Formentor (2026) - Car Cupra - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free Formentor (2026) Cupra in PDF.
| Product Type | Car |
| Brand | CUPRA |
| Model | Formentor (2026) |
| Category | Compact SUV |
| Dimensions (L x W x H) | Approx. 4450 x 1840 x 1510 mm |
| Wheelbase | Approx. 2680 mm |
| Curb Weight | Approx. 1500 kg |
| Engine Options | Petrol, Diesel, Plug-in Hybrid |
| Power Output | 150 hp to 310 hp |
| Transmission | 6-speed manual or 7-speed DSG automatic |
| Drive Type | Front-wheel drive or All-wheel drive |
| Fuel Tank Capacity | Approx. 55 liters |
| Seating Capacity | 5 |
| Cargo Volume | Approx. 420 liters |
| Safety Features | ABS, ESC, airbags, lane assist, adaptive cruise control |
| Infotainment | 12-inch touchscreen, Apple CarPlay, Android Auto |
| Maintenance Interval | Every 15,000 km or 1 year |
| Warranty | 5 years or 100,000 km |
| Spare Parts Availability | Genuine parts from CUPRA dealerships |
| Repair Service | Authorized CUPRA service centers |
Frequently Asked Questions - Formentor (2026) Cupra
User questions about Formentor (2026) Cupra
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Car in PDF format for free! Find your manual Formentor (2026) - Cupra and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. Formentor (2026) by Cupra.
USER MANUAL Formentor (2026) Cupra
Vehicle identification data
| Model: |
| Vehicle Registration: |
| Vehicle identification number: |
| Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery: |
| SEAT Official Service/CUPRA authorised service: |
| Service advisor: |
| Telephone: |
Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys
| The following items were delivered with the vehicle: | YES NO | |
| On-board documentation | ||
| First key | ||
| Second key | ||
| Correct working order of all keys was checked | ||
| Location:Date: | ||
| Signature of owner: | ||
Thank you for your confidence
With your new CUPRA, you will be able to enjoy a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology and top quality features.
We recommend reading this Instruction Manual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving.
Information about handling is complemented with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips for driving your vehicle in an efficient and environmentally friendly manner.
We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.
CUPRA
WARNING
Read and always observe safety information concerning the front passenger airbag >>> page 63, Fitting and using child seats.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
About this instruction manual ..... 4
General views of the vehicle 6
Front exterior view 6
Rear exterior view 7
Interior view 8
Overview (left hand drive) 9
Overview (right hand drive) 10
Driver information 11
Control lamps 11
Instrument cluster 15
Drowsiness monitor 26
Driver attention monitor 28
Road signs detection system 30
Instrument cluster operation 33
Infotainment system operation and displays. 35
Safety 42
Safe driving 42
Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants 43
Seat belts 45
PreCrash system 51
Airbag system 53
Transporting children safely 6
In case of emergency 72
High-voltage battery 78
Safety instructions 78
Conservation of the high-voltage battery .... 80
Charging the high-voltage battery 81
Charging settings 89
Charging cable 94
Opening and closing 98
Set of vehicle keys 98
Keyless Access system 101
Central locking 104
Anti-theft alarm 108
Doors 109
Rear lid 112
Window controls 116
Sunroof 119
Steering wheel 122
Multifunction steering wheel 122
Seats and headrests 124
Front seats 124
Rear seats 125
Headrest 126
Seat functions 129
Lights 132
Vehicle lighting 132
Interior lights 138
Visibility 141
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys-
tems 141
Mirrors 143
Sun protection 146
Air conditioning 148
Heating, ventilation and cooling 148
Auxiliary heating (additional heating) ..... 158
Stationary air conditioning.... 161
Driving 164
Driving indications 164
Starting and stopping the engine. 169
Driving with electric drive 174
Start-Stop system 179
Manual gearbox 182
DSG automatic transmission 183
Driving on slopes 188
Steering 189
Drive Profiles 190
Braking system 193
Brake assist systems 194
Assistant systems 199
General notes 199
Drive assist sensors and cameras 200
Cruise control system 204
Speed limiter 205
Speed limiter with proactive speed adjust-
ment 207
Eco Assist 208
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control 209
Predictive speed adjustment 214
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) 217
Lane Assist system 221
Travel Assist 223
Emergency Assist 228
Lane departure warning (Side Assist) 229
Parking and manoeuvring 233
Park the vehicle 233
Electronic parking brake 234
General information on parking systems ..... 237
Park Distance Control Plus (Park Pilot) ..... 239
Rear park assist 242
Intelligent Park Assist (IPA) automatic parking
System 243
Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera) 248
Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) .. 251
Trailer Assist 253
Table of Contents
Rear Cross Traffic Alert 256
Exit Warning 257
Practical equipment 259
Storage compartment 259
Power sockets 261
Data transmissions 264
Over-the-air update 264
CUPRA CONNECT 266
Privacy mode 270
User administration 271
WLAN access point 272
Full Link 273
Wired and wireless connections 276
Infotainment system 278
First steps 278
Overview and controls 281
General instructions for use 282
CUPRA Assistant 287
Radio mode 290
Media Mode 294
Navigation 297
Telephone interface 304
Storing objects 311
Positioning the luggage and cargo 311
Luggage compartment 312
Luggage compartment equipment 314
Roof carrier 317
Trailer mode 319
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning ..... 330
Refuelling 330
Fuel types 332
AdBlue ® 333
Engine management and emissions control
system 335
Miscellaneous situations 338
Vehicle tool kit 338
Changing the windscreen wiper blades ..... 338
Jump start 340
Towing the vehicle 343
Fuses 348
Changing bulbs 351
Checking and refilling levels 352
Engine compartment 352
Fluids and consumables 355
Cooling system 355
Brake fluid 360
Windscreen washer reservoir 361
Engine oil 362
12-volt battery 366
48-volt battery 371
Energy management 373
Wheels and tyres 375
Important information about wheels and
tyres 375
Changing a wheel 381
Tyre pressure monitor system 386
Tyre repair 388
Maintenance 392
Service 392
Additional service offers. 394
Vehicle upkeep and cleaning 395
Accessories, spare parts and repair work .... 400
User information 402
Warranty 402
Information stored by the control units ..... 402
Vehicle antennas 403
Fluids in the air conditioning system 403
Information on the EU chemicals regulation
REACH 404
Materials and recycling information 404
Third-party copyright information 406
Return and scrapping of end-of-life vehicles 406
Declaration of conformity 407
Radioelectrical equipment 407
Technical data 412
Indications about the technical data ..... 412
Engine specifications 414
Dimensions....417
Index 419
About this instruction manual
About this instruction manual
This instruction manual is valid for all variants and versions of your CUPRA model. It describes all equipment and models without specifying whether their features are optional equipment of model variants. As a result, equipment not fitted to your vehicle or only available in certain countries may be described. Find out about your vehicle's equipment in the documentation supplied with it and please contact your CUPRA Specialised Service or SEAT Official Service if you require more detailed information.
All information provided in this instruction manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going to press. As the vehicle is under continuous development, it may have differences to the data included in this manual. For this reason, no claims can be made in the event of mismatching data, illustrations and descriptions.
Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times if you sell it or lend it to third parties. In addition, CUPRA recommends resetting the infotainment system to factory settings to delete all personal data.
Some details on the drawings may be different to your vehicle and they should be interpreted as a standard representation.
The direction indicators (left, right, forwards, backwards) in this manual refer to the direction of travel of the vehicle unless otherwise stated.
This instruction manual has been written for left-hand drive vehicles. In right-hand drive vehicles, the arrangement of the controls differs partly from that shown in the illustrations or described in the texts.
Technical modifications to the vehicle or safety-critical issues that have arisen since the time of going to press will be included in a supplement to the on-board documentation.
® Trademarks are marked with ®. The absence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark.
You can access the information in this manual using:
- Thematic table of contents that follows the manual's general chapter structure.
- Visual table of contents that uses graphics to indicate the pages containing “essential” information, which is detailed in the corresponding chapters.
- Alphabetical index with many terms and synonyms to help you find information.
DANGER
Texts with this symbol warn of dangerous situations which, if ignored, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Texts with this symbol warn of dangerous situations which, if ignored, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol warn of dangerous situations which, if ignored, could result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
Texts with this symbol warn of dangerous situations which, if ignored, could result in minor or moderate injury.
For the sake of the environment
Texts after this symbol contain information on environmental protection.
Note
Texts after this symbol contain additional information.
Owner's manual and explanatory videos of some functionalities
On the official CUPRA website, you can download the relevant version of the owner's manual and view explanatory videos on how to operate certain vehicle functions.
About this instruction manual
- Scan the QR code or enter the following address in your web browser and select your vehicle:
https://www.cupraofficial.com/owners/cupra-manuals
Note
The vehicle simulations shown in the videos are for illustrative purposes only and are subject to change. Likewise, the functions described in the videos are continuously evolving, and there may be differences and/or significant changes between different vehicle updates. These videos do not replace the instruction manual in the corresponding vehicle edition, which has the complete information and warnings.
Note
The explanatory videos of certain functionalities are only available in some languages.
Digital Manual in the Infotainment System 1)
When a factory settings reset is performed, the Digital Manual is uninstalled from the infotainment system.
Proceed as follows to reinstall the Digital Manual:
- Press the notifications icon located on the top bar of the infotainment system. A pop-up window will then appear.
- Press OK to begin the installation process.
If in any doubts, please contact your SEAT Official Service or specialised workshop.
Note
It is only possible to update the Digital Manual when the vehicle is in Online
page 271 mode. In Offline mode the content may not be up to date.
Valid for the Dutch market
Only CUPRA Specialized Services can repair CUPRA vehicles and provide services under warranty.
General views of the vehicle
General views of the vehicle
Front exterior view
5FF-0120
Driving assistance sensors >>> page 199
① Front multifunction camera
② "Top View Camera" mirror cameras
③ "Top View Camera" front camera
4 Front radar
⑤ Park distance control sensors
⑥ Side radars
⑦ Park assist sensor
A Levels control
Oil >>> page 362
Brake fluid >>> page 360
Battery >>> page 366
B Bonnet
Unlocking lever >>> page 354
Open/close >>> page 354
© Towing the vehicle
Tow start >>> page 345
Towline anchorage >>> page 346
D Charging socket (hybrid vehicles)
Charging process display >>> page 86
Emergency unlocking >>> page 89
Rear exterior view
Rear exterior view
Driving assistance sensors >>> page 199
① Rear view camera
② Park distance control sensors
③ Rear radars
④ Park assist sensor
A Rear lid
Opening from outside >>> page 112
Emergency opening >>> page 116
B Towing the vehicle
Tow-start >>> page 345
Towline anchorage >>> page 347
© Opening and closing
Doors >>> page 109
Central locking >>> page 104
Emergency lock >>> page 111
D Fuel tank
Fuel capacity >>> page 412
Open/Close cap >>> page 331
E Action in the event of a puncture
Tyre mobility system >>> page 388
Wheel change >>> page 381
General views of the vehicle
Interior view
① Armrest >>> page 130
② Isofix anchors >>> page 64
③ Seat belts >>> page 46
4 Sunroof >>> page 119
⑤ Interior mirror >>> page 144
⑥ Seat adjustment >>> page 124
⑦ Emergency start >>> page 173
⑧ DSG automatic transmission
page 183 / Manual gearbox
page 182
⑨ Connectivity Box / Wireless Charger
page 309
10 Glove compartment >>> page 259
⑪ Front passenger airbag >>> page 56
12 Disconnecting the front passenger airbag >>> page 57
Overview (left hand drive)
Overview (left hand drive)
① Power windows >>> page 116
② Exterior mirror adjustment >>> page 145
③ Button to open and close the rear lid >>> page 113
④ Control for lighting and demisting windows >>> page 132
⑤ Turn signal and main beam lever >>> page 134
⑥ Digital Cockpit >>> page 16
Control lamps >>> page 11
⑦ Steering wheel with horn / Driver's airbag >>> page 56 / Multifunction controls >>> page 122 / Gear shift paddles for the Tiptronic >>> page 184
⑧ Wipers and rear window wiper >>> page 141
⑨ Infotainment system >>> page 35, >>> page 278
⑩ Open bonnet lever >>> page 354
⑪ Fuses >>> page 348
12 Drive profiles >>> page 190
13 Steering wheel adjustment >>> page 123
14 Start button >>> page 169
15 Hazard warning lights >>> page 72
⑯ ESC >>> page 169 start stop button
page 196.
17 Auto Hold >>> page 236
18 Electronic parking brake >>> page 234
⑲ Central locking >>> page 104
General views of the vehicle
Overview (right hand drive)
① Infotainment system >>> page 35, >>> page 278
② Turn signal and main beam lever
page 134
③ Digital Cockpit >>> page 16 Control lamps >>> page 11
④ Steering wheel with horn / Driver's airbag >>> page 56 / Multifunction controls >>> page 122 / Gear shift paddles for the Tiptronic >>> page 184
⑤ Wipers and rear window wiper >>> page 141
⑥ Control for lighting and demisting windows >>> page 132
⑦ Button to open and close the rear lid >>> page 113
⑧ Exterior mirror adjustment >>> page 145
⑨ Power windows >>> page 116
10 Hazard warning lights >>> page 72
⑪ Open bonnet lever >>> page 354
⑫ ESC >>> page 169 start stop button >>> page 196.
13 Electronic parking brake >>> page 234
⑭ Auto Hold >>> page 236
15 Central locking >>> page 104
16 Drive profiles >>> page 190
⑰ Steering wheel adjustment >>> page 123
18 Start button >>> page 169
19 Fuses >>> page 348
Control lamps
Driver information
Control lamps
Control and warning lamps
The warning and control lights can be lit individually or in combination and serve as a warning, to indicate the presence of an anomaly or to warn of the activation of certain functions. Some turn on when the ignition is switched on and must turn off after a certain period of time. Depending on the model, additional text messages may be viewed on the instrument panel display. These may be purely informative or they may be advising of the need for action.
Warning with priority 1:
- The red central warning lamp lights up or flashes, possibly accompanied by additional audio warnings or symbols. Stop driving! Danger! Check the faulty function. Seek specialist assistance as soon as possible.
Warning with priority 2:
- The yellow central warning lamp lights up or flashes, possibly accompanied by additional audio warnings or symbols. Operating faults or the lack of operating fluids can cause damage to the vehicle or a fault. Check the faulty function as soon as possible and, if necessary, contact a specialist workshop immediately.
CUPRA recommends visiting an Official CUPRA Service.
Lamps with other colours:
- Green, blue, white and grey: Information on other systems.
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, sometimes a symbol may be displayed on the instrument panel.
The control lamps that light up on the light control are explained in chapter >>> page 132, Lights.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, faults may occur in the vehicle, it may stall in traffic, or accidents and serious injuries may occur.
- Never ignore warning lamps or text messages.
- Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe place.
Note
If there are several warnings, the corresponding symbols will light up for a few seconds and remain lit until the cause is eliminated.
If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. If the fault continues, consult a specialised workshop.
CUPRA recommends visiting an Official CUPRA Service.
| Symbol | Meaning |
| Stop driving!Central warning lamp >>> page 24 | |
| Fasten your seat belt >>> page 46 | |
| Electronic parking brake on>>> page 234 | |
| Deep discharge of the high-voltage battery >>> page 88 |
Driver information
| Symbol | Meaning |
| Stop driving!Fault in the brake system>>> page 194 | |
| Stop drivingBrake fluid level low >>> page 360 | |
| Stop driving!The electromechanical brake servo is not working >>> page 197 | |
| Take control of the vehicle and be ready to brake! >>> page 210 | |
| Stop drivingFault in the motor coolant fluid system >>> page 20 | |
| Stop drivingFault in the high-voltage system coolant fluid system >>> page 20 | |
| Engine oil pressure >>> page 365 | |
| Engine oil level very low>>> page 365 | |
| Stop driving!Steering anomaly >>> page 190 |
| Symbol | Meaning |
| Stop driving!Fault in the high voltage system>>> page 87 | |
| Stop driving!Fault in the electric drive system>>> page 178 | |
| Stop driving!12 volt battery >>> page 370 | |
| Stop driving!48 volt battery >>> page 372 | |
| Collision warning >>> page 217 | |
| Take control of the steering immediately >>> page 227 | |
| AdBlue level® too low, OR fault in the SCR system >>> page 335,>>> page 335 | |
| Emergency Assist active with lane guidance >>> page 228 | |
| Emergency Assist active without lane guidance >>> page 228 | |
| Central warning lamp >>> page 24 |
| Symbol | Meaning |
| Emergency call restricted>>> page 77 | |
| Error_ emergency call>>> page 77 | |
| Fault in the airbag system or the seat belt tensioners >>> page 55 | |
| Range calculation failure>>> page 88 | |
| OFF | Front passenger airbag off>>> page 55 |
| ON | Front passenger airbag on>>> page 55 |
| Please check brake pad>>> page 194 | |
| Lights up: fault in the electronic stability control (ESC) >>> page 198 | |
| Flashing: Electronic stability control (ESC) or Traction Control (TCS) regulating >>> page 198 | |
| TCS switched off manually, ESC in Sport mode or ESC turned off manually >>> page 196 | |
| ESC OFF | ESC disconnected >>> page 197 |
| ABS fault >>> page 197 |
Control lamps
| Symbol | Meaning |
| Fault in the electronic parking brake >>> page 235 | |
| Fault in the electromechanical brake servo >>> page 197 | |
| Lane departure warning not available >>> page 227 | |
| Travel Assist not available >>> page 227 | |
| Fault in the vehicle's lighting >>> page 138 | |
| Fault in the emissions control system >>> page 337 | |
| Particulate filter clogged >>> page 337 | |
| Diesel engine preheating; OR diesel engine management fault >>> page 337 | |
| Rear fog light on >>> page 132 | |
| Fuel tank almost empty >>> page 19 | |
| Engine oil level >>> page 366 | |
| Presence of water in diesel. >>> page 19 |
| Symbol | Meaning |
| Windscreen washer fluid level too low >>> page 143 | |
| Steering anomaly >>> page 190 | |
| Fault in the tyre pressure loss indicator >>> page 388 | |
| STOP Stop driving!Low tyre pressure >>> page 388 | |
| Fault in the electric drive system >>> page 178 | |
| Petrol engine management fault >>> page 337 | |
| Electric drive system power limited >>> page 179 | |
| Electronic engine sound fault >>> page 178 | |
| Front Assist not available or with limitations >>> page 220 | |
| Front Assist deactivated >>> page 220 | |
| Cruise control fault (GRA) >>> page 205 | |
| Speed limiter not available >>> page 206 |
| Symbol | Meaning |
| Gearbox fault >>> page 187, >>> page 188 | |
| Adaptive cruise control (ACC) not available >>> page 214 | |
| Emergency Assist unavailable >>> page 229 | |
| Lane Assist not available >>> page 223 | |
| Limited driver assistance now. Front sensors without visibility >>> page 223 | |
| Lane Assist (lane keeping system) regulating >>> page 222 | |
| Lane Assist deactivated >>> page 222 | |
| Drowsiness monitor limited or un-available >>> page 28 | |
| Driver attention monitor unavailable >>> page 30 | |
| Fault in the driver attention monitor >>> page 30 | |
| Exit Warning not available >>> page 202 | |
| Side Assist (lane change assistance system) not available >>> page 202 |
Driver information
| Symbol | Meaning |
| Road sign recognition limited or not available >>> page 33 | |
| Rear Cross Traffic Alert not available >>> page 202 | |
| Battery / 12V power supply >>> page 370 | |
| Battery / 48V power supply >>> page 372 | |
| Low state of charge of the high voltage battery >>> page 88 | |
| High voltage battery discharged >>> page 88 | |
| Engine RPM limitation >>> page 18 | |
| AdBlue level® low, OR fault in the SCR system >>> page 335, >>> page 335 | |
| AUTO HOLD | Auto Hold active >>> page 236 |
| Turn signals >>> page 138 | |
| Trailer turn signals >>> page 138 | |
| Cruise control (GRA) >>> page 204 | |
| Speed limiter active >>> page 206 |
| Symbol | Meaning |
| Lane Assist (lane keeping system) active. >>> page 222 | |
| Press the brake pedal >>> page 187 | |
| Travel Assist active >>> page 224 | |
| Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) regulating, no vehicle detected ahead >>> page 211 | |
| Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) regulating, vehicle detected ahead >>> page 211 | |
| Vehicle charging >>> page 87 | |
| Adjustment due to the road layout >>> page 216 | |
| Adjustment due to a roundabout >>> page 216 | |
| Adjustment due to a junction >>> page 216 | |
| Adjustment due to a speed limit >>> page 216 | |
| Adjustment due to a speed limit >>> page 216 | |
| Main beam on or flasher on >>> page 134 |
| Symbol | Meaning |
| Main beam assist active>>> page 135 | |
| AUTO HOLD | Auto Hold function on>>> page 236 |
| The cruise control system is switched on, but regulation is not active >>> page 204 | |
| The speed limiter is not active>>> page 206 | |
| Lane Assist not ready to regulate>>> page 222 | |
| Start-Stop system activated>>> page 179 | |
| Start-Stop system unavailable>>> page 179 | |
| Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise control (ACC) active and adaptive lane guidance function passive.>>> page 224 | |
| Hill Descent Control (HDC)>>> page 189 | |
| Exterior temperature below +4 °C (+39 °F) >>> page 22 | |
| Main beam assist on >>> page 135 |
Instrument cluster
Sym- bol
Meaning
Take control of the steering
page 227
Speed warning system partially deactivated >>> page 33
Front Assist connecting
page 219
Distance warning >>> page 217
Electric mode driving not available
page 179
Reference to information in the on-board documentation >>> page 24
Service intervals display
page 25
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury.
- Do not operate the instrument cluster controls when driving.
- To reduce the risk of accident and injury, only make adjustments to the instructions on the instrument cluster display and to the instructions on the Infotainment system display when the vehicle is stationary.
Instrument cluster
Introduction
After switching the engine on with a 12-volt battery that is heavily discharged or newly replaced, some system settings (such as the time, the date, the personalised comfort settings and the programming) might be altered or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.
Driver information
Digital Cockpit
Fig. 1 Digital Cockpit on the instrument cluster (classic view).
Fig. 2 Hybrid vehicles: Digital Cockpit on the instrument cluster (classic view).
① Control and warning lamps >>> page 11.
② Rev counter >>> page 18.
Powermeter (hybrid vehicles)
page 20.
③ Gear engaged or selector lever position >>> page 183.
④ Screen displays >>> page 21.
⑤ Speedometer.
6 Digital speed display.
⑦ Information profiles >>> page 17.
Instrument cluster
The Digital Cockpit is a digital instrument cluster with a high-resolution TFT colour screen. It has a 4 views accessible using the button VIEW of the multifunction steering wheel.
By selecting different information profiles, indications other than the classic circular instruments can be displayed, such as navigation data, multimedia information or travel data.
The 4 views are:
- Classic
• Dynamic - Navigation
• CUPRA
All views will display information on the screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehicle status, navigation 1) and driving aids 1) .
Information profiles
The ◄/▶buttons on the multifunction steering wheel can be used to browse through the different Digital Cockpit information.
Information on the vehicle status, travel data and odometer will be displayed on the left side.
On the right side information will be displayed on: audio, telephone, compass, navigation manoeuvres and the G-force meter.
Depending on the view in the middle of the Digital Cockpit information about the following will be displayed:
- Classic View and Dynamic View: Initial data, date, distance travelled and range. Turning the right thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel: navigation map, driving data (pressing OK switches between the different memories).
- Navigation View: By pressing the buttonOK on the multifunction steering wheel and then turning the thumbwheel you can zoom into or out of the map. If you press the buttonOK again, the map returns to automatic scale.
- CUPRA view: The revolutions tube is displayed in the centre.
Classic and Dynamic View:
The revolutions per minute and speedometer needles appear in full length if you press and hold the button VIEW on the multifunction steering wheel, regardless of the menu displayed in the central area >>> Fig. 1, >>> Fig. 2.
Pressing and holding the VIEW button again returns the display to the previous view.
Or look in the instrument cluster menu for the ✗ Close option using the right hand thumb-wheel on the multifunction steering wheel, and then press OK.
Information that may be displayed in the central area of the Digital Cockpit speedometer
• Audio
- Telephone
- Compass
- Navigation indications (the most recent destinations are displayed by pressing the arrow on the right of the multifunction steering wheel)
G-force meter.
- X > OK (close classic view).
Information that may be displayed in the central area of the Digital Cockpit rev counter
- Consumption and average consumption. By pressing the arrow on the left of the multifunction steering wheel, you can switch between the different travel data memories.
- Range (fuel tank level).
• Lubricating oil and coolant temperature - Average speed. By pressing the arrow on the left of the multifunction steering wheel, you can switch between the different travel data memories.
Driver information
- Other travel data: km travelled and driving time. By pressing the arrow on the left of the multifunction steering wheel, you can switch between the different travel data memories.
- Assist systems.
• Engine power and torque. - X > OK (close classic view).
CUPRA view
Turning the right hand thumbwheel on the multi-function steering wheel scrolls through the following information displayed in the middle of the rev counter:
- Speed and gears.
- Lap timer.
The following information is displayed outside the rev counter circle:
• Right-hand area: G-force meter.
• Left-hand area: engine power and torque.
Rev counter
The rev counter indicates the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Together with the gear-change indicator, use the rev counter to make sure you are running your vehicle's engine at a suitable speed.
The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter indicates the maximum speed in any gear after running-in and with the engine hot. However, it is advisable to move the selector lever to D or lift your foot off the accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone >>> ①.
We recommend that you avoid high revs and that you follow the recommendations on the gear-change indicator. See the additional information in >>> page 164, Selecting the optimal gear.
Speed limiter 1)
If the indicator light turns on, the engine will be automatically limited to the speed shown on the instrument cluster. This protects the engine components in situations such as a cold start or against overheating.
The engine speed limiter is released as soon as the engine reaches normal operating temperature and the driver takes his/her foot off the accelerator.
If the engine speed limit is caused by an engine management fault, the indicator lamp also lights up. Make sure the displayed RPM is not exceeded (for example, by reducing it). Go immediately to a specialised workshop to have the fault repaired.
The flashing indicator warns the driver that the engine RPM limit has been reached.
The flashing indication is displayed in the upper areas of the rev counter by green, yellow and red areas.
When the RPM approaches the limit, the flashing indicator flashes red. Shift up a gear at the right time.
NOTICE
• To prevent damage to the engine, the rev counter needle should only remain in the red zone for a short period of time.
- When the engine is cold, avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise emissions and engine noise.
Instrument cluster
Fuel gauge
Fig. 3 Fuel gauge located in different positions depending on the view.
Reserve
Fuel level
Control lamps
Lights up yellow. Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has been reached >>> △. Refuel as soon as you're the opportunity.
Lights up yellow. Presence of water in diesel. Turn off the engine and seek professional assistance.
The display only works when the ignition is switched on.
The fuel range is displayed on the instrument cluster.
You can consult the tank capacity of your vehicle in >>> page 412.
WARNING
When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries.
- If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could reach the engine irregularly, particularly when driving up or down slopes.
- The steering system and the assistant systems and brakes do not work when the engine is running irregularly or switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregular fuel supply.
- CUPRA recommends always refuelling when the tank is approximately one quarter full, to prevent the vehicle from stopping due to a lack of fuel.
NOTICE
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust system. The catalytic converter or the particulate filter may get damaged!
Note
The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to the fuel pump symbol points towards the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank flap.
Battery level indicator
√ Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 4 Digit al instrument cluster: battery level indicator.
Reserve
Battery level
The small arrow next to the battery symbol on the fuel gauge indicates which side of the vehicle the charging cover is on.
NOTICE
- Never drive with the tank completely empty. Under certain circumstances, the energy stored in the high-voltage battery may not be sufficient to reach the nearest service station.
- When the outside temperature is very low, and therefore the high-voltage battery is very cold, you may have difficulty starting the internal combustion engine and the range in electric driving mode may be reduced.
Driver information
Coolant temperature indicator.
The coolant temperature view can be selected in the corresponding menu >>> page 16.
Control and warning lamps
Fault in the engine coolant system The LED flashes red.
Engine coolant
The lamp lights up red.
The motor coolant temperature is too high or the motor coolant level is too low.
- STOP Stop driving! Stop the vehicle at the first opportunity and in a safe place.
- Switch off the engine and let it cool down.
- Check the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank >>> page 357.
If the warning lamp does not go out even though the motor coolant level is correct, do not continue to drive or leave the engine running. Seek specialist assistance.
Control and warning lamps (valid for hybrid vehicles)
together with
Fault in the high-voltage cooling circuit
The warning lamps flash red.
Engine coolant
The lamp lights up red.
Engine or high-voltage system coolant level too low, engine or high-voltage system coolant temperature too high.
- STOP! Stop driving! Stop the vehicle at the first opportunity and in a safe place.
- Switch off the engine and let it cool down.
- Check the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank >>> page 357.
- Check the coolant level in the high-voltage cooling circuit >>> page 357. If the level is too low DO NOT add coolant. Seek specialist assistance immediately.
If the warning lamp does not go out even though the motor coolant level is correct, do not continue to drive or leave the engine running. Seek specialist assistance.
NOTICE
- To ensure a long useful life for the engine, avoid high revs, driving at high speed and making the engine work hard for approximately the first 15 minutes when the engine is cold. The engine's warming-up phase also depends on the outside temperature. If necessary, use the engine oil temperature as a guide >>> page 23.
- The system's cooling capacity is reduced if an accessory restricts the air inlet or could damage any cooling-system component. Seek specialist assistance.
Power meter
√ Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 5 Digital instrument cluster: Power meter
Instrument cluster
The following displays can be seen on the Power meter: >>> Fig. 5.
Ⓐ Green zone (Charge). The vehicle recovers electrical energy.
Blue zone (Power %). Driving in Electric Mode. Indicates the percentage of power used and the maximum amount of power currently available.
© Revolutions per minute of the combustion engine when in operation.
The power meter shows the usage level of the electric drive. The power meter bar shows the current usage level.
A finer coloured border indicates how much the propulsion can currently be used. Depending on the selected driving program and the current availability of electrical power, the boundaries of the different colours can vary.
Availability of Boost on screen
When the engine is started, the "READY" warning light goes out and the instrument cluster displays Boost availability indications with information about the additional power available at that time.
![graph TD A["1"] --> B["BOOST"] C["2"] --> D["BOOST"] E["3"] --> F["BOOST"]](/content/2026/07/1441719/images/2f4da3ae42e07e480d3fd0767646c792c91936d10404f60971551f716aee6029.jpg)
Fig. 6 In the digital instrument cluster: Boost availability display
① Additional power available.
② Additional power not available.
③ Boost additional power activated.
If rapid acceleration is requested (e.g. by Kick-Down) the Boost function will be activated and the vehicle will drive for a short period of time with maximum power from the electric motor and combustion engine. This is indicated by the area below the RPM indicator turning blue.
Note
The Boost function consumes a large amount of energy and is therefore only available for a short period of time.
WARNING
When the electrical system has a reduced performance capability, it can cause a change in the vehicle's handling, such as a different acceleration response. This can cause accidents and serious or even fatal injuries.
• Always adapt your speed and driving style to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions, as well as the charge level of the high-voltage battery.
• Make sure that the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged.
Status display
Possible indications on the instrument cluster display
The instrument cluster can display a variety of information, superimposed according to the vehicle's equipment:
• Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
• Warning and information messages
- Odometer
• Time >>> page 24
- Indications of the radio and navigation system
• Phone indications
• Outside temperature
Driver information
- Compass indication
- Selector lever positions
• Gear-change recommendation
• Combined range (hybrid vehicles) - Display of travel data (multifunction display) and menus for different settings >>> page 23
• Service interval indicator >>> page 25 - Speed warning
• Speed warning for winter tyres - Start-Stop system status display
page 179
- Signs detected by the road signs detection system and warning that the speed limit has been exceeded
- Indication of active cylinder management status (ACT®) >>> page 164
• Low consumption driving eco - Driver assist systems display
Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
When the vehicle is unlocked and while driving, the instrument cluster display shows if any of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are opened and. In some cases this is also indicated by an audible warning.
Selector lever positions
The current position of the selector lever is shown on the side of the control and on the instrument cluster display. When the control is in the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in some cases, the gear engaged in each case is shown on the instrument cluster display.
Outside temperature indicator
If the outside temperature is lower than approximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystal symbol” also lights up on the outside temperature indicator. This symbol remains lit until the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C (+43 °F) >>> △.
In the following situations, the displayed outside temperature may be higher than the actual temperature due to the heat emitted by the motor:
- When the vehicle is stationary
- When driving very slowly
Gear-change recommendation
While driving, the instrument cluster of certain vehicles may indicate a gear recommendation for saving fuel >>> page 164.
Odometer
The odometer registers the total distance travelled by the car.
Speed warning for winter tyres
If the maximum set speed is exceeded, this is displayed on the instrument cluster display. The speed warning can be set in the infotainment system >>> page 38.
Low consumption driving
Depending on the equipment, when driving, the display appears on the instrument cluster when the vehicle is in low consumption status due to active cylinder management (ACT®) >>> page 164.
WARNING
Even when the outside temperature is higher than freezing, some roads and bridges could be frozen.
- The "ice crystal symbol" indicates that there may be a risk of freezing.
- At outside temperatures above +4 °C (+39 °F), there may be ice even when the “ice crystal symbol” is not on.
- The outside temperature sensor takes a guideline measurement.
Note
- There are different instrument clusters and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the case of displays without warning or information texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the control warning lamps.
Instrument cluster
- Some indications on the instrument cluster display may be concealed by a sudden event, e.g. an incoming call.
- Depending on the equipment, some settings and instructions can be changed or displayed on the infotainment system as well.
- If there are several warnings at the same time, the symbols will be displayed one after the other for a few seconds. The symbols will stay on until you remove the cause.
- If warnings are shown about existing faults when the ignition is switched on, it might not be possible to change the settings or display the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a repair.
Driving data display
The driving data display shows a range of driving data and consumption values.
Change from one display to another
- Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel >>> page 34.
Changing memory
- Depending on the view, select Driving data and press the left arrow or the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel.
- Since start: The memory is deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours.
- Since refuel: Display and storage of the journey data and the consumption values collected. When refuelling, the memory is deleted.
- Long-term: This memory contains travel data up to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or 9999.9 km. When one of these values is exceeded (varies depending on the version of the instrument cluster), the memory is deleted.
Delete journey data presets
- Select the memory you want to delete - either "Since start" or "Long-term". The "Since refuelling" memory is only cleared when refuelling.
- Press and hold the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel for approximately 2 seconds.
Select the instructions
On the instrument cluster, it is selected manually using the ◀ button on the multifunction steering wheel. To access the contents of the tube, rotate the right hand thumbwheel up/down.
- Current consumption: The current fuel consumption display operates throughout the journey, in litres/100 km; and with the engine running and the vehicle stopped, in litres/hour.
– Average consumption: The average fuel consumption is displayed after driving for approximately 300 metres. - Travelling time: This indicates the hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ignition was switched on.
- Range: Approximate distance in km that can still be travelled if the same driving style is maintained.
- AdBlue range or Ⓞ: Approximate distance in km that can still be travelled with the current level of the AdBlue® tank with the same driving style. The indication appears from a range of less than 2400 km and cannot be deactivated. 1)
- Distance travelled: Distance covered in km (miles) after switching on the ignition.
- Average speed: The average speed will be shown after driving for approximately 100 metres.
- Boost/Torque: Indicates the power and torque of the combustion engine (does not indicate electric mode).
Driver information
Oil temperature display
The engine reaches its operating temperature when, under normal driving conditions, the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F) and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is required from the engine and the outside temperature is high, the engine oil temperature may increase. This is not a problem as long as the warning lamps or >>> pag e 365 do not appear on the display.
Warning and information messages
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the ignition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Faults are displayed on the instrument cluster display as red and yellow warning symbols >>> page 11 accompanied by messages and, depending on the case, even an audible warning. The representation of the messages and symbols may vary depending on the version of the instrument cluster.
Existing faults can also be checked manually. To do this, open the Vehicle status >>> page 33 menu.
Priority 1 warning (in red)
The symbol lights up or flashes (sometimes accompanied by audible warnings). Stop driving! Danger! Check the fault and eliminate the cause. If necessary, seek professional assistance.
Priority 2 warning (in yellow)
The symbol lights up or flashes (sometimes accompanied by audible warnings). Operating faults or the lack of operating fluids can cause damage to the vehicle or a fault. Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If necessary, seek professional assistance.
Reference to information in the owner's manual
Further information on any warnings can be found in the owner's manual.
Information message
It provides information about processes in the vehicle.
Accessing warnings and information
Existing faults can also be checked in the infotainment system:
- Press > Vehicle > Vehicle status
page 40.
Date and time
Setting the time on the infotainment system
- Press ⚙ > Settings >>> pag e 35.
- Select the menu option Date and time.
- OR set the date and time in the instrument cluster's Service menu.
Service Menu
In the Service menu various settings can be adjusted depending on the features.
Open the Service menu
- While in Classic View, go to the circle on the left and select the odometer, then press the button on the multifunction steering wheel for around 5 seconds and then release it.
- Next, the Configuration list menu is displayed, where you can choose between the Service menu or View selection from where the instrument cluster views can be switched on and off.
Restart the service interval indicator
Select the Service menu and follow the instructions on the instrument cluster display.
Instrument cluster
Reset the oil service
Select the Reset Oil service menu and follow the instructions on the instrument cluster display.
Identifying letters on engine (LDM)
Select the menu Engine code. The identifying letters of the engine will be shown on the instrument cluster display.
Next Service
This specifies when the next workshop inspection is scheduled.
Setting the date and time
Select the Service menu and follow the instructions on the instrument cluster display.
Service intervals
The service interval indicator appears on the instrument cluster display and in the infotainment system.
There are different versions of instrument clusters and infotainment systems, so the versions and instructions on the screens may vary.
CUPRA distinguishes between services with engine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and services without engine oil change (e.g. Inspection).
In vehicles with Services established by time or mileage, the service intervals are already pre-defined.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the intervals are determined individually. Thanks to technological progress, maintenance work has been greatly reduced. The oil only needs to be changed when the vehicle requires it. To calculate this change (max. 2 years), the vehicle's usage conditions and individual driving styles are considered. The advance warning first appears 20 days before the date established for the corresponding service. The kilometres (miles) remaining until the next service are always rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The current service message cannot be viewed until 500 km after the last service. Prior to this, only lines are visible on the display.
Inspection reminder
If a service or an inspection has to be carried out soon, a service reminder will be displayed when the ignition is switched on.
The figure shows the kilometres that can still be travelled or the time until the next service.
Service due
When the time for a service or an inspection comes, an audible warning will be emitted when the ignition is switched on and the fixed
key symbol may appear on the instrument cluster for a few seconds, along with one of the following messages:
• Service now!
- Please have your vehicle inspected
• Oil change service due!
• Oil change service and inspection due!
Consult a service notification
With the ignition switched on, the engine off and the vehicle at a standstill, the current service notification can be read:
Check the date of the current service on the infotainment system:
- Press the function button 📄 Vehicle > Vehicle status > Service.
Checking the date on the digital instrument cluster: - The date of the service can only be read through the Service >>> page 24 menu.
Resetting the service interval indicator
If the service was not carried out by a specialised CUPRA dealer or any dealer in the SEAT network, the display can be reset as follows:
- The service interval indicator can only be reset through the Service >>> page 24 menu.
Do not restart the indicator between the service intervals, otherwise the information displayed will be incorrect.
Driver information
If the oil change service is reset manually, the service interval indicator changes to a fixed service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible oil change service.
Note
- The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when the OK button is pressed on the multifunction steering wheel.
- In vehicles with the LongLife system in which the battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is not possible to calculate the date of the next service. Therefore the service interval indicator may not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the maximum permitted service intervals >>> page 392.
- If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indicated as in vehicles with fixed service intervals. For this reason we recommend that the service interval indicator be reset by an authorised dealer.
Drowsiness monitor
Introduction
KR1-0124
Fig. 7 On the instrument clust er display: Drowsiness monitor symbol.
The drowsiness monitor informs the driver whether his or her driving behaviour is indicative of fatigue.
The drowsiness monitor determines the driver's driving behaviour and uses this information to assess driver fatigue. If the system detects that the driver is tired, it indicates this visually on the instrument cluster display by means of a control or warning lamp in combination with a supplementary text message. It also issues an audible warning >>> page 27. The text message on the instrument cluster display is displayed for 4 to 6 seconds.
Operating conditions
The drowsiness monitor will only display warnings at speeds above 70 km/h.
WARNING
The drowsiness monitor is no substitute for the driver's attention and only works within the limits of the system. Therefore, the drowsiness monitor may not detect that the driver is tired in all situations and may not give a warning or may give a delayed or unintended warning. There is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries.
• Always pay proper attention and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is responsible for his or her fitness to drive at all times.
• Note the limits of the system
page 26.
- Never drive a vehicle when you are tired.
- During long journeys, take regular and sufficient breaks.
- Follow the information on the instrument cluster display and respond as prompted
page 27.
System limits affecting the drowsiness monitor
The drowsiness monitor has system-related limitations. The following conditions may limit the drowsiness monitor's operation, or prevent it from operating at all:
• Speeds below 60 km/h.
• Speeds over 130 km/h.
• Roads with many curves.
Drowsiness monitor
- Roads in poor condition.
- Adverse weather conditions.
- Roadworks.
- Sporty driving style.
- Towing a heavy or very long trailer >>> page 319.
• The driver is distracted.
Note
The drowsiness monitor has been developed for use only when driving on motorways and main roads in good condition.
Restarting the drowsiness monitor
The drowsiness monitor restarts in the following situations:
- If the ignition is switched off.
- The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.
- The vehicle has been stopped for more than 30 minutes.
Driving with the drowsiness monitor
Connection and disconnection
Depending on the country, the drowsiness monitor is activated whenever the vehicle's drive system is activated. In this case, the info-
tainment system displays an overview of the individual systems and automatically activated functions in the input menu.
If desired, you can switch off the drowsiness monitor manually in the infotainment system:
- Open the Assistance systems menu.
- Switch the drowsiness monitor on or off in the corresponding submenu >>> page 38..
Sensitivity adjustment
You can manually adjust the sensitivity of the drowsiness monitor and therefore influence how quickly the system reacts to your driving behaviour.
In the infotainment system:
- Open the Assistance systems menu.
- Open Drowsiness Monitor.
- Select the sensitivity in the Sensitivity sub-menu>>> page 38.
Concealing messages via the multi-function steering wheel
- Press the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Drowsiness monitor warning levels
If the system detects that the driver is tired, it indicates this visually on the instrument cluster display by means of a control or warning
lamp in combination with a supplementary text message and an audible warning. The warning is issued at three levels.
Drowsiness monitor warning - Level 1
The system has detected that the driver is becoming tired. An audible signal sounds. A white control lamp and a text message are shown on the instrument cluster display. Consider taking a break.
Drowsiness monitor warning - Level 2
The system has detected that the driver is becoming increasingly tired. An audible signal sounds. A red warning lamp is shown on the instrument cluster display together with a text message. Consider taking a break soon.
Drowsiness monitor warning - Level 3
Serious risk identified. An audible signal sounds. A red warning lamp is shown on the instrument cluster display together with a text message. Serious traffic risk. Stop driving as soon as possible and proceed urgently to the nearest place where you can take a break.
Time-related information
The drowsiness monitor detects that the driver has been driving for 4.5 hours without a break and without any recognised
Driver information
fatigue. A white control lamp and a text message are shown on the instrument cluster display. Consider taking a break.
Troubleshooting
Availability of the drowsiness monitor is restricted
An audible signal sounds. A yellow control light appears along with a text message on the instrument cluster screen. The availability of the drowsiness monitor is restricted.
- Fault or malfunction. Deactivate and reactivate the vehicle drive system.
- If the problem persists, visit a duly qualified workshop. CUPRA recommends that you visit an official dealer.
The drowsiness monitor is not avail-
An audible signal sounds. A yellow control lamp appears in combination with the yellow centre lamp. A text message is also shown on the instrument cluster display and in the vehicle status menu.
- Fault or malfunction. Deactivate and reactivate the vehicle drive system. Check the drowsiness monitor settings in the infotainment system >>> page 38.
• The system limits have been exceeded.
- If the problem persists, visit a duly qualified workshop. CUPRA recommends that you visit an official dealer.
Driver attention monitor
Introduction
KP1-0091
Fig. 8 On the instrument clust er display: Driver attention monitor symbol.
The driver attention monitor informs the driver whether his or her driving behaviour is indicative of a lack of attention, based on where they are looking and the vehicle's operating inputs.
The driver attention monitor assesses the vehicle's operating inputs to determine whether the driver is distracted. In addition, an interior camera fitted to the rear view mirror continuously monitor's the driver's state and actions, as well as where they are looking.
If the system detects that the driver is distracted, it indicates this on the instrument cluster display by a control or warning lamp in combination with a supplementary text message. Depending on the configuration, it also emits an audible warning >>> page 29. The text message on the instrument cluster display is displayed for 4 to 6 seconds.
Note
Depending on the country, the vehicle may include an interior rear-view-mirror camera that supplies additional data to the function
page 201. The camera records and stores only the data required for closed-loop system operation. Therefore, no information is sent outside the vehicle system. No personal data are processed.
Operating conditions
Driving behaviour is only assessed when the speed is higher than 20 km/h.
WARNING
The driver attention monitor cannot be a substitute for the driver's attention and only works within the limits of the system. Therefore, the driver attention monitor may not be able to detect whether the driver is paying attention in all situations and may not react or may react with a delay or in an unwanted manner. There is a risk of accidents and serious or even fatal injuries.
Driver attention monitor
• Always pay proper attention and do not rely solely on the system. The driver is responsible for his or her fitness to drive at all times.
• Note the limits of the system
page 29.
- Avoid distractions while driving.
- Adjust the vehicle's personal settings before starting the journey.
- Follow the information on the instrument cluster display and respond as prompted
page 29.
Note
In the event of a fault, have the system checked by a qualified workshop. CUPRA recommends that you visit an official dealer.
System limits affecting the driver attention monitor
The driver attention monitor has system related limitations. The following conditions may limit the operation of the driver attention monitor or prevent it from operating at all:
• Speeds below 20 km/h.
- Severe driver distraction due to external influences such as traffic.
- Severe driver distraction due to actions not related to the vehicle (for example, using a mobile device).
• Insufficient facial recognition.
- Complex driving situations requiring rapid eye movement (junctions, merging onto motorways, etc.)
- Restrictions to the view of the interior camera (on the rear view mirror) towards the driver - particularly the driver's eyes and head. This can be due to darkening caused by peaked caps, scarves, glasses (particularly glasses that block IR rays) or the sun visor.
- If the interior camera on the rear view mirror is dazzled, e.g. by sunlight.
- If the rear view mirror is incorrectly adjusted.
- If the interior rear view mirror glass is fogged, dirty or damaged.
- If the driver is in an unsuitable sitting position.
- If the driver has physical limitations (e.g. eye movement disorders).
Driving with the driver attention monitor
Connection and disconnection
You can switch the driver attention monitor on and off manually.
In the infotainment system:
1. Open the Assistance systems menu.
2. Switch the driver attention monitor on or off in the corresponding submenu >>> page 38.
3. OR: Via the quick access menu using the scroll bar >>> page 35.
Note
Depending on the country, the function is always switched on when the ignition is switched on.
Concealing messages via the multi-function steering wheel
- Press the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Driver attention monitor symbol.
If the system detects that the driver is distracted, it indicates this on the instrument cluster display by a control or warning lamp in combination with a supplementary text message. Depending on the configuration, it also emits an audible warning.
! Distraction detected.
Driver information
Depending on the configuration, an audible warning may be issued. A white control lamp and a text message are shown on the instrument cluster display. "Pay attention to traffic".
Troubleshooting
The availability of the driver attention tor is restricted
An audible warning is issued. A yellow control light appears along with a text message on the instrument cluster display. The availability of the driver attention monitor is restricted.
- Fault or malfunction. Deactivate and reactivate the vehicle drive system.
- If the problem persists, visit a duly qualified workshop. CUPRA recommends that you visit an official dealer.
The driver attention monitor is available
An audible warning is issued. The yellow warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster in combination with the central yellow lamp. A text message is also shown on the instrument cluster screen and in the vehicle status menu.
- Check the causes and corrective measures described in the information in the driver attention monitor >>> page 38.
- Fault or malfunction. Deactivate and reactivate the vehicle drive system. Check the settings of the driver attention monitor in the infotainment system >>> page 38.
• The system limits have been exceeded. - If the problem persists, visit a duly qualified workshop. CUPRA recommends that you visit an official dealer.
Road signs detection sys- tem
Introduction
The dynamic road sign display system records standard traffic signs by means of a camera located in the upper central area of the windscreen, housed in the compartment at the base of the interior mirror, and reports any speed restrictions, overtaking prohibitions and warning signs that it recognises 1 .
Within its limitations, the system also displays a additional sign to indicate aspects such as temporary prohibitions. Even on routes without signs, the system can, if necessary, display the applicable speed limits.
Road sign recognition does not work in all countries. Keep this in mind when travelling abroad.
The dynamic road sign display system is activated whenever the ignition is switched on.
Shown on the display
In Germany, on motorways and normal roads for vehicles, besides speed limits and overtaking provisions the system also displays end of restriction signs. In all other countries the currently valid speed limit is displayed instead.
The road signs detected by the system are displayed on the instrument cluster display and, depending on the navigation system fitted in the vehicle, in the infotainment system as well.
Display of road signs
After checking and evaluating the information from the camera, the infotainment system and actual vehicle data, the system displays up to two current road signs, and an additional sign:
- First: The sign that is currently valid for the driver is displayed on the left hand side of the screen, e.g. a prohibition of driving at over 130 km/h (80 mph).
- Second: Another road sign, such as a warning sign, can be displayed in second place.
• Additional sign: If an additional sign is detected, e.g. for temporary limits, it is shown below the valid road sign.
Road signs detection system
No entry sign
The road sign recognition system gives a warning on the instrument cluster when a no entry sign is passed on a one-way road or an entrance to a motorway or highway.
WARNING
The technology in the road sign detection system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and only works within the system's limits. The increased convenience provided by the dynamic road sign display system should not lead you to take any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
- Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
- Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog may result in the system not displaying road signs, or not displaying them correctly.
- If the camera's field of view is dirty, covered or damaged, the operation of the system may be affected.
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic indications shown on the road sign detection system may differ from the actual current traffic situation.
- The system cannot recognise or display all road signs correctly.
- Road signs and traffic regulations have priority over the recommendations and displays provided by the system.
Limited operation
The road sign detection system has certain limitations. The following cases may cause the system to function in a limited way or not at all:
- Poor visibility, e.g. in snow, rain, fog or intense mist.
- Dazzling, e.g. caused by head-on traffic or by the sun.
- Driving at high speed.
- If the camera is covered or dirty.
- If the road signs are partially or totally obstructed, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehicles.
• Non-compliant road signs.
• Damaged or bent road signs. -
Variable message signs on signalling gantries (variable indication of road signs by LEDs or other lighting units).
-
If outdated maps are used in the navigation system.
- Adhesives affixed to vehicles that depict road signs, e.g. speed limits on lorries.
Driving with the speed warning function
Operating conditions
The speed warning function gives warnings at speeds above 20 km/h.
Connection and disconnection
Depending on the country, the speed warning function is always activated when the ignition is switched on.
If desired, you can deactivate the speed warning manually in the infotainment system:
- Open the Assistance systems menu.
- Switch the speed warning on or off in the corresponding submenu.
OR: from the multifunction steering wheel:
-
Open the assistants menu by pressing button (☐).
-
Select and switch off the Speed warning.
Driver information
Activating and deactivating the audible warning
In the infotainment system:
- Open the Assistance systems menu.
- Open the Speed Warning.
- Activate or deactivate the audible warning under the corresponding option >>> page 38.
The audible warning is activated whenever the ignition is switched on.
Adjusting the warning thresholds
You can manually adjust the warning thresholds of the speed warning function.
In the infotainment system:
- Open the Assistance systems menu.
- Open the Speed Warning.
- To select the level of the warning thresholds, tap √ in the Overtaking warning >>> page 38 menu option.
When the vehicle's ignition is switched on, the warning thresholds for the speed warning are always reset to the default value.
Activation and deactivation of the speed change warning tone
The speed change warning tone provides the driver with audible information about a change in the speed limits. If desired, you can manually switch off the change tone.
In the infotainment system:
- Open the Assistance systems menu.
- Open the Speed Warning.
- Activate or deactivate the change tone under the corresponding option >>> page 38.
Concealing fault messages via the multifunction steering wheel
- Press the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Trailer mode
For vehicles with a factory-installed towbar and a trailer with electrical connection to the vehicle, the recognition of traffic signs that may apply to the vehicle when towing a trailer, for example applicable speed limits and no over-taking signs, can be activated or deactivated in the vehicle settings menu in the infotainment system.
In trailer mode, the recognition of valid speed limits can be adjusted to suit the type of trailer and country-specific legal requirements.
In the infotainment system:
- Open the Assistance systems menu.
- Open Trailer detection.
- To adapt the warning threshold to the trailer mode, tap on √ in the Overtaking warning menu option.
Speed warning function warning levels
If the system detects that the speed limit has been exceeded, it will indicate this visually on the instrument cluster display by flashing the speed limit detected by the system and, depending on the configuration, will also issue an audible warning. A warning is issued at two levels.
KR1-0126
Fig. 9 On the instrument clust er display: violation of the detected speed limit (illustration).
Instrument cluster operation
Speed warning - Level 1
Speed limit violation detected. The speed limit detected by the system flashes continuously on the instrument cluster and, depending on the equipment, on the front display >>> Fig. 9.
Speed warning - Level 2
Progressive violation of the speed limit has been detected.
An audible signal sounds. The speed limit detected by the system flashes continuously on the instrument cluster and, depending on the equipment, on the front display >>> Fig. 9.
Note
- The second warning level is activated if the speed remains above the limit.
- The second warning level is cancelled again when the driver actively reduces the speed.
Troubleshooting
Advanced road sign recognition is available
A yellow control lamp appears on the instrument cluster display in combination with the central yellow lamp. A text message is also shown on the instrument cluster display and in the vehicle status menu.
Road sign detection system messages:
- "Dynamic road sign assist: please clean the windscreen."
- The windscreen is dirty in the area of the camera or the camera view is impaired by weather conditions. Clean the windscreen >>> page 395.
- The camera's view is impaired by added parts or stickers. Keep the area around the camera clear >>> page 199.
- The camera has been moved or damaged, for example due to damage to the wind-screen. Check whether the damage can be seen.
- "Error: dynamic road sign assist"
- There is a fault in the system. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.
- "Speed warning is currently unavailable"
- The speed warning function of the road sign detection system is faulty. If the problem persists, have the system checked by a specialised workshop.
- "Dynamic road sign assist currently restricted"
- The navigation system is not transmitting data. Check if the navigation system has updated maps.
- OR: the vehicle is in a region not included on the navigation system's map.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by a specialised workshop.
Outside the operating region for advanced road signs recognition
A message appears on the instrument cluster display with the following text "Road sign assist: outside the usage area".
- No data available for this region. The advanced road signs recognition system is not supported in the country you are currently driving in.
Speed warning system partially deactivated
A white control lamp is shown on the instrument cluster display. The default configuration of the speed warning has been changed:
- Check whether the speed warning is switched off >>> page 31.
- Check if the audible warning is activated >>> page 31.
- Check if the default warning threshold has been changed >>> page 31.
Instrument cluster operation
Introduction
With the ignition switched on, it is possible to read the different functions of the display by scrolling through the menus.
Driver information
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, the multifunction display can only be operated with the steering wheel buttons.
Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Instrument panel menus
The number of menus and information items available will depend on the vehicle's electronics and features.
• Vehicle status >>> page 24.
- Driving data >>> page 23.
- Assist systems.
- Front Assist On/Off >>> page 217
- ACC (only display) >>> page 209
- Lane Assist On/Off >>> page 221
- Travel Assist >>> page 223
- Side Assist On/Off >>> page 229
-
Speed warning On/Off >>> page 31
-
Navigation.
• Audio. - Telephone.
WARNING
Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries.
- Never use the menus on the instrument panel display while the vehicle is in motion.
NOTICE
After charging or changing the 12-volt battery, check the system settings. If the power supply is interrupted, the system settings might be incorrect or deleted.
Operation using the multifunction steering wheel
Fig. 10 Right side of multifunction steering wheel: buttons to the menus and informative indications on the instrument panel (depending on the version).
As long as a priority 1 >>> page 24 warning is active, it will not be possible to access any menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the OK button of the multifunction steering wheel >>> Fig. 10.
Select a menu or an informative display
- Switch the ignition on.
- If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press the OK button >>> Fig. 10; several times if necessary.
• To change menus, use ◀ or ▶ buttons.
- To open the menu or the information displayed, press the OK button or wait a few seconds until the menu or the informative display opens automatically.
Changing menu settings
- In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-wheel of the multifunction steering wheel until the desired option of the menu is highlighted. The option appears framed.
- Press the OK button to make the required modifications. A mark indicates that the system or function is activated.
Back to menu selection
- Press the ◀ or ▶ button.
Infotainment system operation and displays
Infotainment system operation and displays
Introduction
The infotainment system brings together important vehicle functions and systems into a single central control unit, e.g. air conditioning, menu settings, radio equipment and the navigation system.
The actual number of menus available and the name of the various options will depend on the vehicle's electronics and equipment.
General operating information
General information on the operation of the infotainment system, as well as on the warning and safety instructions that must be taken into account, is found in >>> page 278.
How to move through the different menus and select them
- Switch the ignition on.
- If the infotainment system is off, switch it on.
- The different menus are selected directly on the touch screen using texts, icons or buttons. If the box is checked √the function is activated.
Pressing the menu button will always take you to the last menu used.
Any changes made using the settings menus are automatically saved on closing those menus
Scroll bar: Some menus and functions show more content above or below those displayed on the screen at that time, for example, long lists of settings. Press on the scroll bar and drag up or down.
Tutorial
The first time you connect the Infotainment system, a system tutorial will open with a brief description of the main functions and how to use it.
Help
In the Help menu can be found more information and tips for using the infotainment system.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Infotainment system while driving could distract you from traffic.
Note
After starting the engine with a 12-volt battery that is heavily discharged or recently replaced, some system settings such as time, date, personalised comfort settings, programming and user accounts might be al-
tered or deleted. Check and correct these settings when the battery is sufficiently charged.
Driver information
Explanation of the function buttons
Fig. 11 Schematic representation: Overview of the possible function buttons on the screen.
Top part of the screen
A Main menu display mode:
■: main menu with widget views.
: main menu in tile mode (functions of the Infotainment system).
B Shortcuts to infotainment system functions with the option of adding or removing functions.
C Active functions that do not appear in zone B.
Status bar. Information bar showing the system status, such as: time, phone coverage, phone charge level, Qi charger status, user privacy mode.
Bottom part of the screen
E Climabar >>> page 150.
Segments
F Scroll down to view the control centre and system notifications.
Change the display of the active function on the home screen. For example, under Navigation switch from Map to Information on route guidance; or under Assisted parking switch from Rear camera display to Manoeuvring status.
Infotainment system operation and displays
Initial configuration wizard
Fig. 12 Schematic representation: Initial configuration wizard.
The initial configuration wizard will help you to set up your Infotainment system the first time you switch it on.
Whenever you switch on the infotainment system, the initial setup screen will be displayed
Fig. 12 if any parameters have not been set (marked with "✓") or if the Don't show again function button has not been pressed.
Configuration options:
A Tap it to access the basic configuration menu of the infotainment system such as navigation to home, mobile connection, radio stations, etc.
B Tap to access the infotainment system's advanced configuration menu.
Don't show again Disables the possibility of changing the settings of the Infotainment system. If you wish to perform the initial settings, you will need to access via Settings.
End Once one or more settings have been applied, press to finalise the setup in the main menu of the wizard.
Driver information
Assistance systems and vehicle settings
Press □ >> Fig. 13 A, or Vehicle in the main menu to open the assistants and vehicle settings menu. Next, clicking on any of the menus located in the left area B, displays the settings menu or the selected assist systems on the display.
The number of assistance systems and settings depend on the version and the country in question.
Assistants
- Parking
- Automatic parking brake activation >>> page 234.
-
Park assist >>> page 239.
-
Trailer Assist >>> page 253
- Rear Cross Traffic Alert >>> page 256.
- Smart Assistants
- Activate/deactivate ESC, stabilisation systems and brake assist >>> page 194.
- Switch the Start-Stop system on/off
page 179
- Speed limiter >>> page 205
- Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
page 209.
- Lane Assist >>> page 221.
- Emergency braking assistance system Front Assist >>> page 217.
Fig. 13 Schematic representation: Assist systems and vehicle settings
- Driving assistant (Travel Assist)
page 223
- Emergency Assist >>> page 228
- Hill Descent Control (HDC) >>> page 189.
- Predictive speed adjustment >>> page 214.
- Auto Hold >>> page 236.
- Eco Assist >>> page 208.
- Driver alerts
- Drowsiness monitor >>> page 26.
- Speed warning >>> page 30.
- Side Assist >>> page 229.
- Door opening warning >>> page 257.
Infotainment system operation and displays
- Trailer detection >>> page 326.
- Traffic hazard alert >>> page 214.
- Attention monitor >>> page 28.
Vehicle
• Instrument cluster >>> page 21.
- Lighting >>> page 138.
- Mirrors >>> page 143.
- Closing >>> page 98.
- Lights >>> page 132.
- Windows >>> page 143.
- Tyres >>> page 386.
• Windscreen wipers >>> page 141
• Electric drive (PHEV hybrid vehicles).
page 174
- Seats >>> page 124
Driver information
Vehicle information
Fig. 14 Schematic presentation: Vehicle information and status.
Pressing ☐ Vehicle in the main menu opens the Vehicle menu with the following submenus:
Vehicle assistants >>> page 38
Vehicle settings >>> page 38
Vehicle status
The warnings regarding faults, incidents, memorisation of the tyre pressure or information about the next inspection service are displayed.
Driving data
The average consumption, average speed, distance travelled, trip duration and range are shown. It has 3 memories: "Since start", "Long-term" and "Since refuelling".
The "Since start" and "Long-term" memories can be reset by pressing button.
Infotainment system operation and displays
Departure menu
Fig. 15 Schematic representation: departure menu.
In the departure menu you can set some functions before leaving the vehicle. When you switch off the ignition, the departure menu is displayed on the infotainment system.
The inputs that are displayed depend on the equipment and, if applicable, are only available under certain conditions. Examples of adjustable functions are:
• Charging the high-voltage battery
• Stationary air conditioning or heating
- Interior monitoring
- Save parking process
Hide
When you leave the vehicle, the departure menu is hidden automatically. Depending on the equipment, it is also hidden after a certain amount of time.
- Press < to manually hide the departure menu.
Adjust
You can adjust the order of the displayed inputs.
- Press
- Sort the inputs according to your preferences.
- Press again.
Safety
Safety
Safe driving
Safety first!
WARNING
- This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the on-board documentation also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
- Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.
Before driving
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before every trip:
• Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working properly.
- Check tyre pressure.
- Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings.
• Make sure all luggage is secured >>> page 311.
• Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
- Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors properly according to your size.
- Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the headrests in the in-use position >>> page 126.
- Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests according to their height.
- Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly fastened seat belts >>> page 61.
- Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers also to assume a proper sitting position >>> page 43.
- Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly >>> page 45.
Factors influencing safety
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.
• Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by passengers or telephone calls.
- Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
- Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
• Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and weather conditions.
- When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least every two hours.
- If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.
WARNING
Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medication or narcotics may result in severe accidents and even loss of life.
• Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics may significantly alter perception, affect reaction times and safety while driving, which could result in the loss of control of the vehicle.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an accident, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The following points cover part of the safety equipment in your CUPRA 1 :
• Optimised seat belts for all seats.
- Seat belt tensioners on the driver, front passenger and rear side seats.
- Seat belt force limiters on the driver, front passenger and rear side seats.
Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants
- Red warning lamp and, if applicable, seat belt status indication.
- Front airbags for driver and passenger.
- Side airbags for driver and passenger.
- Side airbags for the rear seats.
• Head airbags on both sides of the vehicle. - Central airbag between the driver and front passenger.
- Knee airbag.
• Yellow airbag control lamp. - Yellow warning lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF; the roof console.
- Yellow warning lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG ON the roof console.
• Control units and sensors. - Optimised and height-adjustable headrests 1 .
- Adjustable steering column.
• ISOFIX/i-Size anchor points for child seats.
• Child seat top tether attachment points.
The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your passengers with the best possible protection in the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.
Safety is everybody's business.
Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants
Correct position on the seat
Fig. 16 The correct distance between the driver and the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm (10 inches).
Fig. 17 Correct belt web and headrest positions
The correct sitting positions for the driver and passengers are shown below.
If your physical condition prevents you from maintaining the correct sitting position, contact a specialised workshop for help with any special devices. The seat belt and airbag can only provide optimum protection if a correct sitting position is adopted. CUPRA recommends taking your car in for technical service.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking or manoeuvre, CUPRA recommends the following positions:
Safety
Valid for all vehicle occupants:
- Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is, as far as possible, at the same level as the top of your head, as close to eye level as possible 1) >> page 126. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the headrest >> Fig. 17.
- Short people must fully lower the headrest 2 , even if your head is below its upper edge.
• Tall people must fully raise the headrest 1) .
• Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion. - Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly >>> page 45.
The following also applies to the driver:
- Move the seat backrest to an almost upright position so that your back rests completely against it.
- Adjust the steering wheel so that it is at a distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) from the sternum >>> Fig. 16 and you can hold it with both hands on the sides, on the outside, with your arms slightly flexed.
-
The steering wheel must always point towards the chest and never towards the face.
-
Adjust the seat lengthwise so that you can press the pedals fully down with your knees slightly bent and there is a distance between the knee area and the dash panel of at least 10 cm (4 inches) >>> Fig. 17.
- Adjust the height of the seat so that you can reach the top of the steering wheel.
• Always keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.
For the passenger, the following applies:
- Move the seat backrest to an almost upright position so that your back rests completely against it.
- Move the seat as far back as possible (minimum 25 cm between the chest and the instrument cluster). If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
Number of seats
The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 in the rear. All seats are fitted with a safety belt. Check the official documentation for the number of occupants approved for your vehicle.
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position may increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of sudden braking or manoeuvring, in case of collision or accident and if the airbags deploy.
- Before starting the car, all passengers must be sitting in a correct position and stay like that for the entire journey. This also applies to a correct use of the seat belt.
- The maximum number of people in the vehicle is the same as the number of seats with seat belts.
- For children, always use a protection system that is approved and suited for their weight and height >>> page 61.
- While driving, always keep your feet in the footwell. Never place them on the seat or the dash panel, for example, or outside the window. Otherwise the airbag and seat belt may offer insufficient protection and also increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident.
Risks of sitting in an incorrect position
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect sit-
Seat belts
ting positions substantially reduce the protective function of seat belts and, therefore, increase the risk of severe or even fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially heightened when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. The driver is responsible for all people, particularly children, inside the vehicle.
The following list contains examples of incorrect sitting positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle occupants.
When the vehicle is in motion:
- Never stand in the vehicle.
- Never stand on the seats.
- Never kneel on the seats.
- Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the rear.
• Never lean against the dash panel. - Never lie on the rear seats.
- Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
- Never sit sideways.
- Never lean out of a window.
- Never put your feet out of a window.
- Never put your feet on the dash panel.
- Never place your feet on the bench or on the backrest of the seat.
• Never travel in a footwell. -
Never sit on the armrests.
-
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
- Never travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres.
- All occupants must sit correctly during the journey and wear the seat belt correctly.
- Vehicle occupants that are not sitting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or are not at a proper distance of the airbag risk suffering very serious or fatal injuries, especially if the airbags deploy and strike them.
Seat belts
Introduction
Fig. 18 Driv ers with properly worn seat belts will not be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants in the proper position. They also help prevent uncontrolled movements that may result in serious injury and reduce the risk of being thrown out of the vehicle in case of an accident.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are designed to absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the released kinetic energy and conse-
Safety
quently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival when involved in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some cases of head-on collision. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor head-on or side collisions, rear-end collisions, overturns or accidents in which the airbag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.
Important safety instructions for the use of seat belts
• Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.
- Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
- If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly.
- Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
- Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
- The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
- Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
- Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect position.
- Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the proper fit and function of the seat belts, reducing their ability to protect.
- The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
- Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar items to alter the position of the belt webbing.
- Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the
event of an accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.
- Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and have been stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
- Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way.
- The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work properly.
Seat belt buckled indication
Lights up red
The driver or one of the passengers have not fastened their seat belts.
The control lamp lights up to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
- Fasten your seat belt securely.
- Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off.
- Protect children by using a child seat according to the child's height and weight
page 61.
Seat belts
Fig. 19 Instrument clust er: indication of the status of the rear seat seat belts.
When the ignition is switched on, the seatbelt status display >>> Fig. 19 on the instrument cluster display informs the driver whether the occupants of the rear seats have their seat belts fastened.
Depending on seat occupancy and the status of the seat belts, the vehicle's seats will light up in different colours:
A white light indicates that the corresponding seat is not occupied.
A green light indicates that the seat's occupant is wearing the seat belt.
A red light indicates that the seat is occupied and the occupant is not wearing the seat belt.
If a speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) is exceeded after moving off without the driver or a front passenger seatbelt being fastened, or if the seatbelt is unfastened while driving, an audible
signal will sound for 126 seconds. In addition, the warning lamp on the instrument cluster display flashes.
The lamp ⚠ goes out when the ignition is on and all occupants have fastened their seat belts.
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics
Fig. 20 A driv er not wearing a seat belt may be thrown forward violently.
Fig. 21 An y rear seat occupants not wearing a seat belt may be thrown forward violently, hitting the driver who is wearing the seat belt.
The effects of the laws of physics in the case of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy called "kinetic energy" starts acting on both the vehicle and its passengers.
The amount of "kinetic energy" depends on the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of the vehicle and of its passengers. The taller they are, the more energy there is to be "absorbed" in the event of an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the corresponding kinetic energy is multiplied by four.
Safety
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not "attached" to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In the event of a head-on collision, vehicle occupants not wearing a seat belt will be thrown uncontrollably forward and will collide, for example, against the steering wheel, dash panel or windscreen >>> Fig. 20.
It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interior in an accident. If a rear seat occupant is not wearing a seat belt, they are not only endangering themselves but also the occupants of the front seats >>> Fig. 21.
Fastening and unfastening the seat belt
Fig. 22 Insert the lat ch plate of the seat belt into the buckle.
Fig. 23 R lease the seat belt's latch plate.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the position that best protects them in the event of an accident or sudden braking >>> △.
Fastening the seat belt
Fasten your seat belt before each trip.
- Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly >>> page 43.
- Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in an upright position >>> △.
- Pull the latch plate and place the belt webbing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not twist the seat belt when doing so >>> △.
- Insert the buckle plate in the buckle of the correct seat >>> Fig. 22.
- Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.
Releasing the seat belt
Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle has come to a standstill >>> △.
- Press the red button on the buckle
Fig. 23. The latch plate is released from the buckle.
- Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and does not damage the trim.
Seat belts
WARNING
- The seat belt cannot offer its full protection unless the seat backrest is in an upright position and the seat belt is worn correctly, according to your size.
- Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
- The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt, can cause severe injuries if the belt moves from hard areas of the body to soft areas (e.g. the stomach).
Correct position of the seat belt
Fig. 24 Correct seat belt and headrest positions, viewed from front and the side.
Fig. 25 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.
Seat belts offer their maximum protection in the event of an accident and reduce the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the optimum position to ensure the airbag provides the maximum protection. The seat belt must therefore always be worn and the webbing correctly positioned.
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even fatal injuries >>> page 43, Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants.
- The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind the back.
- The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. - The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt should pass uniformly over the chest and as low as possible over the pelvic area with the strap flat so it does not press down on the abdomen; in addition, it must be used throughout the entire pregnancy >>> Fig. 25.
Adapting the position of the belt webbing to your size
The position of the seat belt can be adapted by adjusting the height of the front seats.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident.
- The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never under the arm or across the neck.
- The seatbelt must lie flat and fit comfortably across the upper body.
- The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the pelvis. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Safety
- In the case of pregnant women, the abdominal strap of the seat belt should pass as low as possible across the pelvic area, resting flat and "surrounding" the abdomen >>> Fig. 25.
- Do not twist the seat belt while it is fastened.
- Once the seat belt is positioned correctly, don't pull it away from your body with your hand.
- Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.
- Never use seat belt clips, securing rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.
Note
If your physical condition prevents you from maintaining the correct position of the belt webbing, contact a specialised workshop for help with any special devices to ensure the optimum protection of the seat belt and airbag. CUPRA recommends taking your car in for technical service.
Automatic retractor, tensioner and belt force limiter
Vehicle seat belts are part of the vehicle's safety system >>> page 43. This system has the following important functions:
Automatic belt retractor
The seat belt shoulder straps on the driver's and front passenger seats, as well as those on the rear side seats (and, depending on equipment, also the seat belt of the central rear seat) are fitted with automatic retractors. This device ensures complete freedom of movement when the shoulder strap is pulled gently or during normal driving. However, during sudden braking, when driving in the mountains, around bends and when accelerating, the retractor locks the seat belt if it extends rapidly.
In critical driving situations, e.g. in the event of emergency braking or in the case of oversteer and understeer, the proactive occupant protection can tension the front seat belts automatically if they are worn 1 . The two belts are loosened again if an accident does not happen or when the critical situation passes. Proactive occupant protection is ready to operate again >>> page 51.
Seat belt tensioner
The seat belts on the front seats and, depending on the equipment, side rear seats are fitted with tensioners.
The tensioners are activated by sensors in the event of severe head-on, side and rear collisions (in hybrid vehicles they are also activated in the event of a roll-over), and they tension the seat belts in a direction opposite their extension.
If the seat belt is slack, the tensioner tightens it. This cushions the forward movement of occupants towards the impact.
The belt pre-tensioners work in combination with the airbag system. The belt pre-tensioners activate in combination with some of the airbags, depending on the collision type.
When activated, a fine powder may be released. This is completely normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
WARNING
The seatbelt pre-tensioners are only activated once and the system must be replaced if they are triggered.
- Have any triggered pretensioners and affected parts of the system replaced immediately with new parts approved by CUPRA for this vehicle.
PreCrash system
- Repairs and modifications to the vehicle should only be made by qualified specialist workshops. They have the necessary diagnostic equipment, repair information and tools, as well as qualified personnel. CUPRA recommends a CUPRA dealership.
- Never fit belt pretensioner parts removed from vehicles at the end of their useful life, or pretensioners from recycling plants to the vehicle.
- Never modify any component of the belt pretensioners.
Reversible belt tensioning (proactive occupant protection)
A reversible tensioning of the seat belts may occur in certain driving situations
page 51. For example:
• in the event of sudden braking
• in the event of oversteering or understeering
• in the event of minor collisions
Belt force limiter
Depending on the equipment and the country in question, in the event of an accident, the seat belt force limiter reduces the force the seat belt exerts on the body.
Note
- After certain driving situations, the reversible belt tensioners may be left permanently tensioned 1 . In this case, to loosen the belt, it must be removed manually while the vehicle is stationary and then replaced correctly.
- The relevant safety requirements must be observed if the vehicle or any components of the system are to be scrapped. Specialised workshops are aware of these requirements.
Maintenance and disposal of seat belt tensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt tensioners function incorrectly or may not function at all.
Regulations, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed to ensure that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution.
WARNING
Improper handling and home repairs to seat belts, automatic retractors and belt tensioners may increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries. The tensioners may not activate, even though they should, or they may activate unexpectedly.
- Never repair, adjust, or disassemble and re-assemble seat belt components or tensioners. Always have this work carried out by a specialist workshop.
- Seat belts, tensioners and their automatic retractors cannot be repaired and have to be replaced.
For the sake of the environment
Airbag modules and belt tensioners may contain perchlorate.
Observe the legal requirements for their disposal.
PreCrash system
How it works
The PreCrash system is an assistance system that activates a series of measures to protect the vehicle occupants in potentially risky situations, but which cannot prevent a collision.
Safety
It only works completely if no special drive profile is selected and if there are no operating anomalies.
Basic features
Depending on the legal provisions of the country and the features of the vehicle, in critical situations (e.g. in certain cases of emergency braking or loss of control of the vehicle by the driver) the following functions can be activated separately or at the same time when the vehicle is travelling faster than approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
- Reversible tensioning of front seat belts that are fastened.
• Operation of the hazard warning lights.
• Automatic closing of the windows until they are just cracked open and, depending on the equipment, of the sunroof. - In the event of overturning, depending on the equipment, activation of the belt tensioners.
Depending on how critical the driving situation is, the belts are either tightened individually, or both belts at the same time.
In addition to Front Assist
In vehicles with Front Assist >>> page 217, within the limits of the system, information is assessed on the risk of collision with the vehicle in front. The functions of the PreCrash
system may also be activated if there is a high likelihood of a rear-end collision, or during the activation of Front Assist.
In addition to Side Assist
In vehicles with Side Assist,>>> page 229, within the limitations of this system, information is assessed on the risk of collision with traffic to the rear of the vehicle. If a rear-end collision is highly likely, the functions of the PreCrash system may also be activated. In this situation, the hazard warning lights are turned on with a higher frequency of flashes.
In addition to the Emergency Assist system
In vehicles with emergency assist, driver status information is assessed within the limitations of this system. The following PreCrash systems may be activated if a lack of activity is detected:
- Reversible seat belt tensioning of the driver's seat belt.
• Automatic closing of the windows until they are just cracked open and, depending on the equipment, of the sunroof.
Activating the PreCrash system
The PreCrash system can be partially deactivated by deactivating the traction and/or stability control, depending on the equipment. When
these vehicle safety controls are switched on (by default, every time the ignition is turned on), the system is fully activated.
Drive profile selection settings
In vehicles with drive profile selection, Pre-Crash adapts to suit the special vehicle configuration of the corresponding profile >>> page 190.
Limited operation
The PreCrash system is not available or only has limited availability in the following situations:
- When the TCS and/or ESC is off.
- When driving in reverse.
- When the airbag control unit is not operating properly.
- When there is a fault in the system itself, in the ESC or in Front Assist.
Troubleshooting
If the PreCrash is not working correctly, the message System unavailable or System with limited functions is shown permanently on the instrument cluster display. Go to a specialized CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service and ask for the system to be checked.
Airbag system
WARNING
The PreCrash system cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Risks that compromise safety are never justified by the use of this system. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness and cannot prevent a collision.
- Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
- The system is not always able to recognise objects.
- The system may not react to people or animals or objects crossing the path of the vehicle or that are hard to detect.
- Metallic objects (e.g. fences) or other elements of the public road or adverse weather conditions can hinder its operation and thus its ability to detect collision risk.
- Never ignore the warning lamps that light up or the messages shown on the dashboard.
WARNING
Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries.
- Never change settings on the Infotainment System while driving.
Airbag system
Why is it so important to wear a seat belt and to sit correctly?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting position must be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, it is most important to properly wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety >>> page 45, Seat belts.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so if you are not properly seated when the airbag is triggered, you may sustain fatal injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants assume a correct sitting position while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when triggered, providing their maximum protection.
The most important factors for triggering the airbag are the type of accident, the angle of impact and the vehicle speed.
Whether or not the airbags are activated depends primarily on the vehicle deceleration rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side and/or curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a factor that determines whether or not the airbags are activated.
WARNING
Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting position can lead to critical or fatal injuries
- All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly strapped in can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat. Never transport children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is not appropriate for their age, size or weight.
Safety
- To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the seat belt properly >>> page 45.
Description of the airbag system
The airbag system offers additional protection for the occupants in combination with the seat belts.
The airbag system comprises the following modules (depending on the vehicle equipment):
• Electronic control unit
• Front airbags for driver and passenger
- Knee airbag for the driver
- Side airbags
• Central airbag for the driver
- Head airbag
- Airbag control lamp 🚙 on the instrument cluster >>> page 55
• Key-operated switch for front passenger air-bag
- Control lamp for disabled/enabled status of the front passenger airbag.
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control lamp will illuminate for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control lamp
- does not light up when the ignition is switched on >>> page 55,
- turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
- turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,
- illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is moving.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
• the ignition is switched off
• there is a minor frontal collision
• there is a minor side collision
• there is a rear-end collision
- in the event of the vehicle overturning if the dynamic characteristics measured by the control unit are too low,
- the impact speed is lower than the reference value programmed in the control unit.
WARNING
- The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly >>> page 43.
- If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several airbags may activate at the same time.
In the event of minor head-on and side collisions, rear-end collisions, overturning or rollover of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
Airbags only activate if the vehicle overturns in the hybrid plug-in version of the vehicle.
Airbag system
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system activating in each situation cannot be generalised. Some factors play an important role, such as the properties of the object the vehicle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag activation.
The control unit analyses the collision trajectory and activates the respective restraint system.
If the deceleration rate is below the predefined reference value in the control unit the airbags will not be triggered, even though the accident may cause extensive damage to the car.
The following airbags are triggered in serious head-on collisions:
- Driver airbag.
- Front passenger airbag
- Knee airbag for the driver.
Head airbags.
In the event of serious side collisions, some (or all) of the following airbags can be activated (depending on the severity of the collision):
- Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the accident.
- Front side airbag on the side of the accident.
• Rear side airbag on the side of the accident. - Central airbag.
In an accident with airbag activation:
- the interior lights switch on (if the interior light switch is in the courtesy light position);
• the hazard warning lights turn on;
• all doors are unlocked;
• the fuel supply to the engine is cut; - in hybrid vehicles, the high voltage system is switched off;
• an emergency call is started.
Airbag system control lamps
Lights up on the instrument cluster Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners. Have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop.
Lights up on the roof console
Front passenger airbag deactivated. Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated.
Lights up on the roof console
Front passenger airbag activated. The control lamp turns off automatically 60 seconds after the ignition is switched on.
Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.
If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system control lamp remains on or flashes, it indicates a malfunction in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system >>> △. Have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop.
If the front passenger airbag has been deactivated, the warning lamp OFF, remains lit on the roof console to remind you that the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the control lamp on the instrument cluster, there is a fault in the airbag system >>> △. If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the disabling of the airbag system >>> △. Have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop.
Safety
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.
- The vehicle occupants run the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. Have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop.
- Do not mount a child seat in the front passenger seat or remove the mounted child seat! The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident in spite of the fault.
NOTICE
Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding descriptions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle or harm to the occupants.
Front airbags
Fig. 26 Driv er's airbag in the steering wheel.
Fig. 27 Fr ont passenger airbag located in the dash panel.
The driver's front airbag is housed in the steering wheel and that of the front passenger, on the dash panel. Airbags are identified by the word "AIRBAG".
The airbag covers open and remain attached to the steering wheel and dash panel when the driver and front passenger airbags are triggered, respectively >>> Fig. 26, >>> Fig. 27.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision >>>.
In addition, in certain head-on collisions, the head airbag is triggered on both sides of the vehicle.
Their special design allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.
WARNING
- The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passengers, pets and objects.
- The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
- It is also important not to attach any objects such as drink holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the air bag units.
Airbag system
Activate and deactivate front pas- senger airbag
Fig. 28 Switch for activating and deactivating the front passenger airbag.
Fig. 29 On the roof console: passenger airbag deactivation control lamp.
Deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat.
CUPRA recommends fitting the child seat in the rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the front passenger airbag.
When the front passenger airbag is deactivated, this means that only the front passenger airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain activated.
Deactivate and activate the front passenger airbag 1)
- Switch the ignition off.
- Open the passenger side door.
- Remove the key blade from the vehicle key.
- Insert the key blade into the slot provided in the front passenger airbag disconnection switch >>> Fig. 28. About 3/4 of the key should enter; this is as far as it will go.
- Turn the key gently to change its position to OFF (deactivate) or to ON activate). If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go.
- Close the front passenger door.
- When deactivating the airbag, switch the ignition on and check that the control lamp
OFF: remains lit >>> Fig. 29.
- When reactivating the airbag, check that when the ignition is switched on, the OFF control lamp does not light up and the ON lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turns off.
DANGER
Always switch off the ignition before disabling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do so could result in a fault in the airbag deactivation system.
WARNING
• The driver of the vehicle is responsible for disabling or switching on the airbag.
- Never leave the key in the airbag disabling switch as it could get damaged or enable or disable the airbag during driving.
- If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, reactivate it as soon as possible so that it can fulfil its protective function.
Safety
Central airbag
Fig. 30 In the inner padding of the driver's seat backrest; central airbag.
Fig. 31 Fully inflated central airbag (deployment zone).
The central airbag is installed for the front seats and is located in the inner padding of the driver's seat backrest (according to the version/finish).
The location of the central airbag is indicated by the inscription "AIRBAG" >>> Fig. 30.
When triggered, the central airbag fills the marked zone (deployment zone) >>> Fig. 31. For this reason, never place or fix objects in this zone >>> △.
The central airbag triggers in the case of a side collision or if the vehicle overturns, reducing the risk of vehicle occupants suffering injuries.
WARNING
When triggered, the airbag inflates at high speed in milliseconds.
• Always keep the central airbag deployment zone clear.
- Never attach objects to the central airbag cover or the deployment zone.
- Do not allow other people, animals or objects to get between the occupants of the front seats and the airbag deployment zone. Make sure that all vehicle occupants, including children, follow this rule.
- Never use upholstery or seat covers that have not been explicitly authorised for the seats of the vehicle. Otherwise, the central airbag will not be able to deploy if triggered.
WARNING
Improper manipulation of the driver and front passenger seats can prevent the central airbag from operating correctly and cause serious injuries.
- Never remove the front seats from the vehicle or modify their components.
- If the backrest side bolsters are subjected to a lot of force, the central airbag may not trigger correctly, it may not trigger at all or if may trigger unexpectedly.
- Have a specialised repair shop immediately repair any damage to the original seat up-holstery or seams in the area of the central airbag module.
Side airbags
Fig. 32 Driv er's seat and passenger seat side airbags.
Airbag system
Fig. 33 Illustration of completely inflated side airbags on the left side of the vehicle.
The side airbags are located in the backrests of the front seats and in the sides of the rear seat (according to the version/finish) depending on the vehicle's configuration >>> Fig. 32, >>> Fig. 33.
Their locations are marked with the word "AIRBAG" on the upper part of the back of the seats or on the lower coverings with the word AIRBAG in relief.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side airbag system provides additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision >>> ▲.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal protection, the seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side collision; this is how these airbags provide maximum protection.
WARNING
- If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.
- In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.
- In a side-on collision the side airbags will not work if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.
- Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted.
- Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as drink holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.
- Ensure that children are correctly seated in their seats and that their heads are not in the deployment zone of the side airbags >>> Fig. 33, as deploying airbags could hit them and cause serious injury.
- The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
- The backrest bolster must not be hit or kicked hard, as this could damage the system. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.
- Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the backrest, the use of conventional seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness.
- Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop.
- The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
- Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.
Safety
Head-protection airbags
Fig. 34 Location of head-protection airbags.
Head-protection airbags are on both sides of the vehicle interior, above the doors >>> Fig. 34 and their location is indicated with the word "AIRBAG".
In combination with the seat belts, the Side Curtain Protection® airbags provide additional protection for the upper part of the body of vehicle occupants in the event of serious side collisions or the vehicle overturning >>> △.
The framed area is covered by the head-protection airbag when it is deployed (deployment area) >>> Fig. 34. Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in this area >>> △.
In the event of a side collision the curtain air-bag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle.
The head-protection airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers in the front and rear side seats facing the impact.
WARNING
- In order for the head-protection airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.
- For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. See your technical service to make this adjustment.
- There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the head-protection airbag can deploy completely without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows.
-
Ensure that children are correctly seated in their seats and that their heads are not in the deployment zone of the head airbags >>> Fig. 34, as deploying airbags could hit them and cause serious injury.
-
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang clothes on coat hangers.
- The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
- Any work on the head-protection airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.
- The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct operation of the side and curtain airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a specialised workshop.
Transporting children safely
Knee airbag
Fig. 35 On the driver side: location of the knee airbag.
Fig. 36 On the driver side: action radius of the knee airbag.
The knee airbag is located on the driver side below the dash panel >>> Fig. 35. Its location is indicated by the word "AIRBAG" (according to the version/finish).
The dashed area (deployment area) >>> Fig. 36 is covered by the knee airbag when it is deployed. Objects should never be placed or mounted in this area.
WARNING
- The knee airbag is deployed in front of the driver's knees. Always keep the deployment areas of the knee airbags free.
- Never fix objects to the cover or in the deployment area of the knee airbag.
- Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) between your knees and the location of this airbag. If your physical condition prevents you from meeting these requirements, make sure you contact a specialised workshop.
Transporting children safely
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from accident statistics, we recommend that children under 12 years of age travel in the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children travelling in rear seats must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety reasons, the child seat should be installed in the rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or in the centre back seat.
The laws of physics involved and the forces acting in a collision also apply to children >>> page 47. But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone structures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must always use special child restraint systems when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the Genuine Accessories Catalogue, which includes systems for all ages (see www.cupraaccessories.com).
These systems have been especially designed and approved and comply with the UN ECE R129 (i-Size) regulation.
CUPRA recommends securing the child seats shown on the website as described below:
- Rear facing child seat (group 0+ / child height 40-83 cm):
- ISOFIX and support leg (Britax Römer Baby-Safe 3 i-SIZE + Flex Base i-SENSE).
- Rear facing child seat (group 1 / child height 76-105 cm):
- ISOFIX AND Top Tether (Britax Römer TRI-FIX 2 i-Size).
- Forward facing child seat (group 2 / child height 100-135 cm):
- Seat belt and ISOFIX (Britax Römer KIDFIX i-Size).
Safety
You must also use the seat's "Secure-Guard" seatbelt connection point and adjust the side impact protection system "SICT" (available on certain models), located in the seat backrest. Adjust only the "SICT" closest to the door. Please follow the child seat manufacturer's usage instructions.
- Forward facing child seat (group 3 / child height 125–150 cm):
- Seat belt and ISOFIX (Britax Römer KIDFIX i-Size).
Group 3 can use the seat with backrest or only the seat base without the backrest (booster). The backrest of the child seat has an adult seat belt guide and a headrest, meaning that the seat with the backrest offers better protection than boosters without backrests. CUPRA recommends the use of child seats with backrests.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when installing and using child seats. Always read and note >>> page 63.
We recommend you always carry the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation.
Classification of child seats
Fig. 37 Examples of child seats.
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable for the child.
These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commission for Europe Regulation.
Child seats by weight group as per ECE-R44 and height as per ECE-R129
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group as per ECE-R44
Group 0 Up to 10 kg
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg
Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg
Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg
Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg
Child height as per ECE-R129
45-75 cm From birth to approx. 12 months.
45-87 cm From birth to approx. 4 years.
61-105 cm approx. 4 months to 4 years
100-135 cm approx. 4 to 8 years
125-150 cm approx. 4 years to 12 years
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129 standards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation.
CUPRA recommends you use child seats from the Original Accessories Catalogue. These child seats have been designed and tested for
Transporting children safely
use in our vehicles. You can find the right child seat for your model and age group at our dealers.
Child seats by approval category
Child seats may have the approval category of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific (all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i-Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard).
- Universal: child seats with universal approval can be installed in all vehicles. There is no need to consult any list of models. In the case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether belt.
- Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in addition to the standard requirements of universal approval, requires safety devices to lock the child seat, which require additional testing. Child seats with semi-universal approval include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed.
- Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval requires a dynamic test of the child seat for each vehicle model separately. Child seats with vehicle-specific approval also include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed.
- i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-R 129 standard in relation to installation and safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you which seats have i-Size approval for this vehicle.
Fitting and using child seats
Fig. 38 Airbag stick er: on the passenger side sunshade blind.
Fig. 39 Airbag stick er: on the rear frame of the passenger side door.
Warnings about fitting a child seat
Take the following general warnings into account if you are going to fit a child seat. They are valid for all child seats regardless of their attachment system.
- Please read and follow the child seat manufacturer's operating instructions.
- The child seat should preferably be fitted to the rear seat behind the front passenger seat so that the child can exit the vehicle on the pavement side.
- Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-facing child seats.
- To correctly use a child seat in the back, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child seat in the back if it is rear facing. In the case of forward-facing restraint systems, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child's feet.
- For a correct assembly of the child's seat on the rear seats, adjust or dismount the head-rest, in order to prevent contact with the seat.
- If a semi-universal type seat is to be installed, in which the method of attachment to the car is through the seat belt and support bracket, it should never be installed in the central rear seat as the ground clearance is lower than in other places and the support bracket will not allow the seat to remain sufficiently stable.
Safety
Important information about the front passenger airbag
A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the passenger's sunshade blind and/or on the passenger side door frame >>> Fig. 38.
Read and always observe the safety information included in the following chapters:
- Safety distance with respect to the passenger airbag >>> page 53.
- Objects between the passenger and the passenger side airbag >>> △ in Front airbags on page 56.
The passenger side front airbag, when enabled, is a serious risk for a rear-facing child since the airbag can strike the seat with such force that it can cause serious or fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend that you transport children on the rear seats. This is the safest location in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch >>> page 57. When transporting children, use a child seat suitable for the age and size of each child >>> page 62.
DANGER
- If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
- An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the child seat and throw it with great force against the door, the roof or the back-rest.
- Never install a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if necessary, the front passenger airbag must be deactivated>>> page 57.
- For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a technical service. Do not forget to reconnect the airbag when an adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat.
- Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other vehicle occupants.
- Never leave a child alone in the child seat or in the vehicle.
• Children shorter than 1.50 m must not use the vehicle seat belts unless seated in a child seat, as sudden braking or an accident could cause abdominal and neck injuries.
- When a child seat is mounted in the rear seats, the door's child lock should be activated >>> page 111.
Attachment systems
Depending on the country, different attachment systems are used for safely installing child seats.
Attachment systems overview
- ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attachment system allowing quick and safe attachment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX attachment establishes a rigid connection between the child seat and the car body.
The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, called connectors. These connectors are fitted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found between the seat cushion and the backrest of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISOFIX attachment systems are used mainly in Europe >>> page 65. If necessary, ISOFIX attachment may have to be supplemented with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.
- Automatic three-point seat belt. Whenever possible, it is preferable to attach the child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than attaching them with an automatic three-point seat belt >>> page 71.
Additional attachment:
Transporting children safely
- Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided over the back of the rear seat and attached to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points are located at the back of the rear seat backrest on the luggage compartment side >>> page 68. The rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked with an anchor symbol.
- Support bracket: some child seats rest on the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket. The support bracket prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of impact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket should only be used in the passenger seat and side rear seats >>> △. For the assembly of this type of seat you should also consult the list of approved vehicles for this assembly, available in the instructions for child restraint systems.
Recommended systems for attaching child seats
CUPRA recommends attaching child seats as follows:
• Baby carriers or rear facing child seats: ISOFIX and support bracket or i-Size.
- Forward-facing child seats: ISOFIX and Top Tether.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the support bracket can cause serious or fatal injury.
• Make sure the support bracket is correctly and safely installed.
- When the child seat base is supporting the weight of the child, the support leg must not be in the air or propped up with objects. Also ensure that the base of the child seat rests permanently on the surface of the vehicle's seat. The support leg of the child seat must not lift the base of the child seat off the surface of the vehicle's seat.
Securing a child seat with the ISO-FIX or i-Size system
The marking of ISOFIX or i-Size anchor points depends on the equipment and the country in question.
To understand the compatibility of the ISOFIX or i-Size systems in the vehicle, check the table below.
Safety
Vehicle ISOFIX/i-Size positions
| Child seat Child seat orientation | Size class / ISOFIX class | Front passenger seat | Rear side seat | Rear central seat | ||
| airbag enableda) | airbag disabledb) | |||||
| Group 0: up to 10 kg Rear facing E / R1 X IL IL X | ||||||
| E / R1 X IL IL X | ||||||
| Group 0+: up to 13 kg Rear facing | D / R2 X IL IL X | |||||
| C / R3 X IL IL X | ||||||
| Rear facing | D / R2 X IL IL X | |||||
| C / R3 X IL IL X | ||||||
| Group I: 9 to 18 kg | Forward-facing | B / F2 IL, IUF X IL, IUF X | ||||
| B1 / F2X IL, IUF X IL, IUF X | ||||||
| A / F3 IL, IUF X IL, IUF X | ||||||
| Group II: 15 to 25 kgc) | Forward-facing -- / -- | IL X | IL X | |||
| Group III: 22 to 36 kgc) | Forward-facing -- / -- | IL X | IL X | |||
| i-Size child seat | Rear facing | -- / R2 | X | IUF | IUF | X |
| Forward-facing | -- / B2, F2X | IUF | X | IUF | X | |
| Booster | Forward-facing | -- / B2, B3 | IB | X | IB | X |
a) For forward-facing child seats with the airbag activated, the passenger seat must be positioned as far away from the airbag as possible, while ensuring that the upper attachment point of the vehicle seatbelt is behind the child seat.
b) For rear-facing child seats with the airbag deactivated, seats without height adjustment should be moved to their rearmost position, and seats with height adjustment should be moved to their rearmost and lowest position.
c1 Installation in front seats requires reclining the backrest.
- Size class: The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised body weight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the class according to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.
Transporting children safely
- IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX / i-Size child restraint systems with "universal" approval, approved for use in this weight group.
- IL: Suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account.
- IB: Seat suitable for installing an ISOFIX forward-facing group 2/3 booster seat as well as an i-size forward-facing child seat for children with a height of 100 to 150 cm.
• X: Position not suitable for ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems in this weight group or size class.
Securing the child seat with the ISOFIX or i-Size system
Fig. 40 Rear seat: pre-punched slots to access the ISOFIX/iSize securing rings.
Fig. 41 Front passenger seat: location of the i-Size securing rings.
Fig. 42 R ear seats: fitting a child seat with the ISOFIX system.
You must follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
The location of the ISOFIX or i-Size anchor points is indicated by a symbol >>> Fig. 40,
Fig. 41 1 . In some vehicles, the rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear floor.
- First, by hand, open the cut-out section behind the marked grooves to access the securing rings >>> Fig. 40.
Safety
- Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX or iSize securing rings until it is heard to engage securely >>> Fig. 42. If the child seat is equipped with Top Tether anchor points, secure it to the corresponding ring >>> page 68. Follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
- Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is properly anchored.
Child seats with the ISOFIX or i-Size and Top Tether attachment system can be purchased from technical services.
WARNING
The securing rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX or i-Size and Top Tether system child seats.
- Never secure other child seats that do not have ISOFIX, i-Size or Top Tether systems, or safety belts or any other objects to the securing rings – as this can result in potentially fatal injuries.
- Ensure that the child seat is correctly secured to the ISOFIX or i-Size rings and the Top Tether.
Top Tether securing belts
Fig. 43 Rear part of the rear seats: Top Tether belt anchor.
Fig. 44 Rear of front passenger seat backrest: Top Tether belt anchor (not available in all markets/versions).
Child seats with a Top Tether system are fitted with an additional belt for fastening to an anchor point in the vehicle. This anchor point
is located on the rear of the rear seat backrest and of the front passenger seat backrest 1 (identified with the symbol ☐) and provides better retention >>> Fig. 43, >>> Fig. 44.
The objective of this system is to reduce forward movements of the child seat in a head-on collision, to reduce the risk of injuries that may be caused to the child's head by impacting against any element of the inside of the vehicle.
Use of Top Tether on rear-facing child restraints
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child restraints with Top Tether. The car seat manufacturer's instructions for proper installation of the Top Tether should be read carefully and followed.
Transporting children safely
Locking the tether belt
Fig. 45 Rear seats: adjustment and assembly according to the Top Tether belt.
Fig. 46 Front passenger seat: adjustment and assembly according to the Top Tether belt.
Fig. 47 Front passenger seat: adjustment and assembly according to the Top Tether belt.
Fig. 48 Front passenger seat: adjustment and assembly according to the Top Tether belt.
- Deploy the Top Tether belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
- Position the belt under the headrest (according to the instructions of the seat itself, lift or remove the headrest if necessary)
Fig. 45, >>> Fig. 46.
For vehicles with integrated headrests, pass the Top Tether belt over the headrest or through the headrest recess as shown in the image
Fig. 47, >>> Fig. 48.
- Slide the belt and secure it properly with the anchor on the rear seat backrest >>> Fig. 43, >>> Fig. 44.
- Tighten the belt securely according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Release the tether belt
- Loosen the belt according to the manufacturer's instructions.
- Press the lock and release it from the anchor bracket.
WARNING
Installing safety seats incorrectly will increase the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
- Never attach the tether belt to a fastening hook in the luggage compartment.
- Never attach or secure luggage or other items to the lower anchor points (ISOFIX) or Top Tether anchor points.
Safety
WARNING
Child restraint anchors are designed to support the loads of properly adjusted child restraint systems. Under no circumstances should they be used to attach adult seat belts, harnesses or other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Transporting children safely
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt
If you want to fit a universal approval category (U) child seat in your vehicle, you must check that the seat is approved for your vehicle.
You will find any necessary information on the child seat's orange ECE approval label.
The following table shows the different fitting options:
| Child seat Child seat orientation | Front passenger seat | Rear side seat | Rear central seata) | ||
| Airbag enabled b) | Airbag deactivatedc) | ||||
| Group 0 up to 10 kg Rear facing X U U U | |||||
| Group 0+ up to 13 kg Rear facing X U U U | |||||
| Group I 9 to 18 kg | Rear facing X U U U | ||||
| Forward-facing U X U U | |||||
| Group II 15 to 25 kg Forward-facing U X U U | |||||
| Group III 22 to 36 kg Forward-facing U X U U | |||||
| Child seats as per ECE-R129 | Rear facing X U U U | ||||
| Forward-facing U X U U | |||||
| X: Position not compatible for the installation of seats in this configuration.U: Position suitable for the installation of seats in this configuration. | |||||
a) Do not use semi-universal seats that use the vehicle's seat belt and a support leg as a securing system on the centre rear seat.
b) Move the front passenger seat as far as possible from the airbag. Ensure that the upper attachment point of the vehicle's seat belt remains behind the child seat.
c1 Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.
Safety
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt
Fig. 49 On rear seats: installing a child seat.
- Put the seat belt in place and pass it through the child seat according to the instructions of the child seat manufacturer.
• Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted. - Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle until you hear the engagement click.
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age, weight and size.
• Always read and observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats >>> page 63.
In case of emergency
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 50 Dashboard: hazard warning lights button.
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
If your vehicle is stationary:
- Park the vehicle at a safe distance from road traffic.
- Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights >>> △
- Apply the electronic parking brake.
- Stop the engine.
- Manual gearbox:
Put it in 1st gear.
Automatic gearbox:
Press the parking lock button P.
- Follow the legal provisions of each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, light beacon, etc.).
- Always carry the key with you when leaving the vehicle.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are switched on. The two turn signal lamps ◆ and the turn signal lamp in the switch ▲ will flash at the same time. The simultaneous hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.
While the hazard warning lights are on, you can signal a direction or lane change, e.g. during towing, by operating the turn signal lever. The hazard warning lights remain switched off during this time.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continuously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 mph), the brake light flashes several times per second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off automatically when the vehicle starts to move again.
In case of emergency
WARNING
- The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle (or light beacon, depending on the country) to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle.
- Never leave anybody inside the vehicle, particularly children or anybody who may need help. This is especially important when the doors are locked. Individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures.
- Due to the high temperatures that the catalytic converter can reach, never park in an area where the catalytic converter could come into contact with highly inflammable materials, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This could start a fire.
Note
- The 12-volt vehicle battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long time (even if the ignition is switched off).
- The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the relevant statutory requirements.
Behaviour in the event of an accident or fire
Actions to take in the event of a fire or accident
For your own safety and that of other passengers, the following points should be observed in the order given >>> △:
- Switch off the engine.
- If possible, switch on the hazard warning lights >>> page 72.
- Follow the legal provisions of each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, light beacon, etc.).
- If necessary, get any people out of the hazard area and apply first aid.
- Notify the emergency services.
- Wait at a safe distance from the scene of the accident for the emergency services to arrive.
• In case of fire, do not attempt to extinguish the fire yourself or remain near the vehicle.
WARNING
For your own safety, do not ignore this important check list, otherwise accidents and serious injuries could occur.
• Always complete the operations on the check list and always bear in mind the general safety measures.
WARNING
In the event of fire, an explosion may occur and substances harmful to health may be released, which can cause serious injury.
• Never stay near the burning vehicle.
Information call, Assistance call and Emergency call service
Fig. 51 On the roof console: controls for voice services.
Safety
Fig. 52 Emer gency call button.
Depending on the equipment, an emergency call system may be located on the roof console.
The following voice services can be run by pressing the buttons i, and >>Fig. 51:
• Information call.
- Assistance call.
• Emergency call service.
A built-in control unit establishes the connection.
When a voice service is activated, a connection is established with a phone line.
Control lamp.
There is a control lamp on the control
Fig. 51 (arrow). It shows the following statuses:
- Off: the eCall service is not available.
- Flashes in red, approx. 20 seconds after switching on the ignition: the eCall service is deactivated.
- Lights up red: system failure. The eCall service is available with certain restrictions. CUPRA suggests going to a specialised workshop.
- Lights up green: the eCall service is available. The system is ready to work in the vehicle.
- Flashes green: There is an ongoing voice connection.
→ Assistance call
With the breakdown call you can directly request specialised help in the event of a break-down.
Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data is transmitted, e.g. your current location.
i Information call
With an information call, a call is placed to CUPRA S.A. customer care service.
Note
Breakdown service and information calls can incur an additional cost on your telephone bill.
Types of emergency call
- Public mandatory by law): emergency call made to the emergency services of the country you are driving in, in the language of that country. >>> page 76.
- Private: an emergency call that is made to a "CUPRA call centre", which offers improved customer service, such as service in the language selected in the infotainment system. At any time, the user can choose to cancel the private emergency call in order to be attended by the country's emergency services.
Private emergency call
If the private emergency call service is available in the vehicle's service portfolio, the emergency call service is activated by default for a limited period of time.
- The emergency call service can be used to organise help as quickly as possible in an emergency situation.
- When the emergency call service is activated, a connection is made to the CUPRA emergency call centre.
- If an emergency call is made manually or, in the event of an accident, when the airbag or seatbelt pretensioner is triggered, the data relevant to the emergency call will be transmitted automatically, for example, the current location of the vehicle >>> page 402.
In case of emergency
- The telephone contact person communicates in the language set in the vehicle's Infotainment system. If this language is not available at the location where the emergency call is currently being made, English will be used.
• Additional components such as emergency call microphone, an emergency loudspeaker and an integrated battery which is separate from the integrated power supply, are installed to ensure operation even after a serious accident. - The emergency call service can be deactivated permanently by a qualified specialist. CUPRA recommends that you contact an official CUPRA service or a SEAT official service.
- If the public emergency call system is available in the vehicle, the private emergency call service can be deactivated via the web or app, or by preventing data transmission in the Infotainment system, via the privacy mode >>> page 270.
Starting an emergency call manually
- Briefly press the button cover 📋 and open the cover >>> Fig. 51.
- Press and hold the emergency call button for a few seconds >>> Fig. 52①.
The emergency call is activated and a voice connection is established with the emergency coordination centre.
The emergency call can also be activated manually via the Infotainment system >>> page 304.
If you press the emergency call button inadvertently, hang up the call immediately:
- Press the emergency call button again until the control light stays green.
Note
Only press the emergency call button >>> Fig. 52 in the event of an emergency.
Automatic activation of an emergency call
The automatic emergency call is only activated if the ignition is switched on.
The connection to the CUPRA emergency centre is automatically established in the following situations:
- Immediately after the airbags are triggered.
- Immediately after activation of the seatbelt pretensioner.
- Depending on equipment, in the event of intervention of the Emergency Assist system.
The automatic emergency call cannot be interrupted by pressing the emergency call button >>> Fig. 52.
If enquiries from the CUPRA emergency call centre remain unanswered, rescue measures are dispatched automatically.
Integrated battery
The integrated battery ensures that the emergency call system remains available for some time even if the 12-volt battery has been disconnected or has failed.
If the integrated battery discharges or is defective, a message stating this is displayed on the instrument cluster display. Go to a specialised workshop and ask for the battery to be replaced.
EDR data transmission >>> page 402
When an emergency call is made, the available data are transmitted to the CUPRA emergency call centre so that the necessary rescue measures can be determined.
Vehicle location data is continuously overwritten. This means that the vehicle is not subject to permanent monitoring.
The data related to the emergency call is only processed to ensure the correct operation of the emergency call system (eCall). The system will automatically delete the data related to the call a few hours after the call is activated.
The sent data includes:
- The vehicle's current position at the time the emergency call is activated.
• Vehicle identification number (VIN) - Type of vehicle and type of drive.
• Type of activation (automatic or manual). - Type of call.
Safety
• Direction in which the vehicle was travelling at the time the emergency call was activated.
• Moment of the collision.
• Estimated number of vehicle occupants.
- Language selected in the infotainment system.
WARNING
The following conditions may mean that it is not possible to make a public or private emergency call, either manually or automatically, or that it is only possible to a limited extent:
- The emergency call is made in an area with little or no mobile or GPS coverage.
- In areas with sufficient mobile and GPS signal reception, the mobile network of the telecommunication providers is not available. In this case, the emergency call, if available in the vehicle, uses the legally required emergency call system.
• In areas with sufficient mobile and satellite signal reception, a 2G/3G mobile telecommunication provider network is not available.
- In some countries, the emergency call service may not be available and depending on the location of the vehicle, the control lamp LEDs, and even the operation of the different types of calls, could behave in a specific way.
- There is no valid licence for the use of the emergency call service.
• The components of the vehicle required for the emergency phone call are damaged or do not get enough power.
- The emergency call service function has been deactivated via the web or the App. In this case, the emergency call, if available in the vehicle, is forwarded to the public emergency call service automatically.
- The emergency call service function has been deactivated by preventing the transmission of data (privacy mode). In this case, the emergency call, if available in the vehicle, calls the public emergency call system. If the private emergency call system cannot be executed for technical reasons, calls are forwarded to the public emergency call service automatically.
- The vehicle's ignition is not on.
Note
The operation of the emergency call system, which is required by law, may be limited if an infotainment system is retrofitted
Note
The emergency call, breakdown call and information service are only available in certain countries.
eCall emergency call service, required by law
Depending on the equipment and the country, the vehicle may be fitted with an emergency call system. In some countries, the free public emergency call system is activated by default. The control element is located on the roof console >>> Fig. 51.
With the emergency call, help can be organised as quickly as possible in emergency situations. A voice connection is established with a public rescue coordination centre. The telephone contact person communicates in the language of the country in which the vehicle is located. In addition, any legally required data relevant to emergency calls is automatically transmitted to the public rescue control centre, such as the vehicle's current location.
The required connection is made via a factory-installed control unit. Additional components such as an emergency call microphone, an emergency loudspeaker and an integrated battery which is independent of the integrated power supply, are required to ensure operation even after a serious accident.
Activating an emergency call manually
- Briefly press the button covers and open the cover >> Fig. 51.
- Press and hold the emergency call button for a few seconds >>> Fig. 52①.
In case of emergency
The emergency call is activated and a voice connection is established with the emergency coordination centre.
If you press the emergency call button inadvertently, hang up the call immediately:
- Press the emergency call button again until the control light stays green.
Note
Only press the emergency call button >>> Fig. 52 in the event of an emergency.
Automatic activation of an emergency call
The automatic emergency call is only activated if the ignition is switched on.
A connection to the public rescue coordination centre is automatically established in the following situations:
- Immediately after the airbags are triggered.
- Immediately after activation of the seatbelt pretensioner.
• Depending on equipment, in the event of intervention of the Emergency Assist system.
The automatic emergency call cannot be interrupted by pressing the emergency call button >>> Fig. 52.
If the public rescue control centre's questions remain unanswered, the rescue response begin automatically.
Troubleshooting
Fault in the emergency call service.
The control lamp of the emergency call button lights up in red and stays on. In addition, the following message may appear on the instrument cluster display:
Error: Emergency call function. Workshop!
There is a fault in the emergency call service. In this case, you will not be able to make any emergency calls.
- Immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop and have the fault repaired. CUPRA recommends a CUPRA dealership.
Limited emergency call service
The control lamp of the emergency call button lights up in red and stays on. In addition, the following message may appear on the instrument cluster display:
Emergency call function limited. Workshop!
The Emergency Call Service is only available with limitations. E.g. no voice connection to the CUPRA emergency call centre can be established.
- Immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop and have the fault repaired. CUPRA recommends a CUPRA dealership.
High-voltage battery
High-voltage battery
Safety instructions
Introduction
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
DANGER
The vehicle's high-voltage network and the high-voltage battery are hazardous and can cause burns and other injuries, including fatal electric shocks.
- It should always be assumed that the high-voltage battery is fully charged and that all of its components are live. This may also be the case when the ignition is switched off.
- Never touch the high-voltage cables, the high-voltage battery or its poles, or allow them to come into contact with jewellery or other metal objects, especially if the high-voltage cables, the high-voltage battery or its poles are damaged.
- Never take it upon yourself to perform any type of work on the high-voltage network, on the high-voltage cables or the high-voltage battery.
-
Never open or perform maintenance or repairs on components or parts of the high voltage network, or disconnect them from this network.
-
Never damage, modify or remove the orange high voltage cables or disconnect them from the high voltage network.
- Never open, modify or remove the cover from the high-voltage battery.
- Work on the high-voltage system, as well as on any systems that may be indirectly influenced by it, should only be carried out by specialized personnel with the corresponding qualifications and training.
- Work in the immediate vicinity of high-voltage cables and high-voltage components with tools that are sharp, give off shavings or that have heat sources, such as hot air, thermal bonding or welding work, may only be performed after disconnecting the voltage. The high voltage should only be disconnected by specialized personnel with the corresponding qualifications and training.
- All CUPRA guidelines and standards must be followed when performing any work on the high-voltage system and the high-voltage battery.
- The gases that are emitted or leaked from the high-voltage battery may be toxic or flammable.
-
Damage to the vehicle or high voltage battery could cause an immediate or delayed leak of toxic gases. The emitted gases could also cause a fire. Do not inhale the gases.
-
Never touch the liquids that spill from the high voltage battery and do not touch the emitted gases, particularly if the battery is damaged.
• In the event of a fire, leave the danger area and call the fire department.
• Always inform the fire fighters and the emergency service that the vehicle is fitted with a high-voltage battery.
DANGER
If works are performed on the high-voltage system and on the high-voltage components in an inappropriate manner, this may lead to faults in the operation, accidents and injuries.
• Work on the high-voltage system must only be performed by authorized specialized services with the corresponding permit.
NOTICE
If the vehicle suffers an accident or collision with an obstacle, the high-voltage battery must be checked by specialized personnel with the corresponding qualifications and training.
Safety instructions
NOTICE
If the 12-volt vehicle battery has been disconnected, discharged or replaced, there is a chance that the combustion engine may not initially turn off automatically after moving off. If this situation lasts for several days, contact a qualified specialized workshop. CUPRA recommends visiting a CUPRA partner for this.
High voltage warning lettering
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Warning lettering on the vehicle
The following parts of the vehicle can be identified with the depicted warning lettering >>> Fig. 53, >>> Fig. 54, >>> Fig. 55, >>> Fig. 56:
• Covers and lids behind which live high-voltage components are located.
- All the high-voltage components, including the high-voltage battery.
• Under the front bonnet.
Fig. 53 Warning lettering.
Fig. 54 Warning lettering.
The warning lettering >>> Fig. 53 and >>> Fig. 54 indicate high electrical voltage.
Fig. 55 Warning lettering.
The components of the high voltage system can become very hot and should not be touched >>> Fig. 55.
Fig. 56 High-voltage battery warning lettering.
>>> Fig. 56
① High voltage can cause serious injury or even death. Never touch the battery poles with bare fingers, tools, jewellery or other metal objects.
② The high-voltage battery contains hazardous liquid and solid substances. Emitted gases can cause severe burns and blindness. Suitable eye protection and protective clothing must always be worn when working on the high voltage battery to prevent battery fluid coming into contact with the skin and eyes. If the battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, the affected areas should be rinsed with clean running water for at least 15 minutes, and then a doctor should be consulted immediately.
High-voltage battery
③ The high-voltage battery may burn. The high-voltage battery should never be exposed to fire, sparks or naked flame. The high voltage battery must always be handled with care to avoid damage and fluid leakages.
④ The high-voltage battery should always be kept out of the reach of children.
⑤ You will find further information and warnings in the usage instructions and workshop documentation.
⑥ Incorrect handling of the high-voltage battery can cause serious injuries or death. Never disassemble the high voltage battery or remove its cover.
⑦ Maintenance work on the high-voltage battery must only be performed by specialized personnel with the corresponding qualifications and training. Never modify the high-voltage battery. When the high-voltage battery is open, ensure it does not come into contact with water or other liquids. Liquids may cause short circuits, electrical shocks and burns.
Conservation of the high-voltage battery
Conservation instructions
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Reliability and capacity of the high-voltage battery
In principle, lithium ion batteries are subject to ageing and wear and tear throughout their useful life due to their physical and chemical characteristics. Correct handling of the high-voltage battery makes an essential contribution to keeping it in a reliable state in the long term and to achieving high battery capacity and range. Therefore, it is extremely important to respect the following conservation instructions for the high voltage battery. These maintenance instructions are essential for maintaining the vehicle's value over time.
Please also observe the applicable CUPRA warranty conditions for the high-voltage battery.
Conservation instructions
CUPRA recommends the following conservation instructions:
- If possible, charge the high-voltage battery when a low charge level is displayed on the instrument cluster, or when the electric range is low >>> page 19.
- It is advisable to not charge the high-voltage battery when only a short trip has been made in full electric mode.
-
As much as possible avoid fully discharging the high-voltage battery, such as by leaving the vehicle parked for a prolonged time with a low load level. The charge level must not drop below 20% for long periods of time >>> ①.
-
When the high-voltage battery has been charged to 100% , start driving immediately if possible.
• As far as possible, avoid loads above 80 %.
Vehicle parking times
- If there is a frost, do not park the vehicle for several hours with a charge level of lower than 40% >>> ①.
- If you plan to leave your vehicle stationary for prolonged periods of time, park with a charge level of at least 30% . This situation occurs, for example, when you leave your vehicle at the airport before a trip.
- Do not expose the vehicle to outside temperatures below -30°C or above 60°C for more than 24 hours.
- To improve comfort and performance, make sparse use of the stationary air conditioning (depending on the equipment), particularly in temperatures lower than -15°C >> page 162.
NOTICE
The high-voltage battery must not be used as a stationary power supply. This can cause irreversible damage to the high-voltage battery.
Charging the high-voltage battery
NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for a long time with the high-voltage battery discharged, it may no longer be possible to charge the battery or start the vehicle. Irreversible damage could be caused to the high voltage battery in the long term.
- Charge the high-voltage battery at regular intervals.
Charging the high-voltage battery
Introduction
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Check that the drive system is deactivated and that the charging cable and infrastructure are in a perfect state of repair.
Types of charging
The following charging types are possible for the vehicle:
- Charging with alternating current (AC) at a public or home charging station >>> page 83:
Charging at high power. The maximum achievable charging power depends on the charging station and charging cable that is used and the performance of the vehicle's charger.
- Charging with alternating current (AC) at a household socket >>> page 83:
The electrical installation of the house must have been checked and be in perfect working order >>> ▲. Due to the large capacity of the battery and the low power of this method, a full charge will take more than 20 hours (8 hours, depending on the market).
- Charging with direct current (DC) at a fast charging station >>> page 84:
This is the most powerful type of charge. The charging time decreases significantly. Please note the information on charging frequently with direct current (DC) >>> ①.
Protection against current leakage
The vehicle is fitted with a direct current (DC) leakage protection device. This prevents any current leakage that may occur during charging from reaching the house's electrically installation through the charging cable.
WARNING
If the battery is charged in an inappropriate manner, if no consideration is given to the appropriate safety measures or the high-voltage battery is used in an inadequate manner, this could lead to short circuits, electrical shocks, explosions, fires, burns and serious injuries, and even death.
• Always respect the stipulated order of the operations to avoid the risk of suffering an electric shock or serious injuries due to the residual energy in the charging accumulator.
- Please observe the safety and handling instructions of the charging cable supplied with the vehicle >>> page 94.
- When charging, only use power sockets that are appropriately fitted, have been checked and are not damaged, as well as electrical installations that are in perfect working order. Duly qualified technicians should check the power sockets and the electrical installation on a regular basis.
- Never charge the vehicle in places where there is a danger of explosion. The components of the charging cable can cause sparks and, therefore, may ignite flammable fumes or explosives.
• Always protect the connectors from moisture and from water and other fluids getting inside directly.
- For safety reasons, never perform other works on the vehicle while charging.
• Always complete the charging process before unplugging the connector from the electrical network. Otherwise the charging cable and the electrical installation may also be damaged.
High-voltage battery
WARNING
If the vehicle is driven with a very low charge level of the high-voltage battery, the vehicle may stall in traffic, causing serious damage or accidents and injuries.
NOTICE
Fast charging with direct current (DC) uses very high power. Frequent use of fast charging can permanently reduce the charging capacity of the high-voltage battery.
- The battery should preferably be charged with alternating current (AC) from a public or domestic charging station.
NOTICE
During the charging process, do not rest or wind the charging cable on the charging cover, as this could damage the part.
Note
- To charge the high-voltage battery using alternating current (AC), CUPRA recommends using a home or other type of charging station and charging with maximum charging power. These charging options are more efficient than using a domestic power socket.
- Please note the technical data on your vehicle's charging power. You can get more information from a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT network dealer.
-
The high-voltage battery can only be charged at charging stations that meet the requirements of the country in questions and at least one of the following standards:
-
IEC 61851 and IEC 62196 (Europe).
- ISO 15118 (-1, -2, -3).
- SAE J1772 (USA, Mexico)
- In the event of very low or very high temperatures, it may only be possible to charge the high-voltage battery in a limited manner.
Identification of compatible charging infrastructure
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
A
B
BFJ-0228
Fig. 57 Identification of alternating current (AC) and type 2 connector.
C
D
BFJ-0229
Fig. 58 Identification of direct current (DC) and the vehicle's CCS connector
Compatibility between vehicles and charging infrastructure
The following indicators according to the EN 17186 standard provide information about whether the infrastructure's charging connectors are suitable for the vehicle >>> △.
Charging the high-voltage battery
Indicators >>> Fig. 57
A In the vehicle
B At the charging station
Indicators >>> Fig. 58
c Voltage up to 500 volts
D Voltage of up to 1000 volts.
The indicators are located on the vehicle's charging socket, on components of the local charging infrastructure (charging station, socket) and on the charging cable. The indicators refer to charging connection standards according to IEC 62196.
WARNING
Charging the vehicle at unverified electrical installations can cause serious injury and damage.
- If there is no indicator or if the charging infrastructure is unknown, an electrical installation expert should be consulted first.
Charging with alternating current (AC)
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 59 Opening the charging socket cover.
Fig. 60 Behind the battery charging cover on the front left-hand side: Charging socket
Fig. 61 Behind the battery charging cover on the front left-hand side: Charging socket (depending on the market).
>>> Fig. 60, >>> Fig. 61
① Charging process display
② Charging socket
The battery charger installed in the vehicle converts alternating current from the public supply into direct current.
AC charging station or socket cable: The vehicle's high-voltage battery can be charged using alternating current (AC) through the corresponding charging socket ② .
Connecting the charging cable
- Firstly, connect the charging cable to the socket, or public or home charging station. Next, fully unwind it.
- Charging cable for domestic power sockets: The protection device performs a self-test >>> page 96.
High-voltage battery
- If the vehicle is unlocked, the battery charging cover opens when the indicated zone is pressed >>> Fig. 59.
- Plug the charging connector into the charging socket. Check that the charging connector is fully plugged in.
The connector locks automatically.
The LED (charging process indicator) of the charging socket ① flashes or flashes white >>> Fig. 60, >>> page 86.
You can set the charging as required in the infotainment system >>> page 91.
Automatic start of the charging process
If scheduled charging is not activated, the charging process starts immediately >>> page 89. The external charging infrastructure must be active.
Most public charging stations require authentication to start the process. It is important to verify that the authentication has been performed correctly, otherwise it could cause a system malfunction.
During charging
The charging process indicator on the charging socket ① flashes green. The charging connector is locked.
If the charging process indicator lights up red, there is a fault >>> page 86.
Interrupting the charging process
The charging process can be interrupted:
- Unlock the vehicle.
- Press the Stop charging function button of the infotainment system. The charging process indicator located next to the charging socket ① lights up white. If you want the charging connector to unlock automatically, the Release connector automatically setting must be selected in the charging settings >>> page 89.
- Press the Continue button to restart the process. The charging connector locks. In some cases you may need to authenticate yourself again in the charging station.
To restart the charging process just press the function button.
After charging
When the high-voltage battery is fully charged, the charging process display on the charging socket lights up green.
- Unlock the vehicle.
- Unplug the charging connector from the charging socket within 30 seconds.
-
OR: if Release connector automatically is activated in the charging settings
page 89, the charging connector automatically unlocks once the charging process is complete.
-
Disconnect the charging cable from the power supply and replace the protective cap.
- Close the charging cover and make sure you hear it click into place.
Charging with direct current (DC)
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 62 Opening the char ging socket cover.
Charging the high-voltage battery
Fig. 63 Behind the battery charging cover on the rear right-hand side.
① Charging process display
② Charging socket
③ Protective cap
The alternating current is converted into direct current outside the vehicle. A considerably higher charging power is achieved than when charging with alternating current (AC).
Public fast-charging station: The high-voltage battery can be charged with direct current (DC) at an appropriate charging station. The charging time decreases significantly.
Use a charging cable less than 30 metres long.
Connecting the charging cable
- Unlock the vehicle.
-
Press the battery's charging socket cover in the area of the arrow to open it >>> Fig. 62.
-
Remove the protective cap and hang it on the hook >>> Fig. 63③
- Plug the charging station's charging connector into the charging socket >>> Fig. 63②
The connector locks automatically.
The LED (charging process indicator) of the charging socket flashes or flashes white >>> Fig. 63① >>> page 86
Automatic start of charging
Switch on the charging station >>> ①.
The charging process will start immediately.
Most public charging stations require authentication to start the process. It is important to verify that the authentication has been performed correctly, otherwise it could cause a system malfunction.
During charging
The charging process indicator on the charging socket ① flashes green >>> Fig. 63.
If the charging process indicator lights up red, there is a fault >>> page 86.
Interrupting the charging process
The charging process can be stopped before the desired state of charge is reached:
- Tap the Stop charging function button on the infotainment system display. The charging process indicator located next to the charging socket ① lights up white >>> Fig. 63. The charging connector is unlocked.
After charging
When the desired state of charge has been reached, the charging process indicator on the charging socket will light up green.
After charging, the charging connector is automatically unlocked from the charging station if the Release automatic connector option is activated in the charging settings.
- Unplug the charging connector from the charging socket.
- Place the protective cap on the charging socket's lower connection >>> Fig. 63③
- Close the cover of the battery charging socket until you hear it has engaged.
NOTICE
To use the charging station, bear in mind the manufacturer's indications and usage instructions.
High-voltage battery
Charging process display
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 64 Behind the battery charging socket cover: charging process indicator.
Fig. 65 On the inside face of the cover of the battery charging socket: sticker with information on the charging process display.
An LED light on the charging socket >>> Fig. 64 (arrow) shows the status of the charging process.
A sticker on the battery charging cover provides information on the meaning of the LEDs >>> Fig. 65.
Charging process displays:
The LED flashes
- The vehicle has detected the charging connector.
White LED
•① Flashing: establishment of communication between the vehicle and the charging infrastructure. The charging process is being prepared.
• Permanently on: no active charging function
Green LED
- ② Flashing: the high-voltage battery is charging.
•③ Remains lit: delayed charging is activated. The charging process has not yet started. - ④ Permanently on: the charging process has completed without any problems.
- Flashes red: emergency charging at reduced power due to a failure to recognize the charging connector.
Red LED
• Permanently on: there is a fault in the system. The charging process cannot start or has been interrupted.
Get specialist assistance if the charging process indicator permanently indicates a defect.
Charging socket lighting
In the dark, the charging socket's side lighting (white LED) can facilitate orientation on the vehicle:
Charging the high-voltage battery
On
• The vehicle has been unlocked.
- OR: The charging connector has been unplugged from the charging socket.
Off
• After unlocking or locking the vehicle, the lighting switches off automatically after a while.
Charging process indicator lamp
During charging process, the lamp ω2 is displayed on the instrument cluster display.
2 White indicator: connector plugged in, no charging process active.
Green indicator: connector plugged in, charging process active.
Troubleshooting
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
The electrical system is not working rly. Stop safely!
The warning lamp lights up red. A message is displayed in this regard.
There is a fault in the high voltage system. The high voltage components may be damaged >>> △.
It is not possible to charge the high-voltage battery.
• STOP The vehicle must be parked in a safe place. Park the vehicle outdoors as soon as it is possible and safe to do so.
- Switch off the drive system.
- Seek professional assistance.
and HV battery: Risk of fire e! Stop safely and get out immediately. Call the emergency services.
The warning lamp lights up red and is displayed along with a text message on the instrument cluster accompanied by a continuous audible warning.
The high voltage battery temperature is too high ⚠.
If this message is displayed on the instrument cluster, please note >>> △ and follow the steps below:
- STOP Stop driving! Stop the vehicle immediately, taking into account the traffic situation.
- Choose a safe place outdoors, away from buildings or vehicles, canopies, covered car parks or similar places.
- If possible, switch on the hazard warning lights.
-
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure it is immobilised (parking brake, parking lock P).
-
Switch off the ignition and leave the ignition key on the dash panel or in a visible place so that the emergency services can use it (for example to recover the vehicle from a hazardous area).
- Exit the vehicle and make sure that there are no other people or animals left inside.
- Make sure that you leave the danger zone together with all other vehicle occupants and that everyone remains in an area that is protected from traffic (e.g. behind the guard rail).
- Notify the emergency services. Do not try to put out the fire yourself.
If the message is hidden, the warning lamp remains visible.
The audible warning can only be turned off by a qualified workshop. CUPRA recommends that you visit an official dealer.
Protection functions in the event of a failure
If a serious high-voltage-battery failure occurs, the vehicle can activate additional protection functions; for example, the hazard lights may switch on or the horn may sound immediately after the ignition is turned off.
High-voltage battery
DANGER
If there is a risk of fire in the high-voltage battery, toxic gases may escape or components may be released from the high voltage battery. There is a risk of serious injury, burns or lethal electric shocks.
• Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible
page 73, Behaviour in the event of an accident or fire.
- Get out of the vehicle and keep a safe distance away from it.
- Call the fire department immediately.
Deep discharge of the high-voltage bat- due to prolonged parking time
The control lamp lights up red. A message is displayed.
The high-voltage battery can be damaged if, for example, the vehicle is not used for a long time.
- Charge the high-voltage battery immediately.
High voltage battery discharged
The control lamp lights up in yellow. A message is displayed.
- Charge the high-voltage battery immediately.
Low state of charge in the high-voltage ery
The control lamp lights up in yellow. A message is displayed showing the remaining range.
The high-voltage battery charge has reached the reserve level.
- Charge the high-voltage battery.
Range calculation fault
The control lamp lights up in yellow. A message is displayed.
There is a fault in the range calculation. Contact a specialised workshop.
The charging process is not possible or has been paused
The charging process indicator located next to the charging socket lights up red.
Before visiting a specialist workshop, you can try the following solutions:
- Plug the charging cable back in.
- Check that the charging connector is plugged in correctly.
- Check if a fault is displayed on the charging station or, depending on the equipment, on the charging cable protection device.
If the fault cannot be rectified, contact a specialist workshop immediately.
The charging cable protection device disconnects
If electrical devices with a separate electrical connection, e.g. a cool box, are used in the vehicle at the same time, the self-test of the protective device may detect a fault.
- Please note the order! First connect the charging cable to the external power supply and then to the charging socket.
The charging time varies
During the direct current (DC) charging process, the charging current is reduced automatically to preventing the high-voltage battery from overheating.
After several fast charging processes in a row, the charging time is temporarily extended.
DANGER
High-voltage components, including the battery and high-voltage cables, may be live and damaged. The high voltage system voltage is dangerous and can cause burns, other injuries and fatal electric shocks.
- Do not touch the high voltage components!
Charging settings
Emergency release of the charging connector
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 66 Bet ween the left wing panel and the engine bonnet hinge: Charging connector manual release mechanism puller.
Unlocking the charging connector
Prerequisites:
- The charging connector is plugged in correctly.
• The vehicle is unlocked. - The charging process has ended or has paused >>> page 81.
- When charging with alternating current (AC), the setting Release connector automatically is activated in the infotainment system. >>> page 89.
The manual release mechanism must be used if these prerequisites are met and it is still impossible to unplug the charging connector >>> △.
Emergency electrical release of the charging connector
To avoid having to perform a manual emergency release, try releasing the charging connector electronically using the vehicle's central locking.
- Unlock the vehicle three times in a row.
• Unplug the charging connector.
Manual release of the charging connector
The puller for the manual release mechanism is on the left hand side of the engine compartment, above the charging socket >>> Fig. 66.
- Disconnect the power supply at the charging station or electrical socket.
- Open the bonnet and make sure it is held in place with the prop.
• Pull the puller >>> Fig. 66. - Immediately unplug the charging connector.
DANGER
If the charging connector unexpectedly remains locked, the fault may be caused by the vehicle or charging station. The manual emergency release can make live contacts accessible. In this case, touching the contacts of the charging socket may result in burns, other injuries or a fatal electric shock.
- Never touch the contacts of the charging socket or the charging connector.
Note
The manual release mechanism of the charging connector should only be used in the event of a failure.
Charging settings
Introduction
Immediate charging
The high-voltage battery can be charged without further configuration and according to the available charging option >>> page 83, >>> page 84.
High-voltage battery
- Plug in the charging cable A charging information screen opens in the infotainment system. The charging process starts automatically.
- Set the maximum battery charge level for the desired range in the Infotainment system.
Advanced charging configuration
Individual AC charging settings for your desired location, e.g. at your home, office or charging station, are available if a charging location (from now on Schedule) has been created in the Infotainment system.
- Select: ≡ > Charging.
- Store the current charging location in the Schedule menu >>> page 93.
If you want to performed programmed charging, establish and activate a departure time >>> page 93.
- Make further adjustments if desired.
Note
If no start time has been activated, the high-voltage battery charges to the maximum charge level.
Changing the charging mode
The available charging modes can be selected via a drop-down list in the Charging menu or in the departure menu >>> page 41.
The available charging modes depend on the Schedule configuration and the technical requirements at the location.
Charging settings
Overview
Fig. 67 In the inf otainment system: Charging main menu.
Indications in the Charging main menu
Some of the following indications are only available when a charging schedule is active >>> page 93.
① Charge scheduling >>> page 93.
② General charging settings >>> page 92.
③ Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery.
4 Current electric range.
⑤ Charging speed and power: the increase in range per hour or per minute when charging at the current charging power is displayed. The charging power depends on the charging infrastructure and the tem-
perature of the high-voltage battery. The charging power can vary during the process.
⑥ Minimum charging level. Only visible with an active charging mode, based on a schedule (not visible in immediate charging mode). Allows the minimum charging level to be changed. If a destination is set, it suggests the minimum charging level to reach the destination >>> page 92.
⑦ Charging mode selector based on the schedule for the vehicle's current position. Displayed only if a schedule has been previously set up. Provides extra information about the schedule >>> page 93.
⑧ Touch pad for adjusting the maximum charging level of the battery >>> page 92.
⑨ Navigation symbol with planned charging stops: the maximum charging level is automatically adjusted for the next suggested stop.
⑩ Maximum set battery charging level >>> page 92.
11 End the charge or restart it. Visible during an active charging process.
Instructions for plugging in the charging connector
Information on the current charging process is displayed in the infotainment system.
High-voltage battery
Close the screen:
- Press the X function button.
- EITHER: the display ends automatically after 2 minutes.
• OR: lock the vehicle.
Configuration in the Settings menu
Open the General charging settings menu
- Open the main Charging menu.
- Push the ⚙②>>> Fig. 67 button.
Settings in unknown locations
- Reduce the AC charging power: the charging current is reduced to 6 or 8 amps depending on the country. With this setting you can reduce mains overload when charging at a socket.
- Release the AC power cable: After the charging process is complete, the connector releases automatically.
Battery Care Mode function
The function automatically limits the maximum charge level to 80% for subsequent charges. If it is necessary to charge to over 80% and this is configured, the next charge will automatically be limited to 80%.
Note
- The programmed charge configuration prevails over the "Battery Care" configuration (the maximum charge level is not automatically reset).
- CUPRA recommends using the Battery Care Mode function in daily use to prolong the life of the high-voltage battery.
Set the battery charging limits
The infotainment system can be used to adjust the maximum and minimum charge level and thus the vehicle's range to suit daily needs.
Maximum battery charging level
Normally, if you use the vehicle regularly, it is not necessary to fully charge the high-voltage battery. The maximum charging level limits the battery's maximum state of charge.
- Move the touch slider to the desired value in the infotainment system's charging settings >>> page 91.
The maximum charging level can also be adapted during charging.
Minimum charging level of the battery
The minimum charging level sets the minimum state of charge for a saved schedule. This function can be used to guarantee a minimum range.
- In the infotainment system select: 📋 > Charging.
- Set the minimum charging level in the schedule.
After connecting the electricity, first of all the vehicle charges up to the battery's minimum charging level. The preferred times or a departure time, for programmed charging, will only be taken into account once this limit is reached.
Examples for charging with alternating current (AC)
For AC charging, CUPRA recommends the following settings:
Everyday use - Long range is not necessary
• Maximum battery charging level: 80% maximum.
• Minimum battery charging level: 20% as a minimum if the outside temperature is mild or warm, or 40% if it is cool or cold.
Long distance travel - Long range required
• Maximum battery charging level: 100%.
- Minimum battery charging level: 20% as a minimum if the outside temperature is mild or warm, or 40% if it is cool or cold.
- Avoid leaving the vehicle parked and start driving immediately after charging the battery.
Charging settings
Set charging locations (Schedule)
You can create schedules associated with charging locations in the infotainment system. The vehicle recognises a saved charging location when it is there, and uses the available settings when charging.
Location data
The infotainment system uses the current location data (geographical coordinates) of the vehicle when you create or use a schedule.
Create a schedule
- In the infotainment system select: 📋 > Charging.
- Press Schedule.
- Add the charging location and give it a name (maximum of 5).
Delete a schedule
- In the infotainment system select: 📄 > Charging.
- Press Schedule.
- Press the ∅ function button.
- Press the function button to delete the saved schedule.
Settings
- For immediate charging in the current schedule, activate the corresponding function in the departure menu >>> page 41 or in the charging modes selector located in the Charging menu.
• Departure time >>> page 93 - Reduce charging power in alternating current: the charging current is reduced to 6 or 8 amps. With this setting you can reduce mains overload when charging at a socket.
- Release the AC power cable: After the charging process is complete, the connector releases automatically.
- Minimum battery charging level from 0-50% >>> page 92.
• Maximum battery charging level from 50-100% >>> page 92. - Preferred times. Activating this charging mode can be helpful when there are other electrical consumers in the household or when you prefer to charge during cheaper time periods.
• Display address or geographical coordinates
i Note
All charging settings stored in the schedule always apply to the currently recognised charging location.
Departure time settings
When a charging location has been created, the high-voltage battery can be charged for a certain time.
Set the departure time
- In the infotainment system select: 📋 > Charging.
- Press Schedule.
- Open the profile of a charging location.
-
Set a departure time (maximum of three per location).
-
Days of the week.
- Time at which the high-voltage battery should be charged.
- Use once or weekly.
Air conditioning
The vehicle interior is cooled or heated for the departure time by the stationary air conditioning. The operation depends on the equipment.
- Set the desired temperature in the Stationary air conditioning >>> page 161 menu.
Activate a departure time
- Press Schedule.
- Open the profile of a charging location.
High-voltage battery
- Activate the departure time by checking the checkbox √.
- Select the desired programmed charging mode on the charging mode selector.
Displays
The departure time is used weekly.
Note
The departure menu remembers the active charging mode and gives the option to modify it >>> page 41.
Charging cable
Introduction
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
The type of charging cable supplied with the vehicle basically depends on the technical specifications of each country, e.g. charging connector connections for sockets.
CUPRA recommends exclusively using the supplied charging cable.
Notes on the charging cable
- Handle with care.
-
Unroll and roll fully.
-
Do not twist or bend it over sharp edges.
- Do not crush it or drive the vehicle over it.
• Always unplug it by pulling on the connector.
• Children should not use the charging cable. - Keep animals away from the charging cable.
• After use, store it safely and without twisting it.
DANGER
Using a charging cable that has been damaged or tampered with can cause serious injury and fatal electric shocks.
- Before each use check that the connectors and the charging cable are undamaged, e.g. check for cracks.
- Never disassemble the charging cable or its components.
- Never use a charging cable that is damaged or has been tampered with.
- If the charging cable does not work correct, get a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership to look at it.
WARNING
An unsecured or improperly secured charging cable may be thrown out of the vehicle's interior in the event of sudden driving or braking manoeuvres. This may cause serious accidents and injuries.
- Store the charging cable in the supplied charging cable bag and use the carabiner to attach the bag to the fastening rings at the front of the luggage compartment
page 314.
Notes on charging connectors and the charging cable protection device
- Do not touch the charging connector's contacts.
- Protect from strong sunlight (outside temperatures no higher than 50°C or 122°F ).
- Do not drop them.
- Protect from immersion in fluids such as rain water.
• Fit the protective caps after each use.
Charging cable
WARNING
The charging cable for electrical sockets must always be connected directly to an electrical socket. Failure to do so could result in fire damage and damage to the charging cable or home electrical installation. - Never connect the charging cable to an extension lead, cable reel, power strip or adapter or timer.
NOTICE
The charging cable, as portable electrical equipment, may have to be checked periodically. This requires a test adapter.
NOTICE
Seek information regarding the appropriate charging cable and the maximum permitted charging current before travelling abroad. If possible, use the charging cable supplied in the country in question.
For the sake of the environment
Charging cables must be disposed of in an environmentally friendly way and should not be thrown in the household waste.
Note
The maximum charging capacity of the safety circuit that is used must be observed. If the charging cable is planned into an electrical socket on the same circuit as other consumers, the circuit's fuses may trip.
Cleaning the charging cable
Clean the surface of the charging cable with a dry or slightly damp cloth >>> △, >>> ①
DANGER
The high voltage system voltage is dangerous and can cause burns, other injuries and fatal electric shocks.
- Only clean the charging cable when it is unplugged.
NOTICE
The charging cable can be damaged if not cleaned properly.
- Only water should be used for this purpose, and never additional cleaning products.
- Water should be prevented from getting into the contacts.
Charging cable for alternating current (AC) charging stations
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 68 Charging cable for alternating current (AC) charging stations.
The maximum charging current is 16 or 32 amps, depending on the vehicle's features and the charging cable that is supplied >>> △.
WARNING
Charging the high-voltage battery with an in-appropriate charging cable could cause short circuits, serious injuries and fatal electrical shocks.
WARNING
The charging cable should not be used as an extension lead. The charging process could be affected.
NOTICE
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and indications when using the charging station.
High-voltage battery
Note
Charging with a charging cable for 16 A is not possible at some charging stations that support 32 A. This depends on the charging station's equipment. * Before charging the vehicle, find out about the available charging technology.
Charging cable for power sockets
Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Fig. 69 Charging cable for electrical sockets
Fig. 70 On the charging cable for power sockets. Control lamps on the protection device.
>>> Fig. 70:
① Indicator lamp of the connector and the power supply.
② Control lamp of the protection device
③ Control lamp of the vehicle
④ Failure warning lamp
Charging cable information
Before using the charging cable, also follow the instructions displayed on it and on the rear of the protective device.
Protection device
The electronic protection device >> Fig. 70 ensures that the charging connector does not receive current until it is plugged into the vehicle's charging connector.
Self-check
When the charging cable is plugged into the electrical socket, the protective device automatically performs a self-test. During this check, all warning and control lamps turn on briefly and go out one after the other. Upon completion, the operational status at that time is displayed.
Operating displays
One or more control lamps >>> Fig. 70①. ② o③ light up green.
Display >> Fig. 70 Meaning
① ignition The charging cable is
plugged into the mains
① ② cn Use the voltage bat
① flashes slowly very charging
page 96
①② and ③ on The charging process is complete. The high voltage battery has charged.
Set the charging current
The charging cable limits the charging current according to the available power supply.
Charging cable
If the local mains supply does not allow charging at the maximum charging current, the charging current can be reduced, depending on the charging setting features in the infotainment system >>> page 92.
Temperature control
The charging cable temperature control switches on when the charging cable overheats, such as when it has been stored in a lug gage compartment exposed to high temperatures or strong sunlight.
Display >>> Fig.70 Meaning
①. ④ flashing the housing connector
has overheated.
② ④ flashing The protection device
has overheated.
If the charging process continues with a lower current, both the operating indicator and the warning lamp >> Fig. 70 ④ flash red.
- Unplug the charging cable from the mains and wait for it to cool down.
- If it disconnects again, or the charging current reduces and the cause does not seem to be exposure to an external heat source, make sure that the green control lamp is flashing >>> Fig. 70. Visit a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT network dealer to check the charging cable. Get an establishment that specialises in electrical installations to check the infrastructure connection.
Fault display
If the red warning light ④ flashes or turns on without one of the control lamps >> Fig. 70 ①, ② o ③ also turning on continuously on the status indicator, there is a fault.
Display >>> Fig. 70 Meaning
① flashing ④ on Failure in the power
or flashing
② flashing. ④ on failure in the protection
or flashing
③ flashing. ④ on Failure in the vehicle.
or flashing
The charging process pauses or is cancelled.
- Check the instructions located on the back
of the protective devices.
- Seek professional assistance if the fault per-
sists.
Note
If there is any other mains connection during charging, or if the vehicle is right next to the high voltage cables, charging from an electrical socket is not possible in some cases. Additional mains connections:
• Connecting a 12 volt battery charger.
- Contact with a work tool connected to the
mains, such as a vehicle lift.
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Set of vehicle keys
Vehicle key
Fig.71 Vehicle key
Fig. 72 Centre console with automatic transmissions vehicle key housing.
① Unlocks the vehicle.
② Locks the vehicle.
③ Unlocks only the rear lid.
Press the button until all the turn signals on the vehicle flash briefly.
You have 2 minutes to open the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it will lock again. In addition, the lamp on the key flashes.
A Control lamp.
⑤ Alarm button. Only press in the event of an emergency! When the alarm button is pressed, the vehicle's horn sounds and the turn signals light up for a short time. Press again to disconnect.
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked from a distance using the vehicle key >> page 105.
The vehicle key includes an emitter and battery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The range of the vehicle key with remote control and new battery is several metres around the vehicle.
If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle using the remote control key, this should be re-synchronised >>> page 100 or the battery changed >>> page 100.
Different keys belonging to the vehicle may be used.
Control lamp on the vehicle key
When a button is pressed briefly on the vehicle key, the control lamp >> Fig. 71 flashes once briefly, but if pressed for a long period of time, it will flash several times, for example, when using the comfort opening.
If the vehicle key control lamp does not light up when the button is pressed, replace the key's battery >> page 100.
Key housing
Depending on the version, there is a housing for the key close to the start button >>> Fig. 72. Warning! Do not confuse with the location for the emergency start >>> page 173.
Spare key
To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, the vehicle chassis number is required.
Each new key contains a microchip which must be coded with the data from the vehicle's electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if it does not contain a microchip or the microchip has not been encoded. This is also true for keys which are specially cut for the vehicle.
The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be obtained from a specialised CUPRA dealer or SEAT Official Service, a specialised workshop or an approved key service qualified to create this kind of key.
Set of vehicle keys
New keys or spare keys must be synchronised before use >> page 100.
△WARNING
* Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their own.
* An uncontrolled use of the key by third parties could activate a piece of electrical equipment (e.g. power windows), with the resulting accident hazard. The vehicle doors can be locked with the remote control key, making it difficult to get help in an emergency.
- Never leave the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
NOTICE
Do not leave the key near the Wireless Charger area as this may cause interference.
① NOTICE
All of the vehicle keys contain electronic components. Protect them from damage, impacts and humidity.
Note
- Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also possible even when you are outside the radius of action.
• Key operation can be greatly influenced by overlapping radio signals close to the vehicle working in the same range of frequencies, for example, radio transmitters or mobile telephones.
- Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and discharged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control.
- If the buttons of the vehicle key are pressed or one of the central locking buttons >>> page 106 is pressed repeatedly in short succession, the central locking briefly disconnects as protection against overloading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock it if necessary.
- Spare remote control keys are available at your Technical Service, where they must be matched to the locking system.
Pulling out the key blade
Fig. 73 Vehicle key: remove the key blade.
The central locking remote control has the key blade inside it for use in case of emergency locking/unlocking of the driver's door >> page 110.
- Press the >>> Fig. 73 ① button to release the ring from the key lob and remove the key blade ② Pressing lightly on the ring leaves it fixed as a key lob.
- Press the >>> Fig. 73① button to unlock. Press and hold button ① and at the same time pull on the ring in the direction of the arrow >>> Fig. 73② to completely remove the key blade.
Opening and closing
Changing the battery
Fig. 74 Vehicle key: open the battery compartment cover
Fig. 75 Vehicle key: removing the battery
CUPRA recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery.
The battery is located at the back of the vehicle key, under a cover.
Changing the battery
- Remove the key blade from the vehicle key >>> page 100.
- Insert the key blade into the slot >> Fig. 74, press it in the direction of the arrow ① and detach the cover by levering it ②.
- Remove the battery from the compartment with a suitable thin object >> Fig. 75.
- Insert the new battery and press it into the battery compartment >>> ©
- Place the cover and press it into the vehicle key housing until it clicks into place.
DANGER
Swallowing a battery with a diameter of 20 mm or any other button battery can cause serious injuries or even death within a very short time.
- Keep the vehicle key and key fobs with batteries out of reach of children.
• If you suspect that someone may have swallowed a battery, seek medical attention immediately.
NOTICE
• If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged.
• Use of unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications.
- When fitting the battery, check that the polarity is correct.
For the sake of the environment
Please dispose of your used batteries correctly and with respect for the environment
Synchronize the vehicle key
If the @ button is pressed frequently outside of the vehicle range, it is possible that the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked using the key. In this case, the key must be resynchronised as described below:
- Stand next to the vehicle.
- Briefly press the @ button on the vehicle key twice.
OR
- Remove the emergency key blade
page 99.
- Press the button on the key.
- Unlock the vehicle with the key blade.
Keyless Access system
- Open the driver's door, if the vehicle is fitted with an anti-theft alarm, it will trigger immediately >>> page 108.
- Switch the ignition on. Please note: to turn on the ignition, place the vehicle key at the bottom of the central armrest box, as close as possible to the Kessy logo 4 .
This completes the synchronization.
Keyless Access system
Locking and unlocking with the Keyless Access system
Fig. 76 Keyless Access: proximity zones,
Fig. 77 Door handle: sensor surfaces.
>>> Fig.77
Ⓐ Unlocking sensor surface on the inside of the door handle.
⑥ Locking sensing surface on the outside of the door handle.
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may have the Keyless Access system. This is a keyless locking and starting system that can unlock and lock the vehicle without actively using its key. For this, it is only necessary that there is a valid vehicle key in the detection area corresponding to the attempted access to the vehicle.
Configuring the Keyless Access system
The behaviour of the Keyless Access system can be adjusted in the Vehicle settings menu of the Infotainment system >> page 38.
If the Keyless Access function is disabled, its operation is limited.
Unlocks the vehicle.
- Touch the sensor surface on the inside of the handle Ⓐ. All turn signals flash twice.
If selective opening is fitted, touching the sensor's surface twice unlocks the entire vehicle.
if the vehicle is not unlocked for an extended period, the function is deactivated. The function will reactivate the next time that the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control.
Locks the vehicle.
- Park the vehicle.
- Touch the sensor surface⑧>>> Fig. 77 on the outside of the door handle. All turn signals flash once.
To check that the vehicle is properly locked, the unlocking function is deactivated for a few seconds.
Vehicle locking when walking away
The vehicle may lock automatically when you walk away from it. The following conditions must be met simultaneously:
• The function is active in the infotainment system.
- All vehicle keys are outside the locking area. All turn signals flash once when automatic locking has been performed successfully.
Automatic locking will not occur if there is another vehicle key in the vehicle.
Opening and closing
One-time deactivation of automatic locking:
- Press and hold the button for more than 2 seconds with the door open.
Automatic locking will not be available until the next time the vehicle is intentionally locked.
The vehicle is only locked if all doors and the rear lid are closed. If this option has been activated in the vehicle settings, an audible warning may sound to indicate that a door is open.
In vehicles fitted with the "Safe" security system, when the vehicle is locked while waking away from it, it locks without the "Safe" function. This is indicated to the user by an audible signal. The vehicle's "Safe" system is only activated after intentionally locking using the door handle or contact key.
If the key is in the detection zone around the vehicle for a prolonged period of time, the options for locking when you walk away from the vehicle and unlocking when you approach it may work in a limited manner.
Certain devices can prevent the vehicle from locking. The vehicle then remains unlocked without an audible warning being issued. Always make sure that the vehicle is locked.
Note
If the vehicle is parked for a long time without use, it can only be unlocked via the sensor surface inside the driver's door handle or with the vehicle key.
Unlocking the vehicle on approach
The vehicle can be unlocked by approaching it. For this to work, the function must be activated in the infotainment system and the vehicle key must be in the vehicle's approach area.
- The vehicle is unlocked when the vehicle key is detected nearby >> Fig. 76. All turn signals flash twice.
If the vehicle is not unlocked for an extended period of time, the "Unlock vehicle when approaching it" function is deactivated. This function reactivates when the vehicle is locked again.
When activating the unlocking function for certain doors in the central locking settings in the infotainment system, it is possible that the "Unlock vehicle when approaching" function will only work to a limited extent.
Unlocking the rear lid
When the vehicle is locked and the "Keyless Access" function is active, the rear lid automatically unlocks when it is opened if there is a vehicle key in its proximity zone. The rear lid locks again after closing.
If the central locking of all doors and the unlock when approaching function in "Keyless Access" are active, the vehicle remains unlocked after the rear lid is closed. The vehicle does not lock automatically
Temporarily deactivating the Keyless Access system
The "Keyless Access" system's unlocking function can be temporarily deactivated:
- Move the gear lever to position P since otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked.
- Lock the vehicle using the 📁 button on the vehicle key.
- Within 5 seconds, touch the sensor on the outside of the door handle once >> Fig. 77 B. Do not grip the handle while doing so. This temporarily deactivates the Keyless Access system.
- Check that it is deactivated by pulling on the door handle after at least 10 seconds. It should not be possible to open the door.
The next time, the vehicle can only be unlocked electronically with the vehicle key. After the next unlocking, the Keyless Access system will be active again.
Permanently disabling the Keyless Access system
The Keyless Access system can also be permanently deactivated in the infotainment system.
Keyless Access system
Note
When Keyless Access is deactivated in the infotainment menu, sensor-controlled rear lid opening and closing (Easy Open) is also deactivated, even if the function appears "active" in the vehicle menu.
Comfort functions
To close all the power windows and the sunroof using the comfort function, keep a finger for a few seconds on the locking sensor surface >> Fig. 77 B of the door handle until the windows and roof have closed.
How the doors open when touching the sensor surface on the door handle will depend on the settings that have been activated in the
- Vehicle - Exterior - Opening/Closing.
Note
- Depending on the function set on the infotainment system for the mirrors, the exterior mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting will come on when unlocking the vehicle using the sensor surface on the driver and passenger door handles.
- If the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox, the vehicle can only be locked by pressing the parking lock button P.
- To improve the safety of your vehicle, the system's remote control is equipped with a positive sensor. If this remote control does not detect movement for a certain period of time, the system will understand that you do not intend to open the vehicle (e.g. on the table at night) and will therefore be deactivated.
Troubleshooting
The Keyless Access system does not work. The operation of the sensor surfaces may be limited if they are soiled.
- Clean the sensor surfaces.
All turn signals flash four times
The key that was last used is still inside the vehicle.
- Remove the key and lock the vehicle.
Automatic deactivation of the sensor surfaces
The sensor surfaces are deactivated in the following cases.
- If the vehicle is not unlocked or locked for a long period of time.
- If any of the sensor surfaces are activated unusually often.
To reactivate the sensor surfaces
- Unlock the vehicle using the button on the vehicle key.
NOTICE
The sensor surfaces on the door handles may activate if hit by a jet of water or high pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity area. If at least one of the windows is open and the sensor surfaces on one of the handles permanently activates, all of the windows will close.
Note
If the message Keyless system out of order is displayed on the instrument cluster display, abnormalities may occur in the operation of the Keyless Access system. Contact a specialised workshop.
i Note
If there is no vehicle key inside the vehicle or the system fails to detect one, a warning will display on the instrument cluster display. This could happen if another radio frequency signal (e.g. mobile phone or wireless charger)... interferes with the key signal or if the key is covered by another object. e.g. a metal case
Opening and closing
Central locking
Introduction
Central locking functions correctly when all the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the key.
WARNING
The incorrect use of the central locking system may cause serious injuries.
- The central locking system will lock all doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can prevent any non-authorised individual from opening the doors and accessing the vehicle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or accident, locked doors will complicate access to the vehicle interior to help the passengers.
- Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. The central locking button can be used to lock all the doors from within. Therefore, passengers will be locked inside the vehicle. individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures.
• Depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low, resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.
- Never leave individuals locked in a closed and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to exit the vehicle by themselves or get help.
Description
Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid and the tank flap to be unlocked centrally: Hybrid vehicles: the fuel tank flap does not unlock with the central locking >> page 331.
- From outside, using the vehicle key
page 105. - From outside with the Keyless Access system page 101. - From inside, by pushing the central locking button >>> page 106.
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the unintentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the doors (including the luggage compartment) are opened within 45 seconds, it re-locks automatically.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
The vehicle locks automatically at over a speed of approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). The fuel tank flap is unlocked so that you can refuel without getting out of the vehicle.
Hybrid vehicles: the fuel tank flap remains locked >> page 331.
When the vehicle is locked, the control lamp of the central locking button lights up yellow.
Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock)
If one of the following conditions is met, all doors and the rear lid are unlocked automatically:
• The electronic parking brake is engaged and the ignition is switched off.
- EITHER: the inside door handle has been pulled. This applies when driving at under 15 km/h (9 mph).
- OR: in the event of an accident and an airbag has been triggered >>> page 107.
Automatic unlocking allows third parties to access the interior of the vehicle to provide assistance if necessary.
Turn signals
The turn signals will flash twice when the vehicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle is locked.
Central locking
If they do not flash, this indicates that one of the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not closed correctly.
Accidental lock-out
If you have left the key in the vehicle, it cannot be locked in the following cases:
- If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the central locking switch >> page 106.
Lock the vehicle with the remote control key, when all the doors and the rear lid have been closed. This prevents the accidental locking of the vehicle.
Central locking settings
Central locking settings can be changed in the Infotainment system.
Selective unlocking of the doors
- Press the function button □ > Vehicle > Exterior > Opening and closing > Central locking.
You can decide whether unlocking unlocks all doors, one door or one side of the vehicle.
One locking action operates all vehicle doors regardless of the selected unlocking mode.
With the One door setting, the driver's door is unlocked when:
- The button @ on the remote control key is pressed once.
- OR: it is unlocked once using the key blade
- OR: It is unlocked once via Keyless Access on the driver's door handle. If the passenger door is unlocked, the entire vehicle is unlocked.
- OR: It is unlocked by approaching the driver's door. Automatic unlocking does not occur when approaching the passenger door.
With the One side setting, the driver's side of the vehicle is unlocked when:
- The button @ on the remote control key is pressed once.
- OR: It is unlocked once using the key blade.
- OR: It is unlocked once via Keyless Access on the driver's door handle. If unlocked at the passenger door, only the passenger side is unlocked.
- OR: It is unlocked on the driver's side by approaching the driver's door. It is unlocked on the passenger side by approaching the passenger door.
Exception: When One door or One side is selected, operating the unlocking point twice in less than 2 seconds unlocks the whole vehicle. With the all doors setting, an unlocking action will unlock all the doors and the rear lid.
Note
* Never leave any valuable items in the vehicle unattended. Not even a locked vehicle is a safe.
- If the LED on the driver's door sill lights up for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked, the central locking system or anti-thrust alarm is not working properly. You should have the fault repaired at a specialised CUPRA dealer, SEAT Official Service or specialised workshop.
- Vehicle interior monitoring by the anti-theft alarm system will only function as intended if the windows and sunroof are closed.
Unlock and lock with the key
Fig. 78 Remote control key buttons
Opening and closing
- Lock press the button >> Fig. 78.
• To lock the vehicle without the "Safe" security system, press the locking button twice within 2 seconds. - Unlock: press the Button.
- Unlock the rear lid: press the button once.
The vehicle will be locked again automatically if you do not open one of the doors or the rear lid within 45 seconds after unlocking the car. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you press the @ button for at least one second.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings >>> page 106. Safe security system.
i Note
- For safety reasons it is advisable to only activate the remote control key when you can see the vehicle.
- Other functions of the remote control key >>> page 116, Opening and closing the windows.
Unlocking and locking from the inside
Fig. 79 On the centre console: central locking button
- Lock: press the button >>> Fig. 79. - Unlock: Press the button >>> Fig. 79 ag ein.
Please note the following when using the central locking button to lock your vehicle:
- It is not possible to open the doors or the rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).
■ The central locking button lamp lights up
when all the doors are closed and locked. • You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. - The fuel tank flap remains unlocked.
Hybrid vehicles: the fuel cap remains locked
page 331.
- In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
WARNING
- The central locking button also works with the ignition switched off, except when the "Safe" security system is activated.
- The central locking button does not operate if the vehicle is locked from the outside and the security system is switched on.
- Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency. Do not leave anyone, especially children, in the vehicle.
Note
Your vehicle will lock automatically when it reaches a speed of approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) (Auto Lock) >> page 104. You can unlock the vehicle again using the key of the central locking button.
"Safe" security system
Depending on its equipment, the vehicle may be fitted with the "Safe" security system.
Central locking
When the vehicle is locked, the "Safe" security system puts the door handles out of operation and hinders possible attempts by people to access the vehicle. The doors cannot be opened from inside >>> △.
The instrument cluster may display an indication that the "Safe" security system is switched on.
Disabling the "Safe" security system
The "Safe" security system may be disabled in any of the following ways:
- Press the vehicle key button again within 2 seconds.
- Touch the sensor surface on the outside of the door handle again within 2 seconds >>> page 101.
- Switch the ignition on. - OR: deactivate interior monitoring and the anti-tow system >>> page 109.
Depending on the equipment, before locking the vehicle temporarily deactivate interior monitoring and the anti-tow system in the Vehicle settings menu of the infotainment system >> page 109.
When the "Safe" security system is deactivated, the following needs to be taken into account:
• The vehicle can be unlocked and opened from the inside using a door handle.
• The anti-theft alarm is active >>> page 108.
- The interior monitoring system and the anti-tow system are disabled >>> page 109.
"Safe" status
The flashing frequency of the diode in the door sill immediately confirms the process. Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence for a brief period, then it stops for approximately 30 seconds and, lastly continues flashing slowly.
WARNING
Using the "Safe" security system negligently or without paying due attention can cause
serious injuries in the event of an emergency.
- Never leave anyone inside the vehicle when you lock it with the key. When the "Safe" security system is active the doors cannot be opened from the inside!
Troubleshooting
The control lamp remains on
The red LED on the driver's door flashes at short intervals and then stays on. There is a fault in the locking system.
- Contact a specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends visiting a CUPRA dealership for this purpose.
The turn signals do not flash
If the turn signals do not flash as a confirmation when the vehicle is locked:
- At least one door or the rear lid are not closed or
• The engine cannot is not closed.
The vehicle locks automatically
If one of the following conditions is met, the vehicle re-locks automatically after approx. 45 seconds.
- The vehicle has been unlocked, but none of the doors or the rear lid have been opened.
What happens when locking the vehicle with a second key
They key inside the vehicle is blocked and cannot be used to start the engine as soon as the vehicle is locked from the outside with a second key. To activate the key inside the vehicle to allow it to switch on the engine, press its button.
Locking the vehicle after an airbag is triggered
When an airbag is triggered as a result of an accident, the vehicle is fully unlocked. Depending on the extent of the damage, the vehicle may be relocked after the accident as described below:
Opening and closing
- Switch the ignition off.
- Open the driver's door and close it again.
- Lock the vehicle.
Note
If the 12-volt vehicle battery has little or no charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost or entirely out of charge, you will probably not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Access system. The vehicle can be unlocked and locked manually >>> page 110.
Note
If there is no vehicle key in the vehicle or the system does not detect it, a warning will be displayed on the instrument cluster. This could happen if any other radio frequency signal interferes with the key signal or if the key is covered by another object, e.g. a metal case.
Anti-theft alarm
Description
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be fitted with an anti-theft alarm.
The theft alarm monitors the doors, bonnet and rear lid.
The anti-thaft alarm system activates automatically when the vehicle is locked.
If the vehicle is not opened electronically with a valid key, the alarm triggers and emits audio and light signals for a maximum of approx. 5 minutes.
When is the anti-theft alarm triggered?
- If a mechanically unlocked door is opened with the vehicle key, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition before the alarm is triggered (depending on markets, the 15 seconds waiting time disappears and the alarm is triggered immediately when the door is opened).
- If the bonnet is opened.
- If the rear lid is opened.
- If an invalid vehicle key is used.
- If there are movements inside the vehicle (in vehicles with interior monitoring >> page 109).
- If the vehicle is lifted or towed for vehicles with an anti-tow system >> page 109.
- If the vehicle is transported on a ferry or by rail tin vehicles with an anti-low system or interior monitoring >> page 109).
- If the 12-volt battery is disconnected.
- If the window is broken.
- When a trailer connected to the theft alarm system is unhitched.
Switching off the alarm
- Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key un- locking button.
• Grip the door handle. - Switch the ignition on. Please note: to turn on the ignition, place the vehicle key in the area provided for it to perform an emergency start >> page 173.
i Note
• After 28 days, the indicator light will be switched off to prevent the battery from exhausting if the vehicle has been left parked for a long period of time. The alarm system remains activated.
- If, after the audible warning goes off, another monitored area is accessed (e.g. the rear lid is opened after a door has been opened), the alarm is triggered again.
- The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked from within using the central locking button.
- If the driver's door is unlocked mechanically with the key, only the driver's door is unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. Only when the ignition has been turned on will the other doors be available - but not unlocked - and the central locking button will be activated.
- Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working for any reason.
Doors
Interior monitoring and anti-tow system
If movement is detected in the vehicle interior while the vehicle is locked, the interior monitoring triggers the alarm.
If it detects that the vehicle is being lifted, the anti-tow system triggers the alarm.
Switching on the interior monitoring and the anti-tow systems
- Lock the vehicle. When the anti-theft alarm is activated, the interior monitoring and the anti-tow system are as well.
Depending on the equipment, the use of a partition net can affect the operation of the interior monitoring system.
Temporarily switching off the interior monitoring and anti-tow systems
- Press the button on the remote control twice. The interior monitoring and the anti-tow systems will be deactivated. The alarm system remains activated.
Disconnect through the infotainment system
- Press the function button() > Vehicle > Exterior > Opening/Closing > Central locking > Interior monitoring
The interior monitoring and anti-tow system remain deactivated until the next time the vehicle is locked.
Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system can also be switched off in the departure menu. To do this, the ignition must be switched off >>> page 169.
To avoid false alarms, deactivate interior monitoring and the anti-tow system in the following situations:
- When people or animals remain inside the vehicle.
- When the vehicle is to be loaded onto another means of transport, transported or towed.
- When the vehicle is to be left in a car wash or is to be parked in a double-decker garage.
Risk of false interior monitoring alarms
The interior monitoring system will only operate correctly if the vehicle is completely locked. Please bear in mind all legal provisions. The following situations may cause a false alarm:
- If one or more windows are partially or completely open.
- If the sliding/tilting roof is partially or fully open.
- if light objects are left inside the vehicle, e.g. loose paper or items hanging from the interior mirror.
- If the vibrate function of a mobile left inside the vehicle is activated.
i Note
- It is not possible to permanently deactivate the interior monitoring and anti-tow systems.
* If any doors or the rear lid are open when the anti-theft alarm is activated, only the alarm will be activated. The interior monitoring and anti-tow systems will only activate once all of the doors and the rear lid are closed.
- When the interior monitoring and anti-tow systems are switched off, the "Safe" security system is also switched off >>> page 106.
Doors
Introduction
The doors and rear lid can be locked manually and partially opened, for example if the key or the central locking is damaged.
Opening and closing
WARNING
Opening and closing doors carelessly can cause serious injury.
- If the vehicle is locked from outside, the doors and windows cannot be opened from the inside.
- Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get themselves to safety.
- Depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low, resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.
WARNING
Getting in the way of the doors and the rear lid is dangerous and can lead to serious injury.
- Open and close the doors and the rear lid only when there is nobody in the way.
NOTICE
In certain weather conditions, ice or snow may accumulate on the lower front part of the doors between the door frame and the door: do not force the doors open until you are sure that there is no ice or snow.
NOTICE
When opening and closing in an emergency, carefully disassemble components and then reassemble them carefully to avoid damage to the vehicle.
Emergency unlocking or locking of the driver's door
Fig. 80 Driver's door handle: lock cylinder.
If the central locking system should fail to operate, the driver's door can still be locked and unlocked by tuning the key in the lock.
As a general rule, when the driver's door is locked manually all other doors are locked. When it is unlocked manually, only the driver's door opens. Please observe the instructions relating to the anti-theft alarm system >>> page 108.
- Remove the key blade from the vehicle key >>> page 99.
- Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle.
The key blade is inserted by pointing the grip towards the rear door (the entire key blade enters the cylinder in this position).
Special characteristics
- The anti-theft alarm will remain active when vehicles are unlocked >> page 108.
• After the driver's door is opened, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition (depending on the market). Once this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. - Switch the ignition on. The electronic immobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.
i Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually using the key blade >> page 104.
Doors
Emergency lock of doors without lock cylinders
Fig. 81 Locking the door manually:
If the central locking system fails or the vehicle's battery goes flat, doors with no lock cylinder will have to be locked separately.
The emergency lock is located on the front of the front passenger's door and the rear doors. It can only be seen if the door is open.
- If necessary, remove the rubber seal from the front of the door >> Fig. 81
- Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to the right as far as it will go (if the door is on the right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left side).
- Replace the cap.
Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside. Pull the interior door handle once to unlock and open the door.
Child lock
Fig. 82 Left door childlock
The child lock prevents the rear doors being opened from the inside. Its function is to prevent children from inadvertently opening a single door while the vehicle is in motion.
This function is separate from the vehicle's electronic unlocking/locking systems. It only works on the rear doors. It can only be activated and deactivated manually, as described below.
Activating the child lock
- Unlock the vehicle and open the door on which the child safety lock is to be activated.
- With the door open, turn the slot with
the vehicle key clockwise for the left doorFig. 82 and anticlockwise for the right
When the child lock is activated, the doors can only be opened from the outside.
Deactivating the child lock
- Unlock the vehicle and open the door from which you want to remove the child lock.
- With the door open, turn the slot with the
vehicle key anticlockwise for the left doorsFig. 82 and clockwise for the right doors.
WARNING
The doors cannot be opened from the inside when the child lock is activated. This means that people may be locked inside the vehicle. In an emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle independently or save themselves.
- Never leave children or persons in need of assistance unattended in the vehicle when the doors are locked.
Opening and closing
WARNING
If children, persons requiring assistance or animals are left unattended inside the vehicle, they could be exposed to very high or very low temperatures. There is a risk of serious or fatal injuries.
- Never leave children, persons in need of assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle.
Rear lid
Introduction
The rear lid unlocks and locks together with the doors.
On vehicles with the Keyless Access start/locking system, the rear lid automatically unlocks when it is opened >> page 101.
WARNING
Careless and unsuitable locking, opening and closing of the rear lid can cause accidents and serious injury.
- Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
- Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driving.
- Never open or close the rear lid carelessly or in an uncontrolled manner, as this could cause serious injuries to you or third parties. Make sure that no person or object is in the way of the rear lid as it closes or opens.
- Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
* Never open the rear lid if there is cargo, e.g. bicycles, attached to it. The rear lid may close by itself due to the additional weight. If necessary, remove the cargo first or hold the rear lid.
* Never leave the vehicle unattended or allow children to play inside or next to it, especially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment, close the rear lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle can reach extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries, illness or even death.
NOTICE
Before opening or closing the rear lid, male sure that there is enough space to open or close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a garage.
- Never use the rear wiper or rear spoiler to secure cargo or as a handhold. This could cause damage that could lead to the breakage of the rear wiper or spoiler.
Note
Before closing the rear lid, make sure that the key has not been left inside the luggage compartment.
Opening and closing the rear lid
Fig. 83 Rear lic opening from the outside
To lock or unlock the rear lid, press theoror buttons on the vehicle key.
Manual opening and closing
- Open: press lightly on the handle and lift the rear lid >> Fig. 83.
- Close: grip the rear lid by one of the handles on the interior trim and move it downwards to close.
If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also locked.
Rear lid
A warning appears on the instrument cluster display if the rear lid is open or not properly closed.
The rear lid locks automatically while driving. When the outside temperature is around freezing, the opening mechanism cannot always raise the rear lid. Lift the rear lid by hand.
Note
If the rear lid is not opened within a few minutes after unlocking, the rear lid automatically relocks.
Rear lid with electric opening and closing
Opening the rear lid
Fig. 84 On the driver's door button to open and close the rear lid.
The rear lid is unlocked if an authorised key is recognised in the vicinity of the vehicle.
- Unlock the vehicle and briefly press the handle of the rear lid. On vehicles with Keyless Access you can directly press the handle of the rear lid.
- EITHER: pull the ≈ button on the drivers door upwards for approx. 1 second >> Fig. 84. The button also works when the ignition is switched off.
- OR: press and hold the button of the vehicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle is locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the doors remain locked).
- OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and sensor-controlled opening you can open the rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy Open >> page 115). The rear lid will open automatically.
Closing the rear lid
Fig. 85 R card lid button for closing the rear
- Briefly press the △ button on the rear lid >> Fig. 85, >> △ in Introduction on page 112.
- OR: pull up and hold the ⇌ button on the driver's door until the rear lid is fully closed
Fig. 84 (only with the ignition switched on).
- EITHER: press and hold the 📁 button of the vehicle key until the rear lid closes.
- OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and sensor-controlled opening, move a foot in the area of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy Open >> page 115). The vehicle key must be in the Keyless Access system detection zone at the rear outside the vehicle.
- OR: hold the rear lid by one of the handles fitted to the inner lining and close it by moving it downwards.
Opening and closing
The rear lid lowers automatically to the final position and also locks automatically >>> △ in Introduction on page 112.
Interrupting opening or closing
After beginning to open or close the rear lid, the action can be halted by pressing one of the @ buttons.
If you press one of the Ⓞ buttons again, the rear lid will move again in the original direction.
If the rear lid meets with resistance or an obstacle during the automatic opening or closing, opening or closing will be interrupted immediately. For the closing process, the rear lid opens again slightly.
- Check why it has not been possible to open or close the rear lid.
- Try to open or close the rear lid again.
- If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or closed by hand using reasonable force.
Particular features if towing a trailer
If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically connected to a trailer >>> page 319, the electric rear lid can only be opened or closed with the buttons on the rear lid itself.
Audible warnings
Throughout the process of opening or closing the rear lid, audible warnings can be heard. Exception: when the rear lid is opened manually using the handle or closed using of the button on the rear lid >> Fig. 85.
Modifying and saving the opening angle
If the space behind or above the vehicle is less than the travel area of the rear lid, you can change the opening angle of the rear lid.
To save a new opening angle, the rear lid must be open at least halfway.
- Interrupt the opening process in the desired position.
- Press the button >>> Fig. 85 on the rear lid for at least 3 seconds.
The opening angle is saved. The saving process is indicated by blinking of the hazard warning lights and an audible warning.
Resetting and saving the opening angle
For the rear lid to reopen completely, the opening angle must be reset and resaved.
- Release the rear lid and open it to the saved height.
- Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. To do this, some force will have to be used.
- Press the 📄 button >>> Fig. 85 on the rear lid for at least 3 seconds.
- This resets and saves the factory-set opening angle. The saving process is indicated by blinking of the hazard warning lights and an audible warning.
Automatic protection against overheating
If the system is operated repeatedly in a short space of time, it automatically switches off to prevent overheating.
Once the system is cool again, the function can be reused. Until then, the rear lid can only be opened and closed by hand using reasonable force.
If the vehicle battery is disconnected >>> page 368 or the corresponding fuse burns out >>> page 349 while the rear lid is open, the system will have to be reset. This requires closing the rear lid completely once.
WARNING
If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it is heavily loaded, the rear lid may not open or, after opening, it may lower by itself due to the extra weight and cause serious injury.
- Do not open the rear lid when there is a lot of snow on it or when carrying a load (e.g. on a rack).
- Before opening the rear lid, remove the snow or the load.
Rear lid
Rear lid with sensor-controlled opening and closing (Easy Open)
Fig. 86 II carried with sensor-controlled opening (Easy Open)
Fig. 87 Lower sensor detection area.
If there is a valid vehicle key in the vicinity of the rear lid, it is possible to unlock and open or close it by moving one foot in the area of the sensors located under the rear bumper.
- Switch the ignition off.
- Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the middle.
- With a brisk movement, bring your foot and lower leg as close as you can to the bumper. The lower part of the leg needs to be close to the upper sensor area and your foot to the lower sensor area) Fig. 86①
- Quickly remove your foot and lower leg from the sensor areas >>> Fig. 86 ②. The rear lid will open automatically.
- If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the procedure after a few seconds. The detection zone of the lower sensor may not have been reached >> Fig. 87.
The rear lid can be closed with another foot movement similar to the opening one (provided a valid vehicle key is in the vicinity of the rear lid).
When closed, the rear lid automatically locks if the vehicle has been locked beforehand and there is no valid key inside.
While the rear lid is in motion (either opening or closing), it can be stopped with another foot movement similar to the opening one (provided a valid vehicle key is in the vicinity of the rear lid).
The Easy Open feature is not available or only has limited availability in the following situations (examples):
- If the rear bumper or the sensor is very dirty.
- If the rear bumper or the sensor is wet with salty water, e.g. after driving on salted roads, or is covered with snow or ice.
- If the vehicle has been retrofitted with a tow bracket.
In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open feature may take a little longer to open the luggage compartment or may deactivate automatically, to avoid the luggage compartment opening by accident, e.g. when water falls out
The Easy Open function can be connected and disconnected permanently in the infotainment system using the button □ × Vehicle × Exterior × Easy Open.
Note
Deactivating the Keyless Access system also deactivates the sensor controlled opening and closing of the rear lid (Easy Open), although the function is shown as "active" in the vehicle menu.
CAUTION
If there is a valid key in the vicinity of the rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open function may be accidentally activated and the rear lid will open, for example, when sweeping under the rear bumper, when directing a water jet or high pressure steam at the area or when carrying out maintenance work or repairs in
Opening and closing
that area. If accidentally opened, the rear lid could injure somebody situated in its area of operation or cause material damage.
- Therefore, always make sure that there is no unsupervised valid key in the area near the rear lid.
- Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work on the vehicle, always disable the Easy Open feature via the infotainment system.
- Before washing the vehicle, always disable the Easy Open function via the infotainment system.
- Before attaching a bike rack or hitching a trailer >>> page 319, always disable the Easy Open function via the infotainment system.
Emergency unlocking of the rear lid
Fig. 8B | usage compartment manual release.
The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in the event of an emergency (e.g. if the 12 volt battery is flat).
There is a groove in the Luggage compartment allowing access to the emergency opening mechanism.
Unlocking the rear lid from inside the luggage compartment
• Using the key blade, break the pre-punched sheet and push it out towards the inside of the luggage compartment.
- Insert the key blade into the slot and move the key in the direction of the arrow until the lock unlocks >> Fig. 88.
Window controls
Opening and closing the windows
![graph TD A["Step 1"] --> B["Step 2"] B --> C["Step 3"] C --> D["Step 4"] D --> E["Step 5"]](/content/2026/07/1441719/images/71cef37f5c7ddffdaba26ec1aa08eff842f89cf5db297e6b5613a5d32785016a.jpg)
Fig. 89 Det al of the driver's door window
- Open the window: press button
- Close the window: pull button
Buttons on the driver's door
① Left-hand front door window
② Right-hand front door window
① Left-hand rear door window
④ Right-hand rear door window
⑤ Safety control for deactivating the window control buttons on the rear doors
Window controls
Both front and rear windows can be operated from the controls on the driver's door. The other doors have a separate control for each window.
Always close the windows completely when the vehicle is parked or out of sight >>> △.
You can use the power windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver's door nor the front passenger door have been opened and the ignition key has not been removed (depending on the equipment).
Safety switch
The safety control >> Fig. 89 ⑤ on the driver's door can be used to disable the power window buttons on the rear doors.
Safety control not pressed: the buttons on the rear doors are activated.
Safety control pressed: the buttons on the rear doors are deactivated.
The safety control symbol lights up in yellow if the buttons on the rear doors are switched off.
Convenience opening and closing
The windows can be opened and closed from the outside using the vehicle key:
In the infotainment system different settings can be adjusted using the function button ☐ > Vehicle > Exterior > Windows > Convenience opening.
Convenience opening:
- Press and hold the @ button on the remote control key until all the windows and the sun-roof have reached the desired position.
Convenience closing:
- Press and hold button ☐ on the remote control key until all the windows and the sunroof are closed >>> △.
- OR: using the Keyless Access system (only locking): Press and hold the locking sensor surface >> Fig. 91 (arrow) on the door handle for several seconds to close the windows and the sunroof. If you stop touching the sensing surface, the closing function is interrupted.
Convenience locking closes the windows first and then the panoramic sunroof.
One-touch opening and closing
Automatic raising and lowering fully opens and closes the windows. It is not necessary to press and hold the appropriate window button for this purpose.
For the automatic raising function: pull the button for the corresponding window upwards until it reaches the second position.
For the automatic lowering function: push the button for the corresponding window downwards until it reaches the second position.
Stop automatic movement: push or pull on the button of the corresponding window.
Resetting the automatic raising/ lowering function
If the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged when the windows are not completely closed, the power window automatic raising and lowering function deactivates and has to be reset:
- Switch the ignition on.
- Close all doors and windows.
- Pull the corresponding window button upwards and hold it in this position for a few seconds.
- Release the button, pull it up again and hold it in this position. This resets the automatic or other function.
The function can be reset for a single window or for several windows at the same time.
Opening and closing
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings >> △ in Introduction on page 110.
- Improper use of the power windows can cause injury.
- Never close windows carelessly or in an uncontrolled manner, as this could cause serious injuries to you or third parties. Therefore, make sure that no one is in the way of the moving windows.
- If the ignition is switched on, electrical equipment such as the power windows could activate, which can cause injury.
• The vehicle doors can be locked with the remote control key, making it difficult to get help in an emergency.
• Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
- The power windows are only deactivated when the ignition is switched off and one of the front doors is opened.
* If necessary, deactivate the rear power windows with the safety control. Make sure that they have actually been deactivated.
• For safety reasons, you should only unlock and lock the vehicle with the remote control key when you are approximately 2 metres away from the vehicle. When pressing the lock button, always monitor the movement of the windows to avoid accidents. Relacing the button immediately interrupts the closing process.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, the window will automatically open again page 118. In this case, check why the window could not be closed before trying again.
Window anti-trap function
The roll-back function reduces the risk of injury when the power windows close.
If a window encounters resistance or an obstacle when closing, it will reopen immediately >>> △.
- Check why the window does not close.
- Try closing the window again
- If the closing process is interrupted again, the anti-trap function stops working for a few seconds.
- If the window still cannot be closed, it will stop in the corresponding position. Pulling the button again within a few seconds closes the window without the anti-trap function >>> △.
Closing the windows without the anti-trap function
- Try to close the window again by pulling the button without releasing it, within a few seconds. The anti-trap function will be deactivated!
- If the closing process takes longer than a few seconds, the anti-trap function is activated again. The window will stop again if it encounters resistance or an obstacle, and will reopen automatically.
- If the window will still not close, visit a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings >>> △ in Open-
ing and closing the windows on page 118.
- The roll-back function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body getting pinched against the window frame. Risk of accident.
Note
The anti-trap function also works when the windows are closed with the comfort function using the vehicle key.
Sunroof
Sunroof
Introduction
The sunroof consists of two glass parts. The rear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It also has a sun bind.
The sunroof only works when the ignition is switched on. Once the ignition has been switched off, you can still open or close the sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.
WARNING
If the sunroof is used negligently or without paying due attention, it can cause serious injury.
- Open or close the sunroof and the sun blind only when no one is in their path of movement.
- Never leave any key inside the vehicle when exiting
- Never leave a child or any other person who may need help in the vehicle, especially if they have access to the vehicle key. If using they key unattended, they could lock the vehicle, start the engine, switch on the ignition and activate the sunroof.
- After switching off, it is still possible to open or close the sunroof during a short space of time provided that neither the driver nor passenger door is opened.
NOTICE
* To prevent damage, during winter temperatures remove any ice or snow that might be on the car roof before opening the sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.
Before leaving the vehicle or in case of rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the sunroof open or in a tilted position, water can enter the interior and can cause considerable damage to the electrical system. As a result, other damage can occur in the vehicle.
Note
■ Leaves and other loose objects that accumulate on the sunroof rails should be regularly cleaned away either by hand or with a vacuum.
■ If the sunroof does not work correctly, the anti-trap function will not work either. Contact a specialised workshop.
Operating the glass roof
Fig. 90 On the headner glass 'oo' bu.cn.
The functional area can be operated in two ways: by swiping and pressing.
- Swiping: Fully or partially opens or closes the roof.
- Pressing: Fully or partially raises, opens or closes the roof. Press again to stop the automatic movement.
Raising, opening and closing the sunroof Opening the sunroof
- Automatic movement: slide your finger back over the functional area 📁 >> Fig. 90 Ⓐ.
- Manual movement: slide your finger back over the functional area and hold it there.
Opening and closing
Closing the sunroof:
• Automatic movement: slide your finger forward over the functional area ⚠️.
- Manual movement: slide your finger forward over the functional area and hold it there. Raise the sunroof (it is only possible to raise the sunroof if it is closed).
- Automatic movement: press briefly in the centre of the functional area ⇔ Closing the sunroof when raised:
• Automatic movement: slide your finger forward over the functional area A.
- Or press briefly in the centre of the functional area 📋⑧.
Stop the automatic opening or closing movement:
- Press the functional area again④.
Convenience function to open or close the sunroof
Fig. 91 Door handle sensor surface.
The sunroof can be opened and closed with the convenience function, just like the windows.
Using the door lock
- Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the unlocking or locking position to open or close the roof in the tilted position. Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
- Keep the locking or unlocking button pressed to open or close the roof. If you release the button is the opening or closing will stop.
Using the Keyless Access system (only locking)
Press and hold the locking sensor surface
Fig. 91 (arrow) on the door handle to close the sunroof. If you stop touching the sensing surface, the locking function is interrupted.
Anti-trap function of the panoramic sunroof
The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of injury when closing the sunroof >> △. If the sunroof encounters resistance or an obstacle when closing, it reopens immediately.
- Check why the sunroof did not close.
- Try to close the sunroof again.
- If the sunroof cannot be closed due to an obstacle or some resistance, it stops at the corresponding position and then reopens. For automatic closing, a new closing attempt might take place.
- If the sunroof is still unable to close, close it without the anti-trap function.
Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap function
Before approx. 5 seconds after activation of the anti-trap function, slide your finger forward over the functional area >> Fig. 90 A and keep pressed until the sunroof is fully closed.
Sunroof
- The sunroof closes without the anti-trap function intervening!
- If the sunroof will still not close, visit a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap function can cause serious injuries.
• Always be careful when closing the sun-roof.
- No person should ever remain in the way of the sunroof, especially when closing without the anti-trap function.
• The anti-trap function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body from becoming trapped against the roof frame and injuries occurring.
Glass roof sun blind
Fig. 92 On the headliner operate the sun
blind.
Opening or closing the sun blind
Automatic movement:
- Swipe backwards or forward over the functional area (###) Fig. 92.
Manual movement - Swipe backwards or forward over the functional area and press and hold.
Steering wheel
Steering wheel Multifunction steering wheel
Functions
Fig. 93 Controls on the steering wheel.
Fig. 94 Controls on the steering wheel
The steering wheel includes multifunction modules from where it is possible to control the audio, telephone, navigation, voice control and assist functions without the driver needing to be distracted from the road.
Buttons available depending on the version
Turn Turn your up/cover
Press More source.
Turn: Search in the instrument cluster menu. In Navigation mode, turn to zoom out of the map on the digital instrument cluster.
Press: Select the highlighted option in the instrument cluster.
Radio Search for the previous next station
Media: Short press: previous/next track; ong press: fast forward/re-wind.
Activate phone menu (answer call, and call).
Switch between media and radio sources.
Change the instrument cluster menu (previous/next).
Enable/disable voice control
Change the instrument cluster views.>>> page 16
Activate or deactivate steering wheel heating.>>> page 156
Pause the ACC >> page 209 / Cruise control >> page 204 / Speed limiter >> page 205 / Travel Asset >> page 223.
Activate ACC / Travel/Assist / Speed limiter.
Reset programmed speed.
- Increase programmed speed. - Decrease programmed speed.
Multifunction steering wheel
Open the driver assistants menu in the instrument dusts
Modify the programmed ACC dis-
Satellite buttons
One profile selection
page 191
Starting and stopping the engine
page 169
Steering wheel position adjustment
Fig. 95: L over in the lower-left side of the steering column.
Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and only when the vehicle is stationary.
- Pull lever >> Fig. 95① down, move the steering wheel to the desired position and lift the lever back up until it locks.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjustment function and an incorrect adjustment of the steering wheel can result in severe or fatal injury.
* After adjusting the steering column, push lever >>> Fig. 95① firmly upwards so that the steering wheel does not accidentally change position while driving.
- Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion, stop safely and make the proper adjustment.
- The adjusted steering wheel should be facing your chest and not your face so as not to hinder the driver's front airbag protection in the event of an accident.
- When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce injuries when the driver's front airbag deploys.
- Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the driver's airbag displays, you may sustain injuries to your arms, hands and head
Seats and headrests
Seats and headrests
Front seats
Introduction
WARNING
Always read and observe the information and safety advice given in chapter >>> page 43. Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants.
WARNING
Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to accidents and severe injuries.
- Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary, as the seats could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion and you could lose control of the vehicle. Furthermore, an incorrect position is adopted when adjusting the seat.
- Adjust the height, position and inclination of the front seats only when their movement area is empty.
- Make sure there are no objects in that area. - Make sure that the movement and locking areas of the seats are clean.
WARNING
Incorrectly using upholstery and seat covers might cause an accidental activation of the electrical seat adjustment system and make it move unexpectedly while driving. This might cause loss of control of the vehicle and thus accidents or injuries. Moreover, the electrical components of the front seats might be damaged.
- Never attach or place seat upholstery or covers on the electric controls.
- Never use upholstery or seat covers that have not been explicitly authorised for the seats of the vehicle.
NOTICE
Objects with sharp edges can damage the seats.
- Do not rub the seats with sharp objects. Sharp objects, such as zips and rivets on clothing or bolts, can damage surfaces. Open Velcro fasteners can also cause damage.
Manual adjustment of the front seats
Fig. 96 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.
① Pull the lever to move the seat forwards or backwards. The seat must engage when the lever is released!
② Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat height; several times if necessary.
③ Without placing force on the seat back-rest, turn the wheel to adjust the backrest.
④ To adjust the lumber support, move the lever until the required position is achieved.
Rear seats
Electric adjustment of the front seats
Fig. 97 Driver's seat: electric seat adjustment.
④ Adjust the lumbar support: press the button according to the desired position.
⑧ Seat forwards/backwards: press the button forwards/backwards.
Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the button up/down. To adjust the angle of the seat cushion, press the front of the button up/down.
© Backrest further upright/further reclined: press the button forwards/backwards.
The position will be saved automatically in the CUPRA CONNECT Active user when the ignition is switched off.
WARNING
Using the electric front seats carelessly or without paying due attention can cause serious injury
* The front seats can also be electrically adjusted when the ignition is switched off. Never leave a child or any other person who may need help in the vehicle.
- In the event of an emergency, electrical adjustment can be stopped by pressing any control.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the electrical components of the seats, please refrain from kneeling on the seat or applying sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.
Note
- It may not be possible to electrically adjust the seat if the vehicle battery is very low. - If the engine is started while the seats are being electrically adjusted, the adjustment will stop.
Note
When changing user a warning will be shown on the infotainment system's screen during the time that the seat is moving to the saved position. This movement can be stopped by pressing the stop button on the screen.
Rear seats
Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest
Fig. 98 Rear seat: clip to hold the seatbelt in place.
Seats and headrests
Fig. 99 Rear seat folding down the
backrest
The rear seat backrest is split and each part can be lowered separately to enlarge the lug gage compartment.
Folding the backrest forwards
- Place the side seat bolts in the trim clip >>> Fig. 98.
• Fully lower the rear headrests >>> page 127. - Press the unlock button >> Fig. 99① forwards and at the same time fold the backrest down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the red marking of the button⑦ is visible.
Converting the table to a seat
- Raise the backrest and lock it in place. The red marking on button ② should no longer be visible when the backrest is properly secured.
WARNING
Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention.
* Never lower or lift the rear next backrest
while driving.
- Do not trap or damage the seat belt when raising the rear seat backrest.
- When lowering or lifting the rear seat back rest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and other body parts out of its path.
* For the rear seat belts to offer the necessary protection, all the parts of the rear backrest must be properly engaged. This is particularly important in the case of the centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a seat whose backrest is not properly engaged they will fly forward, along with the backrest, during an accident or a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre.
- A red mark on button ② warns that the rear backrest is not engaged. Always check that the red marking is not visible when the backrest is in the upright position.
- When the rear seat backrest is lowered or is not properly engaged nobody else may travel in the corresponding seats (not even a child).
NOTICE
If the belts are caught when the seatback is raised, fold the seatback back down to release the belt. Grab the belt with your hand and lift the backrest so that it is not trapped.
NOTICE
Serious damage can be caused to the vehicle and other objects if the rear seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention.
* Before lowering the rear seat backrest, always adjust the front seats so that neither the headrests nor the cushions of the rear backrest can hit them.
Headrest
Introduction
The headrest adjustment and removal options are described below. Always make sure that the seats are correctly adjusted >>> page 43.
Headrest
All seats are fitted with a headrest. The central rear headrest is only intended for the central seat of the rear bench. Therefore, do not install it on any other seat.
Correct adjustment of the headrest 1 Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, as close as possible to eye level. Keep the back of your head always as close to the headrest as possible.
Adjusting the headrest for short people 31 Lower the headrest completely, even if your head is below its upper edge. In the lowest position, there may be a small distance between the headrest and the backrest.
Adjusting the headrest for tall people 2 Raise the headrest to the highest position.
WARNING
If travelling with the headrests removed or improperly adjusted, the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres increases.
- Always travel with the headrest correctly installed and adjusted.
• To decrease the risk of neck injuries in the event of an accident, adjust the headrest correctly based on your height, always making sure that its upper edge is at the same height as the top of the head, as close as possible to eye level. Keep the back of your head always as close to the headrest as possible and centred.
- Never adjust the headrest while the vehicle is in motion.
• Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the headrests are in the non-use position.
NOTICE
When assembling and disassembling the headrests, do not allow them to come into contact with the vehicle's ceiling liner, the back rest of the front seat or other parts of the vehicles. Any such contact could damage the vehicle.
Adjusting the headrests
Fig. 100 Front seat: adjusting the beaches.
Fig. 101 Rear headrest adjusting the headrest.
On seats with adjustable headcross.
Seats and headrests
Adjusting the height of the headrests
- Grab the sides of the headrests with both hands and push upwards to the desired position. To lower it, repeat the same action, pressing the button on the side ①>>> Fig. 100, >>> Fig. 101.
• The headrest must lock correctly in one position.
Removing and fitting the headrests
Fig.102 Frontheadrest removal
Fig. 103 Rear headrest removal
Removing the front headrests
- Lower the headrest if necessary.
- To unlock it, look for the button underneath the headrest and press in the direction of the arrow!!! Fig. 102①.
- Remove the headrest in the direction of the arrow ②.
Fitting the front headrests
- Place the headrest in the correct position on the guides of the corresponding backrest and insert it.
- Press the headrest downwards until the bars lock.
- Adjust the headrest according to the instructions on the correct position of the seat.
Removing the rear headrests
To remove the headrest, the corresponding backrest must be partially folded forward.
- Unlock the backrest >>> page 125.
- Move the headrest upwards to its highest position.
- Press button >>> Fig. 103①, while simultaneously pressing on the safety hole② with a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the headrest.
- Move the backrest until it engages properly.
△ in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 126.
Fitting the rear headrests
To mount the external headrests, the corresponding backrest must be partially folded forward.
- Unlock the backrest >>> page 125.
- Insert the headrest bars into the guides until they are heard to engage. It should not be possible to remove the headrest from the back-rest.
- Move the backrest until it engages properly >>> △ in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 126.
Seat functions
WARNING
Remove the rear headrests only when it is necessary to fit a child seat. After removing a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.
Seat functions
Memory function
Fig. 104 On the outer side of the driver's seat memory buttons.
Memory buttons
The memory buttons can be used to save and activate settings for the driver seat and exterior mirrors.
The settings will also be saved in the user of the online services 1 .
Save the settings for the driver seat and exterior mirrors for forward gear
- Apply the electronic parking brake
- Set the gearbox to the neutral position.
- Switch the ignition on.
- Adjust the driver seat and exterior mirrors.
- Press SET for longer than 1 second
335 Fig.104
- Press the memory button in which to store the settings within approx. 10 seconds. An audible signal confirms that they have been saved.
Save the settings of the front passenger exterior mirrors for reversing.
■ Apply the electronic parking brake.
- Set the gearbox to the neutral position.
- Switch the ignition on.
- Press whichever memory button you want. - Select reverse gear.
- Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the kerb edge well.
- The set position for the mirrors is automatically saved and assigned to the key with which you unlocked the vehicle.
Activating the settings
- With the vehicle stopped and the ignition switched on, press and hold the corresponding memory button until the saved position is reached.
- OR: With the ignition switched off and the driver's door open, briefly press the corresponding button.
The front passenger side exterior mirror automatically changes from the position stored for reversing as soon as the vehicle moves forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h (10 mph) or when the gear selection lever is changed to a position other than R >> page 145.
Initialising the seat position memory
If, for example, the driver seat has been replaced, the position memory system must be restarted.
Restarting deletes all memories and assignments of seats with memory functions. The memory keys can then be programmed again.
- Open the driver's door and do not get into the vehicle.
- Change the seat settings from outside.
- Tilt the backrest fully forward.
- Release the control to adjust the inclination and press it again until an audible signal sounds.
1 Not available in all markets.
Seats and headrests
Easy Entry function
Depending on the equipment, the Easy Entry function makes it easier for the driver to enter and exit by moving the seat forwards or backwards respectively.
The function is activated via the driver setting in the sub-menu of seat settings in the seats menu of the infotainment system.
WARNING
Only set the memory function when the vehicle is stationary.
Note
If the driver's door is opened approx. 10 minutes after the vehicle was unlocked or later, the driver seat and the exterior mirrors do not move automatically.
Front centre armrest
Fig. 105 Front sentence arrest
To raise the armrest, pull it fully up in the direction of the arrow!!! Fig. 105 or step by step, depending on how far you want to raise it. To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest position. Then lower it down.
To move the armrest horizontally, move it forward >> Fig. 105 or backward as much as possible in the direction of the corresponding arrow.
WARNING
The front centre armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause an accident and severe injuries. - Keep the storage compartments of the centre armrest closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
* Never let anyone sit on the centre arm-rest while the vehicle is in motion, not even a child. This position is incorrect and may cause severe injuries.
Rear centre armrest
Fig. 106 F oding rear centre arrest (schematic view).
There might be a folding armrest in the rear centre seat.
• To lower the armrest, pull the cord in the direction of the arrow >>> Fig. 106.
- To raise the armrest, push it up in the opposite direction to the arrow and press it as far as it will go into the seat backrest.
When the centre amrest is down, do not allow anybody to travel in the centre seat of the rear bench.
Seat functions
WARNING
To decrease the risk of injuries while driving, the rear centre armrest must always be raised.
- When the centre armrest is down, nobody may travel in the centre rear seat, not even a child. An incorrect sitting position may cause severe injuries.
Lights
Lights
Vehicle lighting
Lighting and visibility buttons
Fig. 107 Dash panel: light panel.
By pressing the MODE button you can select between (the corresponding indicator lights up):
Switching on the dipped beam headlights.
AUTO Automatic control of dipped beam and daytime running light.
0≤ Switching on the side lights. The automatic headlight control AUTO activates at over a speed of approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). Additionally, the following light functions can be activated by pressing on the corresponding symbol.
When the function is activated, the corresponding symbol lights up. To deactivate it, you will need to press on the symbol again.
30 Turning the front fog lights on or off. In addition, a pop-up window with the selected position is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Turning the rear fog lights on or off. In addition, the yellow control lamp on the instrument cluster lights up/Off.
Switching the windscreen domisting function on and off >>> page 151.
Switching the rear window heating on and off >> page 151.
It is always the driver's responsibility to ensure that the vehicle is driven with the correct headlamp settings and the correct lights.
Side lights
When the side light is switched on, the side lights in both headlights, certain areas of the rear light clusters, the number plate light and the button lights on the instrument cluster turn on. The automatic dipped beam activates as of a speed of approx. 10 km/h (6 mph).
Automatic dipped beam headlight control AUTO
When the automatic dipped beam is switched on, the vehicle's lighting and the lighting of the instruments and controls turn on and off under the following conditions.
• The light sensor has detected darkness.
• The wiper has been on for some time.
When the lights are on, the control lamp lights up in green.
The automatic dipped beam is only an auxiliary function and cannot always identify all situations that may arise during driving with sufficient precision.
If the vehicle has the appropriate equipment, the vehicle settings menu of the infotainment system can be used to set the moment that the dipped beam automatically switches on >>> page 38.
Cornering light function
The cornering light is an additional function to the dipped beam to improve lighting of the side of the road when cornering at low speeds. When the dipped beam is on, a static cornering light comes on when driving at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph) or on very tight bends.
Vehicle lighting
- if the steering wheel is turned on the turn signal is switched on, the front fog light gradually turns on. Once the turn has been made, the cornering light progressively turns off. - When engaging reverse gear, both front fog lights turn on.
Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights can increase the vehicle's visibility when driving in daylight and they turn on automatically when the ignition is switched on if brightness is detected!
Motorway light
The motorway light is available on vehicles fitted with LED High lights.
- Activation: when going above 110 km/h (68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dipped beam raises slightly to increase the driver's visibility distance. - Deactivation: when the speed of the vehicle is reduced below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dipped beam immediately returns to its normal position.
Warning buzzers to warn that the lights have not been switched off
If the ignition is not connected and the driver's door is open, an audible warning signal is heard in the following cases: this will remind you to turn the light off.
- When the parking light is on >> page 134. - When the lamp > or 0k on.
If the exit lighting is switched on ("Coming Home" function), when you leave the vehicle there will be no audio warning to warn you the lights are still on.
WARNING
Accidents can occur if the road is not well lit and other road users cannot see the vehicle or see it with difficulty. * The automatic dipped beam control (AUTO) only switches on the dipped beam when there are no changes in brightness, and not, for example when it is foggy.
WARNING
The side light or daytime running light does not provide sufficient illumination to see the road properly or to be seen by drivers of other vehicles. Always switch on the dipped beam headlight at night, in miny weather or when visibility is poor. Daytime running lights must never be used when the road is poorly lit due to weather or lighting conditions.
WARNING
Other road users may be distracted and dazzled if the headlights are set too high and used inappropriately. This could cause an accident, with serious consequences. • Always make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted.
Note
- The relevant legislation in each country must be observed when using the vehicle's lights. - The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. When the ignition is switched off, the side light automatically turns on. - The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind you. You should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
Note
When the lights are in position Δθ0 and the fog lights are switched on, the dipped beam is also switched on regardless of the ambient brightness.
Lights
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 108 Turn signal and main beam lever (depending on the version).
Move the lever to the required position:
① Right turn light or right-hand parking light (ignition switched off).
② Left turn light or left-hand parking light (ignition switched off).
③ Turning on the main beam. The blue control lamp to lights up on the instrument cluster.
④ The headlight flasher turns on when the lever is pulled. The control lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.
Place the lever in its neural position to turn off the corresponding function.
Comfort turn signals
When the ignition is switched on, move the lever as far as possible upwards or downwards and release the lever. The turn signal will flash three times.
To switch off the comfort turn signal early, immediately move the lever in the opposite direction until you feel resistance and release it. The comfort turn signals can be activated and deactivated in the infotainment system, in the vehicle settings menu >> page 38.
Parking light p
The parking lights will only work with the ignition off. If said light is on, an audible warning will sound while the driver's door is open.
- Switch the ignition off.
■ Move the turn signal lever up or down.
When the parking light is switched on, the front side light and the tail light on the corresponding side of the vehicle turn on.
Parking light on both sides
- Switch the ignition off.
- Press the button to select as
- Lock the vehicle from the outside.
When this is done, only the side lights of both headlights, along with the tail lights, partially light up.
WARNING
Using turn signals inappropriately, not using them or forgetting to turn them off can confuse other road users. This could cause an accident with serious consequences.
• Always give warning of lane changes, over-taking or turning manoeuvres by activating the turn signals well in advance.
* As soon as the lane change, overtaking or turning manoeuvre is complete, switch off the turn signal.
WARNING
Improper use of the main beam can cause accidents and serious injuries, as it can distract and dazzle other drivers.
i Note
- When you turn the ignition off without having turned the turn signals off, an audible signal sounds while the driver's door is open. It is intended to remind you to turn off the turn signals, unless you want to leave the parking light on.
- If the comfort turn signals are on (three flashes) and the comfort turn signal on the opposite side is activated, the active side stops flashing and only flashes once on the newly selected side.
Vehicle lighting
• The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.
Also work when the ignition is switched on.
• The main beam can only be switched on
when the dipped beam is switched on.
• In cold or wet weather conditions, the
headlights, tail lights and turn signals may be
temporarily fogged from the inside. This is normal and has no effect on the service life of the vehicle's lighting system.
- The parking light does not activate auto-
matically if the left- or right-hand turn signal is left on and the ignition is disconnected.
Main beam assist (Light Assist)
The main beam assist automatically prevents glare from affecting vehicles moving in the opposite direction or ahead in the same direction. In addition, the main beam assist detects illuminated areas and disconnects the main beam headlight when passing populated areas. Within its limitations, the assist system automatically connects or disconnects the main beam headlight depending on the environmental and traffic conditions, as well as the speed >> △.
Advanced main beam assistant (LED Matrix)
The advanced main beam assistant provides maximum illumination of the road and roadside. At the same time, it avoids dazzling vehicles ahead or oncoming traffic.
The system uses a camera to detect other road users and deactivates certain areas within the light distribution in a specific manner. If the system cannot avoid dazzling other road users, the main beam is switched off completely.
The advanced main beam assistant normally recognizes illuminated areas such as cities and deactivates the main beam while driving through them.
Within the limits of the system, the assistant automatically switches the main beam on or off depending on the ambient conditions, traffic conditions and driving speed.
The advanced main beam assistant can be switched on or off in the vehicle settings in the Infotainment System.
Switching on the main beam assist or advanced main beam assist (Matrix LED)
- Switch on the ignition and select mode AUTO on the headlight control >>> Fig. 107.
- From the neutral position, press the turn signal and main beam headlights lever forwards
Fig. 108③
When the main beam assist is switched on, the control lamp upon the instrument cluster display turns on. When the main beam is on, the blue main beam control lamp on the instrument cluster switches on.
Switching off the main beam assistant or advanced main beam assistant (LED Matrix)
- Switching off mode AUTO on the headlight control >> Fig. 107.
- EITHER: if main beam assist is on, pull the turn signallight and main beam headlights lever back >>> Fig. 108⑥.
- OR: if the main beam assistant is on, but the main beam does not turn on, press the turn signal and main beam lever forwards to turn the main beam on manually. Pull the turn signal and main beam lever back to switch off the main beam manually, if necessary.
- OR: switch off the ignition.
Additional functions
Depending on the equipment, the headlamps are equipped with additional functions that improve comfort and safety.
- Lane light: if the system has detected that the vehicle is travelling on a multi-lane motorway or similar roads the lane light illuminates the full width of the driving lane. If vehicles are detected ahead, the amount of lane illuminated ahead of the vehicle reduces automatically. If the vehicle changes lanes, the illuminated range is extended to both lanes for the duration of the maneuver.
- Orientation light: If the system has detected road works, the orientation light uses markings to approximately show the likely position of the vehicle in its lane, depending on the current
Lights
steering angle. The width of the markings corresponds approximately to the width of the vehicle. The length of markings is automatically adjusted according to speed and distance to vehicles in front.
When the outside temperature drops below 4°C (39°F), the icy road warning projects a snowflake symbol on the road. This is complemented by a pop-up window displayed on the instrument cluster.
These functions can be activated and deactivated from Vehicle settings in the infotainment system.
System limitations
In the following cases, the main beam head-light must be switched off manually because the main beam assist will not disconnect it on time or disconnect it at all:
- On insufficiently lit roads with highly reflective signs.
- If road users have insufficient lighting, e.g. pedestrians or cyclists.
- On tight curves, when the traffic in the opposite direction is partially hidden, on pronounced slopes or inclinations.
- On roads with traffic in the opposite direction and with a central reservation barrier where the driver can see over it e.g. lorry drivers.
- In case of fog, snow or heavy rainfall.
- In case of swirling dust or sand.
- If the windscreen is damaged in the camera's field of vision.
- If the camera's field of vision is misted up, dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice. - If the camera is damaged or if the power supply has been cut off.
WARNING
The comfort features of the main beam assist must not load you to take any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver concentration.
- You must always control the main beam yourself and adapt it to the light, visibility and traffic conditions.
• The main beam regulator may not recognise all driving situations correctly and may operate with limitations in certain circumstances.
- When the camera's field of view is dirty, covered or damaged, the operation of the main beam regulator may be affected. This also applies when the vehicle's lighting installation is modified, e.g. when additional headlamps are installed.
WARNING
To avoid affecting the operation of the system, take the following points into consideration:
- Clean the field of vision of the camera regularly and make sure it is free of snow and ice. - Do not cover the field of vision of the camera.
- Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the camera's field of view.
i Note
- The headlight flasher can be turned on and off manually at any time with the turn signal and main beam lever >> page 134.
* If there are objects that radiate light in the camera's area of influence, e.g. a portable navigation system, this may affect the operation of the main beam assist system.
"Coming home" and "Leaving home" function (exterior orientation lighting)
The "Coming home" and "Leaving home" function lights up the vehicle's immediate surroundings when getting into end out of it in the dark.
This light is automatically controlled by a light sensor.
Vehicle lighting
Turning on the "Leaving home" light
- Unlocks the vehicle (if the automatic dipped beam function AUTO is switched on and the light sensor detects darkness).
Turning off the "Leaving home" light
- It turns off automatically once the lights off delay time has elapsed.
- OR: lock the vehicle. - OR: press the light control as many times as necessary until the instrument cluster displays the setting ON.
- OR: switch on the ignition
Turning on the "Coming home" light
- Switch the ignition off.
The "Coming home" light comes on if the automatic headlight control AUTO is switched on and the light sensor detects darkness.
The lights-off delay countdown starts when the last door or rear lid of the vehicle is closed.
Turning off the "Coming home" light
- It switches off automatically after the set lights-off delay time has elapsed.
- EITHER: it is automatically deactivated if, 30 seconds after the function has been activated, any vehicle door or the rear lid is still open.
- OR: press the light control as many times as necessary until the instrument cluster displays the setting OFF.
- OR: switch on the ignition.
"Coming home" and "Leaving home" settings
The duration of the lights-off delay can be set in the vehicle settings menu of the infotainment system, where the function can also be activated and deactivated >> page 38.
Welcome light
The welcome light is a light located on the exterior mirrors facing the ground which is switched on or off if the lights control is in the AUTO position and the "Coming Home" or "Leaving Home" function is switched on or off.
Dynamic headlight range control
The headlight range is automatically adjusted according to the vehicle load status when they are switched on.
WARNING
If the dynamic headlight range control fails or does not work properly, the headlights could dazzle and distract other road users. This could cause accidents and lead to serious injuries.
- Immediately go to a specialist workshop and have the headlight range control system checked.
Driving abroad
The light beam of the dipped beam lights is asymmetric: the side of the road on which you are driving is lit more intensely.
When a car that is manufactured in a country that drives on the right travels to a country that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is normally necessary to cover part of the headlight bulbs with stickers or to change the adjustment of the headlights to avoid dazzling other drivers. In such cases, the regulations specify certain light values that must be complied with for designated points of the light distribution. This is known as "Tourist Light".
The light distribution of the headlights allows the specific "tourist light" values to be met without the need for stickers or changes being made to the settings.
Lights
Note
'Tourist light' is only allowed temporarily. If you are planning a long stay in a country that drives on the other side, you should take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to change the headlights.
Troubleshooting
Turn signal control lamp
The indicator lamp lights up green.
If a turn signal fails, the turn signal light flashes twice as fast.
- Contact a specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends visiting a CUPRA dealership for this purpose.
Hazard warning lights on >> page 72.
Trailer turn signal indicator control
[Non-Text]
The indicator lamp lights up green.
If a trailer turn signal fails, the indicator lamp stops flashing instead of flashing at double the speed of the turn signal on the vehicle.
![Cupra Formentor (2026) - [Non-Text] - 1](/content/2026/07/1441719/images/f2695b27760f74138fa087600268ee0ac229af03dd6687397d44dadcb1bff11f.jpg)
sult in external lighting
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
There is a total or partial failure of the exterior lighting.
- Contact a specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends visiting a CUPRA dealership for this purpose.
Interior lights
Lighting of the instrument cluster, displays and controls
The instrument and controlling lighting brightness can be set in the vehicle settings menu of the infotainment system >> page 38.
The set intensity automatically adapts to changes in ambient brightness in the vehicle. When the automatic dipped beam light AUTO is turned on, a sensor automatically turns the dipped beam light on or off, along with the instrument and control lighting, depending on the ambient brightness.
In some cases, e.g. when driving through a tunnel without the automatic dipped beam light MDD-Lon switched on, the instrument cluster lighting may even switch off. The objective of this function is to provide the driver with a visual indication that he or she should activate the dipped beam. If your vehicle is fitted with a digital instrument cluster, the message Turn on the lights will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
Interior and reading lights
Fig. 109 Det al of headiner. Front interior lighting.
Turning the interior lights on or off.
Door contact connection. The interior lights come on automatically when you unlock the vehicle, open a door or disconnect the ignition. The light goes out few seconds after closing all the doors, then locking the vehicle or connecting the ignition.
Reading light
The reading light is touch operated, each lens is turned on and off individually by pressing in the respective central area. In addition, the intensity of the light can be adjusted according to the pressure exerted. If you want to turn on the two lenses together you must press the symbols!!! Fig.109.
Interior lights
Glove compartment and luggage compartment lighting
When opening and closing the glove compartment on the front passenger side and the rear lid, the respective light will automatically switch on and off.
Footwell lighting
The lights in the footwell area below the dash panel driver and front passenger sides will switch on when the doors are opened and will decrease in brightness while driving. This brightness can be adjusted through the information system menu using the function button > Lighting > Settings >>> page 38.
Note
The reading lights go out when the vehicle is closed and locked or after a few minutes of turning the ignition off. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Lights
Background lighting
Background lighting provides lighting in different areas of the interior.
There are predefined versions of Ambient Light >> Fig. 110.
The intensity of the lighting can be adjusted using the function button:
Lighting profile. Lights up the interior of the vehicle depending on the selected lighting profile.
Individual To adjust the intensity of the back-ground lighting in each of the areas as well as to change the colour in the versions that have lighting on the front door panel and the dash panel line.
Off Turns off the background lighting
Additional functions of the background lighting
- Door open alert: Representation on the line of the respective front door if the vehicle reaches 10 km/h while either of the two front doors is not closed properly.
- Rear windows locked alert: Representation on the line of the respective front door when the operation buttons of the rear windows are pressed, if they have been locked with the safety button >>> page 116 and the vehicle is locked (Auto Lock).
- Representation of the hazard warning lights: Animation on the entire background lighting line while the hazard warning light function is active.
Fig.110 Schematic representation: Background lighting.
- Representation of acceleration: Animation on the entire background lighting line when accelerating. This function is only represented in the Cupra when the link between the background lighting and the drive profile is activated. If a door has been left open, the "Door Open Alert" will be displayed at a speed above 10 km/h.
The representation of these functions by the background lighting can be switched on and off both individually and as a whole in the information system: @ > Lighting > Settings.
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems
Visibility
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems
Wiper lever
Fig. 111 Operation of windscreen wipers and rear window wiper system.
Move the lever to the required position:
OFF ④ Windscreen wipers off.
NT ① Intermittent wiping of the windscreen or activates the rain sensor. The windshield is wiped intermittently depending on the speed of the vehicle or the heaviness of the rain.
LOW ① Slow wide.
HIGH ③ Fast wipe.
1x ④ Short wipe. Pressing the lever for longer accelerates wiping
⑤ Pull the lever to switch on the automatic windscreen washer/wiper. The Climatronic switches on air recirculation for approx. 30 seconds to prevent the smell of windscreen washer fluid from entering the vehicle interior.
⑤ Switches on the intermittent rear window wiper. The wiper operates at intervals of approx. 6 seconds.
⑦ Pressing and holding the lever turns on the automatic rear window washer/wiper.
(5) A Control for adjusting the duration of the wiping intervals (vehicles without rain and light sensors) or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
WARNING
If insufficient antifreeze is added to the washer fluid, it could freeze on the glass and impair visibility.
* Do not use the wiper system in winter temperatures without first heating the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. Windscreen washer fluid could freeze on the windscreen and impair forward visibility.
WARNING
The use of worn or dirty wiper blades reduces visibility and increases the risk of serious accidents and injuries.
- Replace the wiper blades whenever they are in poor condition or worn out and no longer clean the windows sufficiently >> page 339.
① NOTICE
Before driving off and before switching on the ignition, check the following aspects of the wiper blades and the wiper motor to prevent damage to the glass:
• The wiper lever is in the neutral position.
- You have removed or cleared any snow and ice from the wiper blades and windows.
- You have carefully removed any wiper blades that may have frozen from the window. CUPRA recommends an de-icer spray for this purpose.
NOTICE
Turn of the wiper before the glass is completely dry. Using the wipers while dry can damage the glass.
Visibility
Note
- When the vehicle stops while the wiper is on, the wiper switches to operating temporarily at the next lower wiping level.
- In winter, the service position of the wipers can be useful to make it easier to lift the wipers off the windscreen when the vehicle is going to be left stationary >>> page 339.
Wiper functions
Automatic rear window wiper
The rear wiper switches on automatically when the wiper is switched on and reverse gear is engaged. The automatic rear window wiper activation when engaging reverse gear can be activated and deactivated in the infotainment system, in the vehicle settings menu >> page 38.
Note
The windscreen will be wiped again approximately 5 seconds after the windscreen washer has been activated, provided the vehicle is moving ("drip" function). If you activate the wipers less than 10 seconds after the "drip" function, a new wash sequence will begin without performing the last wipe. For the "drip" function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and then on again.
Note
The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle is still blocking its path. Remove the obstacle and switch on the wiper again.
Rain and light sensor
Fig. 112 Windsor con wipers over adjust the rain sensor Ⓐ.
Fig. 113 Sensely a surface of the rain
sensor
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain >> △.
Push the lever to the desired position >>> Fig. 112.
© Rain sensor deactivated.
① Rain sensor active; automatic wiping if necessary.
④ Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor:
- Set control to the right: high sensitivity
- Set control to the left: low sensitivity.
When the ignition is switched off and then back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts operating again when the windscreen wipers are in position>>> Fig. 112① and the vehicle is travelling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).
Mirrors
Abnormal operation of the rain and light sensor
The possible causes of anomalies and erroneous interpretations in the sensitive surface area >>> Fig. 113 of the rain sensor are, among others:
- Damaged wipers: a film of water on the damaged blades may lengthen the activation time, reduce the washing intervals or result in a fast and continuous wipe.
- Insects: the impact of insects may cause the wiper to activate.
- Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on the roads may cause an excessively long wipe when the windscreen is almost dry.
- Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or make it react more slowly, later or not at all. Regularly clean the sensitive surface of the rain sensor >> Fig. 113 (arrow) and check for possible damage to the wiper blades.
- Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain sensor on. The rain sensor then detects the reduction of the sensor surface and adjusts itself. The behaviour of the sensor may vary depending on the size of the stone impact.
WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect rain sufficiently and may not activate the windscreen wipers.
- If necessary, switch on the windscreen wipes manually when water hinders the view through the windscreen.
Note
• The use of an alcohol-based glass cleaner is recommended to remove waxes and coatings.
- Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the rain sensor. This can cause alterations or failures.
Troubleshooting
Washer fluid level too low
The control lamp lights up in yellow. Refill the washer fluid reservoir at the next opportunity >>> page 361.
Mirrors
General safety instructions
The exterior and interior mirrors allow the driver to observe vehicles driving behind and adapt his or her driving behaviour accordingly.
For safe driving, it is important for the driver to adjust the exterior mirrors and interior mirror correctly before setting off.
When looking through the exterior mirrors and the interior mirror, it is not possible to see the entire area behind and to the sides of the vehicle. These areas outside the field of view are known as the blind spot. Other road users and objects may be in the blind spot.
WARNING
Adjusting the exterior mirrors and interior mirror while driving can distract the driver. This could cause accidents and lead to serious injuries
- Only adjust the exterior mirrors and interior mirror when the vehicle is stationary.
- When parking, changing lanes, overtaking or turning, always keep a close eye on your surroundings, as other road users or objects may also be in the blind spot.
• Always make sure that the mirrors are adjusted correctly and that visibility to the rear is not reduced by ice, snow, fogging or other objects.
Visibility
WARNING
A failure to accurately estimate the distance to vehicles driving behind can lead to serious accidents and injuries.
• Curved (convex or aspherical) mirrors increase the field of view and objects in them appear smaller and further away.
- Curved mirrors do not allow you to precisely calculate the distance to vehicles driving behind, so using them when changing lanes could cause serious accidents and injuries.
- If possible, use the interior mirror to precisely calculate the distance to vehicles driving behind you, or to other objects.
• Always make sure you have sufficient visibility to the rear.
WARNING
The automatic anti-dazzle mirrors contain an electrolyte fluid which could leak if the mirror is broken.
- If it gets out, the electrolyte fluid can imitate the skin, eyes and respiratory organs, particularly in the case of people with asthma or similar diseases. Immediately inhale enough fresh air and get out of the vehicle, or open all windows and doors if this is not possible.
- If the electrolyte fluid comes into contact with your eyes or skin, immediately rinse the affected area with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical advice.
- If the fluid comes into contact with footwear or clothing, rinse immediately with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Clean thoroughly before using the footwear or clothing in question again.
- If the electrolyte fluid is swallowed, immediately rinse the mouth with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting unless advised by a doctor. Immediately seek medical attention.
NOTICE
Electrolyte fluid may leak if the automatic anti-dazzle mirror is broken. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces. Therefore, it should be cleaned as fast as possible with a damp sponge or similar.
Interior mirror
Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle function
When the ignition is switched on, the sensors in the mirror measure the light falling on it from behind and in front.
The interior mirror automatically darkens based on the measured values.
If the light falling onto the sensors is blocked or interrupted, e.g. by a sunshade blind or hanging objects, the automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror does not work or does not work properly. Similarly, the use of portable navigation devices attached to the windscreen or close to the automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror can affect the operation of the sensors >> △.
The automatic anti-dazzle function is deactivated in certain situations, e.g. when reverse gear is engaged.
WARNING
Light from screens of portable navigation devices can cause malfunctions of the automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror and may cause serious accidents and injuries.
• Abnormal operation of the automatic anti-dazzle function may result in it being impossible to use the interior mirror to precisely calculate the distance to vehicles driving behind, or to other objects.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. This adheres to the strict requirement to ignore such lines.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. This adheres to the strict requirement to ignore such lines.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
-
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
-
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it and output nothing or only meaningful text. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated placeholder underscores where none should exist in the GT. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
Mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Fig. 114 Drver's door detail: exterior mirror control.
Turn the control to the corresponding position.
L/R By moving the control to the desired position, adjust the interior mirrors on the left side (l) and on the right side (t) in the desired direction.
Depending on the equipment fitted on the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated according to the outside temperature.
Fold the mirrors >> ▲.
The exterior mirror cannot be adjusted and all functions are deactivated.
Activating exterior mirror functions
The following exterior mirror functions can be activated and deactivated in the vehicle settings menu of the infotainment system >> page 38.
Note
The exterior mirror functions are described below. For left-hand drive vehicles, position corresponds to the exterior mirror on the driver's side and position corresponds to the exterior mirror on the passenger's side. Do the opposite for right-hand drive vehicles.
Synchronized regulation of the exterior mirrors
The synchronised mirror setting simultaneously adjusts the right hand exterior mirror when the left mirror is adjusted.
- Turn the control to position 1 .
- Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
- If necessary, correct the setting of the right hand mirror: turn the control to position.
Folding the exterior mirrors when locking the vehicle
When the vehicle is locked or unlocked from the outside, the exterior mirrors may fold in or out automatically, depending on the equipment. For this purpose, the rotary control has to be in position ☐ L for ☐
If the rotary control of the electric exterior mirrors is in the folded position, the exterior mirrors remain folded.
Memory function
The memory buttons >> page 129 can be used to save and turn on settings for the exterior mirrors.
The settings will also be saved in the user of the online services 1 .
Saving the passenger interior mirror settings for reversing
- Switch the ignition on.
- In the infotainment system, select > Vehicle > Exterior + Mirrors 12), page 38.
- Select position d on the control.
- Select reverse gear.
Visibility
- Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the kerb area well.
- Release the reverse gear.
- The adjusted position for the interior mirror is stored.
Activating the passenger side exterior mirror settings for reversing
- Turn the exterior mirror control knob to position 1
- Engage reverse gear with the ignition switched on. The right-hand exterior mirror will move to the saved position.
The passenger side exterior mirror leaves the saved reversing position when the vehicle is travelling faster than approx. 15 km/h (9 mph), or if the control is turned from position to another position.
WARNING
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out carelessly can cause injury.
- Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror if there is no one in the path of the mirror.
- When moving the mirror, be careful not to pinch your fingers between the mirror and the mirror holder.
In the opposite right-hand drive vehicles
NOTICE
Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, please make sure that the exterior mirrors are folded in to prevent them from being damaged.
* The electrically folding exterior mirrors must only be operated electrically, not by hand, as this could damage their electric drive.
For the sake of the environment
Do not leave the exterior mirror heating on for longer than necessary. Otherwise it causes unnecessary energy consumption.
i Note
If the electrical adjustment should fail to operate, both of the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
Sun protection
Sun blind
Fig. 115 Survivor
Options for adjusting driver and front passenger sun visors
- Lower the sun visor towards the windscreen.
- The sun visor can be pulled out of its mount-
ion and turned towards the down. Fig. 15
ing and turned towards the door. Fig. 115 ① - Swing the sun visor towards the door, backwards and lengthwise.
There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with a cover. When the cover is opened ② a light comes on.
The light goes out when the vanity mirror cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed back up.
Sun protection
WARNING
Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.
• Always store sun blinds and visors in their
housing when not in use.
Note
The light above the sun visor automatically
switches off after a few minutes in certain
conditions. This prevents the battery from
discharging
Air conditioning
Air conditioning
Heating, ventilation and cooling
Introduction
The 3-zone Climatronic heats, ventilates, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle interior, considering it as 3 independent air conditioning areas (driver, front passenger and rear seats).
There are several ways to switch on the air conditioning:
- Press (in the air conditioning menu >> page 151.
- OR: tap any button in the air conditioning menu directly related to the air conditioning (for example temperatures, etc.).
Some functions and menu tabs depend on the equipment.
Economic use of the air conditioning
Extra fuel (combustion engines) or electricity (hybrid in electric mode) may be consumed by the compressor while the air conditioning is on.
The air conditioning operates most effectively with the windows and the sunroof closed.
However, if the vehicle interior has heated up after standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by briefly opening the windows and the sunroof.
Operating the air conditioning with voice controls
Depending on the equipment, some of the air conditioning functions can be operated by voice control>>> page 287.
Passenger recognition function 11
The front-passenger and rear-seat recognition system automatically adjusts the air conditioning, reducing output in unoccupied areas to optimise vehicle energy consumption.
With the ignition on, the vehicle can detect whether a seat is occupied.
The turning down of the air conditioning is indicated as follows:
- Front passenger area: on the front passenger temperature selector, which will display instead of the selected temperature.
- Rear zone: on the rear temperature selector, where ECO will be displayed instead of the selected temperature. This turning down of the air conditioning will also be displayed on the control located in the rear area.
Dust and pollen filter
The dust and pollen filter with activated carbon cartridge helps reduce impurities in the air entering the passenger compartment.
The dust and pollen filter must be changed regularly so that air conditioner performance is not adversely affected.
If filter performance drops sooner than expected because of operation in highly contaminated environments, replace it before the scheduled service interval.
Air vents
To ensure proper heating, cooling and ventilation in the vehicle interior, the air vents must remain open.
There are other additional, non-adjustable air vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and in the rear area of the vehicle interior.
WARNING
Reduced visibility through the windows increases the risk of serious accidents.
• Always ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow, and that they are not fogged, so as to maintain good visibility of everything outside.
- Only drive when you have good visibility.
1 Valid for hybrid vehicles.
Heating, ventilation and cooling
• Always ensure that you use the air conditioner and heated rear window to maintain good visibility.
- Do not keep air-recirculation mode activated for long periods. If the cooling system is off and recirculation remains on, the windows may mist up quickly, greatly reducing visibility.
- Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.
NOTICE
Food, medicines and other objects sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming from the vents.
- Never place food, medicines or other temperature-sensitive objects close to the air vents.
Note
- When the air conditioning system is switched off, the incoming air from outside will not be dehumidified. To prevent fogging of the windows, CUPRA recommends leaving the cooling system turned on. To do this, press the function button A/C. The icon should light up.
-
The maximum heat output required to defrost windows as quickly as possible is only available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature.
-
Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the windows from misting over.
- The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and is extracted through slots in the luggage compartment designed for this purpose. Therefore, you should avoid obstructing these slots with any kind of object.
- It is advisable to turn on the air conditioning at least once a month, to lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling capacity is detected, a Technical Service should be consulted to check the system.
- When the engine is under extreme strain, switch off the compressor for a moment.
Air conditioning
Climatronic control
④ Climabar
Fixed bar at the bottom of the Infotainment System display >> Fig. 116 A where the following Air Conditioning functions are located: Temperature Tapping on the numbers themselves opens a pop-up window for temperature settings using the symbols ⊕ or
OR: use the touch zones ① and ② (blue / red) to adjust the temperature of the Air Conditioning >> Fig. 116. You can also change the temperature by swiping your finger right to left across the touch areas.
Click on the symbol to charge the heat setting. To turn off the heating, press the button until the light level is off. It can also be controlled via the main Seats menu >> page 154.
OR: the seat heating can be controlled by tapping with two fingers at once on touch zones ① (for driver) and ② (for passenger) (depending on the equipment).
The defrost/demist function of the Climatronic removes ice and condensation from the windscreen. The air is dehumidified and the fan is set to high. This function is also available on the light control. When this function is switched on, the rear air conditioning remains switched off.
CLIMA Press this to access the Air Condition ing menu >>> page 151.
Switches the heated window on or off when the engine is running. It switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes. The user must switch it off as soon as the glass is demisted. The system can temporarily switch off the function to avoid possible damage to the battery. The func
Fig. 116 Schematic representation: air-conditioning functions.
tion will be restored as soon as the vehicle's energy management system permits it.
This function is also available on the light control.
Favourites (depending on the equipment) Except for the temperature buttons and seat heating buttons. CLIMA, The re-
maining Climabar buttons can be customised as follows:
-
Press and hold the button that you want to configure. A box showing all the possible options drops down.
-
When you select an option, the button is programmed with that option.
-
Close the box to return to the infotainment menu.
Heating, ventilation and cooling
Air Conditioning Menu
The following functions are available in the Air conditioning menu, depending on the equipment:
Front submenu
Submenu for the air conditioning in the front of the vehicle interior where the following functions are found:
Switching the Climatronic off/on
Fig. 117 Ⓐ
SYNC Equalises all temperature settings to the value selected in the driver zone. To deactivate synchronisation, change the temperature setting for the front passenger and/or rear zone. Activates the tem-
perature control for the passenger side
Fig. 116② and/or rear zone to set a different temperature.
Vents The colour of the arrows in the image of the vehicle interior indicates the temperature requested depending on the ambient conditions, not the air outlet temperature. The direction of the air outlet is selected with the buttons >> Fig. 117 (B).
Switching manual air recirculation on and off >> page 152.
Manual steering wheel heating setting with three heating levels. Press the function of button repeatedly to achieve the desired level. To disconnect it, press several times until no LED is on>>> page 156.
Fig.117 Schematic representation: Ar conditioning menu.
Switch the air conditioning system on and off.
A/C Switch maximum air conditioning output on and off. The air recirculation mode switches on automatically and the Climatronic automatically directs the air to the upper body.
AIR CARE The air conditioning system contains a filter that can reduce allergen contaminants. The Air Care function activates recirculation and regulates it automatically
and continuously as long as there is no risk of missing. Information 1 about the AirCare system can be found in the Settings submenu 20.
Air conditioning
Manual adjustment of fan speed by tapping for .
OR: by pressing or swiping your finger on the lines until the desired fan speed is reached.
AUTO
TO In this mode, the system automatically regulates the interior temperature, fan speed and air distribution for optimal thermal comfort. The AUTO mode will deactivate as soon as manual changes are made to the fan speed, air distribution, windscreen demisting or air recirculation. Repeatedly pressing the mode button AUTO sets the function to gentle, medium or high ventilation levels.
Smart submenu
Submenu where different smart and/or automatic functionalities are located, depending on the version.
Hand warm: automatically adjusts climate control for a set time to heat air via the front vents.
Cool feet: automatically adjusts the air conditioning for a certain time to cool the footwell area.
- Demist the windscreen automatically adjusts the air conditioning for a certain time to demist the windscreen.
Warm feet: automatically adjusts the air conditioning for a certain time to heat the footwell area.
Fresh Air: automatically adjusts the air conditioning for a certain time to ventilate the vehicle interior.
Fast cooling: automatically adjusts the air conditioning to ventilate the vehicle interior for a certain amount of time.
Rear submenu
Submenu for the air conditioning in the rear of the vehicle interior where the following functions are found:
When the rear lock is activated, it is not possible to adjust the temperature from the rear controls.
/ Press to adjust the rear zone temperature.
Settings submenu
Submenu where the following settings are located:
- Heated steering wheel switched on at start of journey depending on temperature: select one of the three heating levels and/or Off from the dropdown menu >> page 156.
Rear controls
Fig. 118 In the centre console, rear section: controls for the rear seats.
Temperature selection
- Press buttons ① and ② >> Fig. 118 to adjust the temperature of the rear zone.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient air from entering the interior.
When the outside temperature is very high, it is advisable to select air recirculation for a short period of time to refresh the vehicle interior more quickly.
For safety reasons, air recirculation is disconnected when pressed or when a sensor detects that the vehicle's windows may mist up.
Heating, ventilation and cooling
Switching air recirculation on and off
- Press the button to switch air recirculation on or off.
WARNING
Stuffy or stale air will increase fatigue and reduce driver concentration possibly resulting in a serious accident.
- Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or use the air recirculation for long periods of time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed.
NOTICE
In vehicles with an air conditioner, do not smoke when air recirculation is switched on. The smoke may be deposited on the cooling evaporator and on the active combination filter and cause permanent unpleasant odours.
Note
When the outside temperature is very high, briefly switching on the air recirculation mode helps to cool the vehicle interior more quickly.
Air conditioning
Seat heating
The front seats have three levels of electric heating.
Turning on the seat heating
There are several ways to switch on the front seat heating;
- Tap on the symbol III located in main menu Seats > Air conditioning.
• Tap on the Climabar symbol >> Fig. 116 - Tap with two fingers at once on touch zones ① (for driver) and ② (for passenger) >>> Fig. 116.
Controlling seat heating
- Press the corresponding seat function button to switch on the seat heating to maximum power.
- Press the function button of the corresponding seat repeatedly until the desired level is set.
- To switch off seat heating, press the corresponding seat icon several times until no LED is on.
The seat heating will switch off automatically when no person is detected on the seat. The indication on the infotainment system turns grey after approx 2 seconds. If the passen
Fig. 119 Schematic representation: Seats menu
ger sits down again while the drive system is still switched on, the seat heating switches on again automatically.
The seat heating can be switched on again manually even if the seat is unoccupied.
Smart heated seat
Availability depending on the equipment. This is an smart function that automatically activates and regulates the driver and front passenger seat heating for greater comfort.
The seat heating for the driver's seat and front passenger seat can be adjusted separately to achieve fully adapted comfort. In addition, in
Heating, ventilation and cooling
the case of the driver, the function can be personalised, depending on the user registered in the vehicle.
To access the smart heated seats function, the CUPRA CONNECT personalisation service must first be activated>>> page 268.
- To activate/deactivate the function go to the seat heating submenu, and press on the Automatic heating button below the image of the corresponding seat >> Fig. 119.
The smart heated seats function requires a period for learning usage habits. The start of the learning process is indicated by the informative text Learning 0 % which will appear above the function's activation/deactivation button. During this process, the learning percentage increase will be shown in this informative text, until 100% learning is achieved.
Seat heating level 3 (maximum) needs to be used to ensure that habits are learned correctly.
During the learning period, it is recommended to use the seat heating at different ambient temperatures to achieve optimal autonomous operation.
No learning will take place after the stationary air conditioning has been used.
Once 100 % learning has been achieved, automatic mode will activate. This mode is also represented by an A next to the corresponding seat button on the air conditioning bar, which is always visible at the bottom of the screen.
The heating can be configured at any time. If the automatic mode is activated, the text Optimising is displayed and the automatic mode will take into account this new learning or modification that the user has made to the seat heating (e.g. changing the heat setting, etc.).
To reset the process and restart the learning period, go to Settings > Reset driver/passenger profile.
Tap ① to access information about the func
Cases in which heat seating should not be switched on
Do not switch seat heating on if any of the following conditions are met:
- The seat is occupied by a person with limited perception of pain or temperature.
• The seat is not occupied.
• The seat has a cover
• A child seat has been installed on the seat
• The seat cushion is wet or damp.
- The outdoor or vehicle interior temperature is higher than +25°C (77°F).
WARNING
Children and people who, due to medication, paralysis or chronic illnesses (e.g. diabetes), cannot perceive pain or temperature — or have limited perception — may suffer burns to the back, buttocks or legs when using seat heating.
- People with limited pain and temperature thresholds must never use seat heating.
If an abnormality in the device's temperature control is detected, have it checked by a specialist workshop.
WARNING
If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can adversely affect the operation of the seat heating, increasing the risk of burns.
- Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to using the seat heater.
- Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is wet or damp.
- Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp on the seat.
- Do not spill liquids on the seat.
Air conditioning
NOTICE
• To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters, do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point on the seat cushion or backrest.
- Liquids, sharps objects and insulating materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating.
• In the event of odours, switch off seat heating immediately and have it inspected by a specialised workshop.
- If the original seat upholstery is replaced by another material, seat heating may overheat or its operation may be limited.
For the sake of the environment
Seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is unnecessary energy consumption.
Note
Please note the following for the smart heated seats feature:
• The system may reset the learning process if it has not been satisfactory.
- Separate driver's seat learning will be required for each registered user.
- The passenger seat learns regardless of the active registered user.
- In hybrid vehicles the use of the stationary air conditioning function with electricity consumers >>> page 161 may affect the learning time of the function.
Steering wheel heating
The selected steering wheel heating level will be displayed on the instrument cluster display and in the air conditioning menu.
Adjusting steering wheel heating by pressing ⚫ on the multifunction steering wheel
- Short press (less than 1 second):
Heating is switched on at its maximum level. Press the steering wheel button repeatedly to set the desired level. To switch off steering wheel heating, press the steering wheel button repeatedly until the heated steering wheel OFF icon is displayed on the instrument cluster.
• Long press (more than 1 second):
Heating is switched off directly from the current operating level Another long press on the button switches on heating directly at the last level saved before switching off.
Adjusting steering wheel heating via the infotainment system
- In the air conditioning menu, press the steering wheel heating function button @The heating initially switches on at the maximum level.
- Press the function button repeatedly to set the desired level.
- To switch off steering wheel heating, press the function button several times until no LED is on.
Automatic disconnection
Steering wheel heating will be switched off automatically when any of the following conditions are met:
• Electrical energy consumption is too high.
■ The steering wheel heating system is faulty.
- If the ignition is switched off.
Parking ventilation
The vehicle interior can be ventilated with the stationary ventilation function (depending on equipment).
The power required for parking ventilation will be provided by the vehicle's 12V battery.
The ventilation function is controlled using the My CUPRA App.
Switching on the stationary ventilation
The function can be switched on as follows:
- The parking ventilation function can be switched on immediately using the immediate on/off button in the My CUPRA App.
- By programming a departure time.
Heating, ventilation and cooling
In the event of low level charge of the 12V battery, the parking ventilation will not turn on.
Disconnecting parking ventilation
The parking ventilation will turn off in the following situations:
- When the operating time for the immediate on/off mode has elapsed.
• The parking ventilation function can be switched off immediately using the immediate on/off button in the My CUPRA App. - When the scheduled departure time has been reached.
The maximum operating period of the parking ventilation is 30 min.
Programming a departure/trip start
The activation of the parking ventilation for a scheduled time is only valid for a single ventilation process. The departure time must be for each newly programmed ventilation process. Before programming the departure time, you must check that the date and time of the car are correctly set
When programming a departure time, the car automatically calculates, depending on the environmental conditions, the necessary operating time of the parking ventilation.
NOTICE
Foods sensitive to heat or cold, medications and other objects can be damaged by the airflow.
* Do not place any type of food, medicines or other temperature sensitive items in front of the ventilation slots.
Note
If parking ventilation runs repeatedly for long periods of time, the 12V battery charge level will drop. It is advisable to take the vehicle for a long drive to recharge the battery.
Troubleshooting
The cooling system cannot be switched on or its operation is limited
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on, this may be caused by the following:
• The engine is not running.
■ The fan is switched off.
• The air conditioner fuse has blown.
- The outside temperature is lower than approximately 0°C (-32°F).
- The air conditioner compressor has been temporarily switched off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
• Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a specialised workshop.
Change the temperature unit (Climatronic)
The temperature display can be changed from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the Infotainment System display using the function button @ > Settings > Units
Water or water vapour under the vehicle
If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensation can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak!
When the outside humidity is high and the ambient temperature is low, condensation water may evaporate when the stationary air conditioning is operating. In this case, steam may come out from under the vehicle. This does not mean that the vehicle has any damage.
Note
After starting the engine, any residual humidity in the air conditioner could mist over the windscreen. Switch on the defrost function as soon as possible to clear the windscreen of condensation.
Air conditioning
Auxiliary heating (additional heating)
Introduction
The auxiliary heater 11 runs on fuel from the vehicle's tank and can be used while you are driving and when the vehicle is stationary.
The auxiliary heater can be controlled through the auxiliary heating menu in the Infotainment system, through the My CUPRA App or with the remote control.
In winter, with the auxiliary heater switched on, you can demist the windscreen and leave it free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) before you start driving.
If the outside temperature is very high, the vehicle interior can be ventilated with the engine off using the auxiliary heater.
The maximum operating period of the parking ventilation is 60 min.
WARNING
The exhaust gases from auxiliary heating contain carbon monoxide, a toxic, colourless and odourless gas. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness and death.
- Never switch on the auxiliary heater or leave it running in enclosed spaces or areas with no ventilation.
- Never program the auxiliary heating to switch on and operate in an enclosed or un-ventilated space.
■ Before refuelling, switch off the additional heating.
WARNING
The components of the auxiliary heater are extremely hot and could cause a fire.
- Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with easily flammable materials that might be below the vehicle, such as dried grass.
NOTICE
Never place food, medicines or other temperature-sensitive objects close to the air vents. Food, medicines and other objects sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming from the vents.
Switching the auxiliary heater on and off
Connection
The auxiliary heating can be switched on in the following ways:
- Press the immediate on/off button in the My CUPRA App.
- Press the immediate on/off button in the infotainment system's departure menu (with the vehicle switched off) or the on/off button in the infotainment system's auxiliary heating menu (with the vehicle switched on).
- Press button on the remote control
page 159.
- Automatically scheduling a departure time in the auxiliary heater menu in the infotainment system or in My CUPRA App >>> page 160.
Disconnection
The auxiliary heating can be switched off in the following ways:
- The auxiliary heating function can be turned off immediately using the immediate on/off button in My CUPRA App.
- Press the immediate on/off button in the infotainment system's departure menu (with the vehicle switched off) or the on/off button in the infotainment system's auxiliary heating menu (with the vehicle switched on).
1 Availability depending on the equipment.
Auxiliary heating (additional heating)
- Press button (55 in the remote control >>) page 159.
• Automatically at the scheduled departure time or after the programmed operating time has elapsed. - Automatically when the controllamp (fuel level indicator) lights up.
• Automatically when the 12-volt battery charge drops too low >> page 366.
Setting the desired temperature
- Open the infotainment system's Auxiliary heating menu.
- Set the desired temperature using Ⓟ and ⓞ
Things to note
Once switched off, the auxiliary heater will continue to operate for a short period of time in order to bum the fuel remaining in the system and also to expel the exhaust fumes.
Radio-operated remote control
Fig. 120 Auxiliary heating: radio remote
conex
>>> Fig. 120
Switch the auxiliary heater on
Off Switch the auxiliary heater off
① Control lamp.
If the buttons on the remote control are pressed unnecessarily, the auxiliary heating may be switched on unintentionally, even if you are outside the operating range or the control lamp is flashing.
To switch on and off the independent heating, the button must be pressed and held for approximately 1 second.
Control lamp on the remote control
When the buttons are pressed, the control lamp on the remote control ① provides the user with different information:
It lights up for approx. 2 seconds
- in green: The auxiliary heater has been switched on using the button.
- In red: The auxiliary heater has been switched off using the OFF button.
Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds - In green: No on signal has been received. The remote control is out of range. Move closer to the vehicle.
- In red: No off signal has been received. The remote control is out of range. Move closer to the vehicle.
Flashes quickly approx. 2 seconds
- in green: The independent heating is blocked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is almost empty, the 12-volt battery charge is very low or there is a fault.
It lights up for approx. 2 seconds
- in orange (then in green or in red): The battery in the remote control is almost empty. However, the on or off signal was received.
- In orange (then flashes green or red): The battery in the remote control is almost empty. No on or off off signal has been received.
Air conditioning
Flashes for around 5 seconds
• In orange: The battery in the remote control is flat. No on or off off signal has been received.
Changing the battery of the radio-operated remote control
When pressing the buttons, if the control lamp of the remote ① flashes for approx. 5 orange or does not light up, the batteries must be replaced.
The battery is located beneath a cover on the back of the remote control.
- To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bottom and slide it down.
- Remove the battery.
- Insert the new battery. When doing so, take into account the polarity and use batteries of the same type >>> Ⓞ.
- Replace the battery cover by inserting the tabs at the top and pressing the bottom.
Range
The receiver is inside the vehicle. The remote control, when fitted with new batteries, has a range of several hundred metres. Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and discharged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control.
WARNING
Swallowing a battery with a diameter of 20 mm or any other button battery can cause serious injuries or even death within a very short time.
- Always keep the radio remote control and key fobs containing batteries, as well as spare batteries, button cells and other batteries larger than 20 mm, out of the reach of chil-
- If you suspect that someone may have swallowed a battery, seek medical attention immediately.
NOTICE
- The remote control contains electronic components. Therefore, avoid getting it wet and avoid impacts or direct sunlight. - The use of unsuitable batteries may damage the remote control. Therefore, always replace the old battery with a new one of the same voltage, size and specification.
For the sake of the environment
- Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally friendly manner.
- The remote control battery may contain perchlorate. Please observe the legal provisions regarding its disposal.
• Make sure that it is not possible to operate the remote control unintentionally in order to avoid switching on the auxiliary heating without intending to.
Programming the auxiliary heater
The activation of the parking ventilation for a scheduled time is only valid for a single ventilation process. The departure time must be for each newly programmed ventilation process. Before programming the departure time, you must check that the date and time of the vehicle are correctly set.
When programming a departure time, the vehicle automatically calculates, depending on the environmental conditions, the necessary operating time of the parking ventilation.
Stationary air conditioning
WARNING
Never program the auxiliary heating to switch on and operate in an enclosed or unventilated space. The exhaust gases from auxiliary heating contain carbon monoxide, a toxic colourless and odourless gas. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness and death.
Usage instructions
The auxiliary heater exhaust system located below the vehicle must be kept clear of snow, mud and other objects. The exhaust fumes must be able to exit freely. The emissions generated by the auxiliary heater are removed via an exhaust pipe fitted uncleemath the vehicle. On heating the vehicle interior, depending on the outside temperature, the warm air is first directed at the windscreen and then to the rest of the vehicle interior through the air vents. Directing the vents - towards the windows for example - can affect air distribution.
When the auxiliary heater is not switched on • The auxiliary heater requires about as much power as the dipped beam headlights. If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, the auxiliary heater switches off automatically and cannot be switched on. This avoids problems when starting the engine.
- The heating must be activated every time you want to set off. Similarly, the departure time must reactivate each time.
- The control lamp B (fuel level indicator) lights up.
Note
- Noises will be heard while the auxiliary heater is running.
- When the outside humidity is high and the ambient temperature is low, condensation from the heating and fresh air system may evaporate when auxiliary heater is on. In this case, steam may come out from under the vehicle. This does not mean that there is an fault in the vehicle.
- If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater may be restricted if the fuel tank level is low (just above the reserve level).
- If the auxiliary heater is used a number of times for a long period of time, the 12-volt battery will lose its charge. In order to recharge the battery, the vehicle must be driven a few kilometres from time to time. As a guide: the run should last approximately as long as the heating has been switched on.
- At temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the auxiliary heater may switch itself on automatically when the engine is switched on. The auxiliary heater is switched off again after a certain period of time.
Stationary air conditioning
Introduction
√ Valid for: hybrid vehicles.
With the stationary air conditioning you can cool, ventilate and heat the vehicle interior while the vehicle is parked. In winter, you can also demist the windscreen and leave it free of ice and snow (if the layer is thin).
The stationary air conditioning is powered by a socket, if the vehicle is plugged in, or by the high-voltage battery otherwise. The stationary air conditioning can be programmed and controlled in the infotainment system or via the My CUPRA App.
You can find information about the app, its availability and the necessary requirements for its use, as well as compatible terminals, on the Internet >>> page 266.
NOTICE
Never place food, medicines or other temperature-sensitive objects close to the air vents. Food, medicines and other objects sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming from the vents.
Air conditioning
Note
Using the stationary air conditioning without connecting the charging cable reduces the vehicle's range. At extreme exterior temperatures, the heating or cooling power of the stationary air conditioning may be insufficient to reach the desired temperature.
Managing the stationary air conditioning
√ Valid for hybrid vehicles.
The stationary air conditioning only works if the high voltage battery is sufficiently charged.
The stationary air conditioning can be used without the charging connector being plug-
ged in. In this case, stationary air conditioning draws the required electrical energy from the high-voltage battery.
Setting the desired temperature
- Open the infotainment system's Stationary air conditioning menu.
Tap Air conditioning. - Set the desired temperature using ⊕ and ⊖
Switching on the stationary air conditioning It can be switched on in the following ways:
- Press the immediate on icon # in the Info-tainment system (while the vehicle is switched off). During immediate air conditioning, the vehicle reaches the set temperature in a maximum of 30 minutes.
- Press the immediate on/off button in the My CUPRA App.
- Automatically by scheduling a departure time in the My CUPRA App or in the infotainment system in the Stationary air conditioning >>> page 162menu,
Switching off the stationary air conditioning It can be switched off in the following ways:
- Press the immediate on/off button in the My CUPRA App.
- Press the immediate on/off icon in the infotainment system (while the vehicle is switched off).
- Press the air conditioning off button in the Air conditioning menu of the infotainment system (while the vehicle is off).
• Automatically, a few minutes after the scheduled departure time. - Automatically if the charge level of the vehicle's high-voltage battery drops excessively.
Note
- Noises may be heard while the stationary air conditioning is running, related to its operation.
- When the outside humidity is high and the ambient temperature is low, condensation from the air conditioning system may evaporate when the stationary air conditioning is running. In this case, steam may come out from under the vehicle. This does not mean that there is an fault in the vehicle.
Programming the stationary air conditioning
√ Valid for hybrid vehicles.
The stationary air conditioning can be programmed in the Infotainment system for a scheduled departure time. You can set the desired temperature of the vehicle interior for the vehicle's planned departure time.
Based on the desired temperature, the vehicle calculates the time that the stationary air conditioning needs to be switched on to reach this temperature by the departure time. The maximum pre-operation time of the stationary air conditioning is approx. 30 minutes before the departure time.
Air conditioning the vehicle for departure
- Open the Stationary air conditioning menu.
- Press ② Departure to open the timer menu.
Stationary air conditioning
- Set the scheduled departure time.
• Activate the timer using the checkbox.
The earliest scheduled departure time is displayed in the infotainment system's departure menu, and can be switched on and off there >> page 41.
The stationary air conditioning switches off automatically
• After approx. 30 minutes if the vehicle is air-conditioned by "Air condition now" with the ignition switched off.
• After approx. 15 minutes if the drive system has not been switched on by one hour after the scheduled departure time.
- When the state of charge of the high voltage battery drops excessively.
Stationary air conditioning with additional electrical comfort consumers
If the vehicle is going to be air conditioned before departure, the electrical comfort consumers, such as seat heating, steering wheel heating or the heated rear window, can also be switched on automatically before the departure time. Comfort electrical consumers, depending on equipment, are activated only at low temperatures.
To enable the use of these consumers:
- Open the Stationary air conditioning menu.
• Tap Air conditioning. - Select the seats whose comfort consumers should be connected along with the stationary air conditioning. Only these seats will be heated before the departure time.
- To turn on the window heating before the departure time, activate the Automatic window heating function
The maximum pre-operation time of the electrical comfort consumers is approx. 10 minutes before the departure time.
If the air conditioning is switched on immediately, the electrical comfort consumers are also activated, depending on the equipment.
Immediate activation of the rear window heating
The heated windscreen can be switched on/off using the My CUPRA App, whether or not the stationary air conditioning is switched on.
Air-conditioning the vehicle after unlocking
R
- Open the inflotainment system's Stationary air conditioning menu.
- Press Settings
- Check the Air condition the vehicle after unlocking check box by pressing it.
The vehicle will be air conditioned for 5 minutes when the doors are unlocked.
Air conditioning the vehicle during high-voltage charging
While the vehicle's high voltage battery is being charged, regardless of whether it is with alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC), the vehicle can be air conditioned before the scheduled departure time.
This can be set in the infotainment system, in the Stationary air conditioning menu.
Note
For high voltage charging at low power with alternating current (AC), charging may be interrupted under certain conditions due to the system's need to air condition the interior.
Check the schedule
When the ignition is switched off, the infotainment system displays the next time that is active and the set functions.
Driving
Driving
Driving indications
Pedals
• Make sure that you can always press the pedals without any problems.
- Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial positions.
- Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals >>> △.
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a specialised dealership. Fasteners for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals.
WARNING
- Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving.
- Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.
- Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation.
Selecting the optimal gear
Depending on the equipment on the instrument cluster display, a recommendation is shown with the gear that should be engaged to optimise consumption.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, it is only displayed when driving in Tiptronic mode >>> page 184.
No recommendation will appear if the optimal gear is engaged. The current gear will be displayed.
Display Meaning
| 3Optim.m gear. | |
| 4>5 | Changing to a higher gear is recommended |
| 2>1 | Changing to a lower gear is recommended |
Information regarding the "cleanliness" of the particulate filter
When the exhaust system detects that the particulate filter is close to saturation, this system's self-cleaning function recommends the optimal gear for that function >> page 336.
CAUTION
The gear change recommendation is an auxiliary function and in no case should be a substitute for careful driving.
- Responsibility for selecting the correct gear, depending on the circumstances, rests solely with the driver.
For the sake of the environment
Selecting the correct gear can help to save fuel.
Note
The recommended gear display turns off when you are no longer in tintronic mode
When you are no longer at the time table,
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres all depend largely on driving style. Consumption can be reduced between 10-15% with an efficient
Driving indications
driving style. The following section gives you some tips on lessening the impact on the environment and reducing your operating costs at the same time.
Active cylinder management (ACT ® )
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active cylinder management (ACT®) may deactivate some of the engine cylinders if the driving situation does not require too much power. The number of active cylinders can be seen on the instrument cluster display >>> page 16.
Anticipation when driving
If you think ahead when driving, you will need to brake less and thus accelerate less. Use the vehicle's inertia whenever possible, with a gear engaged. This takes advantage of the engine braking effect, reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.
Changing gear to save energy
An effective way of saving is to change in advance to a higher gear.
Manual gearbox: change from first to second gear as soon as possible. Choosing the correct gear saves fuel. Select the highest possible gear suitable for the driving situation (the engine should continue to run with cyclical regularity).
Automatic transmission: accelerate gradually and without reaching the "kick-down" posi-
Avoid driving at high speed
Avoid travelling at your vehicle's top speed, whenever possible. Fuel consumption, omission of harmful gases and noise pollution multiply as speed is increased. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Reduce idling time
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is automatically reduced. In vehicles without the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off the engine, for example, at level crossings and at traffic lights that remained for long periods of time. When an engine has reached operating temperature, and depending on the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off for a minimum of about 5 seconds already saves more than the amount of fuel necessary for restarting.
The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollutant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Regular maintenance
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even before the engine is started. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel
efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their optimal operating temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emissions.
A cold engine consumes a disproportionate amount of fuel. The engine reaches its working temperature after about four kilometres (2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return to a normal level.
Check tyre pressure
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the correct pressures >> page 377 to save fuel. If the pressure is half a bar too low, fuel consumption may increase by 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear and impairs handling. Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid carrying unnecessary loads
Given that every kilo of extra weight will increase the fuel consumption, it is advisable make sure that no unnecessary loads are being transported.
Driving
Since the luggage rack increases the aerodynamic drag of the vehicle, you should remove it when not needed. At speeds of 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will achieve fuel savings of 12%.
Save electrical energy
The engine drives the alternator, thereby generating electricity. This implies that any increase in power consumption also increases fuel consumption! For this reason, switch off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices that use a lot of electricity include the blower at a high setting, the rear window heating or the seat heating.
Plug-in hybrid drive: brake early and evenly to take advantage of energy recovery.
Note
- if you have the Start-Stop system, it is recommended that it should not be disconnected.
- It is recommended that you close the windows when driving at more than 60 km/h (37 mph).
- Do not drive with your foot rosting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the plate slip. This causes wear and can damage the clutch plate.
- Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the
bake. The fuel consumption will be lower
and you will prevent the clutch plate from
being damaged.
- Use the engine brake on downhills by changing to the gear that is best suited for the gradient. Fuel consumption will be "zero" and the brakes will not suffer.
Driving with a loaded vehicle
In order to achieve appropriate driving characteristics when the vehicle is loaded, please note the following:
- Place all luggage securely >>> page 311.
■ Accelerate with particular care and precaution
- Avoid sharp braking and sudden manoeuvres.
- Brake earlier than usual.
- If applicable, please note the information about the roof rack >> page 317.
WARNING
Loads that move around could seriously endanger the vehicle's stability and safety, extend the braking distance during hard or emergency braking and lead to serious accidents and injuries.
- Secure the load correctly to prevent it from moving around.
- Secure heavy objects with suitable lashing straps or tie-down belts.
- Ensure that the rear seat backrosts are securely engaged.
Driving with the rear lid open
Driving with the rear lid open is particularly dangerous. Secure all objects and the open rear lid correctly and take any necessary measures.
Driving with the rear lid open increases the aerodynamic drag of the vehicle, along with fuel consumption. It is therefore recommended that you do not drive with the rear lid open.
Driving indications
WARNING
Driving with the rear lid unlocked or open can cause serious injury.
• Always drive with the rear lid closed.
- Place all objects securely inside the luggage compartment. Otherwise, loose objects could fall out of the luggage compartment and injure road users driving behind.
• Always drive carefully and with special care and anticipation.
- Avoid braking and sudden manoeuvres, as the open rear lid could move uncontrollably.
* When transporting objects that protrude from the luggage compartment, mark them accordingly to warn other road users. Please bear in mind all legal provisions.
* Never use the rear lid to support or secure objects protruding from the luggage compartment.
* If a luggage rack is fitted on the rear lid, remove it and the load when you have to drive with the rear lid open.
NOTICE
An open rear lid changes the height and, in some cases, the length of the vehicle.
Note
Depending on the country, it may be forbidden to drive with the near lid open. Please observe the legal regulations of the country in question.
Driving on flooded roads
To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on flooded roads, take the following into account: • Water should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork.
■ Drive at pedestrian speed.
- Never stop the vehicle in the water, drive in reverse or stop the engine.
- Vehicles driving in the opposite direction form waves that can raise the water level so high that your vehicle will not be able to cross the water safely.
WARNING
After driving through flooded zones, braking effectiveness can decrease if the brake discs or pads are damp >>> page 193.
i Note
- Driving through flooded areas may severely damage vehicle components such as the engine, drive train or electrical system.
- Avoid driving through salt water (corrosion)
page 395.
- Whenever driving through water, the Start-Stop system must be switched off >>> page 179.
Running in
Please observe the instructions for running-in new components.
Running-in the engine
A new engine must be driven through a run-in period during its first 1500 kilometres (1000 miles). During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded down.
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km (1000 miles) influences the future engine performance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it should be driven at a moderate speed (especially when the engine is cold) to reduce engine wear and increase its useful life. Never drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always engage a lower gear when the engine works "irregularly". For the first 1000 km or 600 miles, please note:
Driving
- Do not use full throttle.
- Do not force the engine above two thirds of its maximum speed.
- Do not tow a trailer.
Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 to 1000 miles), gradually increase power until reaching the maximum speed and high engine speeds.
Running in new tyres and brake pads
- Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres >>> page 376.
• Information about brakes >>> page 193.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and the engine oil consumption reduced.
Four-wheel drive (4Drive)
On four-wheel drive models, the engine power is distributed to all four wheels
General notes
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine power is distributed to all four wheels. The distribution of power is controlled automatically according to your driving style and the road conditions. See also >>> page 194.
The four-wheel drive is specially designed to complement the higher engine power. This combination gives the vehicle exceptional handling and performance capabilities, both on normal roads and in more difficult conditions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or perhaps especially for this reason), it is important to observe certain safety points >> △.
Winter tyres
Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will have plenty of traction in winter conditions, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend that winter tyres or all-season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to give an even better braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains are mandatory, this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive >>> page 380.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four tyres must have the same rolling circumference. Also avoid using tyres with varying tread depths >>> page 376.
Off-roader?
Your CUPRA vehicle is not an off-reader: it does not have enough ground clearance to be used as such. Avoid rough tracks and uneven terrain.
WARNING
- Even with four-wheel drive, you should always adjust your speed to suit the conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Accident hazard!
- The braking capability of your vehicle is limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no different from a car without four-wheel drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast on firm or slippery roads just because the vehicle still has good acceleration in these conditions. Accident hazard!
- On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to "aquaplane" and lose contact with the road if the car is driven too fast. If this should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed to warn the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel drive car. For this reason you should always choose a driving speed suitable for the road conditions. Accident hazard!
Starting and stopping the engine.
Trips abroad
The vehicle has been manufactured for a specific country and meets the approval regulations in force in that country at the time it was manufactured.
If you are going to use the vehicle abroad temporarily or for a short period of time, please observe the relevant instructions.
Some countries have special safety regulations and provisions that the vehicle may not comply with. Before travelling abroad, CUPRA recommends that you seek information from one of your dealers about the legal provisions in force in your destination country.
If you are going to sell the vehicle in another country or use it there for a longer period of time, please observe the legal regulations in force in the country in question.
In some cases it may be necessary to install or remove certain equipment at a later date, and to deactivate certain functions. Sets and types of services may also be affected. In particular, this can occur if the vehicle is to be used in another climatic region for a long period of time. Due to the different frequency bands around the world, the factory-fitted infotainment system may not work in another country.
With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured that lead-free petrol is available throughout the journey. Seek information about service station networks selling unleaded fuel.
Due to the different technical standards that exist, it may not be possible to charge the high-voltage battery at charging stations in other countries, or it may only be possible with a suitable charging cable. You can get more information from a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT network dealer..
WARNING
As altitude increases, air density decreases. Due to the reduced air density, engine performance may be reduced and vehicle components may be damaged during prolonged operation at very high altitudes. Reduced engine power can lead to accidents and serious or fatal injuries, e.g. when overtaking.
* Before travelling abroad, especially at altitudes above 3,000 m (approx. 9,843 ft) above sea level, please contact a specialised CUPRA dealer or any dealer in the SEAT network for more information.
Note
- CUPRA cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or lack of availability of genuine spare parts. - CUPRA accepts no liability if the vehicle does not meet the legal requirements in force in other countries and continents, or if it only partially meets them.
Starting and stopping the engine.
Switching the ignition on/off
Fig. 121 Starter button
The engine can be started with a start button (Press & Drive). For this there must be a valid key inside the vehicle interior.
The 600861950hd at the bot-
tom of the centre console or, depending on the version, on the multi-function steering wheel.
Opening the driver's door when exiting the vehicle activates the electronic lock on the steering column if the ignition is switched off. For vehicles with automatic transmission, the column will only be locked if the parking lock P is activated.
Driving
Switching the ignition on/off
If you only want to switch on the ignition (without starting the engine):
- Vehicles with a manual gearbox: briefly press the start button once without pressing the brake or clutch pedal >> ▲.
- Vehicles with automatic gearbox: briefly press the start button once without pressing the brake pedal >>> △.
The start button text START ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat when the system is preset for switching the ignition on and off 4 .
Automatic ignition disconnection
When the vehicle detects that there is no driver once the engine has stopped, after a certain time the ignition is switched off automatically. If at that time the dipped beam headlights are on, the side lights will stay on for approx. 30 minutes. The side lights can be turned off by locking the vehicle >>> page 106, or manually >>> page 132.
Automatic deactivation of the ignition on vehicles with the Start-Stop system
The ignition is switched off automatically when the vehicle is stopped and the automatic engine shutdown is active, if:
• the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
• the driver does not step on any pedal,
• the driver's door is opened.
After automatically turning off the ignition, if the dipped beam is on, the side light remains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the battery has enough charge). If the driver locks the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the side light goes out.
Switching off the ignition when leaving the vehicle, with hybrid drive
When the ignition is not switched off in E-MODE operating mode, a certain amount of time after the journey is complete it switches off automatically to prevent draining the 12-volt vehicle battery.
Function "My Beat"
For vehicles with a convenience key there is the "My Best" function. This feature provides an additional vehicle ignition system indication.
When entering the vehicle, the start button >>> Fig. 121 flashes to draw attention to it. When the ignition is on/off, the engine start button flashes.
When the ignition is switched off, the start button goes off after a few seconds.
With the engine running, the start button light stays on, indicating that the engine is running. The time that elapses between the moment the user starts the engine with the start button and the lighting changing from flashing to fixed will depend on specific engine size characteristics. When the start button is used to stop the engine, the button starts flashing again.
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the "My Beat" function also offers additional information:
- When the engine stops during the Stop phase, the light of the start button stays on, as the Start-Stop system remains active even though the engine is off.
- When the engine cannot be started again with the Start-Stop system >>> page 179 and needs to be started manually, the start button fleshes to indicate this situation.
Breath alcohol ignition interlock device (breathalyser)
The vehicle is ready for the installation of a breath alcohol ignition interlock device (breathalyser with LIN communication). After installing a breath alcohol ignition interlock device, it will always be necessary to pass a breathalyser test before the ignition can be switched on.
Some vehicle functionalities may be limited.
1 Valid for versions with the start button on the centre console
Starting and stopping the engine.
WARNING
When switching on the ignition, do not press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine could start immediately.
WARNING
If vehicle keys are used negligently or without due care, this may cause accidents and serious injury.
- Never leave any key inside the vehicle when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or unauthorised person could lock the vehicle, start the engine or connect the ignition and operate any of the electrical equipment.
Note
- Before leaving the vehicle, always disconnect the ignition and, if appropriate, take into account the instructions on the dash panel screen.
- If the vehicle is stationary for a long time with the engine off and the ignition on, the vehicle battery might be discharged and it might not be possible to start the engine.
• In vehicles with diesel engines, wait until the warning light so goes off before starting the engine. - If during the STOP phase you press the START ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is switched off and the push-button flashes 21 .
- If the following indication appears on the instrument cluster display: "Start-Stop system deactivated: Start the engine manually", the button START ENGINE STOP will flash.
Starting the engine
- Vehicles with manual transmission: put the gear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedal and keep it pressed in this position until the engine starts.
- Vehicles with automatic transmission, press the brake pedal and keep it pressed in this position until the engine starts.
- Press the start button >>> Fig. 121 without pressing the accelerator. There must be a valid key in the vehicle for the engine to start.
After starting the engine, the lighting of the START ENGINE STOP button remains fixed indicating that the engine is running 7 . - If the engine does not start, stop and wait for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary, perform an emergency start >> page 173.
Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer than usual to start on cold days. During pre-heating, the warning lamp or remains lit. To avoid unnecessary discharging of the battery, do not use any other major electrical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.
The preheating time depends on the coolant and exterior temperatures. With the engine at operating temperature, or at outside temperatures above +8°C, the warning lamp will light up for about one second. This means that you can start the engine almost immediately.
Starting a diesel engine after having run out of fuel
If the fuel tank of a diesel vehicle was run until completely empty, after refuelling it can last longer than normal to start the engine, even up to a minute. This is because the fuel system must eliminate air first.
WARNING
Do not keep the engine running in confined spaces, as there is a risk of poisoning.
• The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas that can cause loss of consciousness and death.
WARNING
Do not get out of the vehicle with the engine running, especially if a gear is engaged. The vehicle could then suddenly move or something strange could happen that would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
Valid for versions with the start button on the centre console
Driving
WARNING
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Doing this risks injury.
NOTICE
• The starter motor or the engine may be damaged if you try to restart the engine immediately after switching it off.
- When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine, as this could cause engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Note
Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily when the engine starts.
- When starting with a cold engine, noise levels may briefly increase. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
- When the outside temperature is below +5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, some smoke may appear under the vehicle when the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.
Turning off the engine
- Bring the vehicle to a full stop >>> △.
- Vehicles with manual transmission: fully depress the clutch.
- Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Switch on the parking lock by pressing button P.
- Apply the electronic parking brake.
- Briefly press the start button >>> Fig. 121.
Car wash function (hybrid vehicles)
When the ignition is turned off with gear N activated, the vehicle can roll for the next 30 minutes. After that time, if the vehicle is stopped the parking lock P activates automatically. The corresponding warning message is displayed on the instrument cluster display one minute before this happens.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause loss of control of the vehicle, accidents and serious injury.
• The airbags and seatbelt pretensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off.
- The brake servo does not work when the engine is switched off. Therefore, when the engine is switched off, the brake pedal has to be pressed harder to stop the vehicle.
- The power steering does not work when the engine is switched off. When the engine is switched off, more force is required to turn the steering wheel.
- If the ignition is switched off, the steering column lock may activate, leaving the vehicle impossible to control.
WARNING
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle. This is particularly important if there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the power windows), which could cause injuries.
Starting and stopping the engine.
NOTICE
* If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system switches off the engine, the ignition remains switched on. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the ignition is switched off, otherwise the battery will discharge.
- If the engine has been driven at high speed for a prolonged period of time, it may overheat when switched off. To avoid damage, allow the engine to run for approximately two minutes in neutral before switching it off.
Note
After stopping the engine, the radiator fan may continue to run for a few minutes, even with the ignition switched off. It may also start up again if the coolant temperature rises due to heat building-up under the engine compartment or if the engine gets even hotter due to prolonged exposure to sunlight.
Electronic immobilizer
The electronic immobiliser helps to prevent the engine from being started with an unauthorised key and, consequently, the vehicle being put in motion.
The vehicle key has an integrated chip which automatically deactivates the electronic immobiliser if there is a valid key inside the vehicle interior.
The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when there is no longer a valid key inside the vehicle.
For this reason, the engine can only be started with a correctly coded Original CUPRA key. This type of key can be purchased from a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT network dealer.
NOTICE
The correct operation of the vehicle is only guaranteed with original CUPRA keys.
Emergency starting function
Fig. 122 On the centre renvoie: emergency start.
if no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, an emergency start-up will be required. The relevant message will appear in the dash panel display. This may happen when, for example, the vehicle key battery is very low.
- Immediately after pushing the start button, place the key in the drink holder of the centre console >>> Fig. 122, as close as possible to the Kossy logo.
- The ignition connects and the engine starts automatically.
Indications for the driver on the instrument cluster display
Depress the clutch
- This indication is displayed on vehicles with a manual gearbox when the driver does not depress the clutch pedal when starting the engine. The engine can only be started if the clutch pedal is depressed.
Press the brake
- This massage appears on vehicles with an automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start the engine without pressing the brake pedal.
Press the brake to engage a gear
This indication is displayed when starting or stopping the engine if the automatic transmission selector lever is in position D or R and the brake pedal is not depressed. The engine can only be started and stopped in these positions.
Driving
Engage position P; the vehicle can move; doors can only be locked in position P.
For safety reasons, this driver message appears and an audible warning sounds if the parking lock button P is not pressed after switching off the engine. Press button P otherwise the vehicle could move.
Ignition is switched on
- This driver message is displayed and a buzzer sounds when the driver's door is opened with the ignition switched on.
Driving with electric drive Switching on the hybrid drive sys- tem
√ Valid for: hybrid vehicles
Switching on the hybrid drive activates the vehicle's propulsion system. When the vehicle's drive system is switched on, the electric drive is activated. The combustion engine starts automatically when the charge level of the high-voltage battery is not sufficient to run with the electric drive, or if high drive power is required. To access driving with the electric drive in the infotainment system:
- Select: Ⓞ > Charging > Battery Manager.
Requirements for switching on the drive system
The drive system can be switched on when the following conditions are met:
- The high voltage battery has a sufficient charge level.
- There is no charging cable plugged in.
• The temperature of the high-voltage battery is within the operating range.
- There is a valid remote control key in the vehicle.
Switching on the drive system
- Press the ignition and start button once. The ignition must be switched on.
- Press the brake pedal and hold it down.
- Set the gear selector switch to position N or activate the parking lock P.
- Press the ignition and start button
Fig. 121 until indicator lamp READY lights up on the instrument cluster. Do not press the accelerator. Release the ignition and start button when the indicator lamp READY lights up on the instrument cluster. The mark on the power display changes from OFF to 0.
- If the indicator lamp does not light up, cancel and repeat the operation.
- If the vehicle has been locked with the remote control key, the ignition and start button is deactivated. If you are inside the vehi-
cle and have to start the engine, first unlock the vehicle or perform an emergency start >>> page 173.
i Note
A click is heard when the drive system is turned on. This is completely normal and does not mean there is a problem.
Detecting the drive system
With the electric drive, the motor makes no noticeable noise when the drive system is switched on or while driving. Therefore, you cannot detect that the vehicle's drive system is on by engine noise. Instead, the following characteristics show that the vehicle is ready to drive:
- The indication 0 >>> page 20 is displayed on the power gauge of the instrument cluster.
- The display light on the instrument cluster is on, regardless of whether the vehicle's exterior lighting is on.
- The indicator lamp READY is on in the instrument cluster display.
• An audible signal is heard.
Driving with electric drive
Switching on the drive system in very low outside temperatures
If the outside temperature is very low (approximately -27°C (-16°F) or lower), the high-voltage battery may freeze and stop working. In this case it's not possible to switch on the drive system.
As soon as the temperature of the high-voltage battery has increased enough, the drive system can be switched on again.
To ensure that the drive system can be switched on, even in very low outside temperatures, CUPRA recommends parking the vehicle in a place protected from the cold.
Behaviour when moving off or stopping
The combustion engine only runs if necessary. When the vehicle is stationary, the combustion engine is normally switched off and the vehicle's electrical systems are powered by the high-voltage battery. The rev counter on the instrument cluster remains at 0>>> page 20.
The combustion engine switches off in certain driving conditions. This is normal and aims to save fuel. In general, the power steering and brake assist systems remain on. In isolated cases the system may require the combustion engine to carry on running even when the vehicle is stationary.
In traffic jams the combustion engine may start up while the vehicle is stationary to recharge the high voltage battery for subsequent driving off and stopping phases.
Driving
Operating mode selection
√ Valid for: hybrid vehicles
The vehicle has different operating modes so that it can always be optimally adjusted to every situation while driving. Once the drive system has been turned on, and provided that all of the operating conditions required for this purpose have been met, the Electric mode operating mode is always activated in the first instance for electric driving.
Operating mode selection
- Switch on the drive system
- Access the Battery manager menu of the infotainment system (☒) > Charging > Battery manager!
- Select Electric Mode or Hybrid Mode in the infotainment system. Further information about the operating mode can be found in (1) (2) Fig. 123 (4).
Electric mode (driving in electric mode) 1 In electric mode, the vehicle basically drives in electric only mode. To the extent possible, the vehicle's combustion engine is not used. All of the following conditions must be met for the Electric mode to be activated:
Fig. 123 In the In 2 otainment system: Battery manager menu
- The high voltage battery has a sufficient charge level.
• The vehicle speed is lower than 130 km/h (80 mph).
- The high voltage battery temperature is above -10°C.
If, while driving in Electric mode, the necessary conditions are no longer met. the combustion engine starts and electric driving is suspended. In this case, the indicator lights up on the instrument cluster display.
The displayed symbol varies depending on the active operating mode and the charge level of the high-voltage battery.
Driving with electric drive
The combustion engine starts when a kick-down occurs in Electric mode. However, Electric mode remains on.
Hybrid mode ⊖ (use the battery's charge)
This is the operating mode that allows you to save most fuel.
The operating mode control unit tries to make the most of the battery charge. For this purpose, with active directions the navigation data are also accessed.
In this operating mode, the electric motor and the combustion engine share the work of driving the vehicle.
In hybrid operating mode, the power from the battery charge is used optimally. If route guidance is activated, the vehicle may autonomously recharge the high-voltage battery using the combustion engine.
Manual control of the battery charge
Manual control of the battery charge is only possible in Hybrid mode. The option selected by the user is only valid until the ignition is switched off or the vehicle is switched to Hybrid mode or Electric mode.
Key to >>> Fig. 123:
① The horizontal bar can be used to select a lower theoretical charge level of the high voltage battery. The system does not all
low the selection of a higher charge level than the one that is displayed. The vehicle only uses the battery's charge when it is above the selected theoretical charge level. The rest is kept until the end of the
② Maintaining the battery level. The high-voltage battery charge level is kept at around the current level while driving. If you accelerate harder or increase the vehicle speed, the combustion engine starts up. When permitted by the driver's demand for acceleration and the vehicle speed, the vehicle switches back to electric mode. CUPRA recommends using the charging socket to charge the high-voltage battery, whenever possible >> page 81.
③ Adjust the recuperation level. Allows you to select between different levels of recuperation: Smooth, Auto or Strong. If there is no active route, the system will offer the activation of a predictive route to run in a more efficient hybrid mode.
Smooth: In this mode recuperation is low. The level of recuperation can be adjusted in combination with the gear shift, using the steering wheel paddles.
Auto: In "ECO" and "Comfort" driving modes, recuperation is generally smooth, although it can be strong, depending on the driving situation. If the "Cupra" or
“Performance” driving mode is selected, recuperation will be strong. The level of recuperation can be adjusted in combination with the gear shift, using the steering wheel paddles.
Strong: The vehicle recuperates as much energy as possible, depending on the situation. If the brake pedal is depressed, the vehicle also recovers energy through the high-voltage system. If the recuperation level is Strong, the brake lights will also light up to indicate that the vehicle is decelerating.
For the most efficient driving possible, we recommend activating the efficiency assistant >> page 208, driving in "ECO" driving mode, setting the gear shift to D and the recuperation mode to Auto.
WARNING
Medium and strong energy recuperation can cause loss of traction and skidding, particularly on slippery roads. This can lead to loss of control of the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.
- Only activate the high recuperation level if visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions permit, and if other road users are not at risk due to your vehicle's deceleration behaviour and driving style.
The displayed symbol varies depending on the active operating mode and the charge level of the high voltage battery.
Driving
WARNING
The higher the charge level of the high-voltage battery, the lower the braking effect of the engine, to the extent that there may be no braking effect due to recuperation. This can change the behaviour of the vehicle, which is likely to be a
which can be fatal injuries.
- Do not fully charge the high-voltage battery at high altitude, such as at the top of a mountain pass, to allow the use of the recuperation braking effect when driving downhill.
- Reduce speed before driving on a steep gradient.
- Reduce the vehicle's speed by using the vehicle brakes when driving on a steep gradient.
- Note that there is a higher load on the vehicle's brakes if there is no engine braking effect.
Show the active operating mode
The operating mode active at any given time is displayed on the instrument cluster display, e.g. 0.
WARNING
Switching to a different operating mode while driving can distract you from traffic conditions and cause accidents.
Note
Information about the operating mode that is currently active is displayed on the instrument cluster display, along with the charge level of the high-voltage battery.
Vehicle sound
√ Valid for: hybrid vehicles
The electric drive makes much less noise than a combustion engine. In the versions for some countries, artificial vehicle sound is generated to allow the vehicle to be heard better from the outside. At higher speeds, when the noise produced by the tyres and the wind increases, the vehicle's sound automatically fades out.
WARNING
During electric driving, the auditory perception of the vehicle by other road users may be much lower. This is especially true in traffic-restricted areas and when manoeuvring or reversing. Accident hazard!
Troubleshooting
√ Valid for hybrid vehicles
Drive: Fault! Stop the vehicle safely The warning lamp lights up red.
There is a fault in the vehicle's drive system. The vehicle's drive system is no longer available. Park the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Seek professional assistance.
Drive: Fault! The electric drive is not working properly. Visit a workshop
The warning lamp lights up yellow.
There is a fault in the vehicle's drive system. Drive slowly to a specialised workshop to have the fault repaired.
Drive: Warning! Power is limited. Check the manual
The warning lamp lights up yellow.
Performance limited. The high-voltage battery may not be sufficiently charged or may have reached its operating temperature limit, for example in very cold outside temperatures.
Vehicle sound: Fault! Pedestrians cannot hear the vehicle. Visit a workshop
The warning lamp lights up yellow.
There is a vehicle sound fault. Drive with utmost care, as other road users may not be able to hear the electric vehicle. Go immediately to a specialised workshop to have the fault repaired.
Start-Stop system
System power limited
The warning lamp lights up yellow.
A warning text accompanied by an audible warning is displayed on the instrument cluster. System power is limited as it is not possible to use the combustion engine.
- The available power can be monitored on the instrument cluster >> page 20.
- If the combustion engine cannot be started due to lack of fuel (empty tank), refuel as soon as possible. If the charge level of the high-voltage battery is low and it is not possible to use the combustion engine, the vehicle will be immobilised.
As soon as the combustion engine is available again, the warning light on the instrument cluster will go out.
Electric Mode is not available
The indicator lamp lights up in white.
The electric mode 0 (driving in electric mode) cannot be used temporarily because one or more conditions are not met.
- Meet the conditions for using the Electric mode >>> page 174.
Start-Stop system
Description and operation
Not valid for PHEV hybrid vehicles
The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel and reduce CO2 emissions.
In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automatically switch off when the vehicle stops or is stopping. The ignition remains switched on. The engine automatically switches back on when required.
In this scenario, the light of the START ENGINE STOP button remains lit. 1
When the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is automatically activated.
Controllamps
The Start-Stop system is available, the
automatic engine shutdown is active.
The Start-Stop system is not available or
has been disconnected.
Stopping and starting the engine
Vehicles with a manual gearbox:
- When the vehicle is stopped, put it into neutral and release the clutch pedal. The engine will stop. The warning lamp (A) will light up on the display. The engine may stop before the vehicle comes to a standstill (approximately 7 km/h).
- When you depress the clutch pedal, the engine will start again. The indicator lamp goes out.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox:
- Brake until the vehicle has come to a standstill, and keep your foot on the brake pedal or activate the Auto Hold function so that the vehicle remains braked. The engine will stop. The warning lamp (A) will appear on the display. The engine may stop before the vehicle comes to a standstill (approximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on the vehicle's gearbox).
- When you take your foot off the brake pedal the engine will start up again. The indicator lamp goes out. When the Auto Hold system is active, the engine will not start if you remove your foot from the brake pedal. The car starts when you press the accelerator pedal.
Driving
Basic requirements for the start/stop mode
• The driver's door must be closed.
- The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
• The bonnet must be closed.
- The engine has reached operating temperature.
• The reverse gear must not be engaged.
- The vehicle must not be on a very steep slope.
The engine does not turn off for various reasons
Before stopping the vehicle, the system verifies whether certain conditions are met. The engine does not switch off in the following situations, for example:
- The engine has not yet reached the required temperature for the Start-Stop mode.
• The temperature selected on the climate control has not been reached.
- If maximum (HI) or minimum (LO) temperature is requested in the air conditioner.
- De-icing function button ℝ activated.
• Park assist is switched on.
• The battery is very low.
- The steering wheel is turned too far or is being turned.
• If there is a danger of misting.
• After engaging reverse gear
• In case of a very steep gradient.
- In a traffic jam after stopping for the fifth time, the engine will not stop any more.
• With ESC disabled.
- After emergency braking or loss of adhesion
- With a trailer attached.
■ While the particulate filter is regenerating.
• The Offroad driving profile is active.
The instrument cluster screen displays
The engine starts by itself
When stopped, the normal system mode may be interrupted in the following situations. The engine restarts without the driver's intervention.
• The interior temperature differs from the temperature selected on the climate control.
- Defrost function button activated
• The brake is pressed several times in a row.
- The battery is not charged enough.
• High electricity consumption.
- The vehicle rolls forward or backward with the engine off.
- ESC deactivated.
- With manual gearbox: The accelerator pedal is depressed.
With automatic gearbox: The accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The steering wheel is turned slightly. 2
- When the air conditioning is activated.
• Exhaust system temperature is too low
• The Offroaddriving profile is activated.
Additional information related to the automatic gearbox
The engine stops when the selector lever is in D. N and S, as well as in Tiptronic mode. When the parking lock button P is activated, the engine will also remain off when you remove your foot from the brake.
In MHEV vehicles the stop does not occur in S or in Tiptronic mode.
In order to start the engine up again the accelerator must be pressed, or another gear engaged or the brake released.
If the selector lever is placed in R while stopped, the engine will start up again.
Additional information about vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
In vehicles with the ACC function, the engine will start up again in certain operating conditions if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle ahead drives off again.
Start-Stop system
WARNING
- Never switch the engine off until the vehicle is stationary. The operation of the brake and steering will not be fully guaranteed. More force will be needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. You could suffer an accident and even serious injuries. - To avoid injury, make sure that the Start Stop system is switched off when working in the engine compartment >> page 181.
NOTICE
The Start-Stop system must always be switched off when driving through flooded areas >>> page 167.
Note
- In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you can control whether the engine should switch off or not by reducing or increasing the brake force applied. While the vehicle remains stopped, the engine will not stop if the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with frequent stopping and starting for example. As soon as strong pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the engine will stop. - When stopped, the brake pedal must be kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle does not move. - If the engine "stalls" with a manual gearbox, it can be directly started up again by immediately pressing the clutch pedal.
- If the lever is placed in position D, N or S after engaging reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards direction must be reached for the system to be in a condition to stop the engine.
Manually connecting and disconnecting the Start-Stop system
Not valid for PHEV hybrid vehicles
Fig. 124 In the nf otainment system: Start-Stop system (accessible from different, infotainment menus)
Fig. 124
(A) System disconnected.
System connected
If you do not wish to use the system, you can switch it off manually:
- In the infotainment system select □ > Assistants > Smart Assistants.
Note
When the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop system activates automatically.
Troubleshooting
Not valid for PHEV hybrid vehicles
Indications for the driver on the instrument cluster screen
A warning will be displayed whenever there is an error or the Start-Stop system is switched on/off.
"Start the engine manually"
- This indication shows that the Start-Stop system cannot restart the engine.
This happens for 2 reasons: if the driver's door has been opened or if the driver has unbuckled the seat belt.
"Start-Stop system: Fault! Function not available"
- There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault repaired.
Driving
Manual gearbox
Changing gears
![graph TD A["Step 1"] --> B["Step 2"] B --> C["Step 3"] C --> D["Step 4"] D --> E["Step 5"] E --> F["Step 6"] F --> G["R"] G --> A style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333 style F fill:#f9f,st…](/content/2026/07/1441719/images/867c7a516b7006e2089e6a635f572e54084802a5b7936e1cf32248ad479106b5.jpg)
Fig. 125 Diagram of a 5-speed manual gearbox
Gear positions are indicated on the gear lever >>> Fig. 125.
- Depress the clutch and keep your foot as far as it will go.
- Move the gear lever to the desired position
- Release the clutch.
Engaging reverse gear
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stopped.
- Depress the clutch and keep your foot as far as it will go.
- With the gear lever in neutral, push it down, move it all the way to the left and then forwards to select reverse gear >> Fig. 125®.
- Release the clutch.
Changing to lower gears
When driving, you should always change down through the gears progressively, i.e. to the gear immediately below when engine RPM is not too high >> △. Skipping one or several gears when changing down through the gears at high speed or high RPM can cause damage to the clutch and gearbox, even if the clutch is depressed >> ◎.
WARNING
If the engine is running, the vehicle starts moving as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is released. This also happens if the electronic parking brake is switched on. * Never engage reverse gear while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Changing down through the gears incorrectly by selecting a gear that is too low can lead to loss of control of the vehicle and cause accidents and serious injuries.
NOTICE
Engaging a gear that is too low when driving at high speed or at high engine RPM can cause considerable damage to the clutch and gearbox. This can happen even if the clutch pedal is kept depressed and the gear is not engaged.
NOTICE
Consider the following to avoid damage and premature wear:
- Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure exerted by the hand is transmitted to the gearbox forks.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal; even if the pressure seems insignificant, it can cause premature wear of the clutch disc. Use the footrest when not changing gears.
• Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before engaging reverse gear.
- When changing gears, always fully depress the clutch.
- Do not "ride" the clutch with the engine running when the vehicle is stopped on an uphill slope.
DSG automatic transmission
DSG automatic transmis-sion
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled manual gearbox. Torque between the engine and the gearbox is transmitted via two independent clutches. They replace the torque converter found on conventional automatic gearboxes and allow for smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the vehicle.
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to change gears manually >>> page 184, Changing gear in Tiptronic mode.
Gear selector positions
Fig. 126 On the centre console selector lesser.
The gear selector position is shown by the corresponding sign lighting up. The engaged gear is also displayed on the screen in manual shift positions M, D, S and E (when the Eco >> page 190 engine setting is selected in the Individual profile).
In certain versions, S+ or M+ is also displayed on the screen when the Drift or CUPRA profile is selected. S+ and M+ are more extreme shift modes than the conventional Sport (S) mode.
P - Parking lock
When the P button is pressed, the drive wheels are locked. Only press P when the vehicle is stationary >>> △
To press the P button you must press the brake pedal simultaneously.
R-Reverse gear
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling >>> △.
To engage reverse gear R, you must press the brake pedal simultaneously. The reverse lights switch on when the reverse gear R is selected and the ignition is on.
N-Neutral
In this position, the gear is in neutral.
Press the brake pedal to move the lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) >> △.
D/S - Permanent forward drive position
The D/S position enables the gears to be operated in normal mode (D) or sport mode (S). To select Sport mode S, move the lever backwards. Pushing the lever again will select normal mode D. The selected driving mode is displayed on the instrument cluster display.
In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the best gear ratio. This depends on the engine load, speed and the dynamic regulation program (DRP).
Sport mode (S) should be selected for a sporty driving style. This setting makes use of the engine's maximum power output. When accelerating, gear shifting operations are perceptible. Under certain circumstances (e.g. on mountain roads) it can be advantageous to switch to tiptronic mode >> page 184, to adapt the gears to suit the road conditions.
Driving
WARNING
• Take care not to press the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The vehicle could start moving immediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.
- Never move the lever to position R when driving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident or failure.
- With lever in any position, the foot brake must be depressed whenever the engine is running. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed.
- Do not accelerate while selecting a gear, with the car stationary and the engine running. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident.
• The driver must never leave the vehicle while the engine is running and with a gear engaged. Switch on the electronic parking brake and select the parking lock (P).
Note
- If the lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, release the accelerator and let the engine speed drop to idle before selecting gear range D or S again.
- If the power supply is interrupted while the P parking lock is active, it will not be possible to move the lever. If this should happen the manual release can be used. In this case, you should seek professional assistance.
Note
- if a gear has been selected, the vehicle does not move forwards or back. Proceed to the next mode:
- If the vehicle does not move in the desired direction, the gear ratio may not be correctly engaged by the system. Depress the brake pedal and reselect the gear range.
- if the vehicle still does not move in the desired direction, there is a system failure. Seek specialist help and have the system checked.
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode
Fig. 127 S. eering wheel automatic gearbox levers
Tiptronic gives the driver the option to change gears manually.
When you change to the Tiptronic programme, the vehicle remains in the currently selected gear. This is possible as long as the system is not changing gear automatically due to a traffic situation.
Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel paddles.
The gear shift paddles can be used when the selector lever is in the D/S position.
- Press the gear shift, paddle to change up a gear) Fig. 127.
- Press the ⏻ gear shift paddle to change down a gear.
• To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-hand gear shirt paddle towards the steering wheel for approximately 1 second.
To keep Tiptronic mode permanently switched on, move the selector lever to the S position if the selector lever is in position D and the gear shift paddles are not operated for some time, the Tiptronic mode will automatically be switched off.
DSG automatic transmission
NOTICE
* When accelerating, if a higher gear is not selected. It will automatically change shortly before reaching the maximum permitted RPM.
- Also, if a lower gear is selected, the system will not change until it detects that the engine will not reach its maximum RPM.
Driving with an automatic gearbox
Shifting to a higher or lower gear is automatic. The engine can only be started with the lever in the N position and the P button must be lit up (the parking lock remains active).
Driving downhill
Under certain circumstances it may be advantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to select the gear manually according to driving conditions >>> △
Stop/Park
To park on flat ground, just press the P >>> Fig. 126 button. On slopes the parking brake should first be applied and then press the P button.
If the driver door is opened and the P button has not been activated, the vehicle could move. The following warning is displayed on
the instrument panel: © Gear change: Selector lever in the drive position. A buzzing sound is also heard.
Stopping on a downhill
Always apply the brake pedal firmly to prevent the vehicle from moving: if necessary, apply the electronic parking brake >>> △.
Do not accelerate while a range of gears is engaged to prevent the car from rolling downhill.
Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold function
- Once you have engaged a gear, take your foot off the brake pedal and gently press the accelerator.
Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold function
- Pull on the electronic parking brake button.
- Once you have engaged a gear, gently press the accelerator and pull on the electronic parking brake button.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings!!! △ in Gear selector positions on page 184.
- Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often or for long periods, as the brakes can overheat. This reduces the braking power, increases the braking distance or even causes a brake system fault.
• If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehicle's brakes applied with the brake pedal or parking brake.
NOTICE
- When stopping the vehicle on an uphill slope, do not try to avoid shifting into gear and depressing the accelerator. This could overheat and damage the automatic gearbox.
* If you allow the vehicle to roll with the lever in position N and the engine off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged due to a lack of lubrication.
• In certain driving situations or traffic conditions, the gears could overheat and be damaged! If the warning lamp ① lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as you can and wait for the gearbox to cool >> page 187.
- If the gearbox operates in emergency mode, have the fault repaired by a specialist workshop without delay.
Driving
Kick-down
The kick-down device provides maximum acceleration when the gear selector lever is in the positions D, S or in Tiptronic mode.
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear, depending on speed and engine speed. This uses the vehicle's maximum acceleration >> △.
The shift to the next higher gear will not take place until the preset maximum engine RPM is reached.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slippery or wet, the kickdown feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.
Launch-control program
The Launch-control program enables maximum acceleration from a standstill.
Condition: the engine must have reached operating temperature and the steering wheel must not be turned.
The engine RPM for Launch-control is different for petrol and diesel engines.
To use Launch-control you must disconnect the traction control (TCS) or activate the ESC Sport or ESC OFF mode, using the Infotain-
ment system menu press the function button ☐ > Assistants > Smart Assistants or press the ESC off button >> page 196. The lamp ☐ will remain on.
- Press the brake pedal with your left foot and hold it down for at least one second.
- Set the selector lever to position S or Tiptronic, or select the Sport or Cupra Drive Profile >> page 190.
- With your right foot, press the accelerator down to the full throttle or kick-down position. The engine speed is set at approximately 2000 rpm to 4000 rpm, depending on the engine version.
• Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The vehicle starts with maximum acceleration.
WARNING
• Always adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
- Only use the Launch control programme when road and traffic conditions permit, and make sure your manner of driving and accelerating the vehicle does not inconvenience or endanger other road users.
- Make sure that the ESC remains switched on. Please note that when the TCS and ESC are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Accident hazard!
• After moving off, you should activate the TCS or deactivate the ESC "sport" mode again using the infotainment system: function button ☐ > Assistants > Smart Assistants or by pressing the ESC off button >>> page 196.
i Note
- Dynamic driving or using a launch-control program may considerably raise the temperature of the catalytic converter or gearbox. In this case, the program may be out of service for a few minutes. The program may be used again once the cooling phase is complete.
- Accelerating with the Launch control programme places a heavy load on all parts of the vehicle. This can result in increased wear and tear.
Inertia mode
The inertia mode allows you to travel certain distances without using the accelerator, which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the inertia mode to "let" the vehicle "roll".
DSG automatic transmission
Activation of the inertia mode
Combustion engine vehicles (not PHEVs, not mHEVs):
- The function is only available when the "Eco" drive profile is selected, when the accelerator is not depressed and at speeds between 7 and 130km / h (between 4 and 80 mph ).
- If when driving below about 22 km/h (about 14 mph) and you press the brake with the intention of stopping, the engine may switch off and remain off until the vehicle comes to a stop. The system can automatically start the engine to ensure that power is supplied to the electrical system or to ensure its own start-up. Mild hybrid electric vehicles (mHEV):
- The function is only available when the "Eco" or "Comfort" drive profile is selected, when the accelerator is not depressed and at speeds between 7 and 160km / h (between 4 and 99mph ).
- If you apply the brakes and the vehicle slows to a stop below about 40 km/h (about 25 mph), the engine switches off until the vehicle comes to a stop. The system can automatically start the engine to ensure that power is supplied to the electrical system or to ensure its own start-up.
- If you press the brake when in inertia mode to stop above about 40 km/h (about 25 mph), the inertia mode will be interrupted and the engine will start.
- When stopping without braking, the engine automatically restarts at minimum speed to allow maneuvering.
Start and cancel inertia mode
Start:
- Select the "Eco" drive profile. Or, in mHEVs, select the "Comfort" drive profile.
- Take your foot off the accelerator. The engine will disengage and run at idle. The vehicle runs without the engine braking effect. The engine may switch off in vehicles with a mHEV system.
Cancelling inertia mode:
- Press the accelerator.
Alternatively, pull the automatic gear shift paddle towards the steering wheel.
WARNING
- If the inertia mode has been switched on, take into account, when approaching an obstacle, that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usual manner: Accident risk!
- When using inertia mode while travelling down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: Accident risk!
■ If other users drive your vehicle, warn them about inertia mode.
NOTICE
The operation of the inertia mode in combination with hybrid engines (mHEV and PHEV) can cause the combustion engine to switch off.
NOTICE
The inertia mode will be automatically disconnected on gradients steeper than 15%.
Troubleshooting
The engine does not start
The indicator lamp lights up green
The brake is not depressed, e.g. when trying to change the gear selector lever.
• To select a gear range, press the brake pedal.
Indications on the instrument cluster display:
Clutch
Clutch overheated Please stop!
- The clutch has overheated and could be damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to cool with the engine idling and press the P parking lock button. When the warning lamp and the driver message turn off, go to a specialised workshop to get the fault repaired. If they do not turn off, do not continue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
Driving
Faults in the gearbox
Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle and place the lever in P
- There is an anomaly in the gearbox. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not continue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
Gearbox: System fault! You may continue driving
- Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.
Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving with restrictions. Reverse gear disabled
• Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.
Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving in D until switching off the engine
- Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Seek specialist assistance.
Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your driving accordingly
- Continue driving slowly. When the warning lamp goes out, you can continue driving normally.
Gearbox: press the brake and engage a gear again
- If the warning was caused by the temperature of the gearbox, this driver message will be displayed when the gearbox has cooled again.
Emergency mode
If all the gear positions are shown over a light background on the instrument cluster, there is a system fault and the automatic gearbox will operate with the backup programme. It is still possible to drive the vehicle, but at low speeds and within a selected range of gears. Driving in reverse gear may not be possible.
Parking lock manual release mechanism
If, in the event of a power failure (e.g. the 12-volt vehicle battery is drained), the vehicle must be towed and the parking lock can be released manually. In this case, you should seek professional assistance.
Driving on slopes
Hill Hold Control (HHC)
When driving up a slope or driving in Offroad with the lever in position D/S, stopping the vehicle switches on the hill hold control.
When the brake pedal is released, the assistant keeps the vehicle's brakes applied for a few seconds to give the driver time to press the accelerator pedal and continue driving.
downhill assistant
Downhill speed control is activated when the gear lever is in the D/S position and the brake is applied. An appropriate lower gear is engaged.
The assistant attempts to maintain the speed at which the vehicle was travelling when the brake was applied, within logical limits. It may be necessary to correct the speed by pressing the brake.
The assistant can only change down as far as 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep slopes you may have to switch to tiptronic mode and then manually change down to 2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of engine braking and take the load off the brake system.
Downhill speed control is deactivated as soon as the road levels out again or you press the accelerator pedal.
On vehicles with a cruise control system >>> page 204, downhill speed control is activated when you set a cruising speed.
Steering
WARNING
The downhill speed control cannot defy the laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be kept constant in all situations. Always be prepared to use the brakes!
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
√ Valid for vehicles: with 4Drive all-wheel drive
The HDC function is activated automatically when driving down a steep hill in Offroad mode.
Hill Descent Control limits speed on steep downhill gradients by automatically braking all four wheels, helping the driver to maintain precise control of the vehicle on off-road gradients without having to constantly apply the brakes.
The system works in both forward and reverse, even if the N position is selected on the gearbox. Keeping the anti-lock brake system active prevents the wheels from locking.
In vehicles with manual gearboxes, the Hill Descent Control adapts the theoretical speed without braking the engine below its idling speed.
Hill Descent Control is available when the dash panel display shows the message ⚠.
Controllamps
Lights up white. HDC is active.
Lights up grey.
HDC is on, but is not acting because the required conditions are not met.
After starting the descent of a steep hill at less than 30 km/h (18 mph) when the system is on, the HDC will activate automatically if neither the accelerator nor brake pedals are depressed. The speed is limited to a minimum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of 30 km/h (18 mph).
At any time, the driver can increase or decrease the speed within the above-mentioned limit by depressing the accelerator or the brake. The function is then temporarily interrupted while the speed is being regulated and then activated again if applicable.
However, it is essential that the surface ensures sufficient grip. For this reason, the Hill Descent Control will not perform its function when, for example, descending a slope with a frozen or slippery surface.
The Hill Descent Control intervenes automatically if the following conditions are met:
• The vehicle's engine is running.
- The Offroad drive profile has been selected >>> page 191. Driving at a speed below 30 km/h (18 mph) (the message ≈ is shown on the dash panel display).
• The downward gradient is at least 10%.
- Neither the brake nor accelerator pedal is depressed.
The hill descent control is deactivated if the gradient is less than 5%. The function can be switched off manually in the infotainment system using the □ > Assistants > Smart Assistants > HDC function button.
WARNING
Always be ready to apply the brakes. Failure to do so could result in an accident and injury.
- The hill descent control is only an auxiliary system which in some situations may not be able to brake the vehicle sufficiently when going downhill.
- The vehicle's speed may increase despite the intervention of the hill descent control.
Steering
Information relating to different vehicle processes.
To make the vehicle more difficult to steal, always lock the steering before leaving the it.
Steering
On vehicles with electromechanical steering, the power steering automatically adjusts according to the driving speed, the steering
Driving
wheel torque and the orientation of the wheels. The power steering only works when the engine is running.
If the power steering does not work properly or does not work at all, you will have to use much more strength than usual to turn the steering wheel.
Progressive steering
Depending on the vehicle's features, it may or may not incorporate a progressive steering system.
In city traffic you do not need to turn so much on parking, maneuvering or in very tight turns. On roads or motorway, progressive steering transmits, for example, in bends, a sportier, more direct and noticeably more dynamic driving sensation.
Steering assist
This help assists the driver in critical situations. It recommends turning the steering wheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre (counter-storing), turning slightly to avoid skidding >>> △.
WARNING
Steering assist helps the driver in critical situations. The driver is the person who has to control the vehicle's steering at all times.
Troubleshooting
! Steering fault
The warning lamp lights up recl.
There is a fault in the power steering.
- Stop driving! Seek specialist assistance.
- Do not allow the vehicle to be towed on its own wheels.
Steering fault
The control lamp lights up or flashes yellow. The steering is stiffer or reacts more sensitively than usual.
The control lamp lights up and remains lit:
- Restart the engine and drive slowly for a short distance. Contact a specialist workshop if the control lamp remains on.
- OR: the 12-volt battery was disconnected and reconnected. Drive slowly for a short distance.
The control lamp flashes:
- Turn the steering wheel slightly from one side to the other.
• Turn off the ignition and turn it on again.
- Consider the warnings shown on the instrument cluster display.
- If the control lamp continues flashing after the ignition has been switched on, do not continue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
Drive Profiles
Introduction
The driver can use the drive profiles to adapt various features of the vehicle's systems to the current driving situation, the desired driving comfort and an economical driving style. Some of the systems that can be adapted are the suspension, steering, engine and air conditioning.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, various drive profiles can be selected. The degree of influence of the vehicle's systems on the different drive profiles depends on the vehicle's equipment.
Engine
Depending on the profile selected, the engine responds more quickly or smoothly to the accelerator being pressed.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the behaviour of the transmission is modified, whenever a gear is changed up and down, and at other times. The idle speed and gear position can also be changed according to the selected profile.
The Inertia Mode function can also be switched on by selecting the Comfort profile, or from the Individual profile by putting the engine into ECO mode. This allows fuel consumption to be reduced. Other factors can cause it to switch on >> page 186.
Drive Profiles
With manual transmission, the ECO profile changes the gear change recommendations to facilitate more efficient driving.
Engine sound
Depending on the equipment and the selected profile, it modifies the acoustic sensation in the vehicle's interior and the outside sound levels. It acts on several components of the vehicle to increase or decrease the engine and intake noise, as well as the noise from the exhaust system. The configuration is preset for each profile and can be modified in the individual profile.
Dynamic chassis control (DCC)
The DCC continuously adapts the damping of the suspension system to the characteristics of the road surface and the driving situation (speed, acceleration and steering wheel angle) according to the selected drive profile. The vehicle's dynamic behaviour is also adapted to improve grip on curves and turning capacity. Within the individual profile you can also adjust the DCC level in a customised manner, in the event of a fault in the DCC, the following massage is displayed on the instrument cluster display: Fault: damping adjustment.
Four-wheel drive (4Drive)
Modify the transmission to adjust the vehicle's traction capacity to suit the road surface. The acceleration capacity from a standstill will also be modified.
Steering
The operation of the power steering is modified and adapted to the selected profile to offer the best behaviour for each situation.
Air conditioning
Climatronic can operate in Eco mode, especially restricting fuel consumption.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Depending on the drive profile, the performance of the ACC is adapted to allow a speed that is more sporty or fuel consumption-friendly.
PreCrash system
The PreCrash system adapts according to the selected configuration >> page 51.
The Cupra and Offroad drive profiles have specific settings to adapt them to driving characteristics.
Engine torque distribution
This distributes torque as appropriate between the rear wheels, giving more traction on corners.
Selecting a driving profile
Fig. 128 Multifunction steering wheel: button to change the driving profile.
The drive profile can be selected when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle is stationary or moving >> △
Selecting a driving profile
- Press the function button Ⓞ > Drive Profile, available profiles will be displayed.
- OR: With the Infotainment System turned off, by pressing on the Drive Profile icon, the available driving profiles will be displayed.
Driving
- OR: Briefly press the ▼ >> Fig. 12B (arrow) button to change the driving profile. Press and hold the ▼ button to access the Cupra profile directly.
Displaying the drive profile information
- To display more information on the selected drive profile, press information in the infotainment system.
WARNING
Adjusting the driving profile while driving can distract attention from traffic and cause accidents.
• Always drive with attention to traffic and in a responsible manner.
Characteristics of drive profiles
The icon of the selected profile is displayed at all times in the upper central part of the instrument cluster and on the Infotainment System display when it is turned off.
| Drive profile | Characteristics |
| Balanced and comfortable drive profile. The vehicle's component settings of other optimum comfort, making it ideal for daily use and ongoing routines. | |
| Drive profile for a sporty, dynamic and precise style. the vehicle's component settings after stratter spacing and direct running gear and engine response. | |
| Drive profile for the ultimate driving experience. The springs of the components. From the powertrain to the accidents, after the highest performance for drilling, style and precise driving. | |
| Personalised drive profile. Allows the vehicle configuration to be adapted to suit the users' desired driving style. | |
| Drive profile for optimal diet mask and off track performance. Adjusting the components of increased training and allows the hit descent control (I-DC) to be turned on. |
| Drive pro-file | Characteristics |
| Drift1 | Drive profile with engine torque distribution adjusted to optimize over-snee. Activates the more primitive ESC Sport mode. |
| AVertable in LV2 version.Only for 4 Drive models. Not available for 4 LV2 hybrid models.Only for 7 Drive models, depending on the version. Designed for pure track driving. Probified from public roads. | |
| WARNING | |
| Speed and driving style should always be adapted to suit visibility, weather and traffic conditions. | |
Note
- Regardless of the drive profile selected when the ignition is switched off, all systems will start up in Comfort mode. To select a different drive profile, use the CUPRA button on the multifunction steering wheel or the infotainment system display. - Speed and driving style should always be adapted to suit visibility, weather and traffic conditions.
Braking system
Braking system
Information about the brakes
During the first 200 to 300 km, new brake pads do not provide maximum braking power and still have to "settle" >> △. When running in the brake pads, the emergency braking distance is longer than after they have been run-in. During the run-in, avoid sharp braking and situations that place a lot of demand on the brakes, e.g. driving too close to another vehicle.
Brake pad wear depends to a large extent on the conditions in which the vehicle is used, and driving style. If the vehicle is frequently used in city traffic and for short distances, or for sporty driving, brake pad thickness should be checked regularly at a specialist workshop. Driving with wet brakes, e.g. after driving through water, in heavy rain or after washing the vehicle, braking performance may be affected by wet brake discs, or even frozen discs in winter. The driver should be ready to brake harder.
If the brake discs and pads have a layer of salt on them, the braking performance is reduced and the braking distance increases. When driving on salted roads without braking for some time, the layer of salt should be removed by carefully applying the brakes a few times >>> △
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads increase if the vehicle is left unused for a long time, or if it is not driven for many kilometres. If corrosion is present, it is recommended to clean the discs and pads by braking hard several times while driving at high speed. Make sure that you do not endanger any other vehicles or road users >>> △.
WARNING
Driving with worn brake pads or a defective brake system can lead to accidents and serious injuries.
- If you suspect that the brake pads are worn or that the brake system is faulty, have the brake pads checked immediately by a specialist workshop and replaced if they are worn.
WARNING
The braking performance of new brake pads is not optimal.
- During the first 300 km, new brake pads do not provide maximum braking power and still have to "settle". This can be counteracted by applying more pressure to the brake pedal.
- When brake pads are new, drive with extra care to reduce the risk of accidents, serious injury or loss of control of the vehicle.
- Only perform hard braking to clean the brake system when permitted by the traffic situation. Do not endanger the occupants of other vehicles. Accident hazard! - When running in new brake pads, do not drive too close to other vehicles or cause situations that would require the brakes to be applied heavily.
WARNING
When the brakes overheat, their braking performance drops and the braking distance increases.
- When driving downhill, particular demand is placed on the brakes and they heat up very quickly.
Before a long steep slope, reduce speed and change down into a lower gear or range. Therefore, using the engine brake relieves the brakes.
- If you wish to retrofit a front spoiler, integral trim or other accessories, ensure that the air inlet around the brakes is not reduced, as otherwise the brake system could overheat. Please also note the information on brake fluid >>> page 360.
Driving
WARNING
Wet, frozen or salt-covered brakes take longer to brake and increases the braking distance.
• Test the brakes carefully.
* Always dry the brakes and free them from ice and salt by braking repeatedly. If permitted by visibility, weather, road surface and traffic conditions.
A WARNING
When braking manoeuvres are started automatically, the brake pedal may move automatically in the application direction. Do not put your foot under the brake pedal. Risk of injury!
WARNING
Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is stopped. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.
Note
Never let the brakes "drag" by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is not necessary to brake. This can cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in increased brake travel and wear. Please consider the important notes on brake fluid >> page 360.
Note
Regularly check the thickness of the brake pads visually through the holes in the rims or from the underside of the vehicle. If necessary, the wheels should be removed for a more thorough inspection. To do so, CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership.
Troubleshooting
① Defect in the brake system
The warning lamp lights up red. A message may also be displayed.
Stop driving!
- Inform a specialist workshop and request a brake system inspection.
Brake pad wear indicator
The control lamp lights up in yellow.
The front brake pads are worn.
- Contact a specialised workshop immediately. - Get all the brake pads inspected and replace if necessary.
Brake assist systems
Information relating to brake assist systems
Brake assist systems can help the driver in critical driving or braking situations. The driver is responsible for driving safely >>> △
When the brake assist systems are regulating the brakes, the brake pedal may move or make noises. Even so, continue to brake with the necessary force and control the trajectory of the vehicle if necessary.
Depending on the equipment, the ESC and TCS settings can be changed in the vehicle.
- The ESC, ABS and TCS can only operate correctly if the four wheels are fitted with the stipulated tyres >>> △
- If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESC, TCS and EDS also cease to function.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC helps to reduce the risk of skidding and to improve stability in certain driving situations >>> △
Traction control (TCS)
The TCS reduces the driving force on skidding wheels and adapts this force to suit the road surface conditions. The TCS facilitates starting, acceleration and hill climbing ???
Brake assist systems
Electronic brake pressure distribution (EBV) Electronic brake force distribution (EBV) regulates the braking force between the front and rear axles. Excessive braking of the rear axle is avoided and the vehicle remains stable during the braking operation.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS),
The ABS can prevent the wheels from locking up under braking until shortly before the vehicle comes to a stop, and helps the driver maintain control of the steering and the vehicle >>> △.
Brake assist (BAS)
Brake assist (BAS) can help to reduce the braking distance. Brake Assist increases the pressure exerted by the driver when the brake pedal is depressed quickly in an emergency.
Electronic differential lock (EDS and XDS)
The EDS automatically brakes skidding wheels and transmits the driving force to the other driving wheels.
XDS improves traction by applying the brakes to improve cornering acceleration.
Multi-collision brake
The multi-collision brake automatically triggers braking if the airbag control unit detects a collision in the event of an accident.
Automatic braking requirements:
- The driver is not pressing the accelerator pedal.
Trailer stabilisation 11
Note that the vehicle-trailer assembly generally tends to snake. When the snaking of the trailer is felt by the vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will automatically brake the towing vehicle within the limits of the system and stabilise the vehicle-trailer set >>> page 325.
Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV)
With the ignition switched on, the electromechanical brake servo (eBKV) supplements the force exerted by the foot by increasing the pressure that the driver exerts on the brake pedal >> △. When a driver assistance system apples the brakes, e.g. ACC when regulating the speed, or during emergency braking, the brake pedal may move automatically.
After disconnecting the ignition, the assistance of the brake servo is progressively reduced. If you continue to hold the vehicle in place with
the brake pedal, messages are displayed on the instrument cluster display. In this case, the brake servo function is restricted.
Once stopped, immobilise the vehicle to prevent it from moving >>> page 233.
Brake blending 1
The regulated application of the brakes blends the braking effect of the electric motor in energy recuperation with mechanical braking by the driver.
WARNING
Smart brake assist technology cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and only works within the limits of the systems. Driving at high speed on icy, slippery or wet road surfaces can cause a loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury to the driver and passengers.
- Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Never take any risk that compromises safety.
- Brake assist systems cannot prevent an accident if you are driving too close to other vehicles.
• Always use suitable tyres. Driving stability depends on tyre grip.
Driving
WARNING
The efficiency of the ESC can be significantly reduced if components or systems that affect the driving dynamics are not properly maintained or are not working properly. This can particularly occur if changes are made to the suspension or unauthorised rim/tyre combinations are used.
- Ensure that vehicle conversions and modifications are only made by specialised workshops.
• Always use suitable tyres. Driving stability depends on tyre grip.
WARNING
When driving without a brake servo or with restricted brake servo functions, the braking distance can increase considerably and can cause accidents and serious injuries.
• If the brake serve is not working, the brake pedal has to be pressed harder, as the braking distance increases due to the lack of assistance from the servo brake.
Connecting and disconnecting the ESC and TCS
Fig. 129 On the lower part of the centre console ESC on/off button (depending on the version)
The ESC is switched on automatically when the engine is started, and only works when the engine is running and includes the ABS, EDS and TCS systems.
The TCS function should only be switched off in situations in which traction is insufficient.
Depending on the finishes and versions, there is the possibility of disconnecting only the TCS or activating the ESC in "Sport" mode, or turning off the ESC.
Disconnecting and connecting the TCS 1
- The TCS can be switched on and off by briefly pressing the ☑ button on the centre console >> Fig. 129.
- OR: in the infotainment system, press the function button □ > Assistants > Smart Assistants >>> page 38.
When the TCS is disconnected, the control warning light lights up on the instrument cluster.
Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in "Sport" mode
- In Sport mode, the ESC can be switched off and on by briefly pressing the 📄 button on the centre console >> Fig. 129.
- OR: in the infotainment system, press the function button □ > Assistants > Smart Assistants >> page 38.
When "Sport" mode is connected, the interventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle, and the traction control (TCS) interventions are limited. In vehicles with A-wheel drive, the TCS is disconnected completely. In addition, the 0 control lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.
Depending on the version
Brake assist systems
Disconnecting and connecting the ESC 31
- The ESC can be switched on and off by briefly pressing the ⚪ button on the centre console >> Fig. 129.
- OR: in the infotainment system, press the function button ☐ > Assistants > Smart Assistants >>> page 38.
When the ESC is disconnected the control warning lamps and light up on the instrument cluster.
ESC in "Offroad" mode 2
Select the Offroad profile to switch it on >>> page 192. The interventions of the TCS, as well as of the EDS and the ABS system adapt to irregular terrain.
In the following exceptional situations it may make sense to activate the Offroad mode to allow the wheels to spin:
- When swinging the vehicle to get it out of mud/snow.
- Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.
- When driving on unaven ground with one or two wheels in the air (axle articulation).
- Steep descents while braking on unpaved terrain.
For your safety we recommend that you turn off the Offroad mode when it is not absolutely necessary.
To disconnect the Offroad mode, select a different driving mode.
WARNING
The ESC Sport mode should only be switched on if the traffic situation and the driver's ability allow it. Danger of skidding!
- With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising function will be limited or fully deactivated (depending on the model version) for sportier driving. The vehicle may skid.
■ If ESC is deactivated, the vehicle stabilisation function is not available.
Note
- If the TCS or ESC is switched off or "Sport" mode is selected, the cruise control system switches off.
• In ESC OFF mode, ESC will temporarily reactivate to assist the driver during braking, and will switch back to passive mode when the brake pedal is released (depending on the model version).
Troubleshooting
(1) The electromechanical brake servo is not working
Stop driving
The warning lamp lights up rod.
A message is displayed as appropriate. Depress the brake pedal hard because the braking distance will increase due to the lack of brake assist from the brake servo.
- You should obtain professional assistance immediately.
There is a fault in the electromechanical bake servo
The control lamp lights up in yellow.
A message is displayed for a few seconds.
Depressing the brake pedal may cause vibrations. The brake pedal has to be pressed harder because the braking distance increases due to the reduced brake servo assistance.
- Contact a specialised workshop.
The ABS does not work properly or does not work at all
The control lamp lights up in yellow.
Driving
- Contact a specialised workshop. The vehicle's brakes still work without the ABS.
The ESC or TCS is regulating
The control lamp flashes yellow.
ESC fault
The control lamp lights up in yellow. The ESC has been switched off.
There is a fault or defect.
• Turn off the ignition and turn it on again.
- If possible, drive for a short distance at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).
- if the control lamp is still on, go to a specialised workshop.
The brake assist systems make noises
When the described brake assist systems intervene, you may hear noises.
WARNING
- When the ignition is switched on, the status of the brake system and the brake assist functions is automatically checked. The control lamps on the instrument cluster light up briefly and then go out. Any indicator lamp that remains on indicates a fault. Seek qualified technical assistance immediately.
* If the brake system warning lights comes on together with the ill control lamp, the ABS regulation function may not work and the rear wheels may lock relatively quickly when braking. This can lead to loss of control of the vehicle if possible, slow down and drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialist workshop to have the brake system inspected. During this journey, avoid heavy braking and any sudden manoeuvres. * If the indicator lamp is does not go out, or comes on while driving, it means that the ABS function cannot work properly, is not available and will not work during braking. Go to a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
General notes
Assistant systems
General notes
Safety advice
WARNING
- Responsibility for driving rests with the driver at all times. The drive assist systems are not a replacement for driver attention. Focus all your attention on driving and be prepared to intervene at all times.
- Use the drive assist systems only when conditions allow. The driving style must always be suitable for the weather, visibility, road and traffic conditions.
- In order for drive assist systems to react correctly, sensors and cameras must operate without limitations. Please read the notes on sensors and cameras in this chapter.
Note
- Keep in mind the specific rules of each country, especially when it comes to driving, formation of an emergency corridor, braking distance, speed, parking position, wheel position, etc. The driver is solely responsible for always complying with the specific regulations of each country.
- The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with adhesives, additional headlights or similar items, as this could have a negative impact on the operation of the assistants. If the vehicle is not properly repaired or structural modifications are made to it, the operation of the assistants may be affected.
• The repair and adjustment of sensors and cameras requires special knowledge and tools. This is why CUPRA recommends visiting a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT network dealer.
System limits
WARNING
- Drive assist systems can not overcome the laws of physics. Depending on the circumstances, a collision may not be avoidable. - Warnings, notices and control lamps may not be displayed on time, or may be displayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle approaches too quickly.
- Corrective interventions by drive assist systems (e.g. interventions in the steering or brakes) may be insufficient or may never occur, depending on the circumstances. As a driver, you must be prepared to act at all times.
Note
* Due to the system's detection limits in the surroundings, the systems may not give warnings or intervene on time, or they might do so even if it is not desired. In addition, the auxiliary systems may incorrectly interpret a manoeuvre and, as a result, warn the driver in an unexpected manner.
- When the towing mode is selected, some assist systems may react with limitations, in an unusual way or may not be available. Keep in mind the instructions relating to the towing mode.
Button for the assistant systems
Fig. 130 Left side of the multi-function steering wheel: button or driver assistance systems (depending on the version).
Assistant systems
The button for the driver assistance systems is located on the multifunction steering wheel. This button can be used to switch the driver assistance systems in the Assistants menu on and off.
- Press the button to open the Assistants menu.
- Select the assistance system in question and turn it off or on. A mark indicates that assistant system is switched on.
- Next, confirm the selection by pressing the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The assistant systems can also be switched on and off in the infotainment system, in the vehicle settings menu >> page 38.
Drive assist sensors and cameras
Front radar
Fig. 131 On the front bumper: front and side radar sensors.
The vehicle may be fitted with radar sensors on the front bumper >> Fig. 131.
The front radar detects any objects in its detection zone >>> Fig. 132 and provides support for the following functions:
- Front Assist >>> page 217.
- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) >>> page 209 The radar can have a range of up to 120 m (400 ft) depending on road and weather conditions.
Side radars >> Fig. 131 detect objects in their detection zone in order to prevent the vehicle from colliding with crossing vehicles when entering an intersection or junction. These radars provide support to the:
• Junction assist function>>> page 219.
Automatic deactivation of supported functions
The front sensors deactivate automatically when, among other reasons, it is detected that they are permanently covered. This may be the case if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice on top of the sensor.
If the sensor is deactivated, the instrument cluster will temporarily display the message "Driver assist now limited. Front sensors without visibility" accompanied by an audible signal.
Due to the front sensor systems not being able to see, each of the ACC and Front Assist functions will be shown as permanently disabled.
Drive assist sensors and cameras
WARNING
- The visibility of the radar sensors can be impaired by dirt or environmental influences, such as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insects, etc.
- Clean the sensor area on the bumper as indicated in >>> page 396. Cleaning the exterior. When the radar sensor starts correctly detecting again, the message disappears from the screen and the functions become available again.
① NOTICE
- If the radar sensors are dirty or poorly adjusted, the Front Assist or Junction assist system may give unnecessary warnings and apply the brakes inappropriately.
- The operation of the radar sensors can be affected by strong reflections of the emitted signal. This may occur, for example, in an enclosed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works).
• The sensor may not be adjusted correctly if it receives an impact. This may compromise the system's efficacy or disconnect it. If you have the feeling that the radar sensor is damaged or adjusted incorrectly, switch off the Front Assist, ACC and Junction assist functions to avoid any damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.
- The rear bumper should only be painted with paint authorised by CUPRA. Junction assist functions may be limited or work incorrectly if other paints are used.
Interior camera
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be fitted with a camera on the interior rear view mirror. This camera detects the driver and his/her driving behaviour to provide support to the
• driver attention monitoring function
NOTICE
Take the following points into consideration to ensure the camera's functionality is not affected:
- Do not cover the field of vision of the camera.
- Adjust the mirror correctly.
Front camera
Fig. 133 On the windscreen field of vision of the Lane Assist system camera.
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be fitted with a front camera on the front windscreen. This camera detects lane boundaries (lines) to provide support for the following functions:
- Lane Assist >>> page 221.
- Travel Assist >>> page 223
• Emergency assist >>> page 228.
Automatic deactivation of supported functions
The front camera automatically switches off when, among other things, it detects that it is permanently covered. This may be the case if for example, there is a layer of snow or ice.
Assistant systems
If the camera is deactivated, the instrument cluster will temporarily display the message
"Driver assist now limited. Front sensors without visibility" accompanied by an audible signal.
Due to the front sensor systems not being able to see, each of the Lane Assist, Travel Assist and Road Sign Recognition Functions will be shown as permanently disabled.
NOTICE
To avoid affecting the operation of the systems, take the following points into consideration:
- Clean the field of vision of the camera regularly and make sure it is free of snow and ice.
- Do not cover the field of vision of the camera.
- Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the camera's field of vision.
Rear radar
Fig. 134 R car view of the vehicle: radar sensor areas.
Fig. 135 Sensor detection zones.
The rear radar sensors are located on the left and right of the bumper and are not visible from the outside >>> Fig. 134. The sensors monitor both the blind spot and traffic behind the vehicle >>> Fig. 135.
They support the following functions:
- Side Assist >> page 229.
- Rear Cross Traffic Alert >>> page 256.
- Exit Warning >>> page 257
Automatic deactivation of supported functions
The rear radar sensors deactivate automatically when, among other reasons, one of the sensors is detected to be permanently covered. This may be the case if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice in front of one of the sensors.
The relevant text message will appear in the instrument cluster display.
Control lamps
Side Assist function not available
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function not available.
Exit Warning not available
Drive assist sensors and cameras
NOTICE
* The radar sensors on the rear bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a collision, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. This may result in the system disconnecting itself, or at least potential diminished functionality.
• In order to ensure that the radar sensors work properly, keep the rear bumper free of snow and ice and do not cover it.
- The rear bumper should only be painted with paint authorised by CUPRA. The lane departure warning's functions may be limited or work incorrectly if other paints are used.
- The visibility of radar sensors may be affected due to leaves, snow, dense haze or dirt, among others. Clean the area in front of the sensors.
- Never use auto lane changing or the rear cross traffic alert if the radar sensors are dirty.
- Radar operation may also be affected if objects such as bicycle racks or luggage racks interfere with the visibility of the raders.
Ultrasound sensors
The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sensors to perform the following functions:
■ Park Assist >> page 243
- Park assist plus >>> page 239.
- Rear park assist >>> page 242
NOTICE
- Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle underbody can modify the orientation of the sensors. This can affect the park assist function. Have the function checked by a specialised workshop.
- A number plate or number plate holder with dimensions that exceed the space for the number plate, or a curved or deformed number plate can cause false detections or a loss of sensor visibility.
Note
- In order to guarantee good operation, keep the sensors clean, free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects.
- If you use high-pressure or steam equipment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, unless you do so very briefly, and always keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.
■ Fitting certain accessories to the front of the vehicle, such as a plate holder with advertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist.
Area View system
Fig. 136 On the rear lid handle location of the rear assist camera.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, it can be fitted with 1 or 4 cameras that provide support to the following functions:
• Top View Camera >> page 251.
■ Rear View Camera >> page 248.
WARNING
Fitting a number plate frame may interfere with the view shown on the screen, as it may reduce the camera's field of vision.
Assistant systems
NOTICE
• In order to guarantee good system operation, keep the cameras clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects. The camera can be cleaned by operating the wiper.
- Never use abrasive cleaning products to clean the camera lens.
- Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could damage the camera.
Cruise control system
Introduction
The cruise control system (GRA) helps maintain a constant speed set by you.
Speed range
The cruise control system is available when driving in forward gear at a speed of over approx. 20 km/h (15 mph).
Temporarily switching off the cruise control The saved speed can be exceeded at any time, e.g. for overtaking. The cruise control is suspended during acceleration and is then resumed with the saved speed.
Status display
When the cruise control system is switched on, the instrument cluster display shows the saved speed and the system status:
Lights up grey.
The cruise control system is switched
on, but regulation is not active
It lights up green.
The cruise control system is switched on
and regulation is active.
If there is no speed saved, the instrument cluster display shows --- instead of speed.
Changing gears
As soon as the clutch pedal is depressed, regulation is suspended and resumes once the gear change has been made.
Driving down slopes
Shift into a low gear before descending a long hil. This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
The vehicle cannot maintain the saved speed in all driving situations. Always be ready to apply the vehicle's brakes.
WARNING
If it is impossible to drive with sufficient bracing distance and at a constant speed, using the cruise control system may cause accidents and serious injuries may occur.
- Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
- Only use the cruise control system on paved roads with a firm surface.
- Adapt your speed and safety distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
• After use, always switch off the speed limiter to prevent the speed being regulated against your wishes.
- It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions.
Speed limiter
Operating the cruise control
Fig. 137 On the multifunction steering wheel: cruise control operation buttons
Connecting
- Press the button.
Then select "Cruise control" from the driving assistants menu.
Regulation has not yet taken place.
Start regulation
• While driving, press the button SET.
The cruise control system saves and regulates the current speed.
Adjusting the speed
While the G&A is set, the stored speed can be adjusted:
RES - 1 km/h (1 mph)
1 km/h (1 mph)
+ 10 km/h (5 mph)
- 10 km/h (5 mph)
Interrupting the adjustment
- Briefly press the button @ or press the brake pedal.
The speed is stored.
Reinstating the cruise control
- Press the button.
The cruise control system resumes the saved speed and regulates it.
Troubleshooting
Fault in the speed regulator
The control lamp switches on yellow.
Abnormal operation. Switch off the cruise control system and take the vehicle to a specialist workshop.
The adjustment is interrupted unexpectedly
• If the clutch pedal is pressed for a long time
- The vehicle has exceeded the saved speed for a long time.
• No forward gear has been selected.
- A brake assistance system, e.g. TCS or ESC, has intervened.
■ Front Assist has braked the vehicle.
- If the fault continues, disconnect the Emergency Assist and consult a specialised workshop.
Speed limiter
Introduction
The speed limiter helps the driver not to exceed a set speed.
Speed range
The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a programmed speed, from 30 km/h (20 mph) approx. and faster.
Selecting the speed limiter
The speed limit can be interrupted at any time by depressing the accelerator pedal fully, beyond the point of resistance. As soon as the saved speed is exceeded, the green indicator light flashes and an audible warning signal may sound. The speed is stored.
The limiter is reactivated automatically after returning to less than the set speed.
Status display
When the speed limiter is switched on, the instrument cluster display shows the saved speed and the system status:
Assistant systems
Lights up grey
The speed limiter is switched on but rag
ulation is not active.
Lights up green
The speed limiter is switched on and as-
tve
Driving down slopes
Shift into a low gear before descending a long hill. This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
The vehicle cannot maintain the saved speed in all driving situations. Always be ready to apply the vehicle's brakes.
WARNING
After use, always switch off the speed limiter to prevent the speed being regulated against your wishes.
• The speed limiter does not relieve the driver of their responsibility to drive at the appropriate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not necessary.
- Using the speed limiter under adverse weather conditions is dangerous and can cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed limiter when the status of the road and the weather conditions allow it.
Operating the speed limiter
Fig. 139 On the multifunction steering wheel buttons to control the speed driver.
Connecting
- Press the button.
Then select "Speed limiter" from the driving assistants menu.
Regulation has not yet taken place.
Start regulation
• While driving, press the button SET
The current speed is saved as a limit speed.
Adjusting the speed
The programmed speed can be set:
RES +1km/h(1mph)
SET 1 km/h (1 mph)
+ + 10 km/h 15 mph!
- 10 km/h (5 mph)
Interrupting the adjustment
- Press the @ button.
The speed is stored.
Reinstating the cruise control
- Press the RES button.
The limiter will re-activate as soon as the vehicle is moving at a speed lower than the saved one.
Troubleshooting
The speed limiter is not available
The control lamp lights up in yellow.
- Malfunctions: Switch off the speed limiter and go to a specialist workshop.
Regulation is interrupted unexpectedly
* You have switched off the Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC).
• The brakes have overheated. Wait for the brakes to cool down and check the operation again.
- If the fault continues, consult a specialised workshop.
Speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment
Speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment
Introduction
The speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment automatically adapts a maximum speed that you have saved to the detected speed limits.
The speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment is an additional function of the speed limiter and uses the infotainment system's dynamic road sign display >>> page 30 and navigation data.
The speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment is available depending on the equipment, but not in all countries.
WARNING
The smart technology of the speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and only works within the limits of the system. Never allow the greater convenience offered by this function to induce you to take any risk that compromises safety. Serious accidents and injuries can occur if the speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment is used carelessly or unintentionally. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
- Always adapt your speed to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
• Always pay attention to traffic and always keep the vehicle's surroundings in mind.
- Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself. If the road sign recognition system is not working properly or the navigation data is not updated, the speed may change unexpectedly and suddenly or may not be suitable for the current traffic situation. In addition, the speed adjusted by the system may not suit your driving style.
* Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself. If you drive without any active guided route, if you leave the route calculated by the navigation system or if the position of the vehicle cannot be determined correctly because the GPS does not provide accurate data, the speed may change unexpectedly and suddenly or may not be suitable for the current traffic situation.
- Always use up to date navigation data. - Always take into account the speed limit. In the case of speed limits that are not included in the navigation data, the speed limit may be exceeded.
Note
Please also note the information of relevance to safety on the speed limiter >>> page 205.
Limitations of proactive speed adjustment
In addition to the limitations of the dynamic road sign display system >>> page 30, the speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment has the following limitations inherent to the system:
- The speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment only recognises road signs showing a speed limit.
- Road signs that indirectly show a speed restriction, e.g. signs at the entrance to towns, are only recognised on the basis of navigation data.
- If a warning is given of a speed restriction based on navigation data, without it being detected by the dynamic road sign display, the indicated speed will be adjusted to the most recently saved speed.
- The speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment is not available for speed restrictions lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph) that are detected. In this case, a relevant message is displayed on the instrument cluster display.
Activate proactive speed adjustment
The speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment can be activated in the infotainment system's assistants menu.
Assistant systems
Driving with proactive speed adjustment
- Activate the proactive speed adjustment
- Switch on the speed limiter and start the control >> page 205.
- When the system recognises a new speed limit, a warning is displayed on the instrument cluster. This speed will be stored in the speed limiter.
The system has recognised a new speed limit and uses it for regulation.
Interrupting speed adjustment
- Press the multifunction steering wheel but-
ton RES or release and press the accelerator
twice. The last saved speech is resumed. - Press the SET button on the multifunction
stroering wheel. The current speed is taken. - Press the @ button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system switches to a passive state.
Adjust the displayed speed using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel
RES + 1 km/h (1 mph)
SET -1 km/h (1 mph)
• +10 km/h (5 mph)
- -10km/h 15 mph
If you adjust the indicated speed excessively, the proactive speed adjustment is interrupted.
Note
- When a speed restriction is recognised, the proactive speed adjustment also adapts the saved speed, even if the speed limiter is not active.
- If the speed of travel considerably exceeds the speed limit detected by the road signal detection system, a relevant warning is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
- When merging onto a motorway or dual carriageway, the recommended speed is automatically saved as the desired speed.
Special cases
On motorway entry and exit lanes, the system stops applying the maximum permitted speed so you retain better control in line with road layout and traffic conditions.
Troubleshooting
A message is displayed indicating that proactive speed adjustment is not currently available or not offered in your country.
- If this message is displayed for a longer period of time and proactive speed adjustment is available in your country, please contact a specialist workshop.
Note
Depending on the anomaly in question, additional information may be displayed in Vehicle status))) page 40.
Eco Assist
Fig. 139: Proc Assist indication (schematic representation).
Eco-efficient driving assistance helps you drive with cars and with low energy consumption by following instructions superimposed in the digital cockpit, depending on the situation. When you approach places such as a junction, a roundabout or a section of road with a speed limit, the symbol is displayed along with an event on the digital instrument cluster >> Fig. 139.
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control
As soon as you follow the indication and take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle adapts, based on the selected drive profile and distance to the event, brake energy recuperation and speed.
Eco Assist uses the trip data from the infotainment system and the sensors of certain driver assistance systems. If no destination guidance is active, the most likely route is used.
Pressing the accelerator can cancel the intervention of the assistance at any time.
Eco Assist can be activated and deactivated in the infotainment system, in the assistance system settings >>> page 38.
Eco Assist is temporarily deactivated if:
• The gear selector is in the 5-position.
* The Performance of CUPRA drive profile is used.
- Driving with adaptive cruise control (ACC) or cruise control (GRA).
When these conditions no longer exist, the assistance is reactivated if it is switched on in the assistance system settings.
Eco Assist is available depending on equipment and not in all countries.
WARNING
The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
- Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
- Road signs on the road and traffic regulations have priority over eco-driving notes.
Note
- The appearance of the symbols may vary slightly depending on the equipment and model. System updates may modify or expand the symbols.
- When the system is active, Eco Assist may also increase recuperation without displaying any indication. This can occur in situations such as when the accelerator pedal is released when a vehicle is driving in front. In this case, energy recuperation is adapted to match the speed of the vehicle in front without any indication being displayed.
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control
Introduction
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains a constant speed set by the driver. When approaching another vehicle in front, the ACC detects it and adapts the speed automatically, maintaining a distance set by the driver.
Does my vehicle have ACC?
Your vehicle has ACC if it has the ACC function buttons on the multifunction steering wheel >>> page 122, or if it has the configuration menu in the infotainment system.
Speed range
ACC regulates at speeds between 20 and 210 km/h (15 and 130 mph).
When Electric mode is activated in hybrid vehicles, the ACC speed range may vary.
The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill if a vehicle in front stops.
If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, you should pay attention to gear changes. The ACC could switch off if the RPM gets too high or low.
Assistant systems
Driving with ACC
You can override the ACC at any time. Braking interrupts the ACC. If you accelerate, regulation is interrupted during acceleration and then resumed.
Driver intervention prompt
ACC is subject to certain limitations in herent to the system. This means that the driver will have to control the speed and distance from other vehicles in certain situations. In this case, the instrument cluster display will tell you to intervene by applying the brake, and an audio warning will be played.
Radar sensors
The ACC uses the front radar technology. Read its maintenance instructions and information about its limitations >> page 199.
WARNING
The ACC's technology cannot overcome the system's inherent limitations or change the laws of physics. If used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
- Always be prepared to brake or accelerate. - If you press the accelerator pedal the ACC will stop working. Therefore, it will not brake or request any braking intervention.
- Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
- Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, or on roads that are steep, with lots of curves or slippery.
- Never use ACC when driving off-road or on unpaved roads.
- The system may not react in time to stationary obstacles (such as a traffic jam queue), particularly at high speeds. React soon enough to avoid a hazardous situation.
* The system may not react to stopped vehicles in the same lane. You must react early enough yourself in this case.
• The system does not react to people, animals or vehicles that are crossing or approaching in the opposite direction.
- If you are driving with a spare wheel fitted, the ACC system could automatically switch off. Switch off the system when starting off.
- Brake immediately if the ACC does not slow down enough.
- Brake immediately when a driver intervention instruction is displayed on the instrument cluster display.
- if the vehicle continues to move involuntarily after a driver intervention prompt, brake the vehicle.
- The brake pedal may move downwards during braking. Be careful not to position your foot under the pedal.
Note
If the ACC does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it until it has been checked by a specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends visiting a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership.
ACC operation
Fig.140 On the instrument cust or display: ACC active
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control
Fig. 141 On the multifunction steering wheel buttons for operating the ACC.
>>> Fig. 140
① Vehicle detected in front. It will light up if the distance to the vehicle is set.
② Distance selected.
Connecting
- Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel >> Fig. 141.
- Then select the "ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control)" checkbox in the driving assistant menu.
The ACC does not regulate anything yet (standby).
Start regulation
Activating the ACC system also automatically activates the ESC and traction control (TCS).
- To start regulation, press the SET button
Fig. 141.
The ACC saves the current speed and maintains the set distance. If the current speed is outside the predefined speed range, ACC adjusts the speed to the nearest limit of the range.
Depending on the driving situation, the following control lamps come on:
Lights up green
ACC connected, no vehicle detected in front:
• Lights up green
Lights up green ACC connected, vehicle detected in front.
When the ACC is in standby, the control lamps light up grey.
Program the speed
RES +1km/h(1mph)
SET -1km/h(1mph)
+ + 10 km/h (5 mph)
- -10 km/h (5 mph)
Program the distance setting
The distance can be set to one of five levels, from very short to very long.
- Press the 🔊 button and then for button >>> Fig. 141.
• Alternatively, press button as many times as necessary to set the desired distance.
Keep in mind each country's regulations on minimum braking distances.
Suspend regulation (standby)
- Briefly press @ button >>> Fig. 141 or press the brake pedal.
The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speed and distance are saved.
If the traction control or ESC is switched off, the ACC regulation is automatically interrupt-
Reinstating the cruise control
- Press the RES button. The ACC regulates to the last speed and distance setting.
- OR: Press SET button to regulate to the current speed.
Exceeding the speed regulated by the ACC
While driving with the ACC switched on, the driver can increase speed by pressing the accelerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspended until you release the accelerator pedal >> ①.
Assistant systems
Changing the drive profile
In vehicles with Drive Profile, the selected drive profile can have an influence on the ACC's acceleration and braking behaviour >>> page 190.
In vehicles without Drive Profile, the behaviour of the ACC can also be affected if any of the following drive profiles are selected in the infotainment system in Assistants. ACC settings will be the same as those in the Drive Profile.
WARNING
Before driving off, check that the road is clear. The radar sensor may not detect obstacles that could be on the road. This can lead to an accident and serious injury. Press the brake if necessary.
NOTICE
If you increase speed using the accelerator pedal, the ACC may not be able to safely adjust the speed or the distance due to the limitations of the system.
- Be prepared to react if required by the sit-
Special driving situations
Fig. 142 On the instrument cluster display: ACC active, vehicle detected on the left.
Be aware of the limitations and warnings described at the beginning of this chapter >>> page 209, Introduction.
Avoid undertaking on the right 4
If a vehicle is detected in the left lane that is travelling at a speed slower than that set by the driver, it will brake the vehicle within the comfort limits of the system to avoid passing it on the right >>> Fig. 142.
You can cancel this regulation by pressing the accelerator pedal.
The function works at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). It may not be available in certain countries.
Overtaking
When the turn signal is switched on for over-taking, the ACC reduces the distance from the vehicle in front to help with the overtaking manoeuvre. The set cruising speed will not be exceeded.
The function works at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). It may not be available in certain countries.
Stop&Go function
The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill if the vehicle in front stops.
Vehicles with manual gearboxes: you will need to keep the clutch pedal depressed to allow the car to come to a complete stop.
The ACC remains active and the message ACC ready to start is displayed on the instrument cluster for a few seconds. You can extend or reactivate this warning by pressing the AES button or by grabbing the wheel if your vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist. During this time, the vehicle will move off again if the vehicle in front moves forwards.
To move off when the message ACC ready to start is not longer displayed, once the vehicle in front has moved off:
■ Vehicles with automatic transmission: Briefly depress the accelerator pedal.
1 Or on the left, in countries that drive on the left hand side of the road.
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control
Vehicles with a manual gearbox: Briefly depress the accelerator pedal and gently lift the clutch pedal.
- OR: press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
- OR: grab the steering wheel again if your vehicle has Travel Assist.
The ACC does not remain active in the following cases:
• The stopping phase lasts for several minutes. - When a vehicle door is opened.
- If the ignition is switched off
△WARNING
If the message ACC ready to start is displayed on the instrument cluster display and the vehicle in front moves off, your vehicle will move off automatically. In this case, any obstacles in the road may not be detected. This may cause serious accidents and injuries.
- Always check the road before moving off, and apply the vehicle brakes yourself if necessary.
ACC system limitations
The limits of the ACC system mean that it is not appropriate in all situations in Introduction on page 210.
CUPRA does not recommend using the function in the following cases >>> △
■ Heavy rain, snow or fog.
- When going through tunnels.
- On stretches of road with roadworks.
- On routes with curves, e.g. on mountain
roads.
- On off-road routes
• In covered car parks.
- On roads with embedded metal objects such as train or tram tracks.
- On roads with loose gravel.
Pay special attention when using ACC in the following situations:
On curves
Fig. 143 Vehicle or a bend.
The ACC may not detect the vehicle in front on a curve, or may regulate the distance from vehicles in other lanes >> Fig. 143.
Vehicles outside the sensor zone
Fig. 144 Mot or cyclist ahead out of range of the reder sensor.
Fig.145 Vehicle changing lanes
In the following situations the ACC may not react, or may react slowly or inappropriately:
- Vehicles that are not aligned while driving or that are outside the sensor's detection area, such as motorcycles >>> Fig. 144
- Vehicles that move into your lane, a short distance from your vehicle >> Fig. 145.
- Vehicles with loads or accessories that pro trade from the sides, rear or roof.
Assistant systems
Objects that are not detected
Fig. 146 A vehicle turning and another stationary.
The ACC function only detects and reacts to vehicles moving in the same direction. Therefore it does not detect:
• People
• Animals
- Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction or crossing the road.
• Other stationary obstacles
The ACC may not react to stationary vehicles. If, for example, a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or moves over and there is a stationary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to the second vehicle >> Fig. 146.
WARNING
Using the ACC in the above situations can cause serious accidents and injuries, and you could break the law.
Troubleshooting
ACC not available
The indicator lamp lights up yellow:
The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted incorrectly. Take into account the warnings described at the beginning of this chapter 222 page 200
- There is a fault or a defect. Turn off the vehicle's ignition and turn it on again after a few minutes.
- If the problem persists, consult a specialised workshop.
The ACC does not work as expected
• Make sure that the conditions are met for the radar sensor to operate properly. 133 page 200
- If the brakes overheat, regulation stops automatically. Wait for them to cool down and check the operation again.
- Unusual noises during automatic ACC breaking are normal and do not indicate any enoma
The following conditions may lead the ACC not to react:
- No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gear R.
• The vehicle is reversing. - No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gear R.
• The vehicle is reversing.
■ ESC is operating
• The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.
• The RPM is too high or too low.
• A vehicle brake light is faulty.
- A trailer brake light is faulty.
• The parking brake is applied.
- Driving on an excessive slope
Predictive speed adjustment
Introduction
The predictive speed adjustment adapts the speed to the speed limits detected and to the road layout (curves, crossings, roundabouts, etc.).
Predictive speed adjustment is an additional function of the ACC >> page 209 and uses the road signal detection system and the navigation data of the infotainment system.
Predictive speed adjustment is available depending on the equipment, although not in all countries.
The following conditions may lead the ACC not to react:
• The accelerator or brake is depressed.
• The accelerator or brake is depressed.
Predictive speed adjustment
WARNING
The predictive speed adjustment smart technology cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the system. Never allow the enhanced convenience of this function to induce you to take any risk that compromises safety. If used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
• Always adapt your speed to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
• Always pay attention to traffic and always keep the vehicle's surroundings in mind.
• Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself. If the road sign recognition system is not working properly or the navigation data is not updated, the speed may change unexpectedly and suddenly or may not be suitable for the current traffic situation. In addition, the speed adjusted by the system may not suit your driving style.
* Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself. If you drive without any active guided route, if you leave the route calculated by the navigation system or if the position of the vehicle cannot be determined correctly because the GPS does not provide accurate data, the speed may change unexpectedly and suddenly or may not be suitable for the current traffic situation.
• Always use up to date navigation data.
- Always take into account the speed limit. In the case of speed limits that are not included in the navigation data, the speed limit may be exceeded.
Note
Also note the information related to the ACC relevant to safety >> page 209.
Limitations of the predictive speed adjustment
In addition to the limitations of the road sign detection system and the limitations of the ACC, predictive speed adjustment has the following limitations inherent to the system:
- Predictive speed adjustment only recognises road signals that show a speed limit. The predictive speed adjustment does not take into account, above all, the rules on priority of passage or traffic lights.
- Road signs that indirectly show a speed restriction, e.g. signs at the entrance to towns, are only recognised on the basis of navigation data.
- On roads that are not included in the navigation data, or that are included with low accuracy, predictive speed adjustment is not available.
- If a speed limit is notified based on the navigation data without it being detected by the road signal detection system, the indicated speed will be adjusted to the speed that was saved the last time.
- Predictive speed adjustment is not available for speed limits below approx. 20 km/h (approx. 15 mph). In this case, a relevant message is displayed on the instrument cluster display.
Activating the predictive speed adjustment
In the infotainment system, in the assist services menu, you can individually adjust the type of incident the vehicle should respect to
page 38:
• Response to read layout.
■ Response at permitted speeds.
Driving with predictive speed adjustment
- Connect the ACC >>> page 210.
- Set the distance and speed.
- Activate the predictive speed adjustment.
As soon as the system recognises a speed limit or a relevant road layout during the route, a warning will appear on the instrument cluster.
Assistant systems
display. This warning will indicate the reason and the speed to which the vehicle will adjust due to said limitation.
Indication of turning intention
If the turn signals are activated to indicate the intention to turn, the predictive cruise control can reduce the speed at the next available turn.
The predictive cruise control does not detect the intention to turn in the following situations:
• A dashed line is recognised in the direction in which the turn signal is activated.
• The turn signals are not activated sufficiently far in advance.
Indication of regulation in progress
Adjustment due to the end of a speed limit.
Adjustment due to a roundabout.
Adjustment due to a junction.
Adjustment due to a road layout.
In the event of adjustment due to a speed limit, the detected speed will be saved as the new desired speed. In the event of adjustment due to the road layout, the vehicle will accelerate
again after leaving the reason for the adjustment behind and the speed will be adjusted to the saved speed.
Curve control speeds depend on the selected driving profile >> page 190.
Interrupting speed adjustment
• During the warning, press the button.
■ During the regulation, press the button SET
Adjust the announced speed
The announced speed can only be adjusted in the event of adjustment due to a speed limit.
Multifunction steering wheel:
RES +1km/h(1mph)
SET -1 km/h (1 mph)
+ + 10 km/h (5 mph)
- 10 km/h (5 mph)
Note
- When a speed limit is recognised, the predictive speed adjustment also adapts the saved speed even if the ACC is switched off. However, it will not regulate.
- If the speed of travel considerably exceeds the speed limit detected by the road signal detection system, a relevant warning is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
- In the event of joining a highway without a speed limit, the recommended speed is automatically saved as the desired speed. If a higher speed has previously been saved for a motorway without a speed limit, this is used instead of the recommended speed.
Troubleshooting
A message is displayed indicating that predictive speed adjustment is not currently available or not available in your country.
- If this message is displayed for a long time and predictive speed adjustment is available in your country, contact a specialised workshop.
Note
Depending on the anomaly in question, additional information may be displayed in Vehicle status >>> page 40.
Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)
Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)
Introduction
The objective of the system is to prevent head-on collisions against objects that may be in the vehicle's path or minimise the consequences of such impacts.
The function is designed to avoid collisions against:
- Parked vehicles.
• Vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists that are travelling in the same lane and direction.
- Pedestrians and cyclists who cross the vehicle's path.
Front Assist detects these objects using a camera on the top of the windscreen and a radar sensor on the front of the vehicle >>> page 200.
Front Assist detects different road users, such as other vehicles, pedestrians, bicycles and motorcycles, using a camera on the top of the windscreen and three radar sensors on the front of the vehicle >> page 200.
Depending on several factors and how critical the situation is, the system operates in a staggered manner.
First by informing the driver, and if there is no or insufficient reaction, then by activating an autonomous emergency braking or an evasive manoeuvre as indicated by the conditions that will be discussed in the following points.
The system can be cancelled if the accelerator pedal is pressed or the steering wheel is turned firmly.
Depending on the equipment and the country, Front Assist also includes the following functions:
- Pedestrian protection >>> page 218
• Cyclist protection >>> page 218
• Dodge assist >>> page 218 - Oncoming vehicle braking when turning
page 218
- Junction assist >>> page 219
WARNING
- Front Assist is a driving assistance function that can never replace the driver's attention.
- Front Assist cannot change the laws of physics or replace the driver in terms of keeping control of the vehicle and reacting to a possible emergency situation.
- Following a Front Assist emergency warning, pay immediate attention to the situation and try to avoid the collision where appropriate.
Warning levels and brake assist
Front Assist is active from 5 km/h (3 mph). Depending on different conditions (vehicle speed, speed and type of object recognised, etc.), some of the stages described below are omitted to optimise the performance of the system.
Safety distance warning
If the system detects that you are driving too close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the driver with this indication on the instrument cluster display.
The timing of the warning varies depending on driver behaviour, vehicle speed and relative speed between both.
The safety distance warning is active from approx. 65 km/h (40 mph).
Advance warning
If the system detects a possible collision with the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by means of an audible warning and an indication on the instrument cluster display.
Assistant systems
The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a possible emergency braking >> △ in Introduction on page 217. When Front Assist is connected, the indications of other functions on the screen may be hidden.
Critical warning
If the driver fails to react to the advance warning, the system may actively intervene in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger of a collision.
Automatic braking
If the driver also fails to react to the critical warning, the system may initiate independent emergency braking by progressively increasing the braking in accordance with the criticality of the situation.
Driver emergency braking assistance system If the driver, after the critical warning, starts braking but the system detects that the brake is not being applied with sufficient force, the braking intensity will be increased. This brake assist only occurs if the pedal is pressed firmly.
WARNING
- The system cannot prevent a collision, although it can significantly minimise the consequences by reducing the speed and the force of the impact.
- If Front Assist applies the brakes, the brake pedal is "harder".
• Automatic interventions by Front Assist on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing the accelerator or moving the steering wheel.
- Front Assist may decelerate the vehicle until it stops completely. However, the brake system does not halt the vehicle permanently. Use the foot brakel
Pedestrian and cyclist recognition
The system recognises pedestrians and cyclists who travel in the same lane and direction and pedestrians and cyclists who transversely cross the vehicle's path.
Pedestrian and cyclist recognition technology cannot exceed the physically prescribed limits and works exclusively within the system's limits. The responsibility for braking always depends on the driver.
The pedestrian and cyclist recognition can cause undesired warnings and braking interventions, e.g. with a hidden radar sensor or a dirty camera field of vision.
Be ready to take charge of the vehicle at any time.
The pedestrian and cyclist recognition operating speed range is lower than that of Front Assist.
Dodge assist
Dodge assist helps the driver avoid an obstacle in critical conditions.
Once the Front Assist has activated a critical warning, if the driver intends to dodge the object, the swerve assist will help correct the trajectory. The driver must start and finish the manoeuvre, as this is an assistance system and not an autonomous one.
The system is active between approximately 30 km/h (20 mph) and 150 km/h (90 mph).
Limitations
This system does not react to objects crossing the path of the vehicle or to animals. The basic limitations of Front Assist must also be taken into account>>> page 219.
Turn-off assist
Turn-off assist can avoid a collision with a vehicle approaching in the opposite direction, by braking the vehicle itself when the intention is to turn.
This system is active up to 25 km/h (15 mph).
Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)
Limitations
The turn-off assist function is available if you have indicated your intention to turn by activating the turn signal, you have turned the steering wheel and the turning path has started.
It only reacts to vehicles that are in the path of the vehicle (not to animals, people, etc.).
The basic limitations of Front Assist must also be taken into account>>> page 219.
Junction assist
Junction Assist can prevent the vehicle from colliding with a vehicle crossing the road as it enters an intersection or junction.
If there is a risk of collision when exiting an exit or entering a junction, Junction Assist can issue a visual and audible warning and brake the vehicle. This can reduce the risk of an accident.
Displays
At low speeds, the park assist display uses coloured segments to show detected crossing traffic.
Fig. 147 In the infatainment system: junction assist display.
Yellow segment: Junction assistant has detected crossing traffic. Pay attention and be prepared to brake
Red segment: Junction assist has detected a potential collision with crossing traffic. Brake!
Depending on the situation, the coloured arrows are also shown on the head up display or on the instrument cluster. These indicate the direction from which cross traffic is approaching.
Speed range
Junction assist is available in a speed range from 0 km/h (10 mph) to around 65 km/h (close to 40 mph).
Limitations
Junction assist does not react to road users who are hidden by structures or other road users. Road users leaving a place where they were concealed may be detected with a delay
Always keep in mind the basic limitations of the Front Assist >> page 219 system.
System limitations
Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to the system. Thus, in certain circumstances, some of the reactions may be inappropriate from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention and intervene if necessary.
The following conditions may cause Front Assist not to react or to do so too late:
The indication will be shown on the instrument cluster display in the first few instants of driving after switching on the ignition, due to the system's initial auto-calibration.
Unrecognised objects
• Vehicles traveling outside the range of the sensors at a close distance to your vehicle.
- Vehicles that suddenly change to the lane on which your vehicle is travelling.
- Pedestrians that cannot be recognised because they are partially or totally hidden.
Assistant systems
- Objects such as walls, posts, fences, trees or garage doors.
- Loads and accessories of other vehicles that protrude over the sides, rear or top.
- Pedestrians or cyclists standing or approaching in the opposite direction.
• Other vehicles crossing the vehicle's path.
Operating limitations
In the following situations, Front Assist may work in a limited or unwanted way:
- If Front Assist or the front camera are disabled or broken.
- If the radar sensor or the front camera are dirty or covered.
- On taking tight bends or complex paths.
- When pressing the accelerator firmly or at full throttle.
- If the ESC is adjusting or is broken.
- If several brake lights of the vehicle or electrically connected trailer are damaged.
- If the vehicle is reversing.
• In case of snow or heavy rain.
• In case of dazzling sun or total darkness.
• Entrances and exits of tunnels.
- In complex driving situations (such as traffic islands, cut-through roundabouts, etc.), Front Assist may issue warnings and unnecessarily intervene in braking.
For more details, see section >>> page 199, System limits.
Manual activation and deactivation of the function
Front Assist indicators appear on the instrument panel display.
Front Assist is active whenever the ignition is switched on. When the vehicle is started, Front Assist may not be available for a short period of time while the system starts. During this phase, the instrument cluster display will display the following indication ②.
When Front Assist is deactivated, so too are the advance warning and the distance warning functions.
CUPRA recommends leaving Front Assist activated except in the situations explained in section page 221. Temporarily deactivating Front Assist.
Activating and deactivating Front Assist
With the ignition switched on, Front Assist can be deactivated or activated as follows:
- In the infotainment system: press the function button ☐ > Driver assist > Smart Assis-
tants > Front Assist >> page 38. - OR: Select the corresponding menu option using the button for the assistants systems >>> page 199.
This indication will be displayed in the instrument cluster when Front Assist is deactivated.
Each time the ignition is switched on. Front Assist will reappear as active.
Switching distance warning on and off
The safety distance warning can be activated or deactivated in the infotainment system using the function button ☐ > Driver assist
Smart Assistants > Front Assist >>> page 38.
Each time the ignition is switched on, the distance warning will reappear as active.
CUPRA recommends having the safety distance warning activated, with the exceptions described in section page 221. Temporarily deactivating Front Assist.
Activating or deactivating the swerve and turn assist
The swerve and turn assistance systems can be activated or deactivated in the infotainment system using the functional button.
Driver assist > Smart Assistants > Front Assist >>> page 38.
Lane Assist system
Whenever the ignition is switched on, the swerve and turn assist will reappear as active.
CUPRA recommends having the swerve and turn assistance systems activated, with the exceptions described in section page 221. Temporarily deactivating Front Assist.
Activating or deactivating the swerve and turn and junction assist
The swerve and turn assistance systems can be activated or deactivated in the infotainment system using the function button ☐ > Driver assist > Smart Assistants > Front Assist >>> page 38.
Whenever the ignition is switched on, the swerve and turn and junction assist will reappear as active.
CUPRA recommends having the swerve and turn assistance systems activated, with the exceptions described in section page 221. Temporarily deactivating Front Assist.
Temporarily deactivating Front Assist
In the following situations Front Assist should be deactivated due to the system's limitations:
- When the vehicle is to be towed.
• If the vehicle is on a test bed. - If the radar sensor or the front camera is faulty.
- If the radar sensor or the front camera has suffered a violent blow.
• If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
- If the radar sensor or the front camera is temporarily covered by an accessory.
- When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto transportation.
- If the windscreen is damaged in an area that seems the vision of the best cause
Lane Assist system
Introduction
The Lane Assist System helps the driver stay in his/her lane within the physical limits of the system. This function is not suitable and is not designed to keep the vehicle automatically in the lane.
Using the camera located in the windscreen, the Lane Assist system detects the lane boundaries dividing the lanes in which the vehicle is traveling. If the vehicle gets too close to the detected lane limits, the system alerts the driver through a corrective motion of the steering wheel. The driver can cancel the steering corrective action at any time.
No warning will be given when the turn signals are activated, given that the Lane Assist system understands that a lane change is required.
System limits
Use the Lane Assist system only on large, well-maintained motorways and highways.
The system is not available under the following conditions:
• The speed limit allowed is below approx. 60 km/h (35 mph).
- The system has not detected any lane lines.
- On tight bends.
■ Temporarily in very sporty driving situations.
- If the driver firmly rectifies a system intervention.
- If a lane marking is crossed despite system intervention.
- If the driver does not react to a request to intervene.
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the Lane Assist system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and by the very nature of the system. Careless or uncontrolled use of the Lane Assist system may cause accidents and injury. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness or manoeuvres when driving.
• Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation.
• Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so it can be turned at any time. The responsibility of staying in the lane is always the driver's.
Assistant systems
• The Lane Assist system does not detect all road markings. The road surfaces, road structures or objects in poor condition can be incorrectly detected as road markings under certain circumstances by the Lane Assist system. Immediately counter any unwanted intervention of the system.
- Please observe the indications on the instrument cluster and act as is necessary if the traffic situation permits.
- In the following situations there may be undesired interventions of the system or it may not intervene at all. In these situations, special attention is required from the driver and, where appropriate, the temporary deactivation of the lane assist warning system:
- In very sporty driving situations.
- In adverse weather conditions and roads in poor condition.
- When passing through road works.
Before gradient changes of grade and river beds.
• Always observe the vehicle surroundings carefully and drive proactively.
- When the area of vision of the camera becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the Lane Assist system function can be affected.
Driving with the Lane Assist System
Fig. 148 On the instrument cluster display:
indications of the lane assist system.
① Yellow line: The system intervenes assisting on the represented side.
② White line: Lane line detected. The system is ready to intervene on the displayed side. When the line is grey, the lane line is detected but the system is in a passive state or not available for intervention.
Depending on the equipment, additional details of the lane marking line currently detected by the camera, e.g. dashed road markings, can also be displayed on the instrument cluster display.
Controllamps
Lights up grey
Lane departure warning system switched to passive and not available for guidance.
Lights up green
Lane Assist system active and available
Lights up yellow
The Lane Assist system is intervening by
adjusting the steering.
Switching the lane assist system on or off
In some countries, the Lane Assist system is always activated when the ignition is switched on. It is switched on and off and displayed in the infotainment system's ☐ Vehicle menu and also in the driving assistants menu displayed on the instrument cluster, by pressing the @ button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The Lane Assist system is designed to actively intervene as of approximately 65 km/h (40 mph) and if it has detected the lane boundaries (system status: active).
When a turn signal is activated, the system temporarily switches to a passive state in the indicated direction and is available for operation in the opposite direction.
An energetic rotation or rectification of the steering wheel by the driver causes the system to temporarily switch to a passive state.
When Lane Assist is switched off, the yellow disconnection warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster (depending on the country).
Travel Assist
I Note
If a system fault persists, Lane Assist may switch off automatically.
Driver intervention prompt
If the steering is not corrected manually, the system prompts the driver an indication on the instrument cluster display and audible warnings.
If no reaction is obtained from the driver, the system switches to a passive state.
Depending on the equipment, Emergency Assist is activated.
Regardless of the steering manoeuvres, an indication on the instrument cluster display and audible warnings also prompt the driver to drive in the middle of the lane if the steering correction lasts longer than reasonable.
Steering wheel vibration
The following situations may result in a steering wheel vibration:
• The lane ceases to be recognised during a sudden intervention in the steering by the system.
It is also possible to select steering wheel vibration in the Vehicle menu of the infotainment system. In this case, when a vehicle with Lane Assist switched on crosses over a detected lane marking, the steering wheel will vibrate.
Troubleshooting
The lane departure warning assistant available
The control lamp lights up in yellow. A relevant warning is also displayed on the instrument cluster display.
- There is a fault or a defect. Switch the engine off and on again.
- The field of vision of the camera is dirty. Clean the windscreen >> page 395.
- The camera has decreased visibility due to accessories or adhesives.
If the camera's field of view is affected by dirt, snow, accessories, stickers or other obstructions, the following temporary message may appear on the instrument cluster, accompanied by an audible warning:
Driver assist limited now. Front sensors without visibility.
See more information on this topic in the section "Drive assist sensors and cameras" >> page 200.
The system behaves differently than expected
- The camera has been altered or damaged, e.g. because of damage caused to the wind-screen. Check for visible damage.
- Do not mount objects on the steering wheel.
if the problem persists, consult a specialised workshop.
Note
After switching on the ignition, it may take a few seconds before a fault is detected in the system.
i Note
If lane assist is not available, Emergency Assist and Travel Assist are not available either
Travel Assist
Introduction
Travel Assist combines adaptive cruise control (ACC) and the adaptive lane guidance function. Within the limitations of the system, the vehicle can maintain a distance from the vehicle in front that is preselected by the driver and remain in the preferred position within the lane.
Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist. Therefore, carefully read the information about the ACC >> page 209 and the Lane Assist >> page 221 and take into account the limitations of the systems and the indications given in the information.
Assistant systems
How to know if the vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist
The vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if the Travel Assist option appears in the instrument cluster menu when the button ☑ on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed.
Speed range
Travel Assist regulates at speeds between 20 and 210 km/h (15 and 130 mph).
Driving with Travel Assist
Travel Assist automatically controls the accelerator pedal, the brakes and the steering. In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limitations, decelerate the vehicle until it stops behind another that stops, and automatically start again.
You can override assisted adjustment at all times.
Status display
Fig. 149 On the instrument cluster display: display of active regulation (schematic representation).
① The colour of the lane markings indicates the status of the adaptive lane guidance function.
- Green: adaptive lane guidance function active.
■ Grey: passive adaptive lane guidance function.
② Distance set.
Depending on the equipment, additional details, e.g. dashed road markings and vehicles in front, can also be shown on the instrument cluster display.
Control lamps indicate the status of the system on the instrument cluster display:
Indicator lamp green: Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise control and adaptive cruise control
Partially green lamp: Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise control active and adaptive lane guidance function pas-
Grey lamp: Travel Assist deactivated, not regulating.
Driver intervention prompt
If you remove your hands from the steering wheel, after a few seconds the system asks you to take over the steering with an indication on the instrument cluster display and audible warnings.
If you do not react, Travel Assist is deactivated. Depending on the equipment, Emergency Assist activates in its place.
WARNING
The Travel Assist smart technology cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the system. If Travel assist is used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
Travel Assist
- Bear in mind the system limitations and the indications regarding the control of the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist.
- Adapt your speed and safety distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
- Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in slippery conditions (e.g., snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.
- Do not use Travel Assist offload or on roads where the surface is not firm. Travel Assist has been designed for use on paved roads only.
- Travel Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane.
- Brake immediately if Travel Assist does not slow down enough.
- Brake immediately when instructed to do so on the instrument cluster display, or if Travel Assist does not reduce speed sufficiently.
- Brake when the vehicle continues to move forward without it being desired after an indication to brake.
- If possible, do not wear gloves while driving. The system could interpret this as no driving activity.
- If driver intervention is requested on the instrument cluster display, immediately resume control of the vehicle.
- Keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times, to ensure you always have control over the steering. The driver is always responsible for keeping the vehicle in its own lane.
* Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself.
Operating Travel Assist
Fig. 150 Left side of the multilunction steering wheel
Switch on and start regulation
The Travel Assist Function is activated via the driving assistance menu displayed on the instrument cluster.
-
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
-
Then select the Travel Assist option from the menu.
Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle switches to the following system statuses in Travel Assist:
- If the ACC was already regulating, Travel Assist maintains the current speed and the preset distance to the vehicle in front.
When lane markings are detected, the vehicle is also kept in the lane by steering movements. • If ACC was not already regulating, Travel Assist remains selected but in a passive status (not regulating).
Press the SET button.
Travel Assist switches to the active system status, depending on the driving situation.
The indicator lamp for the driving situation lights up on the instrument cluster display. A message is also displayed.
Interrupting regulation
- Briefly press the button .a.
OR: press the brake pedal.
The set distance remains saved.
Assistant systems
Switch to ACC or speed limiter
- Press the button on the multi-function steering wheel.
- Then select the ACC or Limiter option from the menu.
The vehicle switches from Travel Assist to the ACC or speed limiter system status corresponding to the driving situation.
Making other adjustments
All other aspects of Travel Assist are controlled like the ACC.
Using the lane change assist
Lane Change Assist uses the same sensor system as Side Assist. Therefore, read the information on Side Assist page 229 carefully and observe the limits of the system and the notes that it displays.
Activating the comfort turn signal on a motor-way, provided that the prerequisites are met and no vehicles have been detected in the vicinity, provides assistance when the vehicle is changing lanes.
Prerequisites
Lane change assist is only available, depending on the vehicle's equipment, when driving forwards on multi-lane motorways included in the infotainment system's navigation data, and when travelling later than 65 km/h.
Travel Assist must also be activated.
The comfort turn signals mode must first be activated in the infotainment system's vehicle settings menu >> page 134.
Status display
Fig. 151 On the instrument cluster display lane change assist display (schematic representation)
① Adjoining lane highlighted: changing lanes is possible on the respective side.
② Arrows in the vehicle's own lane show that the assisted lane charging function is switched on.
- Grey arrow: changing lanes to the respective side of the lane is not possible.
- White arrow: changing lanes to the respective side of the lane is possible.
① Green track on the overtaking lane: lane change is in progress.
Activating and deactivating lane change assist
You can activate and deactivate lane change assist in the Inforainment system.
1. Access the assistant menu.
2. Select Travel Assist.
3. Activate or deactivate lane change assist as a sub-function of Travel Assist.
Note
If a fault occurs in the system, lane change assist may automatically switch off or be interrupted during the lane change.
Activating lane change assist while driving
Once the prerequisites have been met and the programmed speed has been set with the SET button:
1. Press the Biffon again.
This activates lane assist. The arrows of your own lane on the instrument cluster display are grey??? Fig. 151②
Changing lanes
If the system detects no objects in the detection field of the sensor system and an assisted lane change to an adjacent lane is possible, the corresponding lane is shown in the instrument
Travel Assist
cluster display next to the driver's own lane. The arrow on the corresponding side of the lane is displayed in white >> Fig. 151②
- When the comfort turn signal is activated on the desired side, the vehicle changes lane. A message is also displayed.
When changing lanes, the vehicle automatically activates the turn signal on the corresponding side. Once the lane change is complete, the turn signal automatically switches off.
WARNING
The sensor system cannot reliably detect all objects in the surroundings and operates exclusively within the limits of the system. If you use the lane change assist irresponsibly, accidents and serious injuries can occur. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
- Before changing lanes, make sure it is safe to do so. In particular, rapidly approaching objects may not be detected in time.
- Keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times and be prepared to control your own speed and direction of travel.
Turning off the lane change assist
- It turns off if the steering wheel is turned sharply.
- OR: by pressing the button.
• OR: by pressing the brake pedal.
Lane change assist is deactivated.
Troubleshooting
Travel Assist is not available or does work as expected
The control lamp lights up in yellow. A relevant warning is also displayed on the instrument cluster display.
- There is a fault in the sensors. Check the causes and solutions described in the information about the ACC >>> page 214 or the Lane Assist >>> page 223.
- There is a fault or a defect. Switch the engine off and on again.
• The system limits are exceeded.
- If the problem persists, consult a specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends visiting a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership.
Grip the steering wheel
The warning lamp lights up white and a message is then shown on the instrument cluster display.
- You released the steering wheel for a few seconds. Take hold of the steering wheel and take control of the vehicle.
Grip the steering wheel
The warning lamp lights up red and a message is shown on the instrument cluster display. Depending on the situation, an audio warning sounds or the steering wheel vibrates.
- You have let go of the steering wheel for a long time, or the system limits have been reached. Immediately take hold of the steering wheel and take control of the vehicle.
Travel Assist disconnects automatically
- There is a fault or a defect. Switch the engine off and on again.
- If the problem persists, consult a specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends visiting a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership.
Regulation is interrupted unexpectedly
- Vehicles without lane departure warning:
You have turned on the turn signal.
Assisted lane changing is interrupted
of unavailability
A message about this is shown on the instrument cluster display.
• The vehicle has stopped detecting lane markings.
- You have let go of the steering wheel
- You are applying too much force to the steering wheel.
Assistant systems
- You have turned on the turn signal too many times, or the turn signal lever is stuck.
- The driving speed is lower than around 65 km/h.
- The vehicle has detected objects in the vicinity that prevent an assisted lane change.
- You are not on a multi-lane motorway.
Emergency Assist
How it works
Emergency Assist can detect whether the driver is inactive and can automatically keep the car in its lane and stop it altogether if necessary.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the system may perform an assisted lane change, guiding the vehicle to the adjacent lane and even stopping it on the shoulder, based on nearby traffic conditions, vehicle speed, and road type.
This way the system can actively help avoid an accident or reduce its consequences.
Emergency Assist uses the same sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Lane Assist and Side Assist. Therefore, carefully read the information about ACC >> page 209, Lane Assist >> page 221 and Side Assist >> page 229 and take into account the limitations of the systems and the indications given in the information.
Emergency assist always available after the ignition has been switched on and is activated if the following conditions are met:
• Travel Assist or Lane Assist is switched on.
- The system has detected at least one lane boundary to the left or right of the vehicle.
Note
If emergency assist is faulty, it may switch off automatically.
Note
If Lane Assist is unavailable, Emergency Assist is also unavailable.
Driver intervention prompt
If Emergency Assist detects that the driver is not actively doing anything, he or she is prompted to take control of the vehicle by audio warnings and a brief application of the brake. In addition, a warning is shown on the instrument cluster display and the volume of the infotainment system is lowered.
Depending on the equipment, the driver's seat belt is tightened at the same time.
System intervention
If the driver does not respond, the Emergency Assist system is activated. The following control lamp lights up on the instrument cluster display:
The system is regulating, lane guidance is activated.
The system is regulating, passive lane guidance.
You can cancel the adjustment at any time by moving the steering wheel, over-accelerating or braking.
While the emergency assistant is in operation, other road users are warned as follows:
• The hazard warning lights are switched on soon after.
■ The horn sounds (depending on the speed).
- If the system performs an assisted lane
change, the corresponding turn signal will activate.
The following happens as soon as the vehicle stops:
- The electronic parking brake and gear shift position P are engaged.
■ The vehicle interior lighting comes on. - Depending on the features, an emergency call (eCall) is made.
Lane departure warning (Side Assist)
WARNING
The Emergency Assist smart technology cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle.
- Adapt your speed and safety distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
• Emergency Assist cannot always avoid accidents or serious injuries by itself.
- If the radar sensor or the camera are covered or have been altered or damaged, the system may inappropriately apply the brakes or intervene in the steering.
• The Emergency Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane.
WARNING
If Emergency Assist intervenes inopportunely, serious accidents and injuries may occur.
- If the vehicle behaves differently than expected, interrupt the intervention of the Emergency Assist by over-accelerating, braking or moving the steering wheel.
- Do not use Travel Assist or Lane Assist. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.
Troubleshooting
Emergency Assist not available
The control lamp lights up in yellow. A relevant warning is also displayed on the instrument cluster display.
- There is a fault or a defect. Turn the drive system off and on again.
- If the problem persists, switch off the Emergency Assist and go to a specialised workshop.
Lane departure warning (Side Assist)
Introduction
The lane departure warning uses radar sensors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle >> page 6. The system does this by measuring the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and its speed differential. The lane departure warning will not work at speeds of less than approx. 15 km/h (9 mph).
Lane width is not detected individually, but is rather pre-configured in the system. Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in between two lanes, the indications may be incorrect. Furthermore, the system can detect vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if there are any) and can also detect stationary objects such as dividers, and thus give an incorrect indication.
Trailer mode
Side assist is automatically deactivated and cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted tow-bar is electrically connected to a trailer or similar device.
As soon as the driver starts to drive with a trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a message is displayed on the instrument cluster display indicating that side assist is switched off. Once the vehicle trailer has been disengaged, side assist will return to the initial state prior to the moment the trailer was electrically connected.
If the tow-bar is not factory fitted, side assist should be switched off manually when driving with a trailer.
Physical limitations inherent to the system
In some situations the lane departure warning may not interpret the traffic situation correctly. I.e. in the following situations:
• in the case of lanes with different widths;
■ in areas with significant gradient changes;
• in adverse weather conditions;
- in the case of special constructions to the side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular dividers.
Assistant systems
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into Side Assist cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics: it only works within the limits of the system. Accidents and severe injury may occur if Side Assist is used negligently or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
- Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
- Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time.
- Pay attention to the control lamps that may come on in the external interior mirrors and on the instrument cluster, and follow any instructions they may give.
* The lane departure warning could react to any special constructions that might be present to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. high or irregular dividers. This may cause erroneous warnings.
- Never use the lane departure warning on unpaved roads. The lane departure warning has been designed for use on paved roads.
• Always pay attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
- The control lamps of the lane departure warning may have limited functionality due to solar radiation.
Note
If Side Assist does not work as described in this chapter, stop using it and contact a specialised workshop.
Driving with Side Assist
Fig. 152 C control lamp of the lane departure warning
Fig. 153 Controllams of the lane departure warning.
Connecting and disconnecting
Side Assist can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistants menu in the infotainment system.
Additionally it can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistants menu on the instrument cluster.
When the lane departure warning is ready to operate, the indications in the control lamps will turn on briefly as confirmation.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjustment in the system will remain active.
Light indication
The control lamp provides an indication on the corresponding side regarding the traffic situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp on the left-hand side
Lane departure warning (Side Assist)
indicates the traffic situation to the rear left of the vehicle, and the control lamp on the right-hand side indicates the traffic situation to the rear right of the vehicle.
Keep the warning lamps zone of the lane departure warning free of stickers or similar objects that may interfere with your visibility.
It lights up
It turns once briefly: the lane departure warning is activated and ready to operate, i.e. when activating the system
It lights up continuously: the lane departure warning has detected a vehicle in the blind seat.
Flashes
A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane and the turn signal has been switched on in the direction of the detected vehicle.
For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist 392 page 221, a warning to switch lanes will also appear even though the turn signal has not been switched on Lane Assist. "Plus".
The control lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check.
If there are no indications from the control lamp of the lane departure warning, this means that the lane departure warning has not detected any other vehicles at the rear area.
When the exterior lighting is low, the brightness of the control lamps dimmed. The user can modify the intensity of the control lamps with up to 5 levels in the infotainment system menu.
Lane assist Plus.
The Lane Assist Plus function can be used by activating the Lane Assist >> page 221 and Side Assist functions. In this case its functions are expanded as described below.
If the driver initiates a lane change maneuver in a potential critical situation;
- The lamp flashes on the corresponding side even though the turn signal has not been activated.
• The steering wheel vibrates to warn the driver of the risk of collision.
- torque is applied to correct the steering and return the vehicle to its lane.
Driving situations
Fig. 154 Overtaking with traffic behind the vehicle.
Fig. 155 Over drinking in the central lane and then joining the right lane.
In the following situations, an indication will be displayed by the control lamp >>> Fig. 152, >>> Fig. 153 (arrow):
Assistant systems
- When being overtaken by another vehicle >>> Fig. 154.
- When overtaking another vehicle
Fig. 155 with a speed difference of approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a considerably higher speed, no indication will be displayed.
The faster the vehicle approaches, the sooner an indication will be displayed in the control lamp, because the lane departure warning takes into account the speed differential with other vehicles. Thus even though the distance from the other vehicle is identical, the indication will appear sooner in some cases and later in others.
Park the vehicle
Parking and manoeuvring
Park the vehicle
Parking
When parking your vehicle, all legal requirements should be observed.
- Connect the electronic parking brake >>> page 234.
- Automatic transmission; switch on the parking lock by pressing button P.
- Stop the engine and turn off the ignition. Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
- Manual gearbox: engage first gear on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.
- On slopes, turn the steering wheel so that if the parked vehicle were to start moving, it would steer toward the kerb.
- Exit the vehicle >>> ⚠️. Watch out for other road users!
- Take all vehicle keys with you and lock it.
To avoid damage or hazardous situations, always park the vehicle on a suitable parking surface >>> ①.
Rear seat warning
The function depends on the vehicle's equipment.
When the ignition is switched off, a text message in the infotainment system reminds you not to leave any passengers in the rear seats >>> △.
If a rear door was used before the trip, a text message is also displayed on the instrument cluster and an audible warning may sound. This warning can be activated/deactivated in the infotainment system menu Settings > Screen settings > Rear seat warning.
WARNING
If the vehicle is parked incorrectly, it could roll away, even on gentle slopes. This can cause accidents and serious injuries.
- When parking, always carry out the operations in the stipulated order.
■ Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the electronic parking brake is engaged.
WARNING
If children, people who may need assistance or animals are left unattended in the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries can occur.
- Never leave children, people who may need assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle. They could operate the gear selector and release the electronic parking brake. The vehicle could be set in motion.
- Never leave children, people who may need assistance, or animals in the vehicle. Depending on the season, very high or low temperatures can be reached inside a closed vehicle.
• Always take all vehicle keys with you when leaving the vehicle.
NOTICE
The presence of irregularities on the ground, sand or mud can cause damage to the vehicle and mean that it cannot be parked properly.
• Always park the vehicle on firm and flat ground.
Parking and manoeuvring
NOTICE
Components on the underside of the vehicle, such as bumpers, spoilers and running gear components, can be damaged when running over objects protruding from the ground. - Drive carefully when entering buildings, on ramps, driving over kerbs or fixed markings, and on doscents.
① NOTICE
Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel or flammable materials.
Electronic parking brake
| Using the electronic parking brak
Fig. 156 C. entire console, lower part electronic parking brake button.
Connecting
The electronic parking brake can be activated whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, even when the ignition is switched off. Activate it whenever you leave or park the vehicle.
- Pull and hold the button >> Fig. 156. The parking brake is on when the red indicator lamp on the instrument cluster and the button indicator lamp turns on.
- Release the button
Switching off
- Switch the ignition on.
- Press the button >> Fig. 156. At the same time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the engine is running, press the accelerator pedal slightly.
- The indicator lamp on button and the red indicator lamp @ on the instrument cluster turn off.
Automatic disconnection when moving off
The electronic parking brake automatically disconnects when moving off in any of the following situations. If the driver's door is closed and the driver's seatbelt is buckled:
- Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: A gear range is engaged or switched to another one and the accelerator pedal is lightly pressed.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox: Fully depress the clutch pedal before moving off and gently depress the accelerator.
• To facilitate certain manoeuvres, there are exceptions that allow the parking brake to disconnect automatically without the driver's seatbelt being buckled.
The parking brake can be prevented from being automatically released by continuously pulling up the @ switch when moving off.
The electronic parking brake is not disconnected until the @ button is released. This can facilitate starting off when a heavy load is towed >> page 319.
Automatic application when exiting the vehicle incorrectly
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the electronic parking brake may be applied automatically if the system detects an improper attempt to exit the vehicle. For example:
- no seat presence detection,
- seat belt unfastened
- door open.
The electronic parking brake also holds the vehicle in the neutral N position.
Electronic parking brake
WARNING
If the vehicle is left incorrectly, it could roll away. This could lead to accidents, serious injury and property damage.
- When parking the vehicle, always perform the appropriate operations in the indicated order >>> page 233, Parking.
- Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the electronic parking brake is applied and that the control lamp next to the gear selector is red on the instrument cluster.
Protection against unintentional movement
If you do not want the electronic parking brake to be applied automatically, e.g. in a car wash or if you want to push or tow the vehicle, the vehicle's ability to roll can be maintained.
Deactivate:
With the vehicle stationary, press down the brake pedal and select the N position on the gear selector.
- Confirm the message Deactivate roll-away protection in the infotainment system.
- OR: open the vehicle settings in the infotainment system (≥Vehicle > Brakes > Deactivate the "Roll-away protection function".
Activate
- Press the button >>> Fig. 156. The electronic parking brake is activated.
NOTICE
The vehicle may be able to roll even when the ignition is switched off.
Automatic connection when the ignition is turned off
This function can be deactivated through the Infotainment system.
In vehicles with manual transmission, the electronic parking brake is activated automatically when the ignition is turned off.
Emergency brake function
Only use the emergency brake function in an emergency, if the vehicle cannot be stopped by pressing the brake pedal >> ▲!
- Pull and hold the button. The vehicle will brake sharply. At the same time, an audio warning will be heard.
- To stop the braking process, release the button or press the accelerator.
When the ESC Sport or ESC OFF mode is selected, ESC will reactivate to assist the driver during braking. Depending on the model version, the ESC will either switch back to its previous disconnected state or will remain on.
WARNING
Improper use of the electronic parking brake can cause accidents and serious injury.
- Never use the electronic parking brake to stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. The braking distance is considerably longer. Always use the brake pedal.
- Never accelerate from the engine when a gear range or a gear is engaged and the engine is running. The vehicle could start moving even when the electronic parking brake is engaged.
NOTICE
To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally moving when parking it, first apply the electronic parking brake and then remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Troubleshooting
There is a defect in the electronic parking brake
The control lamp lights up in yellow.
Visit a CUPRA dealer or other specialist workshop.
The electronic parking brake does not release.
The 12-volt battery is discharged.
Parking and manoeuvring
• Use the jump start >> page 340
The electronic parking brake makes noises
- When the electronic parking brake is applied and released, noises may be heard.
- The system performs automatic and audible checks sporadically in the parked vehicle if some time elapses without the electronic parking brake being used.
Auto Hold function
Fig. 157 In the lower part of the centre console: Auto Hold function button
The Auto-Held function holds the vehicle at a standstill and prevents it from moving without it being necessary to keep the brake pedal depressed.
AUTO HOLD When the Auto Hold function is switched on, the lamp on the instrument cluster lights up grey.
When the Auto Hold function is active, the control lamp on the instrument cluster lights up green.
The control lamp of the button
Fig. 157 remains on when the Auto Hold function is connected.
Requirements
- If the system has detected the driver's presence based on various signals such as: seat-belt, driver's door, driver's seat occupied and others.
- The engine is running
Connecting and disconnecting
Press the Auto Hold button >> △. The control lamp on the button turns on when the Auto Hold function is switched on. The function is now available to be activated. The lamp on the button goes out when the Auto Hold function is switched off.
Switching on and off automatically
If the Auto Hold function was switched on with the Auto Hold button before switching off the ignition, the function will remain on after the ignition is re-engaged.
If the Auto Hold function was not switched on, it will remain off next time the ignition is switched on.
The Auto Hold function is automatically turned off if the following conditions are met:
1. If any of the requirements of the function are no longer met.
2. If the engine runs erratically or has any anomaly.
3. If the engine stalls.
4. Automatic gearbox: If any of the tyres have only minimal contact with the ground, e.g., if the axles are crossed.
Activation and deactivation
The Auto Hold function activates automatically if the following conditions are met (all points must be met at the same time):
- The function is switched on
- The vehicle is brought to a complete standstill with the brake pedal on a flat surface or on a slope.
- The engine rotates "correctly".
The Auto Hold function deactivates automatically if the following conditions are met: - The car moves off again
Automatic gearbox: by pressing the accelerator.
Manual gearbox by lifting your foot off the clutch pedal and pressing the accelerator (provided that a gear is engaged). - The function is switched off with the actions seen in the previous sections.
General information on parking systems
WARNING
The smart technology of the Auto Hold cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only operates within the limits of the system. Never allow the enhanced convenience of the Auto Hold function to induce you to take any risk that compromises safety.
- Never leave the vehicle running with the Auto Hold function switched on.
• The Auto Hold function cannot always keep the vehicle stopped on an uphill, or brake it sufficiently on a downhill, e.g. on slippery or icy surfaces.
NOTICE
Always deactivate the Auto Hold function before entering an automatic car wash facility. Failure to do so could cause damage due to the automatic application of the parking brake.
Note
After connecting the 12-volt battery, drive for a short distance to reset the Auto Hold function to operate correctly.
General information on parking systems
Automatic brake operation
The automatic braking feature of a parking system is used to reduce the danger of collision when an obstacle is detected during a parking manoeuvre.
Braking functions
Depending on the equipment, the following systems are available:
- Park assist plus manoeuvre braking function
page 239.
- Rear cross traffic alert emergency brake function >>> page 256.
- Park assist emergency brake function >>> page 243.
- Trailer Assist manoeuvre braking function
page 254
Infotainment system lamps
White lamp: system activated, the system brakes when it detects an obstacle in the path.
Coloured lamp: system deactivated, the system does not brake when it detects an obstacle although the sensors still detect it.
Requirements
• The vehicle is moving between approx. 3 km/h and 8 km/h when maneuvering
• A parking system is switched on.
The brakes are not automatically operated when park assist is switched on automatically while moving forward.
What happens in the event of automatic braking?
If there is an obstacle, the system brakes the vehicle to a standstill and keeps it stationary for approx. 2 seconds. Press the brakel
Activate
• Automatic braking is activated when the driver switches a parking system on.
Deactivating
- The automatic brake operation function deactivates when a park assist system is switched off.
- OR: to temporarily deactivate the manoeuvre braking function, press the ⚙ function button on the park assist screen and change the setting.
Parking and manoeuvring
WARNING
Never allow the automatic braking operations of park assist systems to lead you to take any risk that compromises safety, in certain situations, the automatic braking intervention may only work in a limited way or not work at all. Collisions with obstacles can injure people and damage the vehicle. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. - Pay attention and do not rely solely on park assist systems. - Always be prepared to brake and control the steering yourself. - Do not take any risks that compromise safety. - Act in accordance with the warnings and driving recommendations of the parking systems.
i Note
- Switch off the parking system if the automatic brakes operate excessively, e.g. when driving off-road. - After the park assist's manoeuvre braking function has braked the vehicle, it deactivates for the next 5 metres of movement in the same direction, and becomes active again after changing gear or changing the position of the gear selector.
Troubleshooting
The parking system behaves differently than expected
There can be several causes:
- The system requirements are not met. - The sensors or the camera are dirty or have ice on them >> page 396.
- The camera lens is not clean and the camera image is not clear >> page 396.
- Some noise sources, such as a jackhammer or a cobblestone surface can interfere with the ultrasound signal.
- The vehicle has some type of damage in the sensor or camera area, e.g. due to a parking impact.
- The sensor detection zone or field of view of the camera are blocked by an accessory, e.g. a bike rack.
- Changes have been made to the paintwork or structural modifications in the sensor or camera area, e.g. at the front of the vehicle or to the running gear.
Also take into account the messages displayed on the infotainment system display.
Sensor or camera without visibility, or the parking system has been switched off
If a sensor fails, that sensor zone is permanently switched off. The affected sensor zone may be displayed on the infotainment system
with a | symbol and a grayed-out graphic segment. If necessary, the parking system switches off the affected zone.
If the park assist is not working properly, a continuous audible signal sounds for a few seconds when it is switched on. If applicable, a message to this effect is displayed on the instrument cluster display
- Check if one of the causes indicated above has occurred.
- Once the source of the problem has been eliminated, the system may be reconnected.
- If the problem persists, consult a specialised workshop.
- Once the source of the problem has been eliminated, the system may be reconnected.
- If the problem persists, consult a specialised workshop.
Park Distance Control Plus (Park Pilot)
Park Distance Control Plus (Park Pilot)
Description
Fig.158 Park assist view on the
Intecement system display
Park assist plus assists the driver by giving visual and audio warnings about obstacles detected in front of and behind the vehicle.
The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When an obstacle is detected, it is indicated by audible signals and in the Infotainment system 193 Fig. 158.
When moving close to an obstacle, it is possible to know if the obstacle is in front of the vehicle or behind it according to the sound frequency.
The approximate measurement range of the
sensors is:
A 1.20m
⑤ 0.90m
c 160m
D 0.90m
As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of the audible signals will increase. The signal will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop the vehicle!
If the separation is maintained, the warning volume is reduced after about 2.5 seconds.
Error messages
If a an error or fault message is displayed on the instrument cluster in Park Assist, there is a fault.
If the fault doesn't disappear before switching off the ignition, it will not be indicated next time the park assist is connected.
If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in the front area are detected. If a front sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in the rear area are displayed. The symbol is displayed.
We recommend taking the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the fault repaired.
Trailer mode
On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch, when the trailer is connected, the rear sensors will not activate when reverse gear is engaged or buttonPis pressed in the infotainment system (☐ > Assistants). Therefore, any objects behind or to the side of the vehicle will not be indicated on the screen and no audible signals will sound.
The screen will only display objects detected at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.
Park assist settings
The indications and audible signals are set in the infotainment system: function button □ > Assistants > Parking > P > Settings
• Automatic activation: On/off
- Front volume: Volume in the front and rear
area.
- Rear volume: Volume in the rear area.
- Reduce volume: When Park Assist is
switched on, the volume of the audio source will be reduced, depending on the selected option.
Parking and manoeuvring
WARNING
* Always pay attention, by looking directly, to traffic and the area around the vehicle. Assistance systems are not a replacement for driver awareness. Responsibility always lies with the driver.
• The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not detected. Pay special attention to children and animals.
• Always keep the surroundings in sight: use the mirrors for additional help.
NOTICE
Park assist plus functions can be affected by various factors which may cause damage.
• Under certain circumstances, the system does not detect or display certain objects:
- Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences, posts and thin trees.
- Objects that are located above the sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.
- Objects with certain surfaces or structures, such as wire mesh fences or powder snow.
- Certain surfaces of objects and garments do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' signals. The system cannot detect these objects or people wearing such clothes correctly.
-
Sensor signals may be affected by external sound sources. This may prevent them from detecting people or objects.
-
If the system warns you of the proximity of a low obstacle, please note that after being detected by the system, the obstacle in question may disappear from the measurement sensors as the vehicle moves closer, and the system will no longer warn of its presence. In certain circumstances, objects such as high kerbs that could damage the underside of the vehicle are not detected.
- If the parking distance warning system is ignored, the vehicle could suffer considerable damage.
- Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle underbody can modify the orientation of the sensors. This can affect the park assist function. Have the function checked by a specialised workshop.
- A number plate or number plate holder with dimensions that exceed the space for the number plate, or a curved or deformed number plate can cause false detections or a loss of sensor visibility.
Note
- The Infotainment System display has a slight time delay.
- In certain situations, the system can give a warning even though there is no obstacle in the detected area:
- Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces with long grass.
- External ultrasound sources, such as other vehicles equipped with ultrasound systems.
- Heavy rain or snow, hall or dense exhaust gases.
- If the number plate is not properly secured to the surface of the bumper.
- Gradient changes.
• In order to guarantee good operation, keep the sensors clean, free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects.
* If you use high-pressure or steam equipment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, unless you do so very briefly, and always keep a distance of more than 10 cm away.
- Fitting certain accessories to the front of the vehicle, such as a plate holder with advertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist.
• We recommend that you practice parking in an area without traffic.
Park Distance Control Plus (Park Pilot)
• The volume and tone of the signals and indications can be changed.
- Please observe information on towing a trailer.
Operating Park Assist Plus
Switching on and off manually
- Press button P#: the infotainment system (Assistants > Parking assist > Park assist)
Automatic activation
- Select reverse gear
- OR: if you drive forward at a speed of less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter an obstacle, it is detected when it is optically approx. less than 95 cm away, or acoustically approx. 50 cm away. If the automatic connection is activated, a reduced display is shown.
- OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain distance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approx depending on whether or not an obstacle is detected).
When the Park Assist Plus connects automatically, a diagram of the vehicle and the segments will appear on screen. This function will be available unless the user has deactivated it. It only operates every time the speed drops below 15 km/h (9 m/s) for the first time.
Automatic activation of park assist can be
switched on and off in the infotainment sys-
tem:
- Switch the ignition on.
- In the infotainment system select □ > Assistants > Parking > Park assist.
- Check the Automatic activation box.
If activated automatically, an audible sound warning will only be given when obstacles in front are at a distance of less than 50 cm, approx.
If it is switched off using the P4 button in the infotainment system, one of the following actions must be taken for it to reactivate automatically:
- Switch off the ignition and switch it on again.
- EITHER: drive forward at over approx. 15 km/h (19 mph).
- OR: activate or deactivate the parking lock button P.
- OR: switch the automatic activation on and off in the Infotainment system.
Automatic disconnection
- Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.
• OR: press the parking lock button P.
Temporary mute
- Press the 16. function button on the infotainment screen.
- OR: activate the electronic parking brake.
Change from reduced view to full view
- Engage the reverse gear if your vehicle is equipped with a reversing camera.
- Press the car icon on the reduced view
- OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain distance (between approx. 10 and 20cm approx depending on whether or not an obstacle is detected).
Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear View Camera "RVC")
- Select reverse pair
- OR: press the RVC button on the Infotainment System display 1
A short confirmation signal will be heard and the button symbol will light up when the system is switched on.
NOTICE
Park assist plus only connects automatically when driving very slowly. If driving style is not adapted to the circumstances, an accident and serious injury or damage may be caused.
Parking and manoeuvring
Visual indication segments
Fig.159 Park assist view on the
Info: aivveni system device
The optical indication of the segments works as follows:
- Grey segments: the obstacle is more than approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the direction opposite to travel. They are also displayed when the electronic parking brake is activated.
- Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on the vehicle's path and are at a distance of less than approx. 30 cm away.
- Red segments: obstacles are less than approx. 30 cm away.
A guiding track will indicate the anticipated forward or backward trajectory, depending on the gear that is engaged.
If an obstacle is located in the vehicle's way, the corresponding audible warning will sound.
When the penultimate segment is displayed, the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, obstacles are shown in red (including these outside the trajectory). Stop the vehicle >>> △ in Description on page 240
If the car is fitted with the Top View Camera system, Park Assist visual guidance will appear in accordance with the view selected in the Top View Camera system.
Rear park assist
Description
Rear park assist is a visual and audible assistant that warns of obstacles located behind the vehicle.
There are sensors integrated in the rear bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible and visible warnings on the Infotainment system.
If the Top View Camera system is installed, the rear park assist will issue an audible warning about objects near the rear of the vehicle, and the Top View Camera image will be available on the infotainment screen, giving a real image of the objects around the car.
Particularly make sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and the like, as this could affect the system's operation. Cleaning instructions >>> page 396.
The approximate measurement range of the rear sensors is:
- Side area: 0.60 m
- Central area: 1.50 m
As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of the audible signals will increase. The signal will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop the vehicle! >>> △ on page 240.
If the separation is maintained, the warning volume is reduced after about 2.5 seconds.
Turning on Park assist
- Select reverse gear
Turning off Park assist
- Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.
- EITHER: use the selector lever to select N or
D, or press the parking lock button P.
Park assist settings
The indications and audible signals are set in the Infotainment system: function button □ > Assistants > Parking > P > Settings.
- Rear volume: Volume in the rear area.
- Reduce volume: When Park Assist is switched on, the volume of the audio source will be reduced, depending on the selected option.
Intelligent Park Assist (IPA) automatic parking system
Error messages
If a an error or fault message appears on the instrument cluster in Park assist, there is a fault.
If the fault doesn't disappear before switching off the ignition, it will not be indicated next time the park assist is connected.
We recommend taking the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the fault repaired.
Towing device
In vehicles factory fitted with a towing device, when the trailer is connected, the park assist will not be activated when reverse gear is engaged.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings >>> ▲ in Description on page 240.
Intelligent Park Assist (IPA) automatic parking system
Introduction
The automatic parking system is an additional function of ParkPilot >>> page 239 and helps the driver find a suitable parking space from among the following types:
- reverse parking in suitable perpendicular and parallel spaces,
- park driving forwards in suitable perpendicular spaces.
- exit a parking space driving forwards from a parallel space.
- park in a suitable space driving forwards at an angle to partially enter the selected parking space. The system will centre the vehicle in the parking space,
- finish reverse parking into a space in which you have attempted to park manually by partially entering with the rear of the vehicle.
In vehicles with an automatic parking system and factory infotainment system, the front, rear and side areas are represented, and the position of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.
The automatic parking system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system and its use requires special attention by the driver >>> △.
WARNING
The technology used in the automatic parking system has a series of limitations inherent to the system itself and the use of ultrasonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
- Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury.
- Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
- Certain surfaces of objects and garments do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' signals. The system cannot detect, at least correctly, these objects or people wearing such clothes.
• Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected by external sound sources. In certain circumstances this may prevent them from detecting people or objects.
• The ultrasound sensors may have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not detected.
- Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the ultrasound sensors do not detect small children, animals or certain objects in all situations.
WARNING
Quick turns of the steering wheel when parking or exiting a parking space with the automatic parking system can cause serious injury.
Do not hold the steering wheel during manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space until the system requests it. Doing so disables the system during the manoeuvre, resulting in the parking being cancelled.
Parking and manoeuvring
NOTICE
- In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects such as trailer hitches, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an open (or opening) rear lid, which could damage the vehicle.
- Retrofitting of certain accessories to the vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the operation of the automatic parking system and cause damage.
- The automatic parking system uses as a reference parked vehicles, kerbs and other objects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels are not damaged while parking. If necessary, interrupt the parking manoeuvre on time to avoid damaging the vehicle.
- The ultrasound sensors on the bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a collision, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space.
- If you use high-pressure or steam equipment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do not apply it directly unless very briefly and always from a distance of more than 10 cm.
- A registration plate or plate holder on the front that is larger than the space for the registration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause:
- False detections.
- The sensors to lose visibility.
- Cancellation of the parking manoeuvre or defective parking.
- If one of the ultrasonic sensors is damaged, the area corresponding to that group of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and cannot be activated until the fault is corrected. However, you can still use the sensors of the other bumper as per usual. If there is a fault in the system, consult a specialist workshop. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this purpose.
Note
• In order to guarantee good system operation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects.
- Certain sources of noise, such as rough asphalt or paving stones and the noise of other vehicles can induce the automatic parking system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warnings. The presence of metal objects can also affect the manoeuvre.
• To become familiar with the system and its functions, CUPRA recommends that you practice operating the automatic parking system in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.
Description of the automatic parking system
The components of the automatic parking system are the ultrasonic sensors located in the front and rear bumpers, the P button to switch the system on and off and the messages on the infotainment system display.
Prerequisites for parking
- The traction control (TCS) must be switched on >>> page 196.
- Speed when passing next to the parking space: do not exceed approx. 50 km/h (31 mph).
- Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres when driving past the parking space.
- Space length (parallel parking): vehicle length + 1 meter.
- Space width (parking bay): vehicle width +1.1 meters
Requirements for leaving the parking space (only for parallel parking)
- The traction control (TCS) must be switched on >>> page 196.
• Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5 metres.
[Non-Text]
Intelligent Park Assist (IPA) automatic parking system
Prematurely stopping or automatically interrupting the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space
The automatic parking system interrupts the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space in any of the following cases:
- Press button P in the infotainment system ○ > Assistants > Parking > Automatic parking system.
• The driver takes control of the steering wheel
• The parking manoeuvre can involve up to 8 movements.
- The parking manoeuvre does not end within 6 minutes after activation of the automatic steering.
- There is a fault in the system (the system is temporarily unavailable).
• TCS is switched off.
• TCS or ESC intervene with regulation
- A door or the luggage compartment is opened.
* The parking system encounters an unexpected obstacle.
- The parking system detects high rolling resistance, e.g. if there is an obstacle on the ground (stone, bump, carb, etc.).
Special characteristics
The automatic parking system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. For example, it is therefore not possible to use it to enter or exit a parking space on sharp bends or on very steep hills.
After changing a wheel
If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops entering and exiting parking spaces correctly, the circumference of the new wheel may be different and the system may need to adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and takes place during driving!!! in Introduction on page 243.
Selecting a parking type
Fig. 160 On the infolvement system display: parking modes indication.
Automatic parking includes the following 5 types of parking:
Reverse parallel parking
4 Reverse angle parking.
Forward angle parking.
9 Reverse parallel parking without driving past first: "Help me".
E Forward or reverse parking in a parking bay without driving past first.
Parking and manoeuvring
Selecting a parking type after passing in front of the space
After activating the automatic parking system and after detecting a parking space, the infotainment system display proposes a type of parking. The automatic parking system selects the parking type automatically. The selected type is shown on the infotainment system display >>> Fig. 160
• The prerequisites for parking with the automatic parking system must be met >>> page 244
- Press the P button in the infotainment system, > Assistants.
- When the system is switched on, the symbol P on the infotainment system display is highlighted. The selected type of parking is also displayed. You can change the type of parking on the infotainment system display.
- if there are more spaces available, another space can be selected by clicking on it on the infotainment system display.
- Follow the instructions displayed on the information system display while paying attention to traffic and drive the vehicle past the parking space.
Reverse parallel parking without driving past first (type 0)
With this type of parking [0], press button p so that the system completes the parking that has already been started. The system will only
switch on if sufficient progress has been made with the manoeuvre (the side sensor must be able to detect the reference vehicle). If it is impossible to successfully complete the manoeuvre that has been started, the system itself will drive out of the parking space before starting parking in a similar way to type A.
Special case of forward or reverse parking into a parking bay [6] without driving past first.
- The prerequisites for parling with the automatic parking system must be met >>> page 244.
- Move forward towards the parking space while paying attention to traffic and stop the vehicle with the front part partially inside the parking space.
- Press the P button once in the infotainment system. ○ > Assistants.
- When the system is switched on, the symbol P on the inflationment system display is highlighted. The selected parking mode without a reduced view is also displayed.
- Let go of the steering wheel >> in introduction on page 243.
Parking with the automatic parking system
The prerequisites have to be met to park with the automatic parking system >> page 244 and the parking mode has to be selected >> page 245.
Parking
Fig. 161 On the inf-terrain system display parallel parking position.
Fig. 162 On the infctainment system displays parking bay parking position
Intelligent Park Assist (IPA) automatic parking system
Fig. 161 >>> Fig. 162
① Your vehicle
② Parking space detected
① Indication showing the proposed parking manoeuvre
④ Start parking manocuvre
- Look at the display on the infotainment system's screen to see if the space has been detected as "appropriate" and if the correct position for parking has been reached >>> Fig. 161, >>> Fig. 162. Stop the vehicle and follow the instructions shown on the infotainment system
- Stop the vehicle, press the brake and, after a short pause, press the Start Ⓐ button in the infotainment system.
- Let go of the steering wheel >> △ in Introduction on page 243.
- Please note the following message:
Parking the vehicle... Steering intervention active
- The automatic parking system will park autonomously by taking control of the steering wheel (transverse control of the vehicle) and control of the accelerator and brake pedals (longitudinal control of the vehicle).
- Once the manoeuvres have been completed, this is indicated by an audio and visual warning in the inlotainment system. At this point the vehicle will be parked and immobilised tgear P activated and will turn off.
Progress bars
Fig. 163 On the infotainment system display progress bar
The progress bar ⑤ on the infotainment system display shows the relative distance to be covered as a symbol. The more complete the progress bar, the shorter the distance to complete the parking manoeuvre.
Fig. 164 On the Inl oistment System display parking space
Note
If the parking space is displayed with arrows on its sides, this indicates that it is possible to park in a different way in the same space by pressing on the highlighted space >> Fig. 164.
Note
If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely during parking, the result may not be the best.
Leaving a parking space with the automatic parking system (only for parallel parking)
Fig. 165 On the inf oatment system display: leaving a parallel parking space.
① Your vehicle
② Message giving the proposed manoeuvre to exit the parking space
Parking and manoeuvring
Leaving a parking space (parallel parking) The necessary conditions to exit a park- ing space with Park Assist have to be met
page 244.
- Press the P in the infotainment system: □
- Assistants. When the system is switched on, the symbol P on the infotainment system display is highlighted.
- Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards the road you will enter when exiting the parking space, and press the brake pedal.
- Tap the Start button③ in the Inflotainment system.
- Let go of the steering wheel >>> △ in introduction on page 243. Please note the following message:
Vehicle driving out of the parking space... Intervention in active steering.
- The automatic parking system will automatically perform the manoeuvres for getting the vehicle out of the parking space by taking control of the steering wheel (transverse control of the vehicle) and control of the accelerator and brake pedals (longitudinal control of the vehicle).
- The vehicle can be driven out of the parking space when a message to this effect is displayed in the infotainment system (Vehicle out of the parking space. Take control of the vehicle) and, if necessary, an audio sig
nal sounds. Take control of the steering wheel while maintaining the steering angle set by the automatic parking system.
- Paying attention to the traffic and surround-
ings, exit the parking space.
Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)
Introduction
A camera installed in the rear lid handle assists the driver with reverse parking or maneuvering >>> page 203.
The camera image is viewed together with orientation lines projected on the infotainment System display. Part of the bumper can be seen at the bottom, which can be used by the driver as a reference point.
Reverse assist modes
Depending on the equipment, the following modes are available:
- Angle parking: reverse parking perpendicular to the road.
- Trailer towing assist function: assistance with hitching a trailer.
• Cross traffic: monitors cross traffic.
Requirements
To park with reverse assist, the following requirements must be met:
- Do not exceed a speed of approx. 15 km/h (9 mph).
- Parking space width: vehicle width + 0.15 m (without counting the mirrors).
To display a real image, the following requirements must be met:
• The luggage compartment rear door is closed.
• The surroundings are on a flat surface. - The vehicle should not be loaded very heavily at the rear.
WARNING
- Reverse assist cannot precisely calculate the distance from obstacles and the limits of the system cannot be overcome, hence its negligent use may cause serious accidents and injuries if used without due care. The driver should be aware of his/her surroundings at all times to ensure safe driving.
• The camera lens expands and distorts the field of view and displays the objects on the screen in a way that is different from reality. Distance perception is also distorted.
Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)
- Due to the screen resolution or light conditions, some items may be blurry or not displayed at all. Take care with thin posts, fences, railings or trees that might not be seen on the screen and could damage the vehicle.
- Reverse assist has blind spots where it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the vehicle's surrounding area at all times.
- The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Supervise the parking manoeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area at all times.
- Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen.
- The images are only two-dimensional. Protruding objects or holes in the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all.
- Vehicle load modifies the representation of the guide lines. The width represented by the lines decreases with vehicle load. Pay special attention to the surroundings when the inside of the vehicle or the luggage compartment are loaded.
• In the following situations, objects or other vehicles appear to be further away or closer than they actually are. Pay special attention:
- If moving from a flat surface to a slope and vice-versa.
- If the vehicle is heavily loaded.
- When the vehicle approaches objects that are not on the ground surface or that protrude from it. These objects may be outside the camera angle when reversing.
Note
- It is important to take great care and pay special attention if the driver is not familiar with the system.
• The reverse assist reference lines disappear when the rear lid is open.
Connecting and disconnecting
Connect the reverse assist
- With the ignition switched on, select reverse gear.
- OR: in the infotainment system select □ > Driver assist > Park assist.
Disconnect the reverse assist
- Drive forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h (9 mph).
Shown on the display
The system's functions and representations may vary depending on the equipment.
The assistant's image view changes when the factory-fitted tow hitch is electronically connected to a trailer >>> page 319.
Reverse assist functions and symbols
When the reverse assist is connected, you can make adjustments using the function buttons. Some adjustments are equipment-dependent.
X Exit the current display
Switch to angle parking >> page 250
1/n Switch to the trailer hitching assistance function
JBL Switch to cross traffic
Adjust the display: brightness, contrast and colour.
Switch to park assist >> page 239
Display/hide the park assist view
Guide lines
Green horizontal lines: extension of the vehicle.
Yellow lines: vehicle path depending on the steering angle.
Parking and manoeuvring
Assistance function for hitching a trailer
On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device, this function can be used to move the vehicle close to a tow bar.
Auxiliary lines are shown in the infotainment system.
Green lines: distance to the trailer hitch. The distance between the lines is approx. 0.30 m Yellow line: pre-calculated direction of the trailer hitch depending on how the steering wheel is turned.
Cross traffic
This view helps to monitor traffic behind the vehicle and can be used, for example, when exiting garages or narrow exits.
Angle parking
Fig. 166 Display on the infotainment system display: parking with reverse assist
Key to >>> Fig. 166:
(A) Find a parking space
Go to the selected parking space
(c) Centre the vehicle inside the parking space
① Road
② Parking space
③ Side boundary of the parking space
④ Rear boundary of the parking space
Parking
- In the infotainment system select ☐ > Driver assist > Park assist before passing in front of the selected parking space.
- With reverse assist connected and in operation, press the function button.
- Stop the vehicle in front of the parking space
Fig. 166②A.
- Reverse while turning the steering wheel so that the yellow lines enter the parking space. The green and yellow lines must match the side boundary lines (3).
- Stop the vehicle when the red line has reached the rear boundary ④⑤.
Troubleshooting
The system behaves differently than expected
There can be several causes:
- The camera is dirty >>> page 396. In addition to dirt and snow, camera visibility can be reduced by detergent residue or any type of coating.
- The system requirements must be met
page 248.
■ The camera is covered with water.
- The factory-fitted towing bracket must not be electrically connected to a trailer >>> page 319.
Peripheral view system (Top View Camera)
- The vehicle has some type of damage in the camera area, e.g. due to a parking impact.
- The field of view of the camera is blocked by an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier system.
- Changes have been made to the paint in the camera area, or structural modifications have been made to a component such as the running gear.
Camera with no visibility, fault message, the system disconnects
- Clean the camera or remove any stickers or accessories from it >>> page 396.
- Check for visible damage.
Possible solution
• Temporarily disconnect the system.
- Check if one of the causes indicated above has occurred.
- Once the source of the problem has been eliminated, the system may be reconnected.
- If the system still behaves unpredictably, have it checked by a specialised workshop.
Peripheral view system (Top View Camera)
Introduction
Using 4 cameras, the system generates a representation that is shown on the infotainment system display. The cameras are located on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrors and the rear lid.
The functions and representations of the Area View system may vary depending on whether or not the vehicle has ParkPilot.
WARNING
The image from the cameras does not make it possible to calculate the distance to the obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) precisely, so using them could cause serious accidents and injury.
- The camera lenses augment and distort the visual field and the objects on the screen are seen differently and imprecisely.
- Certain objects may not be shown or may not be shown very clearly, for example, posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolution or if light conditions are insufficient.
• The cameras have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not registered.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into the Top View Camera system cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the system. The greater convenience provided by the Area View system should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. If used negligantly or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
- Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
- Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen.
• Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the cameras do not capture small children, animals and certain objects in all situations.
- The system will probably be unable to represent all areas clearly.
Parking and manoeuvring
NOTICE
* The camera images are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, objects that jut out or holes on the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all.
- In certain circumstances, the camera does not capture objects such as beams, fences, posts or thin trees, which could damage the vehicle.
- The system displays the auxiliary lines and boxes regardless of the vehicle's surroundings and whether or not objects are detected. The driver is responsible for determining that the vehicle will fit in the parking space.
Area View system
Fig. 167 AreaView system display: too view.
There are four different views to choose from >>> Fig. 167:
A Front camera area
Right camera area
© Rear camera area
Left camera area
Function buttons:
Depending on the equipment: switch the Park Pilot sound on and off.
The top view is generated by combining the images from all the cameras>>> Fig. 167. The top view can be selected by pressing the vehicle inside the zone.
The system will automatically switch between front and rear camera view according to the direction of travel.
Press on the different areas >> Fig. 167 A to B of the top view or reduced top view to sales and set the corresponding view, which will be highlighted in orange.
Conditions necessary for the use of the Area View system
- The doors and the rear lid must be closed.
• The image must be reliable and clear. For this reason, for example, the camera lens must be clean.
- The area around the vehicle must be clearly and totally visible.
- The area for parking or manoeuvring should be a flat surface.
- The vehicle should not be loaded very heavily at the rear.
• The driver must be used to the system.
- There should be no damage to the vehicle in the camera area. If the position or installation angle of the cameras have been changed, a g after a rear-end collision, the system should be checked by a specialised workshop.
Special characteristics
The images on the area view system cameras are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, it is difficult or impossible to make out on-screen any potholes in the ground, objects jutting out from the ground or parts protruding from other vehicles.
Situations in which the objects or other vehicles appear to be further away or closer than they really are:
- When moving from a horizontal plane to a slope.
- When moving from a slope to a horizontal plane.
- If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.
- If the vehicle approaches protruding objects. These objects may be outside the cameras' angle of visibility.
Trailer Assist
Trailer mode
The Area View system conceals, in the rear camera area, all the auxiliary guiding lines when the factory-fitted towing bracket is connected electrically to a trailer >>> page 319.
i Note
To become familiar with the system and its functions, CUPRA recommends that you practice handling the Area View system in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.
Connecting and disconnecting
Connecting
- Select reverse gear.
- OR: in the infotainment system select □ > Assistants > Parking assistant > Park assist.
Switching off
- Drive forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h (9 mph).
- OR: press the X function button.
Views of the peripheral vision system (modes)
The red lines indicate a distance of approx. 40 cm away from the vehicle.
Top views (bird's eye view)
Main mode:
The vehicle and its immediate vicinity seen from above are shown. Depending on the equipment, the ParkPilot's path may also be displayed.
Front camera views (front view)
Cross traffic
This visualization helps to monitor traffic to the left, front and right of the vehicle and can be used, for example, when exiting garages or narrow exits
Angle parking
The area in front of the vehicle is shown. Orientation lines are shown to give guidance.
Side camera views (side view)
Right and left sides.
The areas located directly to the side of the vehicle seen from above are represented in order to navigate possible obstacles more precisely.
Rear camera views (rear view)
Angels parking
The area behind the vehicle is shown. Auxiliary lines are shown to give guidance.
Trailer coupling assistance function.
On vehicles with a trailer coupling assistance function, the function will provide guidance to facilitate hitching the trailer. Auxiliary lines are shown in the infotainment system.
Green lines: distance to the trailer hitch. The distance between the lines is approx. 0.30 m
Yellow line: pre-calculated direction of the trailer hitch depending on how the steering wheel is turned.
Cross traffic.
This visualization helps to monitor traffic to the left, front and right of the vehicle and can be used, for example, when exiting garages or narrow exits.
Trailer Assist
Introduction
Trailer assist helps the driver to reverse and manoeuvre with a trailer.
By moving the rotary knob of the exterior mirrors, the trailer assist directs the trailer that is hitched. The driver has to accelerate, change gears and brakes!
Parking and manoeuvring
System limitations
Under certain circumstances, the camera does not detect objects such as trailer draw bars, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an open (or opening) rear lid, which could damage the vehicle.
In order to guarantee good system operation, keep the camera clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover it with stickers or other objects. Do not allow the draw bar to be covered by external influences.
Use the trailer manoeuvre assistant only when the rear lid is closed correctly.
NOTICE
The trailer maneuver assistant does not take the vehicle's surrounding as a reference. No obstacle detection takes place. The driver alone has to assess whether it is possible to manoeuvre safely with the tow vehicle and trailer set.
• Always observe the movement of the trailers and, if necessary, actively interrupt the manoeuvre to avoid damage. Even if the trailer manoeuvring assistant is operated correctly, on rare occasions the trailer may move in a different way to the setting.
- Do not rely solely on the indications on the instrument cluster display.
Note
The trailer manoeuvre assistant automatically switches off approx. 10 minutes after being activated. The assistant is also deactivated if the driver does not perform any action over the course of approx. 3 minutes.
Requirements
The following requirements must be met for the trailer manoeuvres assistant to work:
• The engine is running.
■ The ESC must be connected.
• The driver's door and the rear lid are closed.
- The exterior mirrors are not folded.
- There is a non-articulated one or two axle trailer hitched and electrically connected.
- Both the tow vehicle and trailer are stopped.
- The maximum bending angle has not been exceeded.
- The length of the trailer's drawbar has been determined
Determine the length of the trailer's drawbar
In order for the trailer manoeuvre assistant to determine the length of the trailer's drawbar, drive the vehicle-trailer set through some turning manoeuvres or curves. The more precisely the length of the drawbar is determined.
the wider the angles that will be available when maneuvering. The assistant subdivides the maximum available end stops of the angle indicator into four levels: approx. 30°, 45°, 60° and 75°.
Note
For technical reasons, the trailer manoeuvre assistant cannot always correctly detect trailers with LED technology taillights.
Operating
Fig. 16B Ours door rearview mirror rotary control-adjust the trailer angle
Trailer Assist
Fig. 169 Instrument clust or display: engage reverse.
Key to the >>> Fig. 168, >>> Fig. 169:
① Rotary exterior mirror controls.
② Trailer orientation to the left
⑤ Trailer orientation to the right
④ Move the vehicle in the direction of the towing device.
⑤ Actual trailer position
⑥ Target trailer position
⑦ Angle indicator zero position
Manoeuvre with the tow vehicle and trailer set
The system requirements must be met
page 254.
- Select reverse gear.
- Press the infotainment system button □ > Assistants > Parking > Trailer Assist.
- Let go of the steering wheel >>>
- Tilt the rotary control until the desired direction is reached>>> Fig. 168. A representation of the tow vehicle and trailer set is shown on the instrument cluster screen for guidance purposes>>> Fig. 169.
- Reverse by accelerating slowly. Pay attention to your surroundings!
- If necessary, correct the angle with the rotary control. Press the control towards the left or right: the set will move to the left or right. Press the control backwards: the vehicle will follow the trailer.
- Reverse and move forwards until the desired position is reached.
- The manoeuvre ends when a message is displayed on the instrument cluster display and, in some cases, an audio signal sounds.
Automatic brake operation
The trailer manoeuvre assistant helps the driver by automatically operating the brakes in certain situations.
The driver is responsible for braking on time >>> △.
The brakes may be applied automatically and the function deactivated in the following situations:
• A certain speed is exceeded.
- The steering wheel is grabbed. The vehicle brakes automatically until it stops.
- If the button P is pressed during the manoeuvre or the driver's door opens.
WARNING
The quickly turning steering wheel can cause serious injuries.
- Do not hold the steering wheel during the manoeuvre until the system requests it.
• Exception: If a dangerous situation occurs, intervene and take over the steering.
WARNING
Never allow the automatic operation of
brakes to lead you to take any risk that com- promises safety. The system is not a replace- ment for driver awareness.
• The manoeuvre assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. In certain situations, the automatic braking intervention may only work in a limited way or not work at all.
- Always be ready to use the brakes yourself! - Automatic brake operation ends after 1.5 seconds approx. if the vehicle is stopped. After this, brake the vehicle yourself.
Parking and manoeuvring
Note
The exterior mirrors cannot be adjusted while the assistant is active. The saved setting for the passenger's mirror can be activated))) page 145.
Troubleshooting
Camera with no visibility, fault message, the system disconnects
- Clean the camera or remove any stickers or accessories from it >>> page 396.
- Check for visible damage.
The system behaves differently than expected
There can be several causes:
- The camera is dirty 100 page 396. In addition to dirt and snow, camera visibility can be reduced by detergent residue or any type of coating.
• The system requirements must be metpage 254.
• The camera is covered with water.
• The vehicle has some type of damage in the camera area, e.g. due to a parking impact.
• The field of view of the camera is blocked by an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier system.
- Changes have been made to the paint in the camera area and structural modifications have been made, e.g. to the front part of the vehicle and the running gear.
Solution for all cases
• Temporarily disconnect the system.
- Check if one of the causes indicated above has occurred.
• Once the source of the problem has been
eliminated, the system may be reconnected.
■ If the system still behaves unpredictably.
have it checked by a specialised workshop.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
How it works
Fig. 170 Park assist diagram detected area around the vehicle that is driving off
Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rear bumper >> page 202 to monitor traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it reverses out of a parking bay, or as it is being manoeuvred, for example in very low visibility conditions.
When the system detects a relevant vehicle on the road that is approaching the rear of the vehicle >> Fig. 170, an audio alarm may sound if the vehicle is sufficiently relevant.
In addition to the audio alarm, the driver is also informed by means of a visual signal on infotainment system display. This signal is displayed in the form of a red strip at the back of the image of the vehicle on the infotainment.
Exit Warning
system display. This strip displays the side of the vehicle towards which traffic is approaching in a cross-wise direction 1 .
Automatic braking to reduce damages
page 237.
Connecting and disconnecting
The rear cross traffic alert can be activated and deactivated by accessing the Assistants menu of the infotainment system. It can also be found in the Park Assist Settings menu.
Additionally it can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistants menu on the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjustment in the system will remain active.
Trailer mode
The rear cross traffic alert will be automatically deactivated and it will be impossible to activate them if the tow hitch is electrically connected to a trailer or other similar object. As soon as the driver starts driving, a message appears on the instrument cluster display indicating that the assistant is deactivated.
Once the trailer is uncoupled from the vehicle, the assistant will return to its initial state prior to the moment when the trailer was electrically connected.
If the tow hitch is not factory fitted, then the rear cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated manually when driving with a trailer.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into the rear cross traffic alert cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics: it only works within the limits of the system. The park assist function should not tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.
- The system should never be used in limited visibility conditions or complicated traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossing multiple lanes.
- Be sure to always be aware of the vehicle's surroundings, since the system often fails to detect things such as bicycles or pedestrians.
- The rear cross traffic alert itself will be brake the vehicle to a complete stop.
Exit Warning
How it works
Fig. 171. illustrated example.
Fig. 172 Door: w string lamp
It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a starting system.
Parking and manoeuvring
The door opening warning (Exit Warning) warns occupants of a possible collision when opening the door when the vehicle is stationary.
The system monitors, within the limits of the system itself, the rear and side environment of the vehicle using the rear sensors >>> page 202. It detects moving objects that approach from behind, such as cars >>> Fig. 171.
If a critical situation is detected when the door is opened, an alert is given by an audible signal from the door speaker on the corresponding side. Fig. 172. Additionally, the lane assist indicator on the corresponding door side will flash only when the front doors are open. When the rear doors are opened, the side assist indicator light will not be available. If either front door has already been opened and another road user has been detected in a critical situation, the controllamp of the lane departure warning on the corresponding side will light up permanently.
The brightness of the door opening assistant display can be adjusted by accessing the Side Assist menu.
When you want to access the vehicle for the first time, with the doors closed and locked, the function will be available 3 minutes after the first opening of any of the doors. The func-
tion will continue to be available as long as the vehicle has the ignition connected and is not moving.
After switching off the ignition, the function will remain available for approximately 3 minutes.
Connecting and disconnecting
The door opening assistant can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistants menu in the infotainment system. It can also be found in the Park Assist Settings menu.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjustment in the system will remain active.
Trailer mode
The door opening assistant will be automatically deactivated and it will be impossible to activate it if the tow hitch is electrically connected to a trailer or other similar object.
Once the trailer is uncoupled from the vehicle, the assistant will return to its initial state prior to the moment when the trailer was electrically connected.
If the tow hitch is not factory fitted, then the door opening assistant will have to be deactivated manually when driving with a trailer.
WARNING
• Always pay close attention to the traffic and the surroundings of the vehicle. The door opening warning (Exit Warning) cannot replace the necessary attention to be paid by the vehicle's occupants. Responsibility for opening the doors and exiting the vehicle always lies with its occupants.
- The door opening warning (Exit Warning) operates continuously as long as the vehicle ignition is on. Otherwise, the system is deactivated and the lamps light up briefly.
- It is possible that the traffic situation is not interpreted correctly the system cannot be aware of all the objects that are approaching, such as pedestrians. Always visually monitor the traffic and the area surrounding the vehicle.
WARNING
The door opening warning (Exit Warning) is subject to system limits and cannot warn of an imminent collision in all cases:
- If your vehicle is too deep in the parking space and the adjacent vehicles hide it.
• In certain circumstances, objects or people who approach, e.g. on a bicycle or scooter, are not detected.
• The system does not react to stationary objects.
Storage compartment
Practical equipment
Storage compartment
Introduction
Use the storage compartments only for small or light items.
WARNING
Objects inside the vehicle that are not secured could be thrown across the vehicle interior in the event of sudden braking or manoeuvring. This may cause severe injuries as well as loss of control of the vehicle.
- Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or heavy items in open storage compartments of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the cover behind the rear seats, or inside pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehicle.
- Keep the storage compartments closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
- Do not hang garments weighing more than 2.5 kg (approx. 3.5 lb) on the vehicle's coat hooks. Never leave heavy hard or sharp objects in the pockets of these pieces of clothing.
WARNING
If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they might be damaged or lit inadvertently. This could lead to severe burns and damage to the vehicle.
Before moving a seat, make sure there are no lighters in the moving part area of the vehicle.
- before closing a storage compartment, male sure there are no lighters in the closing area.
* Never leave a lighter inside a storage compartment or any other surface of the vehicle as it could ignite due to the high temperatures on such surfaces, particularly during the summer.
① NOTICE
- Do not store heat - or cold-sensitive objects, food or medicines in the vehicle interior. Heat and cold could damage them or render them useless.
* Objects made from transparent materials left inside the vehicle, such as glasses, magnifying glasses or transparent suction pads stuck to the windows can concentrate sunlight and damage the vehicle.
Glove compartment
Fig. 173 On the passing or side glove compartment.
Opening and closing the glove compartment
Opening: Pull the handle >>> Fig. 173 and open the glove compartment.
Closing: Press the glove compartment upwards.
WARNING
If the glove compartment is left open, the risk of severe injuries being caused in the event of an accident, sudden braking or manoeuvring increases.
• Always keep the glove compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Practical equipment
Drink holder
Fig. 174. In the near central armrest, drink holder.
The storage compartments of the driver and passenger doors contain a bottle holder.
Front drink holders
There are two drink holders in the centre console.
Drink holder in the rear central armrest
Use: Lower the central armrest >> Fig. 174. When the drink holder is no longer in use, lift the armrest again.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bottle holders may cause injuries.
* Never put hot drinks in the drink holders. In the event of sudden braking or an accident while driving, hot beverages in the bottle holders might spill and cause bums.
- Ensure that no bottles or other objects are dropped in the driver footwell while driving as they could get under the pedals and obstruct their working.
- Never place glasses, food or other heavy objects in drink holders. These heavy objects may be thrown across the vehicle interior in the event of an accident and cause serious injuries.
WARNING
Closed bottles may explode inside the vehicle due to cold or heat.
* Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle if the temperature inside is very high or very low.
① NOTICE
Do not leave open cans in the drink holders when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may damage the vehicle and its electrical system.
Note
The elements inside the drink holders can be extracted for cleaning.
Storage compartment under front seats
Fig. 175 Storage compartment under the front seats
Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handle and slide the drawer out.
Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until it engages.
Power sockets
WARNING
If the drawer is left open, it could prevent use of the pedals. This may cause serious accidents and injuries.
• Always keep the drawer closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer and any objects in it could fall into the driver's footwell and obstruct the pedals.
NOTICE
The drawer can hold 1.5 kg at most.
Other object holders
You will find more object holders, compartments and supports in other parts of the vehicle:
• In the centre console.
• In the upper part of the glove compartment. The load should not exceed 1.2 kg.
- Other storage compartments are found in the rear seat, to the left and the right of the seats.
- In the backrests of the front seats, storage packets.
There are hangers on the struts of the doors and the rear.
WARNING
Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's visibility, which may cause serious accidents and injuries.
• Always hang clothes from hangers in such a way that the driver's visibility is not affected.
- Only hang light pieces of clothing from the hangers of the vehicle. Never leave heavy, hard or sharp objects in the packets of these pieces of clothing.
- Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the clothing, as this could interfere with the function of the head-protection airbags.
NOTICE
Do not place overly large objects in the pockets on the front seat backrests (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharp edges. Risk of damage to the pockets and the upholstery.
Power sockets
Introduction
Electrical equipment can be plugged in to the vehicle's sockets.
The devices must be in a perfect state of repair. Do not use defective devices.
The 12 volt power socket will only work with the ignition on.
WARNING
Improper use of the sockets or electrical devices could lead to a fire and cause serious injuries.
- Please ensure that children are never left unsupervised inside the vehicle. The sockets and the devices connected to them can be used when the ignition is switched on.
- If electrical devices overheat, switch them off immediately and disconnect them from the power supply.
NOTICE
• To avoid damaging the electrical system, never connect electrical devices that supply power, such as solar panels or battery chargers, to 12-volt sockets to charge the 12-volt battery.
- Only use electrical devices that comply with the applicable electromagnetic compatibility directives.
• To prevent voltage fluctuations from causing damage, unplug any connected electrical devices before switching the ignition on and off.
- Never connect electrical devices that consume more than the specified power to a 12 volt socket. Exceeding the maximum power consumption could damage the vehicle's electrical system.
- Observe the instruction manuals of electrical devices!
Practical equipment
Note
• The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause the 12-volt battery to discharge.
- Uninsulated devices can interfere with the radio, infotainment system and the vehicle's electronic system.
Vehicle power sockets
Fig. 176 Vehicle 12 vol. socket.
>>> Fig. 176
① 12-volt sockets inside the front armrest.
② 12-volt USB sockets at the rear of the console, between the front seats.
Make sure that the maximum power of the sockets is not exceeded. The power consumption of the devices is shown on the type plate of the devices.
The continuous output of all of the vehicle's 12-volt sockets is 120 watts in total.
When connecting two or more electrical devices at the same time, make sure that their total consumption never exceeds 190 watts.
USB power sockets
Depending on the equipment and the country, the vehicle may also have USB connections exclusively for charging or as a power socket >> Fig. 176 ②.
These USB ports are located at the rear of the console, between the front seats. These connectors can work at a maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port.
NOTICE
If the 12-volt socket is used at full power for longer than the specified time, the fuse may blow.
- Never use the 12-volt socket at full power for more than 10 minutes. - In the case of full power, use a single 12-volt socket.
230-volt power socket
Fig. 177 in the large age compartment: 230 volt power socket.
With the engine running, the power socket activates automatically as soon as a connector is plugged in.
Maximum power consumption is 150 watts (300 watts - maximum 2 minutes).
Connect an electrical device: Open the cover and insert the plug into the power socket as far as possible to unlock the built-in child lock. The socket only supplies power once the child lock is unlocked.
LED on the power socket >> Fig. 177 (arrow) Steady green light.
- The childproof lock is unlocked. The socket is ready to operate.
Power sockets
Flashing green light:
- The ignition is switched off, but there is enough power available to continue supplying the socket with current for a maximum of 10 minutes. If the connector is unplugged before this time elapses, the socket is disconnected and cannot be used again until the ignition is switched on again.
If insufficient power is available in the 12V battery, the socket cannot be used while the engine is off.
Flashing red light:
- There is an anomaly, e.g. disconnection due to a current surge or overheating.
Disconnection due to overheating
When the temperature exceeds a certain value, the 230-volt socket inverter is automatically disconnected. The disconnection prevents overhaating when the power consumption of the connected devices is excessive or the ambient temperature is very high. The 230-volt power supply can be used once again after a cooling time. First unplug the connector of the connected device and then plug it back in again. This prevents the electrical device from being switched on again if this is not wanted.
WARNING
The electrical system is under high voltage
- Do not spill liquids onto the socket.
- Do not plug adapters or extension cords into the 230-volt power socket. Otherwise, the integrated child lock will be unlocked and the power socket will operate.
- Do not insert conductive objects (a knitting needle, for example) into the 230-volt power socket.
NOTICE
230-volt power socket
- Do not leave devices or connectors that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer) hanging directly from the power socket.
- Do not connect neon lamps.
- Only connect devices to the socket if the device and socket voltage match.
- The built-in overload disconnect function prevents any electrical devices that require a high start-up current from turning on. In this case, unplug the electrical device's power supply and re-try the connection after about 10 seconds.
Note
Some appliances may not work properly when connected to the 230-volt sockets due to a lack of power (watts).
Data transmissions
Data transmissions
Over-the-air update
Introduction
Over-the-air updates allow you to always keep your vehicle up to date, for example for optimising functions and for malware protection. 1
How can you find out when an over-the-air update is available?
The available updates are displayed in the information system.
If several updates are available for the vehicle at the same time, one over-the-air update must first be successfully completed before the next one can be performed.
Note
Over-the-air updates require your vehicle's connectivity to be enabled.
it is in your own interest to complete updates as soon as possible. If the controller repeatedly rejects the over-the-air update, it will be necessary to visit a qualified workshop. CUPRA recommends using a CUPRA dealer.
WARNING
In very rare cases, a control unit may not function properly after an over-the-air update. Malfunctioning of a control unit and the vehicle can lead to serious accidents and fatal injuries.
- Reduce speed in a controlled manner if the vehicle operates or reacts differently than usual while driving.
* Contact a specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends using a CUPRA dealer.
WARNING
If the instrument cluster does not work after an over-the-air update, you will not be able to see instrument cluster displays, warning lights, symbols or text messages. Driving with an instrument cluster that does not work can lead to serious accidents and fatal injuries.
- Do not use the vehicle. Please contact the CUPRA customer care service.
NOTICE
If special modifications have been made to vehicles outside the scope of CUPRA's responsibility (for example, for emergency service vehicles or taxis), there is a risk that special functions (e.g. the taximeter) may no longer work properly after an over-the-air update.
- Consult with your CUPRA dealer before performing an over-the-air update.
Note
- Measures to improve performance or efficiency (e.g. engine tuning) that have not been incorporated by CUPRA may be deleted after an over-the-air update.
- Depending on the equipment, release notes may appear once before or after an over-the-air update. These release notes describe changes to the vehicle status. For release notes and more information on over-the-air updates, please visit the website: www.cupraofficial.com/owners/cupra-connect/ota-updates
- The over-the-air update will not update apps installed in the vehicle.
- Certain information, such as your VIN (vehicle identification number), may be shared with the brand to ensure that each of these campaigns is successful. These updates will require your final confirmation before installation. If you do not wish to receive them, you can change your privacy to 📄 Incognito (maximum privacy) mode in the privacy and services settings >>> page 271.
1 Not available in all markets.
Over-the-air update
Prerequisites for an over-the-air update
The following prerequisites must be met to allow an update to be downloaded via satellite and to install the update software.
- The over-the-air update function is available in your country.
- The vehicle is located in an area with sufficient mobile reception.
- Your current privacy configuration allows you to transmit and receive data and information
page 271
- The vehicle's 12-volt battery is properly charged.
Download and install an over-the-air update
Download costs
Over-the-air updates are downloaded via the factory control unit with eSIM card, and are free of charge. CUPRA covers the cost of the connection.
Download timing
Downloading takes place automatically without warning and may also happen while driving. When the download is complete, a message will appear to inform you that an over-the-air update is available.
Note
The duration of the download process depends on the quality of the network, the file size and the type of update. The download process may be interrupted. It will resume when the ignition is switched on again.
Software installation pre-requisites
- The vehicle is parked safely in accordance with legal requirements and local regulations >>> page 233.
■ Previous over-the-air updates have been installed.
Installing the software from an over-the-air update
Choose a time for the over-the-air update when neither you nor others are likely to be driving the vehicle.
WARNING
The control units will be switched off and will not work while the software installation is in progress. Driving while the control units are switched off or faulty can lead to accidents and fatal injuries.
- Install the software in a way that does not interfere with other road users.
- Do not use the vehicle during a software installation procedure.
- Deactivate the vehicle's drive system and apply the electronic parking brake.
- Close the bonnet, luggage compartment, all windows and all doors.
- Confirm the software installation in the infotainment system.
- Ensure that all vehicle occupants get out and that there are no animals left inside.
- Collect all vehicle keys and get out.
- Lock the vehicle.
Functional restrictions during software installation
The control units, central computer, functions and displays will not be available during the software installation. Do not use the vehicle or the infotainment system during installation.
• The system prevents the activation of the vehicle's drive system.
- The high-voltage battery is not charged.
• The AUX-IN diagnostic socket is switched off.
■ The anti-theft alarm is switched off.
• The "Safe" security system is switched off.
After installing the software
After the software installation and before activating the vehicle's drive system, read the message on the Infotainment system or in the Instrument cluster about the complete installa-
Data transmissions
tion of the software. It can take up to 1 minute for the vehicle to display the status of the over-the-air update.
- The vehicle's drive system can be activated once the software has been successfully installed.
- If the software installation is not successful: >>> page 266, Troubleshooting.
Troubleshooting
The installation of an over-the-air update has failed.
- If an update is not installed correctly, an error message will appear in the infotainment system or in the instrument cluster. Observe the corresponding messages and warnings.
Note
The control units will stop working or will not work properly in the event of a critical installation error. The functions and screens will not be available until the error is amended. Do not use the vehicle. In this case, please contact CUPRA customer care.
Can I interrupt the installation of an over-the-air update? Not possible.
13 Not available in all markets
What happens if the installation of an over-the-air update is interrupted?
If the installation is interrupted, for example due to damage to the vehicle's electrical system, the control units may not be updated and may not work due to incomplete installation of the update.
CUPRA CONNECT
Introduction
Access CUPRA CONNECT ™ digital services by connecting your vehicle to the Internet. A description of the available services can be found on the Internet at:
https://www.cupraofficial.com/owners/cupra-connect
To use CUPRA CONNECT, you have to activate the services by concluding a CONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A., which may be subject to usage time limitations, depending on the country.
Both the CUPRA CONNECT service portfolios offered by CUPRA and individual services can be modified, cancelled, deactivated, reactivated, renamed and extended, even without prior notification.
The implementation and availability of all CUPRA CONNECT services and service portfolios may vary by country, as well as by vehicle and its equipment.
CUPRA CONNECT's voice recognition or search technology does not recognise or offer results for all words.
There are CUPRA CONNECT services for which registration is mandatory and others for which it is not mandatory.
Description of services
Before running CUPRA CONNECT services, read and take into account the description of the corresponding services. Descriptions are updated from time to time.
- Always use the most up-to-date version of the corresponding service description.
WARNING
In areas with insufficient mobile phone and GPS coverage, emergency calls and phone calls will not be connected and data cannot be transmitted.
- Change location if possible.
CUPRA CONNECT
NOTICE
The vehicle may be damaged by factors outside CUPRA's control, specifically including:
• Misuse of mobile terminals
• Data loss during transmission.
• Unsuitable or defective third party applications.
- Malicious software on data storage devices, computers, tablets or mobile phones.
Services portfolio
The initial service assignment shown here represents the maximum possible volume. The maximum possible volume is only available on a few vehicle models. During the useful life of the vehicle, you can change the assignment shown here.
After activating service management in the infotainment system, you can check whether services are available for the vehicle and what services they are >>> page 270.
In some countries and in the event of a contract renewal, the services offered may be combined differently than indicated here. They may also vary depending on the year of production of the vehicle. The aforementioned services correspond to CUPRA CONNECT.
- Some services may be subject to special equipment
21 The above services may be subject to a subscription period.
CUPRA CONNECT services
If you vehicle is fitted with Media System - or Navi System +, your online services package is CUPRA CONNECT. The following services are included:
- Breakdown call.
- Customer care
• Service appointment planning
- Customisation.
• Remote heating and ventilation.
- Remote unlock.
• Horn and turn signals.
- Vehicle status incl. doors and lights.
- Driving data.
- Vehicle health report.
• Anti-thaft alarm warning.
- Zone notification.
• Speed notification.
• Online map update.
• Natural voice control for destinations and
addresses.
- Internet radio.
- Online route import
• Online destination import.
- Parking position
• Data package.
• Online Store.
- Online navigation: Dynamic Points of Interest - Online system update.
If your vehicle is fitted with Navi System +, it also has the CUPRA CONNECT PLUS online services package. The included services are all the CUPRA CONNECT services in the previous section plus 25 :
- Search for public car parks.
• Search for petrol stations.
- Online route calculation.
• Online traffic information.
CUPRA CONNECT services for hybrid vehi-
cles
Available only in hybrid vehicles.
The included services are all the CUPRA
CONNECT services in the previous section
plus.
- Remote air conditioning
• Electrical power manager.
■ Remote vehicle charging
• Search for charging stations.
Data transmissions
CUPRA CONNECT individual options
- In-Car Applications. These applications can be purchased and installed directly on the infotainment system through the Online Store, provided they are available. Access to the Online Store is only possible if the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. - Data package. Pay per use data rates for the use of online functions, for example, 2 GB per month.
Note
• The public emergency call service is available regardless of whether the infotainment system is logged in.
- Customisation and purchase of in-car Apps require logging in to the infotainment system and activating the vehicle in a CUPRA CONNECT account.
Activating CUPRA CONNECT and S-PIN
The following steps are required to activate CUPRA CONNECT (including registration): 1. Switch on the ignition and the infotainment system. 2. Change the privacy mode to 'Tracking' >> page 271. 3. Select: > Users and press the button to add a new user.
- Follow the on-screen instructions to download the My CUPRA App.
- Follow the instructions to create your CUPRA ID.
- Accept the Privacy Policy
- Enter the vehicle identification number (VIN) to add the vehicle to your user account.
- Check your personal details.
- Select your CUPRA CONNECT online services pack.
- Open the app and scan the new QR code generated by the infotainment system.
S-PIN
The S-PIN is a sequence of several digits, which can be selected when the CUPRA CONNECT registration is completed.
When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to-guess number sequences and known dates of birth. You can change the S-PIN in the CUPRA
CONNECT user account in Account settings. The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to protect your user profile or to run a CUPRA CONNECT service related to the security of your vehicle.
You must keep this S-PIN strictly confidential. If you reveal the S-PIN to third parties, for security reasons you must change it immediately.
Ownership and identity accreditation
Become primary user
To become a primary user and thus prove ownership of the vehicle, you need both of the vehicle's physical keys. Ownership accreditation takes place in the vehicle during registration or, if you already have a CUPRA CONNECT user account, you must log in through the infotainment system and then go to Manage users.
- Switch on the ignition and the infotainment system.
- In the infotainment system, register in CUPRA CONNECT.
Or: open the menu 🖱 Users > Settings > Become primary user and follow the instructions.
- Press the unlock button on the first vehicle key.
- Press the unlock button on the second vehicle key.
Once the infotainment system has processed the orders by radiofrequency, the accreditation of the ownership will have been comple-
How is ownership accredited?
Infotainment 2 Key method
My CUPRA App Not possible
CUPRA CONNECT
Identity accreditation (CUPRA ID)
Identity accreditation must be completed before you can use CUPRA CONNECT services that are relevant to security, such as the Remote Opening service. The identity verification can be carried out at a specialised CUPRA dealership with the assistance of a brand specialist or independently and online via the My CUPRA App.
Legal provisions
When using CUPRA CONNECT services, information is transferred and processed online through the vehicle. Such data can also provide (at least indirectly) information about the driver in question, for example, driving behaviour and location. As a contracting party in the CUPRA CONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A., you must ensure that when your vehicle is used by other drivers (for example, family or friends), data protection and personal rights are respected. Therefore, you must inform drivers in advance that the vehicle transfers and receives date online, and that you can access such data.
Not taking into account this obligation to inform, can infringe certain rights of the occupants.
Follow-up services: ask all occupants
The follow-up services need geographical and vehicle data to determine whether the vehicle is being used within defined speed ranges, where it has been parked or if it is being used in an established geographical area. This information is displayed in the My CUPRA App. Therefore, before moving off, ask all the vehicle occupants if they agree with the activated services. If they do not, deactivate the service in question (if possible) or do not allow the occupants to use the vehicle.
GPS tracking: marking
If the vehicle has a factory-assembled control unit that transmits the its current geographical position and speed, the vehicle usually has this GPS marking (e.g., on the roof console). The absence of the marking on the vehicle does not guarantee that the control unit does not transmit the vehicle's current geographical position and speed.
Personal information
CUPRA protects your personal data and only uses them, as long as the law allows it or you have given your consent on the occasion of a use. Detailed information on data processing in connection with the CUPRA CONNECT services can be found in the Data Protection Declaration, the current version of which can be accessed on the CUPRA website.
Permanent transfer of the vehicle
If the vehicle has been purchased used or someone else has left the vehicle to you for permanent use, CUPRA CONNECT may already be activated and the previous primary user may still be able to access the data registered via CUPRA CONNECT and control certain functions of your vehicle.
You can automatically remove the previous primary user by registering yourself as the primary user of the vehicle. Alternatively, you can restore the infotainment system to factory settings (① >Restore factory settings) or set the vehicle to "Privacy" mode (maximum privacy), and therefore limit both your vehicle's communication with the CUPRA data service and the processing of personal and vehicle data.
Deactivating CUPRA CONNECT services
The following functions are available to activate and deactivate the CUPRA CONNECT services:
- Allow or prevent data transmissions through the infotainment system >> page 270, Privacy mode.
- Whenever possible: individual deactivation or activation >>> page 270.
You can run the relevant services again after cancelling their deactivation.
Data transmissions
Note
The services required by law and their data transmission cannot be disconnected or deactivated, for example, the emergency call system (cCall).
Faults
Even if the prerequisites for the use of CUPRA CONNECT services are met, there may be factors beyond the control of CUPRA that interfere with the execution of such services or prevent them, specifically including
- Maintenance, repair, deactivation, software update and technical expansion of telecommunication equipment, satellites, servers and data banks.
-
Change of the mobile telephony standard for mobile data transmission by the telecommunications service provider, e.g. from LTE or LMTS to EDGE or GPRS.
• Disconnection of an existing mobile phone standard by the telecommunications service provider.
• Interference, disturbance or interruption of mobile and GPS signal reception due to aspects such as high speed driving, solar storms, meteorological influences, topography, jamming equipment and intensive mobile phone use in the radio cells in question. -
When in areas with zero or insufficient mobile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for example, in tunnels, confined areas between very tall buildings, garages, underpasses, mountains and valleys.
- External information from third party suppliers available with limitations, incomplete or incorrect, e.g. representations of maps.
• Countries and regions where CUPRA CONNECT is not offered.
Service management
Open the settings in Users and go to Privacy settings and services. You can do the following in the infotainment system:
- Check which CUPRA CONNECT services are currently available in the vehicle.
■ View the number of CUPRA CONNECT services that are activated or deactivated.
- Activate or deactivate CUPRA CONNECT services.
Note
If you deactivate all CUPRA CONNECT services, the vehicle can still transmit emergency call (eCall) data.
Privacy mode
Introduction
With the "Privacy" function, data transmissions between the vehicle and the internet can be allowed or blocked.
Please note that your vehicle is connected by default, so that it can receive remote updates that improve the performance of your vehicle.
Certain information, such as your VIN (vehicle identification number), may be shared with the brand to ensure that each of these campaigns is successful. These updates will require your final confirmation before installation. If you do not wish to receive them, you can change your privacy to 📄 Incognito (maximum privacy) mode in the privacy and services settings >> page 271.
The desired mode can be set in Users > Settings > Privacy and Services.
Data transmission by external devices and their communication with the vehicle cannot be blocked using the "Privacy" function.
The services required by law and their data transmission cannot be disconnected or deactivated, for example, the emergency cell system (eCal).
User administration
Note
Please note that all vehicle users can configure individual settings in the "Privacy" function. These settings may not match those desired by the vehicle owner.
Privacy and services settings
CUPRA CONNECT services can be activated and deactivated individually. To do this, just check the box corresponding to the service you want to activate or deactivate. Use the privacy mode option if you want to deactivate all of the services at the same time.
Privacy mode.
Allows you to deactivate or activate the services depending on the selected privacy level.
Share location: Primary users and co-users can view position data on the My SUPPA App.
Use location. Position, vehicle, and user data are used for services.
No location. Only the vehicle data and user data are used for services.
Maximum privacy. Your services are disabled. Only services required for legal reasons use data.
Setting options are not available in all markets or in all vehicle models.
Connectivity status indication
The following symbols indicate the respective data transmission status in the infotainment system.
Symbol: white: full connectivity, all services available
Symbol grey: limited connectivity, some services may not be available.
no icon No connectivity, no services available.
User administration
User role description
Both the owner of the vehicle, and any other user who has access to the vehicle will be authorised to order and activate CUPRA CONNECT services for a specific vehicle. Each vehicle only has one main user, as well as one anonymous guest user and up to 4 additional or secondary users. The different roles are described below:
- Primary user: A user registered in the vehicle who completes the enrolment process by activating CUPRA CONNECT services (via the two-key method or pairing code) to become the primary user. He or she is the only one that
can make online purchases (data and other services). He or she has access to all vehicle services.
• Additional user: a user registered in the vehicle who has not completed the enrolment process and is not the primary user. Through the vehicle's infolainment system, the additional user has access to the same services as the main user, except those that require making a purchase. Additional users do not have access to in-App services.
• Secondary user: the primary user can invite an additional user to become a secondary user, so that they can enjoy all services available to the primary user except those related to purchasing and receiving alerts. The invitation is sent from the vehicle user management menu in the app and must be accepted by the additional user invited to become a secondary user.
- Guest user: the only role that is always present in the vehicle, if you don't want to register as a main or additional user. When selecting this mode for the first time, or each time you switch from a primary or additional user to a guest user, date is shared online so that remote updates can be received. If you do not wish to receive them, you can change the privacy to "Offline Mode" (maximum privacy) in the privacy settings >> page 271.
Data transmissions
Create and delete a user role
Create a user
Register for CUPRA CONNECT. You can then sign a CUPRA CONNECT contract with CUPRA, add the vehicle to your user account and follow the steps in the app to register yourself as a new main user or as an additional user.
Delete a user
To delete the main user, restore the factory settings of the infotainment system. If you want to delete an additional user, the main user may delete it manually, or the additional user can delete himself/herself.
Note
If the infotainment system is restored to factory settings in offline mode, the user cannot be deleted on the server.
WLAN access point
Introduction
The infotainment system can be used to share a 'WLAN' connection with up to 8 devices >>> page 272. Configuration for sharing a connection over WLAN.
The infotainment system can also use the WLAN hotspot of an external device to provide Internet to the devices connected to the hotspot (WLAN client)>>> page 273.
Note
- There may be a charge for the required data transmission. Due to the high volume of data exchanged, CUPRA recommends the use of a flat rate tariff for data transmission. Mobile phone operators can provide information on this. You can also purchase data plans for your vehicle on the Cubic website: https://cupra.cubictelecom.com - Exchanging data packages and purchasing them from third parties may generate additional costs, depending on your mobile phone rate, particularly if you are abroad (for example, roaming rates).
Configuration for sharing a connection over WLAN
Establishing the connection with the wireless network (WLAN) - Press the HOME > Button. - Activate the wireless network. To do this, t the function button Network > Wi-Fi > Infotainment system as hotspot.
- Activate the wireless network (WI.AN) on the device that is to be connected. If necessary, refer to the manufacturer's instruction manual. - Activate the mobile device assignment in the infotainment system. To do this, press the function button Use as hotspot and check the checkbox. - Enter and confirm the network key displayed on the device.
The following adjustments can also be made in the Infotainment system as hotspot menu: ■ Network key: Network key generated automatically. Press the function button to change the network key manually. The network key must have at least 12 characters and a maximum of 62. ■ SSID: Name of the WLAN network (maximum 32 characters). The WLAN (wireless) connection is established. To complete the connection, it may be necessary to enter other data into the device.
Repeat this process to connect other devices. There is also the option of scanning the QR code to connect the device directly to the infotainment system's Wi-Fi network without having to enter the password; select Settings > Network > Quick connection to infotainment system.
Full Link
Configure Internet access
The infotainment system can use the WLAN hotspot of an external device to establish an Internet connection.
Establishing the connection with the wireless network (WLAN)
- Activate and share a wireless hotspot with Internet on the external device. Refer to the manufacturer's instruction manual.
- Press the HOME > ⚙ button.
- Tap the menu Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi and tick the verification box.
- Press the Search for Wi-Fi button and select the device you want from the list.
The system preferentially searches for devices in the 5 GHz Wi-Fi band. If no results are found, it is advisable to check the device's access point settings.
- If necessary, enter the network key of the device in the infotainment system and confirm with OK.
Manual settings:
- To manually enter the network settings of an external (WLAN) device.
The WLAN (wireless) connection is established. To complete the connection, it may be necessary to enter other data into the device.
Note
Due to the large number of devices on the market, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions.
Full Link
Introduction
With Full Link it is possible to view and use the contents and functions that are shown on the mobile phone device on the infotainment screen.
To do this, the mobile phone device must be connected with the infotainment system through a USB interface.
Some technologies can also be used by Wireless Full Link through the Bluetooth® interface and a Wi-Fi connection.
The following technologies may be available:
• Apple CarPlay™
• Apple CarPlay™ Wireless
• Android Auto™
• Android Auto™ Wireless
The availability of the technologies that Full Link includes depends on the country and the mobile phone device used.
You can find more information on the CUPRA website (www.cupraofficial.com).
Access the Full Link main menu
Browsing the Full Link main menu depends on the infotainment system used.
- Press MENU > Full Link.
Configure Wireless Full Link
In order to use Wireless Full Link, you must first pair the mobile phone device with the infotainment system. To do this, proceed as follows:
Connect a mobile phone device for the first
- Unlock the mobile phone device.
- Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth® on the mobile phone device.
- Connect the mobile device to the infotainment system using a USB cable.
- Access the Full Link main menu, if it is not displayed automatically.
- Select the mobile device and the technology you want.
- Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mobile phone device to grant the necessary authorisations to the infotainment system.
- Disconnect the USB connection and connect with the infotainment system again via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®. Wireless Full Link is now configured.
The pairing has concluded. The connected mobile phone device can also use Wireless Full Link from now on without the USB connection.
Data transmissions
If pop-up menus are rejected during the connection process, Wireless Full Link will not be available. In this case, CLPRA recommends removing the devices in both the telephone settings and the infotainment system, and restarting the connection process.
Bluetooth pairing*
You can connect your device to the infotainment system via Bluetooth*.
If the device is compatible, the system will inform you that you can connect your device to Apple CarPlay™ or Android Auto™ as appropriate.
WARNING
The use of applications while driving can distract your attention from the traffic. Any distraction affecting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries.
* Always drive with attention to traffic and in a responsible manner.
WARNING
Any applications that are not suitable or execute incorrectly may cause damage to the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.
- Protect the mobile phone device and its applications from inappropriate use.
- Never make modifications to the applications.
- Follow instructions in the instruction manual for the mobile phone device.
① NOTICE
CUPRA cannot be held liable for any damage caused to the vehicle as a result of the use of applications that are of poor quality or are defective, inadequate programming of the applications, insufficient coverage of the network, loss of data during transmission or improper use of mobile phone devices.
Note
- Wireless Full Link may not be compatible with all technologies.
- When crossing the border into countries with permitted radio frequencies different to those in your own country, running the Full Link Wireless function may be restricted or even unavailable due to legal regulations. This may also be indicated by a message in the infotainment system. Running Full Link via cable is not affected by this restriction and it can continue to be used.
Applications (apps)
With Full Link, the display of the contents of CUPRA applications and other providers installed on mobile phone devices can be transferred to the infotainment screen.
In the case of third-party applications, there may be compatibility problems.
Applications, their use and the necessary mobile phone connection may be pay per use.
The applications on offer can be varied and designed for a vehicle or a specific country. The contents and volume of applications, as well as the companies that offer them, may vary. Some applications also depend on the availability of third-party services.
It cannot be guaranteed that all the applications offered will work on all mobile phone devices or with all their operating systems.
The applications offered by CUPRA can be modified, cancelled, deactivated, reactivated and extended without prior notification. To avoid distracting the driver while driving, only certified applications can be used.
Full Link symbols and settings
To show more information.
To select Apple CarPlay technology
To select Android AutoTM technology.
Full Link
Apple CarPlay™
In order to use Apple CarPlay™, the following requirements must be met:
- The iPhone™ must be compatible with Apple CarPlay™.
• Voice control (Siri™) must be active on the iPhone™.
- Apple CarPlay™ must be active without limitations in the iPhone™ settings.
- If this is not possible via Apple CarPlay™ Wireless, the iPhone™ must be connected to the infotainment system via a USB connection. Only USB connections with data transmission are suitable for the use of Apple CarPlay™.
- The USB cable used must be an original Apple TM cable.
Apple CarPlay™ Wireless: Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi must also be activated on the iPhone™.
Establish connection
When you first connect an iPhone ™ , follow the instructions on the infotainment system display and on the iPhone ™ .
The requirements must be met to use Apple CarPlay 19 .
Launch Apple CarPlay™:
- Press MENU > Full Link to access the Full Link main menu
- Press Apple CarPlay™ to establish a connection with the iPhone™.
Disconnecting
- In Apple CarPlay™ mode, press the CUPRA icon to access the Full Link main menu.
- PressX to interrupt the active connection. The representation of function buttons on the screen may vary.
Special characteristics
During an active Apple CarPlay™ connection, the following characteristics are applicable:
- Bluetooth® connections between the iPhone™ and the infotainment system are not possible.
- If there is an active Bluetooth® connection, it is automatically interrupted.
- It is not possible to use the built-in navigation system and the Apple CarPlay™ navigation system at the same time. The last route started interrupts the one that was previously active.
- Depending on the infotainment system you use, on the instrument cluster display you can view data from the Telephone mode.
- Only navigation instructions from compatible apps are displayed on the instrument cluster's screen.
- With the multifunction steering wheel you can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end an ongoing telephone conversation.
Voice control
- Press On the multifunction steering wheel briefly to start voice control using the infotainment system.
- Press and hold this button to start voice control (Siri TM ) of the connected iPhone TM .
Note
• The availability of technologies depends on the country and may vary.
- You will find information about technical requirements, compatible iPhones, certified applications and their availability on the CUPRA and Apple CarPlay™ websites, at specialised CUPRA dealerships or at any SEAT dealership.
Android Auto™
Requirements for Android Auto™
In order to use Android Auto™, the following requirements must be met:
- The mobile phone device, called smartphone from here on, must be compatible with Android Auto™.
- The smartphone must have an Android Auto™ application installed.
Data transmissions
- If this is not possible via Android Auto® Wireless, the smartphone must be connected to the infotainment system via a USB connection with data transmission.
- The USB cable used must be an original cable provided by the smartphone manufacturer. Android Auto™ Wireless: The smartphone's Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi signal also have to be on.
Establish connection
When you first connect a smartphone, follow the instructions on the infotainment system display and on the smartphone.
The requirements must be met to use Android Auto™.
Launch Android Auto™:
- Press MENU > Full Link to access the Full Link main menu
- Press Android Auto™ to establish a connection with the smartphone.
Disconnecting
- In Android Auto™ mode, press the CUPRA icon to access the Full Link main menu.
- Press X to interrupt the active connection.
Special characteristics
During an active Android Auto™ connection, the following characteristics are applicable:
- An active Android Auto™ device can be connected at the same time via Bluetooth® (HFP profile) with the infotainment system.
- It is possible to use the phone's functions through Android Auto™. If the Android Auto™ device is connected at the same time via Bluetooth® with the infotainment system, the telephone function of the infotainment can also be used.
- It is not possible to use the built-in navigation system and the Android Auto™ navigation system at the same time. The last route started interrupts the one that was previously active.
- Telephone and Media data can on the instrument cluster display
- Only navigation instructions from compatible apps are displayed on the instrument cluster's screen.
- With the multifunction steering wheel you can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as and an ongoing telephone conversation.
Voice control
- Press 1 on the multifunction steering wheel briefly to start voice control using the infotainment system.
- Press and hold this button to start voice control (Google Assistant) on the connected smartphone.
Note
• The availability of technologies depends on the country and may vary.
- You will find information about technical requirements, compatible mobile phone devices, certified applications and their availability on the CUPRA and Android Auto™ websites, at specialised CUPRA dealerships or at any SEAT dealership.
Wired and wireless connections
USB connection
Fig.178 C entre console: USB input.
Wired and wireless connections
Fig. 179 Rear centre console: US\$
connectors with power socket function.
The USB port can be found in the storage compartment area of the front centre console >>> Fig. 178.
Depending on the equipment and the country, the vehicle may also have USB connections exclusively for charging or as a power socket.
These USB ports are located at the rear of the console, between the front seats >> Fig. 179.
Note
Before switching the ignition on or off, unplug the appliances from the USB ports to protect them from any damage caused by fluctuations in voltage.
Infotainment system
Infotainment system
First steps
Introduction
Infotainment functions and settings depend on the country and equipment.
Before first use
Before the first use, bear in mind the following points, to take full advantage of the functions and settings offered:
- Observe the basic safety warnings >> page 278.
- Restore infotainment to factory settings.
- Search and store favourite radio stations on the preset buttons so you can tune them quickly.
- Use only suitable audio sources and data media.
- Pair a mobile phone to use phone management through the Infotainment system.
• Use up-to-date maps for navigation. - Register with CUPRA to execute the corresponding services.
Current documentation attached
For using infotainment and its components, take into account the following documentation, together with this instruction manual:
- Supplements to your vehicle's on-board documentation.
- Instruction Manual of the mobile phone device or audio sources.
- Operating instructions for data media and external players.
- Manuals for the Inflotainment accessories subsequently installed or used additionally.
- Description of services when running CUPRA services.
Safety instructions
Some function areas may include links to third-party websites. CUPRA is not the owner of the third-party websites accessible through the links, and assumes no liability for their content.
Some function areas may include outside information from third-party providers. CUPRA is not responsible for such information being correct, up-to-date or complete, or for ensuring it does not infringe the rights of third parties.
Radio stations and owners of data media and audio sources are responsible for the information they transmit.
Bear in mind that car parks, tunnels, tall buildings, mountains or the operation of other electrical devices, such as chargers, can also interfere with the reception of the radio signal.
Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on the antenna and on the window panes can interfere with radio reception.
WARNING
The infotainment central computer is interconnected with the control units mounted on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a serious danger of accident and injury if the central computer is repaired or disassembled and re-assembled incorrectly.
- Never replace the central computer with another one that is used, recycled or from another vehicle at the end of its useful life.
• The central computer should only be repaired or disassembled and reassembled at specialised workshops. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this purpose.
WARNING
Any distraction affecting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Reading the information on the screen and managing the infotainment system can distract your attention from traffic and cause an accident.
• Always drive with attention to traffic and in a responsible manner.
First steps
WARNING
Connecting, inserting or removing an audio source or data media while driving can distract your attention from the traffic and cause an accident.
WARNING
Select volume settings that allow you to easily hear signals from outside the vehicle at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens).
- Hearing may be impaired if using too high a volume setting, even if only for short periods of time.
WARNING
The following circumstances may result in an emergency call, phone call or data transmission not being made or being interrupted:
- When in areas with zero or insufficient mobile telephony or GPS signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas between very tall buildings, garages, underpasses, mountains and valleys. - When in areas with sufficient mobile phone or GPS signal, the telephony network of the telecommunications provider has interference or is not available.
- When the vehicle components necessary to make emergency calls, phone calls and to transmit data are damaged, do not work or do not have sufficient electrical power. - When the battery of the mobile phone device is discharged or its charge level is insufficient.
WARNING
In some countries and some telephone networks it is only possible to make an emergency call, if a mobile telephone device is connected to the telephone interface of the vehicle, inside which there is an "unlocked" SIM card with sufficient balance to make calls and with sufficient network signal coverage.
WARNING
Read and observe the operating instructions provided by the manufacturer in question when using mobile phone devices, data media, external devices, external audio and multimedia sources.
WARNING
Changing or connecting an audio or multi-media source may cause sudden changes in the volume.
- Lower the volume before connecting or switching to audio or multimedia sources.
WARNING
If mobile phone and radiocommunication devices are used without connection to an external antenna, the maximum electromagnetic radiation levels inside the vehicle might be surpassed, thus posing a risk to the health of the driver and passengers. This is also the case if the external antenna has not been correctly installed.
- Keep a distance of at least 20 centimetres between the antennas of the mobile phone device and an active medical device, such as a pacemaker, as mobile phones might alter the functioning of these devices.
- Do not carry a switched-on mobile phone too close or directly on top of an active medical device, for instance in a chest pocket.
- Immediately turn off the mobile phone if you suspect it is causing interferences in an active medical device or any other medical device.
WARNING
Mobile phones, external devices and accessories that are loose or not properly secured could move around the vehicle interior during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or an accident and cause damage or injury.
- Place mobile phone devices, external devices and their accessories outside the airbag deployment areas or store them securely.
Infotainment system
- Position the connection cables of the audio sources and external devices so that they do not interfere with the driver.
WARNING
The centre armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause an accident and severe injuries.
- Keep the storage compartments of the centre armrest closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
If the light conditions are not good and the screen is damaged or dirty, the indications and information displayed on the screen may not be read or be read incorrectly.
- The indications and information displayed on the screen should never induce you to take any risk that compromises safety. The screen is not a replacement for driver awareness.
WARNING
Radio stations can transmit disaster or hazard announcements. The following conditions prevent such notices from being received or issued:
- When you are in areas with insufficient or no radio-signal reception. Also in tunnels, confined areas between very tall buildings, garages, underpasses, mountains and valleys.
- When the frequency bands of the radio station have interference or are not available in areas with sufficient radio signal reception.
- When the speakers and the vehicle components necessary for radio reception are damaged, do not work or do not have sufficient electrical power.
WARNING
Switch off mobile phone devices in areas with a risk of explosion!
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic indications shown on the navigation system may differ from the current traffic situation. • Road signs, signalling systems, traffic regulations and local circumstances prevail over driving recommendations and navigation system indications.
- Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
• Certain circumstances can significantly lengthen both the initially planned duration of the trip and the route to the destination, or even temporarily prevent navigation to it, for example, if a road is closed to traffic.
NOTICE
In areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobile phones is forbidden, the mobile device in question must be switched off at all times. The radiation produced by a mobile phone device when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment.
NOTICE
If the playback volume is excessive or distorted, the speakers may be damaged.
Overview and controls
Overview and controls
Connect System
Fig. 180 Overview control unit
① HOME button ■main menu with widget views.
② MENU button again menu in tile mode.
③ Touch screen. The infotainment function can be used through the screen.
④ On/Off touchpad (to turn the infotainment system on/off).
⑤ Touch zones (to raise and lower the air conditioning temperature).
⑥ Touch zones I to raise and lower the volume.
Infotainment system
General instructions for use
Operating indications
- The infotainment system needs a few seconds to start up completely and during that time it does not react to inputs. Only the image of the rear view camera system can be displayed during system start-up.
- The display of all indications and the execution of functions only takes place once the infotainment system has finished booting. The duration of the system boot depends on the number of infotainment functions and may take longer than normal in the event of very high or very low temperatures.
- When using the infotainment system and corresponding accessories, e.g., headphones, bear in mind country-specific regulations and legal provisions.
• Some functions of the infotainment system require an active CUPRA CONNECT user account and an Internet connection for the vehicle. Data transmission must not be limited for functions to be performed. - To use the infotainment system, simply lightly press a button or touch the screen.
-
For the correct operation of the inotainment system it is important that it is switched on and that, if necessary, the time and date of the vehicle are set correctly.
-
If a function button is missing on the screen, it is not a device defect, but corresponds to the specific equipment of the country or version.
- Some infotainment functions can only be selected when the vehicle is at a standstill. In some countries the parking lock must also be enabled (button P) or the selector control must be in the neutral position N. This is not a malfunction, but is due to compliance with legislation.
- Restrictions on the use of devices using Bluetooth® technology may apply in some countries. For further information, contact the local authorities.
- If you disconnect the 12-volt battery, turn on the ignition before restarting the infotainment system.
- If the setup is changed, this may change the display on the screen and in some cases, the infolament system may behave in a manner different to that described in this instruction manual.
-
In some countries, the infotainment system automatically shuts off when the engine is switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt battery charge level is low.
■ Ensure that any repairs or modifications that need to be carried out on the infotainment system are carried out by a specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this purpose. -
Using a mobile phone device inside the vehicle may cause noise in the speakers.
- On vehicles with park assist, the audio source volume is automatically lowered when reverse gear is selected. The volume reduction can be adjusted.
• Information about the included software and the license conditions can be found in Settings > Information > Copyright. - When selling or lending the vehicle, make sure that all saved data, files and settings have been deleted and, if necessary, external audio sources and data media have been removed.
Note
You can find more information and tips for using the infotainment system in the Help menu.
Home screen
If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not a device defect, but corresponds to the specific equipment of the country or version. The following menus can be included as an
Main menus
Vehicle >> page 38
Navigation>>> page 297
General instructions for use
Radio >>> page 290, Media >>> page 294
2 Help
Telephone >>> page 304
Full Link >>> page 273
Load>>> page 91
Drive Profile >>> page 190
Seats >>> page 154
CUPRA Assistant >>> page 287
Stationary air conditioning >> page 161
Vehicle lights >>> page 140
Settings >>> page 284
Sound
Users
Store
Legal.
Managing the infotainment system
Execute the functions and settings with the infotainment controls.
Depending on the equipment, the infatainment system has different controls:
- Touch screen.
- Touch zones outside the screen, for example, Volume (+ -).
Open the Quick Guide
More information and operating tips can be found in the infotainment Quick Guide.
- Press MENU > ⑦ Help.
Connecting and disconnecting the infotainment system
The infotainment system turns on when the ignition is switched on, unless it has been manually turned off beforehand.
The infotainment system starts-up with the last set volume, provided that this does not exceed the preset maximum start-up volume.
The infotainment system automatically turns off when the driver's door is opened, provided the ignition has been switched off beforehand.
Moving objects and adjusting volume
Move objects on the screen to adapt settings, for example, with scrollable buttons or to move the areas of a menu.
Depending on the equipment, menus and displays can be customised.
Zooming into and out of images or map sizes
Tip: use your thumb and index finger
- Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and leave them on the screen.
• To enlarge views, slowly separate one finger from the other. To reduce views, slowly bring one finger towards the other.
Note
If you turn on the infotainment system manually with the ignition off, it will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
i Note
As with most state-of-the-art computer and electronic equipment, in certain cases the system may need to be rebooted to make sure that it operates correctly. To do this, if appropriate, press and hold the On/Off button of the infotainment system (>>> page 281) for approx. 15 seconds until the CUPRA logo appears on the display.
Infotainment system
Customising the infotainment sys-tem
Customise the top menu or the HOME
Fig. 180 ① view to quickly access your
favourite or most frequently used functions.
The main menu contains function buttons for accessing all of the Infotainment apps.
Configuring customised menus
At the top of the screen you will find short-cuts to customisable system functions. Use the settings to delete or replace them, or change their order.
- Press and hold one of the icons (or press on the icon of an empty position) to display an additional window.
- Select one of the icons from the apps bar.
- Click on the three dots and then Delete favourite to delete an icon.
- Click on an icon in the additional window to replace the value.
- To close the edit mode, press Finish in the additional window.
Settings (system and sound)
The selection of possible settings varies depending on the country, the equipment in question and the equipment of the vehicle.
Modifying settings
The meaning of the following symbols are valid for all system and sound settings.
All changes are automatically applied when the menus are closed.
| /○ | The setting is selected and activated or connected. |
| ☐/○ | The setting is not selected and disabled or disconnected. |
| ▼ | Open a drop-down isL. |
| to save a setting value. |
| + | Increase a setting value. |
| Reduce a setting value. |
| < | Go back step by step. |
| > | Go forward step by step. |
| ○ | Change a setting value with the sellable button without adjust- ing. |
Sound settings
- Access the sound settings: Ⓞ > Ⓡ
In the sound settings there may be the following functions, information and setting options:
Equaliser - Position.
- Settings.
System settings
- Access the system settings: Ⓞ > Ⓗ
In the system settings there may be the following functions, information and setting options:
- Screen.
• Time and date.
- Language.
• Additional keypad languages.
Units.
• Voice control.
■ Wi-Fi
- Data connection.
■ Manage mobile devices.
- Restore factory settings.
■ System information.
• Copyright.
- Configuration wizard.
Adjust the volume of external audio sources
If you need to increase the playback volume for the external audio source, first lower the volume on the infotainment system.
If the sound from the connected audio source is very low, increase the output volume on
the external audio source. If this is not enough, change the input volume to medium or high.
General instructions for use
If the sound from the connected external audio source is too loud or distorted, lower the output volume on the external audio source. If this is not enough, change the input volume to medium or low.
Clean the screen
Remove persistent dirt carefully and without using aggressive cleaning products. To clean the screen we recommend that:
• The infotainment system is switched off.
- Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with water >>> page 395.
- In case of stubborn dirt: moisten with a little water and then wipe off carefully with a clean, soft cloth.
NOTICE
Cleaning the display dry or with unsuitable cleaning agents may damage it.
- When cleaning, only press lightly.
- Do not use cleaning products that are aggressive or contain solvents. Such products may damage the equipment and darken the screen.
Trademarks, licenses and copy-rights
Registered trademarks and licenses
Certain terms in this manual bear the symbol * or **. These symbols indicate that they are trademarks or registered trademarks. The absence of this symbol, however, does not necessarily mean that the term in question can be used freely.
Other product names are registered trademarks of the respective rights holders.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
- Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• Android Auto™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
• Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of Apple Inc.
- Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
- iPod®, iPad 60 , and iPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc.
- Windows ® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation, Redmond, USA.
- MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS.
- This product is protected by certain Microsoft Corporation industrial and intellectual property rights. The use or commercialization of technology of this type outside the configuration of this product, without a licence from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft branch is prohibited.
Copyright
As a general rule, audio and video files stored on data media and audio sources are subject to intellectual property protection in accordance with the national and international provisions applicable in each case. Please bear in mind all legal provisions!
Technical data
Central computer with control and display unit 1)
The factory-mounted central computer in the vehicle includes country-specific components and software for connectivity and for the execution of vehicle, comfort and infotainment functions.
The corresponding indications are shown on the control and display unit screen and partly on the instrument cluster.
Infotainment system
• Capacitive colour screen
• Using the equipment with.
- Touch zones. Touch operation.
Buttons on the multifunction steering
WHEEL:
- Approach sensors.
HOME > Settings > Display.
Vehicle and comfort functions
• Assistants system settings.
• Heating and air conditioning settings
• Lights and visibility function
- Vehicle comfort settings
• Parking and manoeuvring settings.
Note
Setting navigation routes and other func-
tions requiring the vehicle's location will be
more efficient if you activate the privacy sat-
ings to share your location 977 page 271 and if you give your consent in the top survey.
mobile device for it to share your location.
data.
Sound system (basic equipment):
The factory-fitted entertainment system is
equipped as follows:
- Speakers in different locations and with dif-
ferent power levels (watts).
• Internal amplifier depending on the system:
- 7 speakers (with Online connectivity unit).
6 speakers (without Online connectivity)
unit.
Setting options:
• Equaliser, depending on the system:
- 5 frequency bands and default settings.
• Sound distribution, depending on the sys
tent:
- Balance + Fader (left / right / front / rear).
• Sound optimisation by zones:
- Manual (Driver and All).
- Automatic depending on the seats occu
pic
Optional sound system
The infotainment system can be extended with an optional sound system as follows:
■ 12 speakers in different locations and with
different power levels (watts).
• External amplifier (390 W Ethernet), which
processes the audible signals sent by the cen-
tral computer.
■ Excitation of speaker channels through class
AB final stages
• Audio signal processing in digital internal sig-
nal processor; DSP;
■ Independent subwoofer in the luggage com-
partment
Setting options
• Equaliser: 3 preset sound modes and 1 user
customisable 6-band equaliser. With "Immer-
sion 24 surround sound control in any of the
modes.
• Sound distribution: Balance (left / right) -
+ader front / rear.
• Sound optimisation by zones:
- Manual (Driver, Front and AI)
- Automatic depending on the seats occu-
pre
- Subwoofer volume.
Wi-Fi
• Wi-Fi compliant with IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ax
and IEEE 902.11a/n/ac/ax.
• Transfer at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.
• Apple CarPlay™ and Android Auto™ over Wi
Fi.
• Simultaneous connection of up to B Wi-Fi
devices
• Two Wi-Fi modes at the same time:
- Access point.
- Internet connection through Wi-Fi:
- Tethering through the customer's phone.
- Customer access point [clients] in the va
hicle.
- Pairing process simplified with QR code.
CUPRA Assistant
Bluetooth® profiles
There can be a maximum of two mobile devices connected to the Bluetooth® hands-free and a third device connected to the Bluetooth® as a music player.
When a mobile phone is connected to the telephone management system, a data exchange takes place via one of the Bluetooth® profiles.
- Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the HFP can be used to manage calls through the infotainment system.
- Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. Other profiles may need to be connected for managing and controlling playback.
• Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows phone book contents to be downloaded from the mobile telephone. - Messaging profile (MAP): It allows short messages (SMS) and emails to be downloaded and synchronised.
CUPRA Assistant
Introduction
i Note
The CUPRA Assistant function is not available
in all markets.
Not available in all markets
The CUPRA Assistant works both online 21 and offline, taking into account the aspects indicated in the section "Languages available depending on the market"
In offline mode the catalogue of voice controls is limited. For a better user experience, it is advisable to use the online mode by activating the online voice assistant via the My CUPRA App, which provides the user with a wider range of voice controls. In addition, ChatGPT is also available to answer questions.
The CUPRA Assistant understands questions and expressions without having to learn commands. Commands can be freely formulated and can be colloquial. For better system operation, it is recommended to always include a verb in the voice control. Command proposals can be found in the infotainment system, for example in the MENU Ⅲ > CUPRA Assistant > Tips menu.
Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle can cause malfunctions, as well as confusing phrases and answers.
Seat-dependent speech recognition
Thanks to additional microphones, the CUPRA Assistant can recognise whether the person speaking is the driver or the passenger. Therefore, in the case of the available languages, you can access functions for a specific seat, such as switching on the seat heating.
Languages available depending on the market
• Online and offline: German, American English, British English, French, Italian, Spanish, Mexican Spanish, Czech, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese, Swedish, Danish, Norwegian, Finnish, Greek, Russian and Turkish. These languages have advanced functions such as online commands, climate control, natural interaction, etc.
• Offline: Bulgarian.
The other infotainment system languages have no natural interaction.
Requirements
- Offline: voice control with the corresponding infotainment installed in the vehicle.
• Online and offline: voice control with the corresponding infotainment system installed in the vehicle and an active CUPRA CONNECT contract.
Note
• The CUPRA Assistant only recognises commands in the language set in the infotainment system.
- Test the CUPRA Assistant while the vehicle is stopped, before moving off, to familiarise yourself with its operation.
Infotainment system
• The CUPRA Assistant can only control functions that are available as part of the vehicle's equipment.
Activation word and commands
Activation word for the CUPRA Assistant
The CUPRA Assistant starts when the infotainment recognises the activation word.
If you have started the CUPRA Assistant via the activation word, the activated infotainment will play an audible tone as it is listening to you and display the avatar next to the teleprompter.
- OR: after the wake word, say the desired command, for example: "Hello CUPRA" and then "Switch on heating".
The system scans the words spoken in the vehicle after the activation work and displays them on the screen.
Activate and deactivate the activation word
- Tap MENU > CUPRA Assistant > Activation. Activation word:
Spanish Hola CUPRA
Portuguese Ola CLPRA
Polish Cross CUPRA
Turkish Menhaba CUPRA
The activation word can be personalised by the user via the microphone or keypad.
Commands
To help the voice control recognise commands reliably.
- Pronounce clearly. Confusing commands are not recognised. Speak in a normal tone of voice. Speak a little louder if you are driving at high speed.
- Avoid outside noises. Open windows and doors can interfere with voice control.
- Avoid other secondary noises, such as conversations in the vehicle. Do not direct the air flow from the outlets towards the microphone or the interior lining of the roof.
- Do not make long pauses.
Voice control is active and recognises the words pronounced.
Open the command proposals
• Tap MENU • CUPRA Assistant.
Note
- If the activation word is switched off, the CUPRA Assistant cannot be activated via the activation word. The CUPRA Assistant is still available via the (%) button on the multifunction steering wheel. You can deactivate the activation word in MENU > CUPRA Assistant > Activation.
• Availability depends on country and equipment.
Starting and ending the CUPRA Assistant
Depending on the equipment, you can start voice control in different ways.
CUPRA Assistant
Starting the CUPRA Assistant
- Activating the CUPRA Assistant: say the word that activates the CUPRA Assistant.
- Multifunction steering wheel: press the voice control button O4.
In some cases you can also start the voice assistant of the connected mobile device by pressing and holding down the voice control button.
Ending the CUPRA Assistant manually
The CUPRA Assistant can be cancelled using the command Cancel.
- Multifunction steering wheel: tap the voice control button ( ) once to end the assistant.
CUPRA Assistant is automatically terminated if you use infotainment functions, if the parking system is activated, if there is an incoming call or a long pause or silence.
Infotainment system
Radio mode
Introduction
In Radio mode you can tune in the available radio stations in different frequency bands and save your favourites on the preset buttons to access them quickly.
The types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country. In certain countries, frequency bands may stop broadcasting or may no longer be available.
Access the RADIO menu
- Press MENU > 10 Fig. 181.
Access the settings
- Press MENU > 10.
Online functions in Radio mode 11
Online functions in Radio mode are only available under the following conditions:
- CUPRA CONNECT equipment
- You have an active CUPRA CONNECT user account.
■ The vehicle is assigned to your user account.
Fig.181 Schematic Representation: Radio view
* You have a corresponding data plan purchased from the webshop of CUPRA's official data supplier, or you have a volume of data for your own mobile device via the Wi-Fi hotspot.
i Note
- Radio stations are responsible for the content of the information they transmit. Electrical equipment connected to the vehicle may also cause interference in radio signal reception and noise in the loudspeakers.
Radio mode
- Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehicles with a window aerial.
Radio equipment and symbols
The functions, as well as the types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country.
• AM tuner.
• Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna).
• Summarised FM station list.
• Merger of DAB and FM stations into one list.
- Merger of all stations stored in preset buttons
into one list. Maximum 36 favourite stations.
- Station logos.
- DAB presentation (slideshow). Images that are emitted sequentially.
- Internet Radio: over 10,000 stations and podcasts from around the world, included with CUPRA CONNECT.
Universal symbols in Radio mode
AM To select the desired AM frequency band 1 .
FM/DAB To select the desired FM/DAB frequency band.
Internet radio To select the type of Internet
radio reception
TP Next to the name of the station, monitor
ing of active traffic information stations
| T Pi |
Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency band
To display the frequency band for manual selection of the FM frequency. Only the FM band should be selected in the Radio context.
DAB not available
DAB stations support presentations (slide-show).
Symbols on the AM frequency band 1
○ Manually updating the station list.
To display the frequency band for manual
selection of the AM frequency.
Menus in Internet radio mode 1)
Show station selection.
Open text search.
Show the last online radio stations heard.
The Show the 100 most played radio stations
and podcasts.
Show available online radio podcasts.
Show online radio stations, grouped by
country
Show online radio stations by the desired language.
Show online radio stations whose programme has the desired musical genre.
Selecting, tuning and saving a sta- tion
Select the frequency band
Before selecting a station you have to select a frequency band or a type of reception. Different stations are available depending on the frequency band selected or the type of reception.
The types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country.
- Select the frequency band or type of reception: AM, FM/DAB, FM (for devices that do not have DAB), Internet radio.
Search and select a station
You can select radio stations in different ways. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the type of reception.
Infotainment system
Select via the frequency band (AM and FM)
-
Activate the frequency band.
-
Click on the cursor, scroll through the frequency band and release it when you reach the frequency band you want.
OR: press on a point on the frequency band. The cursor will automatically jump to the corresponding frequency.
The station of the set frequency is tuned.
Select from the station list (AM and FM/DAB)
The station list shows the stations that are currently tunable. In the AM frequency band, you may have to update the station list if you are no longer in the area where you last accessed the station list. In the FM/DAB frequency band, the station list is automatically updated.
-
Open the station list
-
Press the station you want.
The selected station is tuned. In the case of FM/DAB and if the station is available, the best quality reception is automatically selected.
Search and filter stations (Internet radio)
In Online Radio mode, stations can be filtered by categories and can be searched by text.
-
Open the station list
-
Select the category by which the stations are to be filtered.
OR: press Q to start the text search. The input field is displayed.
-
Enter the name of the station you want. The list of the stations found is updated while entering the text.
-
Press the station you want.
The selected station is tuned.
Save stations on the preset keys
You can store up to 36 stations of different frequency bands and reception types as favourites using the preset buttons.
-
Tune the station you want.
-
Access the preset buttons.
-
Press the preset button and hold it down
until the station is stored.
OR: press the station on the station list and hold it down. The preset buttons are displayed.
- Press the preset button.
The station is stored in the selected preset
button.
If a station was already stored in the preset button, it is overwritten with the new station.
Special functions in Radio mode
Traffic information (TP)
The TP function monitors the announcements of a station with traffic information and automatically plays them in the Radio mode or in the multimedia playback that is active. To do this, you have to be able to tune into a station with traffic information.
Some stations without their own traffic information support the TP function by broadcasting traffic information from other stations (EON).
In the FM frequency band or in the Multimedia mode, a station with traffic information in the background is automatically tuned while it is possible to tune into a station with traffic information.
If no station with traffic information can be tuned in, the device automatically searches for stations with tunable traffic information.
Stations with traffic information are not available in all countries.
Activating and deactivating the TP function
- In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, press - Traffic programme (TP).
Radio mode
Presentations (SlideShow) in DAB
The slideshow function (SLS) is a feature of digital radio (DAB) stations, allowing a slide-show of images, e.g. the station's logo, to be displayed to the user.
Activating and deactivating the SLS function
It is possible to deactivate the slideshow function on DAB radio stations:
- Menu > Slide Show (switch on/off).
Online radio. 11
Online radio is a type of reception for Internet radio stations and podcasts that are independent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks to Internet transmission, reception is not limited to the region.
Internet radio is only available with CUPRA CONNECT online services activated and online mode active. The use of online radio may not be free of charge due to the transmission of data from the Internet.
- In Online radio mode, press and set the audio quality to high or low to tune the online radio.
Station logos
In the case of some frequency bands, station logos may already be pre-installed in the infotainment system.
If in the FM/DAB frequency band settings the automatic selection of station logos is activated, station logos are automatically assigned to the stations.
In the Online radio mode, the infotainment system accesses the station logos of the online database and automatically assigns them to the stations.
Assign station logos manually
-
In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos.
-
Press on the 🔒 icon and then select the station to which a station logo is to be assigned.
-
Select the station logo. If desired, repeat the same process with other stations.
-
OR: via the menu > Station logos.
Additional DAB warnings
The DAB announcement function monitors possible notifications from DAB radio stations and plays them automatically in Radio mode.
Activate and deactivate additional DAB warnings:
- Menu > Additional DAB announcements (Activate/deactivate).
Radio text
The radio text function provides information related to the selected radio station.
- Menu > Radio Text (Activate/deactivate).
Infotainment system
Media Mode
Introduction
In Media mode you can play multimedia files from data media through the infotainment system.
Depending on the equipment, the following data media can be used:
• USB storage support (for example, a USB stick, a mobile phone connected via USB).
- Bluetooth® device (for example, a mobile phone or a tablet).
Depending on the equipment, the following types of multimedia files can be played:
• Audio files.
• Video files (depends on the system).
Access the MEDIA menu
- Press MENU > ☑️ Fig.182.
Access the settings
- Press MENU > 10.
Data media limitations and indications
Data media may not work if they have been exposed to high temperatures or have been damaged. Please bear in mind the manufacturer's indications.
Fig.182 Schematic representation: Media
yie
Quality differences between data media produced by different manufacturers can cause multimedia playback malfunctions.
Incorrect data media configuration may make it unreadable.
Playlists only specify a playback order and refer to the storage location of the multimedia files within the folder structure. No multimedia files are saved in a playlist. To play a playlist, multimedia files have to be found in the storage places of the data media to which the playlist refers.
Media Mode
Note
CUPRA assumes no liability for any deterioration or loss of files on data storage devices.
Equipment features and media symbols
Audio, multimedia and connectivity
• Media playback and control via Bluetooth®
• Audio playback in these formats: AAC, APE, ALAC, FLAC, MP2, MP3, MP4, Vorbis, OPUS, WMA, WAV.
• Video playback in these formats:
- MPEG-1 and MPEG-2
(mpg, mpeg, mkv, avi)
- ISO MPEG-4 ASP; Xvid
.mp4, m4v, mov, mkv, 24).
- ISO MPEG-4 AVC / H.264
,801V, 351, 21K9, 3401,
- Playlists on any type of device.
• Multimedia search.
Universal symbols in Media mode
▶ Start playback.
11. Pouse plywood
Change to the previous track.
Change to the next track.
Repeat the track that is playing.
Recent all titles.
× Activate the shuffle playback order.
★ Display a list of favourites.
⊕ Add a media file as favourite.
▼ Top right: select media source.
Access the settings.
Open the search.
< Return to the top folder of the media
source
Select and play a multimedia
source
Select multimedia source
Before playing multimedia files you must first
connect a multimedia source.
- Connect an external multimedia source.
- Select the connected media source to be
used for playback.
Playing audio and video files
You can search and play multimedia files from
an available multimedia source in different
ways.
Search in the folder structure
Multimedia files can be catalogued by catago
ries (for example, album, artist, title). In My
media this category view is always displayed. The classic bridge structure of individual LCP
The classic reader structure of the adult use data media is also found in My media.
- Activate the folder structure
The folder structure of the selected multi
media source is displayed. When My med
is selected, the categories (music, videos)
playlists) and connected multimedia sour
ces are displayed first.
- Search for the title you want in the folder
structure.
OR: press Q to start a text search The in
put field is displayed.
- Enter the name of the desired title. The list
of the titles found is updated while entering
the text:
- Press the desired title.
If at the beginning of the playback your se-
lection is in a folder of
the multimedia files that are in it are also
added to the playback
If a playlist is played, all available titles in the
playlist are added to the playback.
- Close your selection with ✗
Select favourites
In favourites you can save titles, music genres,
artists and albums individually for playback.
Infotainment system
- Access favourites ★
• Press the favourite you want.
Depending on your selection, all the titles belonging to the favourite are added to the play-back.
Save favourites
Only multimedia files in My media of the infotainment system can be saved as favourites. You can save up to a maximum of 36 titles, albums, artists and music genres individually as favourites.
- Start playback.
- Access favourites.
- Tap a favourite that is not assigned.
OR: press and hold on an existing favourite for approx. 3 seconds. - Select from the selection list: Title, Album, Artist, Genres, Playlist.
The selection is saved instead of the previously selected favourite. If the favourite was already assigned, the previously saved favourite is overwritten.
The selectable options in the selection list depend on the data attached to the multimedia file. If the music genre is not indicated in the music files, for example, you cannot save the music genre as favourite.
If a video file is playing, only that video can be saved as favourite.
Playing entertainment content in the infotainment system
Depending on the infotainment system, videos can be played.
Video mode
When in Video mode, a video stored on data media, in My media can be played on the information display. In this case, the video sound is played through the vehicle's speakers.
The image is only displayed if the vehicle is stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the infotainment screen turns off. The sound of the video can still be heard.
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
。
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
1
。
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
Navigation
Navigation
Introduction
Note
The "Navigation" function is not available in all markets.
A global satellite system determines the current position of the vehicle and the sensors mounted on the vehicle analyse the routes taken. All measured values and possible traffic events are compared with the available maps to allow optimal navigation to the destination. Navigation announcements and graphic representations will guide you to your destination. Navigation is managed on the screen.
Depending on the country, some functions of the infotainment system will not be available on the screen when traveling above a certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is due to compliance with legislation.
Navigation announcements
Navigation announcements audible indications for driving relating to the current route. The type and frequency of navigation announcements depend on the driving situation, for example, starting the guide to the destination, driving on the motorway or on a roundabout and the settings
Fig. 183 Schematic Representation Navigation view
If the exact destination cannot be reached because, for example, it is in a non-digitised area indications relating to the address and the distance to the destination are displayed on the screen.
During dynamic route guidance, you will receive information about reported traffic congestion on the route. An additional navigation announcement is given if the route is recalculated due to traffic congestion.
While a navigation announcement is playing, its volume can be adjusted. Subsequent navigation announcements will be played with the newly adjusted volume.
Infotainment system
Limitations during navigation
If the infotainment system cannot receive data from GPS satellites, for example, in a tunnel or in an underground garage, navigation continues using the vehicle's sensors.
In areas that are not digitised or are only partially digitised in the infotainment's memory, the infotainment system will still attempt to provide route guidance.
In the case of missing or incomplete navigation data, it may not be possible to determine the exact position of the vehicle. This may mean that navigation is not as precise as usual.
Roads and streets are subject to constant
closed to traffic, changes to street names and building numbers). If the navigation data is obsolete, this may lead to errors or inaccuracies during route guidance.
Managing the navigation map
For optimal viewing, you can also manage the navigation map with additional finger movements.
Moving the map
Tip: use your index finger
- Move the map with your finger.
Zooming into or out of the view
Tip: use your index finger
- Press twice on the map and keep your finger pressed on the screen.
- To zoom out the map view, move your finger upwards. To zoom into the map view, move your finger downwards.
Change the 2D / 3D view
Tip: use your index and middle fingers
- Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and keep them pressed.
- For 2D view scroll your fingers down, for 3D view scroll your fingers up.
Rotate the map
Tip: use your thumb and index finger
- Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and keep them pressed.
• To rotate the map view, turn your fingers clockwise or anticlockwise.
Saved data
The infotainment system saves certain data, for example, frequent routes and position data, to make it easier to enter the destination and to optimise route guidance.
Delete saved data
- Press Settings > Basic function settings > Delete and then Accept.
WARNING
Select the settings, enter the destination and the modifications for navigation only with the vehicle at a standstill.
Note
- If a detour is passed during route guidance, navigation may recalculate the route.
• The quality of the navigation recommendations given by the Infotainment system depends on the navigation data available and any reported traffic congestions.
- Navigation announcements are not emitted if the sound is muted in the infotainment system.
Navigation functions and symbols
Navigation
Navigation functions depend on the equipment and country.
All navigation functions require the activation of CUPRA CONNECT PLUS online services.
Navigation
Functions
- Entering the destination and route calculation (offline and online. 15 )
- Display of two navigation maps at the same time (screen and instrument cluster).
Update of online maps. 10 - Predictive navigation
• 3D urban maps.
• Online traffic information. 1
• Dynamic POIs (points of interest).
Symbols on the map
The buttons and indications depend on the settings and the current driving situation.
Symbols for traffic events and points of interest (POIs) are displayed on the map. For example, petrol stations, train stations or interesting stopovers, provided navigation has such data >>> page 302.
▲ Current position.
Search for destinations.
Destinations along the route.
Final destination.
Home address.
Work address.
☆ Favourite destinations.
/Additional window with route options.
Not available in all markets
Centre the map on the current position.
Change view: 2D oriented to the north, or 2D oriented to the direction of travel, or 3D to the direction of travel.
Information about the current route guidance.
220m Map scale.
Other symbols
Entering the detailed destination for an address.
Search for destinations.
< Back
Symbols in the route details
▲ Current position.
Destination of the current guidance.
POI symbols (points of interest)
POIs (points of interest) are shown on the map, provided the navigation has said data.
Click on the desired POI (point of interest) to start route guidance >>> page 300.
B Petrol station.
P Car park
⑧ Tourist information offices.
Train station.
11 Restaurant.
Traffic information.
POIs (points of interest) are shown on the map, provided the navigation has said data >>> page 302.
Click on a traffic event to open an additional window with further details >>> page 302.
Slow traffic.
- 2017
Traffic jam.
Accident
A
Broken down vehicle.
Slippery surface (ice or snow).
Good closed to traffic
-
Slippery road hazard.
▲
!
Road works.
[Unreadable]
Strong wind.
Infotainment system
Reduced visibility.
Navigation data
The infotainment system is equipped with a built-in navigation data memory. Depending on the country, the necessary navigation data may already be pre-installed.
To provide correct route guidance and make the most of the functions offered, the infotainment system should be updated on a regular basis.
Using obsolete data may lead to errors during navigation. Current routes cannot be traced or the route guidances will lead to mistaken destinations.
Ensure navigation data is updated at all times.
Online updating of navigation data 31
The navigation data of the regions through which you travel frequently is automatically updated in the background if the Internet connection is established and the privacy settings are valid.
- With the ignition switched on, the navigation data is updated automatically.
Manual update of navigation data
Current navigation data for large regions, for example Western Europe, can be downloaded from www.seat.com and stored on USB data devices.
- Download the navigation data to a USB data device.
• Turn on the ignition of the vehicle.
- Connect the USB data device to the infotainment system. Navigation data is automatically updated in the background.
The map version is displayed in HOME > ☐ > System information.
Note
Automatic update of the navigation data is subject to the privacy settings. No update is made in incognito mode.
Start route guidance
Depending on the country and equipment, different functions are available to enter destinations.
The different functions for entering destinations are found in the navigation main menu.
Opening the Navigation main menu
- Press MENU > ⑧.
Select the destination and start navigation
-
Press
-
Select the desired destination. You can choose from Suggestions, Recent destinations or Favourite destinations.
OR: press Q and enter the address in the input screen.
OR: detailed address.
- Press Start.
Suggestions
The destination synopsis uses recorded data to propose possible destinations.
Select the destination and start navigation:
-
Tap ♡ and then Suggestions.
-
Select the desired destination. The route guidance starts automatically.
Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold the desired destination for a few seconds.
Recent destinations
Navigation saves the recent destinations to make them available for route guidance.
1 Not available in all markets.
Navigation
Select the destination and start navigation:
-
Tap and then R recent destinations.
-
Press the desired destination
-
Press Start
Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold
the desired destination for a TEN seconds.
Favourite destinations
Save up to 20 destinations as favourites.
To save a destination as a favourite press☆in
the spin surface of the following (the closest-aligned)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 99.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Tap ⑨ and then Favourites
-
Press the desired best-hand
-
Press Start.
Note
Enter the destination as accurately as possible. If you enter a destination incorrectly, the route guidance will not be able to start or it will guide you to an incorrect destination.
Start route guidance by selecting from the map
The navigation map includes active areas at many points that are suitable for entering the destination. To do this, press the desired position or place on the map. If there is map data at this point, you can start route guidance.
Whether it is possible to enter the destination
through the navigation map depends on the
state of the data and it is not possible for all
pension
To start "offroad navigation", press an empty
area without position data.
Start navigation:
-
Press
-
Move the view on the map until the desired
position can be selected. The navigation
map can be used by means of ac
inger movements >> page 297.
-
Press the desired destination on the map.
-
A pop-up window will appear where you
can tap on the corresponding icon:
• ☆ favourite destination
• new route.
a. Start starts the route to the destination.
Offroad navigation
"Offroad navigation" calculates routes to selected destination points using unknown data. When a destination point is outside the known roads or position data, navigation finds the route to the closest point on a known road and completes the path to the next destination point with a direct connection.
Start navigation:
- Move the view on the map until the desired
position can be selected. The navigation
map can be used by means of additional
Figure movements 297 page 297
- Press on any point on the map without po-
sition clal
- A pop-up window will appear where you
can tap on the corresponding icons
• ☆: favourite destination.
- new route
- Start: starts the route to the destination.
Start route guidance using contact details
Start route guidance with the saved address
data of a contact. Contacts saved without ad-
dress data cannot be used for route guidance.
Start navigation
-
Press
-
Press on the contact you want.
-
A pop-up window will appear where you
can tap on the corresponding icon:
• ☆: favourite destination.
• new route
• Start: starts the route to the destination
Infotainment system
Note
If the address details of a contact are obsolete, the route guidance will nevertheless take you to the registered address. Check that the contact address is updated.
Traffic information
The infotainment system receives detailed traffic information automatically 1 if the internet connection is established. This information is displayed using symbols and by highlighting the road network in colour on the map.
Traffic incidents
Traffic incidents, for example, traffic jams or congested traffic, are shown on the navigation map using symbols.
With active route guidance, traffic incidents that are on the current route are shown in the route details. Such traffic incidents can be avoided >> page 302, Function descriptions.
Traffic flow indication
The navigation map shows traffic flow according to current traffic events, highlighting the road network in colour.
- Yellow: Slow traffic.
• Red: Tr
7 Not available in all markets
Note
Traffic information receipt is subject to the privacy settings. In maximum Privacy mode, no traffic information is received. The Tracking or Location level must be set up.
Function descriptions
Route details
The route details contain information on all incidents, for example, the starting point, stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destination, provided the navigation has such data.
If you press on an incident, an additional window opens providing more options. The available options depend on the incident and the current settings.
Open and close the route details
• To open them, press or swipe it.
- To close them, press] or swipe it.
Edit route guidance
To edit the route guidance, move the stop-overs to the destination in the TripView view.
- Hold the desired destination pressed until it is visibly highlighted.
- Move the destination to the desired position.
■ Remove your finger from the screen. The
route will recalculate.
Avoid traffic incidents
The details of the route show the current traffic incidents if the navigation has such data. Avoid traffic incidents by editing route details. >>> page 302
- Press on a traffic event.
- Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.
Split screen
When handling navigation functions, an additional window with other options may open. Possible options depend on the function being used.
Close the additional screen
- Press on an empty area outside the additional window.
- OR: press X.
- OR: press Accept.
Functions in the additional window:
Show on. Show what is selected on the
map map
Navigation
Functions in the additional window:
| Add stop-over desti-nation | Add a stopover is the route guidance. |
| Direct route | Starts direct route guidance. |
| Delete Delete a stopover from the route guidance. | |
| Avoid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re-calculate. | |
| Stop route guidance | Ends the current route guid-ance. |
| × | Close the additional window. |
| ☆ | Add a destination of favourites. |
Learn usage pattern
When the vehicle is in motion, navigation saves routes and destinations used to automatically generate destination proposals. Destinations are learned based on the time of day and the day of the week.
Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at the same time. The proposed routes may be different from the routes of the normal route guidance.
If one of the proposed destinations is selected, the guide to that destination is started.
The route guidance follows the selected route until the vehicle deviates from it in that case, the route is recalculated and takes you back along the most direct path to the initially selected destination.
Important traffic jams are taken into account in the route guidance, and are avoided if alternative routes are available, provided navigation has such data.
You can activate and deactivate the function whenever you want.
Enable and disable learning usage pattern The setting is in the corresponding navigation menu. ⚙ > Basic function settings.
- To activate the function, activate learn usage pattern.
• To disable the function, disable Learn usage pattern.
- To delete saved data, press Delete usage pattern.
360° electric operating range display
Valid for vehicles with plug-in hybrid drive. The 360° electric operating range display shows the possible range with the current charge level of the high voltage battery.
- To deactivate the 360° range display, select Navigation Settings > Show range on map.
Note
- If the battery charge level is very low, the range indicator is automatically hidden. When the battery is recharged, the range indicator is displayed again.
- If necessary, adapt the map view to display the full range on the map.
Infotainment system
Telephone interface
Introduction
You can use the telephone interface to connect your mobile to the infotainment system and operate phone functions through it. The sound is played through the vehicle's speakers.
You can connect up to two mobile phone devices simultaneously to the infotainment system. High speeds, poor weather or road conditions and a noisy ambience (even outside of the vehicle), as well as the quality of reception can all affect the quality of a telephone conversation in the vehicle.
Note
- As a general rule, pairing a device (for example, a mobile phone device) is only necessary once. You can restore the device connection via Bluetooth 2 or Wi-Fi with the infotainment system whenever you want without having to pair the device again.
• The availability of certain telephony functions will depend on the features of the mobile connected to the infotainment system, such as the operating system, mobile network, or phone company.
Fig.184 Schematic representation: Phone view.
Telephone interface equipment and symbols
Equipment features
- Hands-free function.
■ Use up to two phones at the same time.
• Phone book with a maximum of 5,000 contacts.
- SMS functions via Bluetooth®: SMS reading, SMS writing (templates included), SMS play-back message history.
- Email functions via Bluetooth®: reading email, writing email.
Telephone interface
- Connection to wireless charging option.
- Connection to the microphone mounted on the vehicle.
Symbols in the main menu
Contacts.
6. List of incoming and outgoing calls
Enter telephone number.
Text messages (SMS and emails).
Telephone interface settings.
Symbols for calls
The symbols may be different depending on the infotainment system.
Start a cell or bring it to the foreground.
End or reject a call.
Open contact list or Start conference call.
Enter telephone number.
9. Mute the sound of the hands free
Hold call.
Continue call.
□ Switch call to private mode
Make an emergency call.
ap Voicemail
Reject call with SMS Template.
Ignore an incoming call.
Do Switch the call to handsfree mode.
- Go to the CarPlay context. - Remove a person from the conference call. - Go to the contacts list. - Make a breakdown call. - Make a customer care call.
Call list symbols
• To open the call lists, press
Incoming call
Outgoing cal.
Missed cal.
Telephone number (company)
Telephone number (private).
Mobile telephone number (company)
□ Mobile telephone number (private)
Fax (private).
Fax
Symbols for text messages
The symbols may be different depending on
the inforainment system.
• To open the text messages, press
Q. Activate voice control input >>> page 287.
Templates for text messages
Places with special regulations
Switch off the mobile telephone and the telephone interface in places with a risk of explosion. These places are not always clearly marked. They include, for example:
- The vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks.
• The lower decks of boats and ferries. - In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquefied gas (such as propane or butane).
- Places where the air is laden with chemicals
or particles such as flour, dust or metal pow - All other places where the engine or tele-
WARNING
Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a risk of explosion!
Note
in areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobile phones is forbidden, it must be switched off at all times. The radiation produced by the mobile phone when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment.
Infotainment system
Pairing, connecting and managing
Pairing requirements:
- Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone device.
- Bluetooth® is activated on the infotainment system.
- Depending on the mobile device, it will be necessary to have the Bluetooth® menu open or activate the Visibility option so that the device is visible from the infotainment system.
- The vehicle must be stopped or someone must be detected in the front passenger seat to perform the pairing.
Pair a mobile phone device suitable for telephony with the infotainment system to use the telephone interface functions. When making the first connection, the mobile phone device is paired with the infotainment system. Doing so saves a user profile.
The pairing can take a few minutes. The functions available depend on the mobile phone device used and its operating system.
Pair a mobile phone device
To use the phone interface with the desired mobile device, establish an active connection to the infotainment system.
- Accessing the mobile-devices menu:
Open the Mobile devices connections menu in the infotainment system. To find this menu follow either of the following two steps:
Menu > Settings > Network > Mobile Devices
Menu 🎨 > Phone > Settings > Select mobile telephone
- Start Bluetooth pairing*:
On the mobile device, open the list of available Bluetooth ® devices and select the infotainment system name to connect. Alternatively, select the mobile-device name in the list of available Bluetooth ® devices in the infotainment system's connection.
- Confirm the pairing:
Confirm the prompts on the mobile device and on the infotainment system to connect. If pairing is successful, the mobile phone data are stored in the user profile. After pairing, the phone interface is displayed automatically showing the active connection with the mobile device.
Note
For a full experience, approve the prompts on the mobile device that grant access to contacts and messaging.
Pairing multiple mobile devices
You can pair additional mobile devices with the infotainment system using the same procedure. Paired devices will be saved as "known devices", even if they do not have an active connection at the time.
The phone interface allows up to two simultaneous hands-free connections. To connect a new device, repeat the procedure above and confirm data-transfer permissions on that device.
Connecting a known mobile device
Requirement: the mobile device must have been previously paired and appear as a "known device" in both the infotainment system and the device itself.
To connect automatically:
-
Bluetooth 2 is activated on the mobile phone device.
-
The infotainment system will connect automatically if the device is within range.
Managing mobile devices. Active and passive connection
Although two mobile devices can be connected simultaneously, the phone interface displays information from only one device at a time, referred to as the active device.
Telephone interface
Difference between active and passive connection:
Active The mobile device is connected and is the primary device.
Functions such as contacts, call history, favourites, messaging and keypad are available for this device.
Outgoing calls made from the infotainment system are routed through this device.
The name of the active mobile device is displayed at all times at the top of the phone interface.
Passive The mobile device is connected and is secondary.
It can receive or handle calls, but detailed information is not shown, and calls cannot be initiated through the system while it is secondary.
Switching the active connection
If two mobile devices are connected to the infotainment system, you can switch which one is active. To do so:
-
In the phone interface, tap the drop-down with the name of the current mobile device.
-
Select the device you wish to activate. The phone interface will update to show information from the newly active mobile device. The other connected devices will automatically become passive connections.
Voice control with Android Auto™ or Apple Carplay™ technologies active
The voice control functions for phones may not be available on all mobile devices, so pressing and holding the voice control activation button Ωe on the multifunction steering wheel can be used to activate the mobile device's voice assistant.
WARNING
If you perform the pairing while driving, it could cause an accident or injury.
• Perform pairing only with the vehicle at a standstill.
Note
• While the infotainment system is in the Known mobile phones menu, the wireless charging function is disabled. When you exit this menu, the wireless charging function is activated again.
- When pairing some mobile phone devices, a PIN number is shown on the screen of the mobile phone device. Enter or accept that number in the infotainment system to complete the pairing.
Basic and Comfort Telephony
Depending on the equipment, two types of telephone interface can be used:
- Basic telephone interface.
• Comfort telephone interface.
Basic telephone interface
The Basic telephone interface uses the Bluetooth® HFP profile for transmission. This interface allows the use of telephone functions through the infotainment system and playback through the vehicle's speakers.
Comfort telephone interface
Like the Basic telephone interface, the Comfort telephone interface also uses the Bluetooth® HFP profile.
The Comfort phone interface can be equipped with the wireless charging function >>> page 309.
In order to use the functions of the wireless charging function, you have to place a suitable mobile phone device correctly in the storage compartment. The mobile phone device will then connect to the vehicle antenna. This improves the reception and sound quality of calls.
Calling and sending messages
Open the telephone interface
- Press MENU > %.
Infotainment system
Make a call
Select a phone number to start a call. Different functions are available for selecting a phone number:
Contacts
If a contact has several registered phone numbers you have to select one.
- Press and press a number on the list to start the call.
OR: press Q and enter the contact name in the input field to search for it. Press on the contact to start the call.
OR: press a favourite in the telephone interface main menu to start the call.
Calls
The telephone interface shows the call list of the mobile telephone device. Start a call from the call list.
- Press fs > All and press a number on the list to start the call.
OR: press σs and filter the call list entries (for example, missed calls or dialled numbers). In the filtered list, press a number to start the call.
Dial number
Manually enter a phone number to start a call. While entering the phone number, contacts that match that number are shown on the info-tainment screen.
- Press and enter the telephone number. Press to start the call.
The last call is dialled by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
5end messages
Depending on the mobile phone device and the infotainment system used, you can send and receive SMS and e-mails through the telephone interface.
Send an SMS
-
Press ▼ > Text message > Enter new message and enter the message on the screen.
-
Enter the contact you want in the search bar.
-
To send the message press OK.
Note
For messaging to be available, permissions to share messages must be accepted in the mobile device settings.
Send an email:
- Press 📋 E-mail ➤ Enter new message and enter the message on the screen.
- Enter the contact you want in the search bar. - To send the message press OK.
Note
The availability of the E-mail function depends on the connected mobile telephon device and the e-mail apps that are used.
Phone book, favourites and speed dial buttons
When a telephone is first connected to the infotainment system, the phone book is saved in the infotainment system. Data transmission may have to be confirmed and permissions for sharing contacts on the telephone may have to be accepted.
Each time the phone is reconnected, the phone book is updated.
If conference calls are supported, calls with up to six participants can be made by accessing the phone book during a call. If there is a saved image for a contact, it can be displayed in the list next to the entry.
Telephone interface
Favourites
A speed dial button can be assigned to a maximum of six phone book favourites. If there is a registered photo saved for the contact, it is shown on the speed dial button.
The clailing buttons have to be edited manually.
Assign the speed dial button
- In the Favourites menu, press the + button, then open the phone book to select a contact as a favourite. If the contact has several phone numbers, press on the number in the list.
Edit the speed dial button
• To edit or delete a favourite contact press the icon 🔔 in the Favourites menu screen. You can delete one or more favourites.
Call a favourite
- Press the assigned speed dial button.
Note
Favourites are not updated automatically. If you change a contact's phone number, you have to reassign the speed dial button.
Connectivity Box
Fig. 185 On the centre console: past for the mobile phone connection.
The Connectivity Box includes different functions that will help to use your mobile device. These are:
- Wireless Charger 1 . - Mobile Signal Amplifier
Wireless charger
If your mobile device is equipped with induction charging (Qi) technology, it can be charged wirelessly.
To charge your mobile phone wirelessly: - Place your mobile device in the middle of the pad with the screen facing up >>> Fig. 185, >>> △.
Make sure there are no objects between the pad and the mobile phone.
The mobile phone will start charging automatically. For further information about whether your mobile device supports Qi technology, check your phone's user manual or visit the CUPRA website.
Mobile Signal Amplifier
This reduces radiation in the vehicle and gives you better reception.
For safety reasons, it is recommended that you pair the system and the mobile using Blue tooth® and place it on the Connectivity Box pad, for the best reception without having to handle the mobile phone.
For connection to the vehicle's external antenna:
- Place your mobile device in the middle of the pad with the screen facing up >>> Fig. 185, >>> △.
Make sure there are no objects between the pad and the mobile phone.
Your mobile phone will automatically be able to use the external antenna function.
Infotainment system
WARNING
Notifications on the screen of the mobile device can distract the driver's attention and increase the risk of a serious accident.
- Only place one suitable mobile device, with Qi compatibility if applicable. To ensure that it operates properly, place it without the protective case and ensure that it has maximum dimensions (width x length) of 80 x 140 mm (3.15 x 5.512 inches) on the base of the Connectivity Box as indicated.
- If the mobile device is not placed on the base of the Connectivity Box, in the correct position, or if its dimensions exceed those specified, it may not be recognised or may not charge correctly. Under certain circumstances, the infotainment system indicates that there is a foreign object in the storage compartment. Using a suitable mobile phone device and correcting its position can eliminate the fault.
WARNING
• The mobile phone may become warm due to wireless charging. Think about this before you pick it up, and take care when removing it.
- There must be no metallic or other objects between the mobile phone and the housing, to prevent the functionality of the Connectivity Box from being affected.
NOTICE
Do not leave the key near the Wireless Charger area as this may cause interference.
① NOTICE
A active NFC function on your mobile device may prevent its wireless charging from working properly. CUPRA recommends that you deactivate the NFC function on your mobile device when charging.
NOTICE
The base of the Connectivity Box is not removable.
Note
- Your mobile device must support the Qi inductive charging interface standard for proper operation.
- Charging time and temperature vary depending on the device that is used.
- To improve the cooling of your mobile device during charging, the Connectivity Box is fitted with a ventilation channel to allow air to pass through. Keep the base area as clear as possible of objects to promote cooling.
- The maximum charging capacity is 15W.
• Qi technology does not allow simultaneous charging of more than one mobile device.
- No improvement in reception can be guaranteed if there is more than one mobile phone on the pad.
- You are advised to keep the engine running
* When a telephone with Oi technology
connected by USB, it will be charged by the means specified by the manufacturer.
Positioning the luggage and cargo
Storing objects
Positioning the luggage and cargo
General information
Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely
It is possible to carry objects and luggage in the vehicle, in a trailer >>> page 319 and on the roof >>> page 317. When doing so, please consider all legal provisions.
- Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly as possible.
• Always place luggage and heavy objects as far forwards as possible in the luggage compartment >> △
• Take into account the maximum authorised weight per axle, as well as the maximum authorised weight of the vehicle >>> page 412. - Secure the objects to the fastening rings of the luggage compartment using appropriate chains or bolts >>> page 314.
- Also place small objects safely.
• In vehicles with dynamic headlight range control, the lights adapt automatically. - Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into account the pressure sticker of the tyres
page 377.
- In vehicles equipped with a tyro pressure control system, adjust to the new load status if necessary >>> page 386.
WARNING
Loose or unsecured objects can cause serious injury in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or in case of an accident. This is particularly the case if the airbag impacts them when deploying and they are thrown across the inside of the vehicle. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury:
- Place all objects inside the vehicle safely.
- Secure all objects, small and large.
- Place the objects in the vehicle interior in such a way that they can never move into the airbag deployment areas while the vehicle is in motion.
- Keep the storage compartments closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
- Place the objects in such a way that they never force any occupant of the vehicle to sit in an incorrect position.
- When transporting objects that take up a seat, never let anyone use that seat.
- Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects loose in open storage compartment of the vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat or on the dash panel.
- Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects from the fabrics and bags in the vehicle interior and store them safely.
WARNING
Transporting heavy objects changes vehicle handling and increases braking distance. Heavy objects that are not properly placed or secured may cause loss of control of the vehicle and thus severe injuries.
- Never put too much load in the vehicle. Both the carrying capacity as well as the distribution of the load in the vehicle have effects on the driving behaviour and braking ability.
- When transporting heavy objects, the driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due to the displacement of the centre of gravity.
• Always distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly and horizontally as possible.
• Always place heavy objects in the luggage compartment in front of the rear axle and as far away from it as possible.
- Objects in the luggage compartment that are unsecured could move suddenly and modify the handling of the vehicle.
- Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
- Accelerate with particular care and caution.
- Avoid sharp braking and sudden manoeuvres.
- Brake earlier than usual.
Storing objects
① NOTICE
Electrical wires or, depending on the features, the antenna embedded into the rear windows could be damaged, even irreparably, if they are in contact with objects.
f Note
Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially available from accessory shops.
Luggage compartment
Luggage compartment shelf
Fig. 186 In the luggage compartment removing and installing the self
Fig. 187 In the luggage compartment: removing and installing the shelf.
Removing
- Detach the cord loops >>> Fig. 186 (from their hooks A).
- Remove the rear shelf from the side supports >>> Fig. 187 by pulling it upwards and then take it out.
If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored under the luggage compartment double floor >> page 313.
Fitting
- Insert the cover horizontally so that the "recess" slots over the support fittings
Fig. 187 and press down until it engages.
- Attach the securing straps >>> Fig. 186® onto the rear lid.
WARNING
Animals, lease or unsecured or objects carried on the rear shelf can cause serious injury in case of sudden maneuvering or braking or in case of an accident.
- Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy objects loose or in bags on the rear shelf.
• Never transport animals on the rear shelf.
① NOTICE
- Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted.
• An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seated and it may be bent or damaged.
- If the luggage compartment is overloaded, remove the rear shelf.
Note
Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the rear shelf, rear visibility is not reduced.
Luggage compartment
Store the rear shelf
Fig. 188 In the boot: covers for storing the rear shell.
Fig. 189 In the boot: fitting the ear shell.
Depending on the equipment, once the luggage compartment shell has been removed, it can be stored under the boot floor.
- Remove the left and right covers
Fig. 168.
- Place the rear shelf in the corresponding housing >>> Fig. 189.
- Put the left and right covers in their original position.
Variable luggage compartment floor
Variable floor in high position
Fig. 190 Variable luggage compartment floor: sign position.
- To move from the low position to the high position, lift the floor using the handle >>> Fig. 190 (1), and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports >>> Fig. 191 (2).
- Move the floor forward over the supports as far as the rear seat backrest and then lower the floor with the handle ①.
Variable floor in low position
Fig. 191 Variable luggage compartment Door low position.
- To move from the high position to the low position, lift the floor using the handle >>> Fig. 190①, and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports >>> Fig. 191②.
- Now let the front part fall to the floor and slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat backrest; lower the floor at the same time with the handle ①.
i Note CUPRA recommends returning the variable floor to the high position >> Fig. 190 when additional space is no longer required.
Storing objects
Variable floor in the tilted position
Fig. 192 Variable luggage compartment floor hiked position.
When the variable floor is tilted you can access the spare wheel or tyre mobility system area.
- Lift the variable floor to the high position using handle >> Fig. 190 (1), pull it up and push it towards the backrest of the rear seats until it folds along the hinge line and the movable part of the floor is resting on itself.
- Rest the floor on its housings 33) Fig. 192 (arrows).
WARNING
- Always secure objects, even when the luggage compartment floor is properly lifted. - Only objects that do not protrude more than 2/3 the height of the floor may be carried between the rear seat and the raised luggage compartment floor.
- Only objects that do not weigh more than approximately 7.5 kg may be carried between the rear seat and the raised luggage compartment floor.
NOTICE
• The maximum weight that can be loaded on the luggage compartment variable floor in the top position is 100 kg.
- Do not let the luggage compartment floor fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it downwards in a controlled manner. Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the luggage compartment could be damaged:
Luggage compartment equipment
Fastening rings
Fig. 193 In the luggage compartment: fastening rings.
There are fastening rings!!! Fig. 193 on the front and rear of the luggage compartment to secure loose objects and luggage with fastening belts and cords.
WARNING
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining straps are used, they could break in the event of braking or an accident. Objects could then be thrown across the vehicle interior and cause serious or fatal injuries. • Always use belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition.
- Tighten the belts and straps in a cross layout over the load placed on the luggage compartment floor and secure them to the fastening rings safely.
- Never exceed the maximum tensile load of the fastening rings when securing objects.
- Make sure that, particularly for flat objects, the upper edge of the load is higher than the fastening rings.
- Depending on the features, take into account the instruction panels on the luggage compartment on how to place the load. - Never secure a child seat to the fastening rings.
Luggage compartment equipment
Note
- The maximum tensile load that the fastening rings can support is approx. 3.5 lON.
- Appropriate bolts, straps and securing systems for the load can be purchased from specialised dealerships. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this purpose.
Net bag
Fig. 194 In the boot net bag took up at door level.
Fig. 195 In the luggage compartment: rings ① and hooks ② for attaching the net bag.
The luggage compartment prevents light luggage from moving. The net bag has a zip and can be used to store small objects.
The net bag can be hooked up to the luggage compartment in different ways.
Hooking the net bag into the luggage compartment floor
If necessary, the front eyes must be unfolded. first 31/
- Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings
Fig. 194① and ⑦>>> The bag zip should be facing upwards.
Hook the net bag next to the load threshold
- 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88. 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96. 97. 98. 99. 100
- Secure the straps in the bag hooks ②.
Removing the net bag
The hooked up net bag is taut >>> △.
- Release the net bag from the fastening rings.
- Store the net bag in the luggage compartment.
Storing objects
WARNING
To secure the elastic net bag on the fastening rings of the boot it must be stretched out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bag is hooked up or unhooked incorrectly the hooks could cause injuries.
• Always secure the bag hooks properly so that they do not suddenly release from the fastening rings when hooking or unhooking them.
- On hooking or unhooking them, protect your eyes and face in case the hooks are released suddenly.
• Always hook up the net bag hooks in the described order. Unfastening a hook suddenly can cause injuries.
Bag hooks
Fig. 196 In the luggage compartment bag hooks.
There may be hooks for hanging bags on both sides of the luggage compartment >> Fig. 196.
The bag hooks have been designed to secure light shopping bags.
WARNING
Never use the hooks to hang luggage or other objects. In case of sudden braking or an accident, the hooks could break.
Trapdoor for transporting long objects
Fig. 197 On the rear seat backrest opening the trapdoor.
Fig. 198 In the lugg age compartment opening the trapdoor
On the rear seat, behind the central armrest, there is a trapdoor for transporting long items in the interior, such as skis.
Opening the trapdoor
- Lower the centre armrest.
- Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow and fold the trapdoor cover >> Fig. 197 ① down and forwards.
- Open the rear lid.
- Insert the long objects through the gap from the luggage compartment.
- Secure the objects with the seat belt.
- Close the rear lid.
Roof carrier
Closing the trapdoor
- Lift the trapdoor cover until it engages. The red mark on the luggage compartment side should never be visible.
- Close the rear lid.
• Lift the centre armrest if necessary.
WARNING
The presence of objects in the central airbag deployment area can prevent it from operating properly and can cause serious injury.
- Do not leave any objects in the central air-bag deployment zone >>> page 58.
WARNING
- When the armrest is down, nobody should travel in the centre seat of the rear bench.
• Do not use the hatch while driving. - When lowering or raising the hatch, take particular care with your hands and do not trap or damage the seatbelt.
Note
The trapdoor can also be opened from the luggage compartment. To do so, press the release lever down, in the direction of the arrow, and the cover upwards >> Fig. 198.
Roof carrier
Introduction
The vehicle roof has been designed to optimise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross bars or conventional roof carrier systems cannot be secured to the roof water drains.
As the roof water drains are integrated in the roof to reduce air resistance, only CUPRA-approved cross bars and roof carrier systems can be used.
Cases in which cross bars and the roof carrier system should be disassembled.
- When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.
- When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-
mum height, for example, in some garages.
WARNING
- Always secure the load properly using belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition.
- Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a negative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of gravity and driving performance.
- Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
- Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
NOTICE
- Remove the cross bars and the roof carrier system before entering a car wash.
- Vehicle height is increased by the installation of cross bars or a roof carrier system and the load secured on them. For this purpose, check that your vehicle's height does not surpass the headspace limit, for example, for underpass, then entering a purpose down
Cross bars, the roof carrier system and the load secured on them should not interfere with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid. - On opening the rear lid make sure that it does not knock into the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
When cross bars and a roof carrier system are installed, the increased air resistance means that the vehicle uses more fuel.
Storing objects
Securing the crossbars and the roof carrier system
Fig. 199 Attachment points for the crossbars for the roof carrier.
The crossbars are the basis of a series of special roof carrier systems. For safety reasons, special fixtures must be used to safely transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. The appropriate accessories can be purchased at specialised CUPRA dealers or any SEAT dealership.
Always secure the crossbars and the roof carrier system properly. Always take the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carrier system in question into account.
Installing the bars
The crossbars are assembled on the roof railings. The distance between crossbars >>> Fig. 199 A should be between 70 and 90 cm and the distance between the crossbars and the brackets of the roof railings B must be 9 cm.
WARNING
Incorrect attachment and use of the crossbars and the roof carrier system may cause the whole system to detach from the roof and cause an accident and injuries.
- Always take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account.
- Check threaded joints and attachments before moving off and if necessary tighten them after you have travelled a short distance. When making long trips, check the threaded joints whenever you stop for a rest.
- Do not modify or repair the crossbars or roof carrier system.
Note
Always read the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carrier system carefully and keep them in the vehicle.
Loading the roof carrier system
The load can only be secured if the crossbars and the roof carrier system are properly installed >>> △.
Maximum authorised cargo on the roof
The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. This figure comes from the combined weight of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on the roof >> △.
Always check the weight of the roof carrier system (roof box, bicycle carrier, ski rack, etc.), of the cross bars and of the load to be transported and weigh them if necessary. Never exceed the maximum authorised roof load.
If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier with a lower weight rating, you will not be able to carry the maximum authorised roof load. In this case, do not exceed the maximum weight limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the fitting instructions.
Distributing a load
Distribute loads uniformly and secure them correctly >>> △.
Trailer mode
Check attachments
Once the cross bars and roof carrier system have been installed, check the bolted connections and attachments after a short journey and every so often afterwards (approx. every 200 km).
WARNING
- Never exceed the maximum authorised load on the roof and on the axles or the vehicle's maximum authorised weight.
- Never exceed the load capacity of the cross bars and the roof carrier system, even if the maximum authorised roof load has not been reached.
- Secure heavy items as far forward as possible and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.
WARNING
If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall from the roof carrier system or cause accidents and injuries.
• Always use belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition.
Trailer mode
Introduction
Take into account country-specific regulations about driving with a trailer and the use of a towing bracket.
The vehicle has been developed primarily for carrying people, although it can also be used to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding technical equipment. This additional load has an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption and vehicle performance and in some cases can reduce the service intervals.
Driving with a trailer requires more force from the vehicle, and thus more concentration from the driver.
In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both the vehicle and the trailer.
Maximum vertical load technically permitted on the coupling device
The maximum vertical load technically permitted from the trailer draw bar on the towing bracket's tow ball is 80 kg.
Vehicles with the Start-Stop system
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing bracket or one that is retrofitted by CUPRA, the Start-Stop system operates as normal. No special characteristics need to be taken into account.
if the system does not recognise the trailer or the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by CUPRA, the Start-Stop system must be disconnected by pressing the corresponding button in the lower part of the centre console before driving with the trailer, and it should remain off for the rest of the journey >> △.
Vehicles with drive profile selection
If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use of the Eco drive profile is not recommended. You are advised to select another of the available drive profiles before beginning to drive with a trailer.
Trailer weight/drawbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you will be able to drive up steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. Since higher altitude decreases engine performance and the ability to climb slopes, the tow load decreases proportionally.
The weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for every 1000 r of altitude. When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum authorised drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.
Storing objects
DANGER
Never use the trailer to transport people. This endangers their lives and is also prohibited.
WARNING
Improper use of the towing bracket may cause injury and accidents.
- Only use the towing bracket if it is in a perfect state of repair and is properly secured. - Never modify or repair the towing bracket in any way.
• In order to reduce the danger of injury in the event of rear-end collisions and to avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists when parking the vehicle, cover or remove the tow hook when you are not using a trailer.
- According to EU regulation 2021_535 it is not permitted to install a towing device that completely or partially covers the rear number plate.
- Never fit a towing bracket "with weight distribution" or "load compensation". The vehicle has not been designed for this type of towing bracket. The towing bracket could fail and the trailer could be released from the vehicle.
WARNING
Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects can affect driving properties and even cause an accident.
• Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition.
- Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
- Trailors with a high centre of gravity are more likely to overturn than those with a low one.
- Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. - Take great care when overtaking.
- Reduce speed immediately if you notice
- Never drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional circumstances). This also applies in countries where driving at higher speeds is permitted. Take into account the speed limit for vehicles with trailers in the corresponding country, as it could be less than the speed limit for vehicles without a trailer.
- Never attempt to "straighten" the towing vehicle and trailer by accelerating.
WARNING
If the towing bracket has been retrofitted by a non-CUPRA workshop, the Start-Stop system must be disconnected manually whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise the brake system could be damaged and could consequently cause a serious accident or injury.
• Always disconnect the Start-Stop system manually when using a towing bracket that has not been fitted by a CUPRA workshop.
Note
- Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always deactivate the anti-theft alarm >>> page 108. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off.
- Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's first 1000 km >>> page 167.
- CUPRA recommends that, if possible, the tow hook be removed or covered when it is not going to be used. In the event of a rear-end collision, the damage to the vehicle could be greater if the tow hook is fitted.
- Some retrofitted towing brackets cover the rear towing eye. In these cases, the towing eye should not be used for tow-starting or for towing other vehicles. For this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofitted with a towing bracket, always keep the tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.
Trailer mode
Technical requirements
Vehicles that are factory equipped with a towing bracket meet all the technical and legal requirements for driving with a trailer.
If the vehicle is retrofitted with a tow bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for the maximum authorised load of the trailer that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and the trailer and must be properly secured to the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing bracket that has been authorised by CUPRA for this vehicle. Always check and take into account the towing bracket manufacturer's instructions.
Towing bracket fitted on the bumper
Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to the area where the bumper is mounted. The towing bracket should not impair the bumper's function. Do not make modifications or repairs to the exhaust system or the brake system. Make regular checks to ensure that the towing bracket is secure.
Engine cooling system
Driving with a trailer increases the load on the engine and cooling system. The cooling system should have sufficient coolant and be prepared for the additional effort involved in driving with a trailer.
Trailer brakes
If the trailer has its own brake system, please take the relevant legal requirements into account. Never connect the trailer's brake system to the vehicle's brake system.
Tow cable
Always fit a cable between the vehicle and the trailer >>> page 322.
Trailer tail lights
The trailer's tail lights should comply with the statutory safety regulations >>> page 322.
Never connect the trailer's tail lights directly to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not sure that the trailer's electrical connection is correct, have it checked by a specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this purpose.
Exterior mirrors
If you cannot see the area behind the trailer with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle, additional mirrors will have to be installed in accordance with the regulations of the country in question. The exterior mirrors should be adjusted before you start driving and must provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.
WARNING
If the towing bracket is fitted incorrectly or is not the right one, the trailer could become detached from the vehicle and cause serious injury.
NOTICE
- If the tail lights of the trailer are not correctly connected, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged.
- If the trailer absorbs excessive electric current, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged.
- Never connect the trailer's electric system directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sources. Only use the connections intended for providing electric current to the trailer.
Storing objects
Hitching and connecting a trailer
Fig. 200 Diagram assignment of the pins of the trailer's electrical socket.
Pin Meaning
| 1. Let turn signel |
| 2. Rear fog light |
| 3. Earth for pine 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 |
| 4. Right turn signa |
| 5. Rear light, right |
| 6. Shake lights |
| 7. Rear light, left |
| 8. Reverse lights |
| 9. Permanent live |
| 10. Live charge cable |
| 11. Earth for pin 10 |
| 12. Unassigned |
Pin Meaning
13 Earth for pin 9
Power socket for trailer
The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket for the connection between the trailer and the vehicle. With the engine running, electrical devices on the trailer receive power from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin 10 of the trailer power socket).
If the system detects that a trailer has been connected, the consumers on the trailer will receive electricity through this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for example, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in a caravan only receive electrical power if the engine is running through pin 101.
To avoid overloading the electrical system, you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3, pin 11 or pin 13.
If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you will need to use an adapter cable. In this case the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be available.
Tow cable
The tow rope must always be securely fixed to the towing vehicle and loose enough so that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. However, make sure that the cable does not rub on the ground while driving.
Trailer tail lights
Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure they are working correctly and that they comply with the relevant safety regulations. If you connect the trailer to the factory-mounted system, when you turn on the rear fog lamp, the fog lamp of the towing vehicle will turn off to turn on the trailer fog lamp.
Include in the anti-theft alarm
The trailer is included in the anti-theft system if the following conditions are met:
- If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an anti-theft alarm.
- If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow bracket.
- If the trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle through the trailer power socket.
- If the electrical systems of the vehicle and trailer are in perfect condition and have no faults or damage.
- If the vehicle is locked with the key and the anti-theft alarm is activated.
Trailer mode
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is triggered if the electrical connection with the trailer is cut off.
Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the till sensor could cause the alarm to go off.
Trailers with LED tail lights
For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED rear lights cannot be connected to the anti-theft alarm system.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does not go off when the electrical connection with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with light-emitting diodes.
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, it may lead to an excessive amount of current supplied to the trailer, which can cause abnormalities in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as accidents and serious injuries.
- Ensure that any repairs that need to be carried out on the electrical system are carried out by a specialised workshop.
- Never connect the trailer's electric system directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sources.
WARNING
Contact between the pins of the trailer power socket can cause short circuits, overloading of the electrical system or failure of the lighting system, and consequently can cause accidents and serious injuries.
- Never connect the pins of the trailer power socket to each other.
- Make sure any work on bent pins is carried out by a specialised workshop.
① NOTICE
Do not leave the trailer connected to the vehicle when parked; place it on its support wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or falls due, for example, to a variation of the load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will be placed on the towing bracket and the trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
Note
- In case of anomalies in the electrical systems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in the anti-theft alarm system, have them inspected by a specialised workshop.
- If the trailer accessories consume energy through the power socket to the trailer and the engine is turned off, the battery will discharge.
- If the vehicle battery is running low, the electrical connection with the trailer will be automatically cut.
Trailer loading
Technically permissible maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling device
The technically permissible maximum trailer weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow >> △. The vertical load on the coupling is exerted vertically from above on the ball of the towing bracket.
The information on the maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling device contained in the type plate of the towing bracket are experimental values only. The correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures, are given in the vehicle documentation. The information in the vehicle documentation takes precedence at all times.
To promote safety while driving, CUPRA recommends making the most of the maximum technically permitted vertical load on the coupling device >> page 319. An insufficient vertical load has a negative influence on the behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.
The vertical load increases the weight on the rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying capacity.
Storing objects
Gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
The gross combination weight is the actual weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual weight of the loaded trailer.
In some countries trailers are classified into different categories. CUPRA recommends obtaining information from a specialised workshop regarding which type of trailer is most suitable for your vehicle.
Trailer loading
The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer must be balanced. In order to do this, the load must be as close as possible to the maximum technically permitted vertical load on the coupling point, and it must be evenly distributed between the back and front of the trailer:
- Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible or above it.
- Secure the trailer load property
Tyre pressure
Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the towing vehicle to the maximum allowable pressure >>> page 377.
WARNING
If the maximum permissible axle weight, the maximum load technically permissible on the coupling point, the maximum authorised vehicle weight or the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer are exceeded, accidents and serious injuries may occur.
• Never exceed the indicated values.
* The actual weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maximum permissible axle weight. The weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maximum permissible weight.
WARNING
A shift in weight could jeopardize the stability and safety of the towing vehicle and trailer, which could lead to accidents and serious injuries.
- Always load the trailer correctly. - Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition.
Driving with a trailer
The front part of the vehicle may be raised when the trailer is connected and the light may dazzle the rest of the traffic.
Specific features of driving with a trailer
- If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake gently at first and then rapidly. This will prevent the jarking that can be caused by the locking of trailer wheels.
- Due to the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the braking distance increases.
- Use engine braking when descending hills. Otherwise, the brake system could overheat and even fail.
- Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: In Tipotropic mode, select a lower gear.
- Vehicles with a manual gearbox: Shift down
- The trailer weight, as well as the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, change the centre of gravity and the properties of the vehicle.
- If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer is loaded, then the load distribution is incorrect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and with extra caution.
Hill starts with a trailer
Depending on the slope of the hill and the combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the vehicle might start rolling backwards slightly when you first start up.
For hill starts with a trailer hitched:
Trailer mode
• Press and hold the brake pedal.
- Press the button to disconnect the electronic parking brake >> page 234.
- Manual gearbox: Depress the clutch pedal fully and engage 1st gear.
Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to the D/S position.
- Pull out the 📄 button and hold it in that position to stop the towing vehicle and trailer with the electronic parking brake.
- Release the brake pedal.
- Move off slowly.
Manual transmission: release the clutch pedal slowly.
- Do not release the 📄 button until the engine has sufficient power to start driving.
WARNING
If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may lead to loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury.
- Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects will change the vehicle handling and braking distances.
• Always drive cautiously and carefully. Brake earlier than usual.
- Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Slow down, especially when driving down hills or slopes.
- Accelerate with particular care and caution. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
Take great care when overtaking. Reduce speed immediately if you notice that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. - Never attempt to "straighten" the towing vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
• Take into account the speed limit for vehicles with a trailer, as it could be lower than for vehicles without a trailer.
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer combination
The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combination is an additional function of the electronic stability control (ESC).
If the system detects that the trailer is weaving, it intervenes to reduce the swaying of the trailer.
Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisation requirements
- The vehicle is factory-equipped with a towing bracket or has been retrofitted with a compatible towing bracket.
- The ESC and TCS are active. The control lamp or is not it up on the instrument cluster
- The trailer is connected to the towing vehicle through the trailer power socket.
- The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h (approx. 37 mph).
- The maximum technically permitted vertical load is not being exceeded on the coupling device.
• The trailer has a rigid draw bar. - If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped with a mechanical overrun brake.
WARNING
The enhanced safety provided by the electric stability control of the vehicle and trailer should not lead you to take any risks that could compromise your safety.
- Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
- Accelerate with caution when the road is slippery.
- When adjusting any settings, stop acceler-
WARNING
The electric stability control for the vehicle and trailer may not correctly detect all driving conditions.
- When the ESC is switched off, the stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer is also switched off.
Storing objects
- The stability system does not always detect light trailers, so it may not stabilise these correctly.
- When driving on surfaces with poor grip, the trailer can even interfere with the stability system.
- Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over even before they start weaving.
- If a trailer is not attached, but a connector is plugged into the power socket (e.g. installation of a bicycle rack with lights), repeated automatic braking may occur in extreme driving conditions.
Electrically unlocking trailer hook
Fig. 201 Left side of the luggage compartment: button to unlock the low hitch.
The hook of the towing device is located in the bumper and cannot be removed 1 .
There should be no person, animal or object in the path of the tow hook >>> △
Unlocking the tow hook and removing it
- Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic parking brake >>> page 234.
- Switch off the engine.
- Open the rear Id.
- Pull the >>> Fig. 201 button briefly. The tow hook unlocks electrically and automatically turns outwards. The button's control lamp flashes.
- Finish removing the tow hook by hand until you feel and hear that it has engaged and the control lamp on the button stays on.
- Close the rear lid.
■ Hitching and connecting a trailerpage 322.
Retracting the tow hook
- Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic
parking brake - Switch off the engine.
-
Unhook the trailer and disconnect the electrical connection between it and the vehicle. If you are using an adapter, remove it from the trailer's power socket.
-
Open the rear lid.
- Pull the >> Fig. 201 button briefly. The tow hook unlocks electrically.
- Turn the tow hook under the bumper with your hand until you feel and hear that it engages and the control lamp on the button remains on continuously.
- Close the rear lid.
The button's control lamp
→ Flashing
This means that the tow hook has not yet engaged correctly or is damaged >>> ▲.
→ Remains on:
If it remains on while the rear lid is open, the tow hook is correctly in place both when expected and when covered.
Proximity, 2-minute after closing the year-end.
WARNING
Improper use of the towing bracket may cause injury and accidents.
- Only use the tow hook if it is properly engaged.
• Always ensure that no person, animal or object is to be found in the path of the tow hook.
1 Not available in all markets.
Trailer mode
* Never use a tool or instrument while the tow hook is moving.
- Never press the button >>> Fig. 201 when there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or when a carrier system or other accessories are mounted on the tow hook.
- If the tow hook is not attached properly, do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised workshop and have the towing bracket checked.
- If you detect any fault in the electrical system or in the towing bracket, contact a specialised workshop and ask them to check it.
- If the ball has a diameter of less than 49 mm at any one point, do not use the towing bracket under any circumstances.
① NOTICE
If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure or steam devices, do not point the jet directly towards the retractable tow hook or the trailer power socket, as this may damage the joints or remove the grease necessary for lubrication.
Note
At extremely low temperatures, the tow hook may be impossible to operate. In this case, place the vehicle in a warmer location (for example, a garage).
Installing a rear carrier system or a bicycle rack on the trailer hitch
Fig. 202 Recommended weight distribution on the rear carrier system.
Examples of rear carrier systems are bicycle racks or multi-purpose boxes that are installed on the trailer hitch.
Only use rear carrier systems that have been specified by the respective manufacturer for the vehicle model, model year and version of the vehicle in question 222.
CUPRA recommends the use of genuine CUPRA spare parts and accessories, which can be purchased from the brand's dealers. Install the rear carrier system according to the manufacturer's installation instructions.
The load capacity is the result of the weight of the rear carrier system and the weight of the load carried on it.
The recommended maximum load capacity of the rear carrier system installed on the trailer hitch may be different from the maximum vertical load on the specific vehicle coupling.
However, it is not permitted to exceed the maximum permitted vertical load on the tow hitch (which depends on the model).
The load capacity is reduced due to the lever effect that occurs the further the carrier system is from the ball head.
Place heavy objects as close as possible to the trailer hitch >> Fig. 202.
Maximum load capacity depending on the vehicle
To find out the recommended load capacity for your vehicle, check the maximum vertical load on its coupling >>> page 412. Please refer to the following table for the load capacity.
In accordance with the UN-R-55 guideline,
COPRA recommends not carrying more bicycles than recommended on the rear rack system.
| Maximum vertical load on the vehicle's specific coupling | Maximum load capacity | Number of bicycles |
| 50 kg 50 kg 2 | ||
| 50 kg 35 kg 2 | ||
| From /5 kg /5 kg 3 |
Storing objects
Maximum load overhang of the rear carrier system
Fig. 203 Schematic representation of the maximum load overhang of a bicycle rack for two or three bicycles.
④ With up to 55 kg load capacity. 500 mm (approx. 19.7 m)
⑧ With 75 kg load capacity: 700 mm (approx. 27.6 in)
The maximum overhang shall not exceed 500 mm from the centre of the ballhead to the centre of the rail of the last support >>> Fig. 203 A for two-bicycle racks. In the case of three-bicycle racks, the overhang must not exceed 700 mm >>> Fig. 203 B.
WARNING
The incorrect use of a rear carrier system installed on the tow hook can cause accidents and injury.
• Make sure that the carrier system is suitable for your vehicle.
- Read and observe the installation instructions of the rear carrier system manufacturer.
- Never attach a rear carrier system below the ball head of the trailer hitch. The system could slip due to the shape of the hitch.
Note
Before setting off, CUPRA recommends removing, to the extent possible, all accessories from the load attached to the carrier system. Examples of these accessories are baskets and panniers, child seats or batteries. This improves the aerodynamics and centre of gravity of the rear carrier system.
Retrofitting a towing bracket
Fig. 204 Toing device dimensions and attachment points.
Fig. 205 T owing device dimensions and attachment points.
Trailer mode
Distance measurements (measurements can vary depending on the different chassis combinations):
Ⓐ Mounting points on the vehicle
⑧ 65 nm (minimum)
© 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
D 1043 mm
E 414mm
634 mm
G 959 mm
CUPRA recommends that towing brackets be retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For example, it may be necessary to adjust the cooling system or mount thermal protection plates CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this purpose.
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance specifications should always be kept in mind.
The distance between the centre of the ball head and the road >> Fig. 204 © must never be less than that indicated. This also applies when the vehicle is fully loaded, including the technically permissible maximum vertical load on the coupling device.
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, this may lead to malfunctions in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as to accidents and serious injuries.
- Never connect the trailer's electric system to the electrical connections of the tall lights or any other unsuitable power sources. Only use suitable connectors to connect the
trailer.
- The towing bracket should be retrofitted only at a specialised workshop.
WARNING
If the towing bracket is badly fitted or unsuitable, the trailer may separate from the vehicle while driving. This could cause serious accidents and fatal injuries.
Note
- According to regulation EU2021, S35 it is not permitted to install a towing device that cannot be removed or retracted.
- Only use towing brackets that have been approved by CUPRA for the model in question.
- In some versions, the fitting of a conventional towing hook solution is not recommended. Please consult your Technical Service.
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning
Refuelling
Safety warnings regarding fuel handling
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and can cause serious burns and other injuries.
- Before refuelling, disconnect the auxiliary heater >>> page 158. >>> page 158.
- When refuelling, turn off the engine and turn off the ignition for safety reasons.
- The fuel system of PHEV models is pressurized to prevent petrol vapours from escaping into the atmosphere.
- Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
- Observe legislation governing the use, storage and carrying of a spare fuel canister in the vehicle.
CAUTION
For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. In an accident the canister could be damaged and could leak. If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the following points: ■ Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canister if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.
- Insert the filling nozzle as far as possible into the spare fuel canister.
- If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up.
- Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is explosive. Risk of fatal accident!
NOTICE
- If any fuel is split onto the vehicle, it should be removed immediately. It could otherwise damage the paintwork.
- Never run the tank completely dry. The catalytic converter can be damaged.
- When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel engine, the ignition must be switched on for
at least 30 seconds before starting the engine. When you then start the engine it may take longer than normal (up to one minute) to start firing.
For the sake of the environment
Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Note
There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If necessary, request assistance from specialised personnel.
Note
Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective device that prevents the insertion of the wrong fuel hose 1 . It is only possible to refuel with Diesel nozzles.
* If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if it is very small, it is possible that it will not be able to open the protective device. Before trying to insert the pump nozzle by turning it, try a different pump or request specialist help.
* If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel canister, the protective device will not open. One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in very slowly.
Refuelling
Refuelling
Fig. 206 Fuel tank flap with tank has attached.
The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the vehicle.
- The tank flap is unlocked when the car is unlocked using the central locking remote control >> page 104.
Hybrid vehicles: Use the [] button on the driver's door to release the tank flap >> page 331
- Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the retainer zone.
- Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left
- Place it in the space on the hinge of the open flap >> Fig. 206.
- Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as the pump's automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion chamber in the fuel tank.
- Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as far as it will go.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at >>> page 332.
The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is given in >>> page 412.
Hybrid vehicles
Every 6 months it is necessary to run on petrol until the control lamp switches off and then the tank must be refilled. This is necessary to ensure that the system works properly, as well as the fuel quality required for driving with petrol.
Purging the fuel tank
√ valid for: hybrid vehicles.
Fig. 207 Driver's door: tank flap release.
Before refueling the fuel system must be depressurized >> in Safety warnings regarding fuel handling on page 330. To do this, press the button on the driver's door.
An audible sound will be played and a warning will be displayed on the instrument cluster display.
After a few seconds the fuel tank flap will unlock and remain unlocked for a few minutes. If you have not refueled after this time, you must press the B button again before refueling. Avoid touching the fuel tank flap lock button
Fig. 206 (arrow). The system will interpret that you have finished and cannot continue refueling. Press the B button on the driver's door again to continue.
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning
Fuel types
Identification of fuels
![graph TD A["① E5"] --> B["② E10"] B --> C["③ E20"] C --> D["⑥ CNG"] D --> E["⑤ XTL"] E --> F["④ B7"]](/content/2026/07/1441719/images/2b905ed253d663c8b2c22ec68f84c754ff5c5ac9f1064591b0aa956dfc429328.jpg)
Fig. 208 Identification of Fuels according to European Union (EU) Directive 2014/947
Fuels are identified by different symbols on the pump and on your vehicle's tank flap (country dependent). This identification avoids confusion when selecting the fuel
① Means petrol with a maximum of 5% Ethanol.
② Means petrol with a maximum of 10% Ethanol.
③ Means petrol with a maximum of 20% Ethanol.
A Diesel according to ENS90 standard. The number indicates the maximum percentage of Biodiesel in the fuel. *B7* means a maximum of 7% Biodiesel.
⑤ Synthetic diesel according to the EN15940 standard.
Natural gas: "CNG" means Compressed Natural Gas
Type of petrol
The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the fuel tank flap.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter and must only be run on unleaded petrol. The petrol must comply with the standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in. The types of petrol are differentiated by using the octane numbers (RON) or via the anti-knock index (AKI).
Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or normal 91 octane petrol at least
We recommend refuelling with super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power loss) may be used.
Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at least
You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI)
at least.
if super petrol is not available, if necessary, use normal 91 octane petrol (87 A0). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possible.
Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or super 95 octane petrol at least
We recommend refueling with super plus 98 octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power loss). If super petrol is not available, if necessary, use normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possible.
NOTICE
- Fuels with a high percentage of ethanol e.g. E30 - E100 button must not be used. The fuel system would be damaged.
- A single refuelling with loaded fuel or other metal additives entails a permanent deterioration of the effectiveness of the catalytic converter.
- Only petrol additives that have been approved by SEAT S.A. should be used. Products containing substances to increase the octane rating or decrease knocking may contain metal additives that damage the engine and catalytic converter. These type of products must not be used.
AdBlue®
- Do not use fuels shown in the pump as containing metals. LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of metal additives. Risk of engine damage! - High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
Note
- Fuel with an octane rating higher than the one required by the engine can be used. - In countries in which there is no sulphur-free fuel, fuel with a low sulphur content may also be used.
Diesel
√ Valid for vehicles with diesel engines Please note the information on the inside of the fuel tank flap.
Diesel can thicken at very low temperatures, thus affecting the start or operation of the engine. Ask your service station attendant if their diesel is suitable for winter use.
Water in the fuel filter 11
If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is equipped with a fuel filter with a water separator, the instrument cluster may display the following warning:
Water in the fuel filter.
If this is the case, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop so that they can drain the fuel
① NOTICE
- Never use of PAME (biodiesel that does not meet the ENS90 standard), petrol, heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents as they can cause severely damage the fuel system and the engine.
- If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not start the engine under any circumstances. Risk of damaging the fuel system and the engine Seek professional assistance.
AdBlue®
Information about AdBlue®
AdBlue® consumption depends on your personal driving style, the temperature of the system and the outdoor temperature when the vehicle is used.
AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11 °C (+13°F). The system has heating elements that guarantee its operation even at low temperatures.
When the range is less than 2,000 or 2,400 km (1,200 or 1,500 miles), depending on the version, a message appears on the instrument cluster display requesting AdBlue refueling ® .
If this message is ignored, the yellow indicator light will come on once the range is less than 1,000 km (600 miles). The indication that in XXX km (XXX miles) it will no longer be possible to restart the engine will appear on the instrument cluster display.
If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, when a remaining range of 0 km (0 miles) is displayed, it will no longer be possible to restart the engine. The red warning light will come on
AdBlue® is a registered trademark of the German Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA) and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid).
NOTICE
Overfilling with AdBlue ® can cause damage to the tank system.
Depending on the country.
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning
Fill AdBlue®
Fig. 209 AdBlue Bank cap®.
Operations prior to refilling
Park the vehicle on a flat surface and turn off the ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on a kerb, the level indicator may not detect the refill properly.
If an AdBlue* warning message is shown on the instrument cluster display, fill with at least the minimum required amount (approx. 5 litres). Only after adding this amount will the system detect that AdBlue* has been added and you will be able to start the engine again.
Fill with a refill bottle
Only use AdBlue* that complies with the ISO 22241-1 standard.
• Only use original containers.
- Open the tank flap >> Fig. 209.
- Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an anti-clockwise direction.
- Please observe the manufacturer's instructions, indicated on the refill bottle.
- Check the expiry date.
- Remove the cap of the refill bottle.
- Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler neck vertically and screw the bottle on by hand, but turning it in a dark line direction.
- Press the refill bottle in the direction of the letter neck and hold it in this position.
- Wait until the contents of the refill bottle have been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Do not compress or break the bottle!
- Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise direction and gently pull it upwards >>> page 334.
- The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liquid comes out of the bottle.
- Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direction until it is tightly closed.
- Close the fuel tank flap.
Refilling AdBlue® at the dispenser
Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic reduction.
- Open the tank cap
-
Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise >>> Fig. 209.
-
Fill with AdBlue? until the nozzle stops for the first time.
- Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise until you hear a click.
Operations before driving
- After refilling the tank, only switch on the ignition.
- Leave the ignition on for at least 30 seconds for the system to detect the fluid load.
- Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds before starting the engine!
WARNING
AdBlue 2 should only be stored in its original container, which should be tightly closed and kept in a safe place.
NOTICE
- When refilling, the nozzle grip should be aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle will not connect automatically.
- Do not try to add any more additive after the nozzle has stopped for the first time. The AdBlue 1 tank could overflow and AdBlue 4 could spill out.
- Only use AdBlue that complies with the ISO 22241-1 standard. Only use original containers.
Engine management and emissions control system
- Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or additives. Any type of damage caused by such a
mixture will not be covered by the warranty.
- Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank! This
could result in engine damage.
- Do not carry the refill bottle inside the
vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempora-
ture changes or damage to the bottle), the
AdBlue ® may damage the vehicle's interior
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ-
ment-friendly manner.
Note
Suitable AdBlue® refill bottles can be pur-
chased at specialised CUPRA dealers or any
SEAT dealership.
Troubleshooting
AdBlue® level too low
The indicator lamp lights up red. The engine
cannot be restarted!
Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area
then top up with the minimum required quan-
tity of AdBlue ® >> page 334.
together with Fault in the AdBlue
system®
The control lamps light up red. The engine
cannot be restarted!
Go to a specialised workshop and get the sys-
tem checked
The AdBlue ® reserve is low
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
Top up AdBlue ® within the number of kilome-
tres (or miles) that are indicated >> page 334.
∴ m = 3/11
together with : Fault in the
AdBlue® system
The control lamps light up yellow. There is a
fault in the AdBlue® system or non-conforming
AdBlue® fluid has been added. Go to a special-
ised workshop and get the system checked.
Engine management and emissions control system
Introduction
WARNING
Due to the high temperatures reached by the
exhaust gas scrubbing system, you should
not park your vehicle near a surface that can
catch fire easily. Fire hazardl
WARNING
Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
hazard!
Catalytic converter
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic
converter
- Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en-
gines.
- Never run the fuel tank dry.
- When changing or adding engine oil, do not
exceed the necessary amount >> page 363,
Checking and topping up the engine oil
level.
- Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump
leads if necessary >>> page 341.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss
of power when the car is moving, have the
vehicle inspected by a specialised workshop.
In general, the emissions warning lamp will light waves come out of these owned paper papers.
If this happiness, any unhurst fuel can occur.
the exhaust system and escape into the at-
mosphere. The catalytic converter can also be
damaged by overheating
Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning
NOTICE
Never run the fuel tank completely dry because an irregular fuel supply can cause ignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the gases on occasions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel used. This can quite often be avoided by changing to another brand of fuel.
Particulate filter
Valid for: vehicles with petrol or diesel particulate filters
The particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor- mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short journeys are made continuously), it becomes blocked with spot and the following indication is displayed to the driver:
Particulate filter: cleaned while the vehicle is moving. See Manual.
The particulate filter needs cleaning (regeneration).
Diesel particulate-filter regeneration
Requirements for the regeneration journey: the engine must be at operating temperature.
- Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h (31-75 mph). This increases the temperature and burns the seat in the filter >>> page 336.
- Consider the legal speed limits as well as the recommended gears.
- End the regeneration journey once the control warning lamp has gone out.
If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes of running in regeneration mode, have a specialised workshop repair the fault.
Petrol particulate-filter regeneration
Requirements for the regeneration journey: the engine must be at operating temperature.
- Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h
page 336.
- Completely remove your foot from the accelerator pedal for a few seconds to let the vehicle roll with the gear engaged.
- Consider the legal speed limits as well as the recommended gears.
- Repeat this procedure (accelerate and let roll) until the control lamp turns off.
This procedure involves an autonomous particulate filter cleaning process and may take some time.
If the warning lamp does not turn off, go immediately to a specialised workshop to repair the fault.
WARNING
Always adjust your speed to suit the weather conditions, roads, braking distance and traffic if the particulate filter is in its regeneration phase. Route recommendations should never make you disregard each country's specific traffic regulations.
Note
If during the particulate filter regeneration process you also get a fuel reserve warning, the process may be interrupted. Refuel and continue with the particulate filter regeneration process.
NOTICE
- When the exhaust system detects that the particulate filter is close to saturation, the self-cleaning function of this system recommends optimal driving for this function.
- Due to the high temperatures caused by the regeneration of the particulate filter, it is possible that the radiator fan will activate after stopping the engine, even if its operating temperature has not been reached.
- Noise, smells and high idle speeds can occur during regeneration.
Engine management and emissions control system
• Always use the correct engine oil and the correct fuel to make sure the useful life of the particulate filter is not affected. Also avoid making short trips all the time.
When the ignition is switched on, the clamp
lights up and should go off once the engine
has started.
avoid making short trips all the time.
Diesel engine preheating system
Troubleshooting
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
The engine can be started straight away when
the lamp switches off.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
00 Fault in the diesel engine management
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked.
The control lamp flashes yellow.
Have the engine checked as soon as possible
by a specialised workshop.
Combustion failures that can damage
NOTICE
the catalytic converter.
The control lamp flashes yellow.
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked.
While the control lamps are on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel consumption may go up and the engine might lose power.
Particulate filter blocked
The indicator lamp lights up yellow
page 336.
Petrol engine management fault
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a specialised workshop.
Miscellaneous situations
Miscellaneous situations
Vehicle tool kit
On-board toolkit
Fig. 210 Uncerne ath the floor panel of the luggage compartment on board tools
The vehicle toolkit is located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment. To access the on-board tools >> page 313.
The tool kit includes:
① Adapter for the anti-theft bolt
② Towing eye, removable
③ Wheelwrench
④ Crank handle for jack
⑤ Jack
e Hook for extracting the central wheel trims
⑦ Clip for removing the wheel nut caps
Some of the items listed are only provided in
certain model versions, or are optional extras
WARNING
When the vehicle toolkit, tyre mobility set and space wheel are loose in the interior they can be violently thrown in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and especially in accidents, causing serious injury.
- Ensure that the vehicle toolkit, the tyre mobility set and the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel are safely secured in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can cause injury or accidents.
- Never work with inappropriate or damaged tools.
Note
The jack does not generally require any maintenance. If required, it should be greased using universal type grease.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Wiper service position
Fig. 211 Wixcr's service position
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen. With the wipers in their service position, it is possible to the fold the wiper arms >> Fig. 211
- Close the bonnet >>> page 352.
- Switch the ignition on and off.
- Briefly press the wiper lever downwards.
Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. Use the wiper lever to return the wiper arms to their initial position.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
① NOTICE
- The wiper arms can be moved into the replacement position when the front bonnet is fully closed.
- You can also use the service position, for example, if you want to fix a cover over the windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of ice.
Changing the wiper rear wiper blades
Fig. 212 Changing the windscreen wiper blades
The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of the water as it is wiped across the windscreen will be louder.
Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, they should be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty >>
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the windscreen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a specialised workshop and corrected if necessary.
Damaged windscreen wiper blades should be replaced immediately. These are available from qualified workshops.
Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms
- Place the windscreen wipers in the service position >> page 338.
- Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's attachment point.
Cleaning the windscreen wiper blades
- Raise the wiper arms.
- Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades.
- If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or damp cloth may be used >>> ①.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
- Lift and unfold the wiper arms.
■ Press and hold release button >>> Fig. 212
① and pull gently on the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow.
■ Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into place.
- Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.
Changing the rear window wiper blade
- Separate the wiper arm from the rear window.
- Remove the blade from the holder below the centre. During this operation, hold the wiper arm firmly.
- Fit the new blade (of the same length and type) into the housing of the wiper arm by pressing it in place. When doing so, hold the wiper arm by the upper end.
- Fold the wiper arm and rest it on the window.
WARNING
Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of accident and serious injury.
• Always replace damaged or worn wind-screen wiper blades or blades that no longer clean the windscreen properly.
Miscellaneous situations
NOTICE
- Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass.
- If products containing solvents, rough sponges or sharp objects are used to clean the blades, the graphite layer will be damaged.
- Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the windows.
- In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before using the wipers. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wipers in their service position >> page 338.
NOTICE
• To prevent damage to the bonnet and the wiper arms, only leave them in the service position.
Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.
Jump start
Introduction
Due to technical reasons, tow starting the vehicle is not allowed.
If the engine fails to start because of a discharged 12-volt battery, the battery can be connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
Jump leads complying with the DIN 72553 standard are needed for starting (see cable manufacturer's instructions). The lead cross section must be at least 25mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35mm2 for diesel engines. Ensure the cable has fully insulated clamps and that the insulation is free of defects.
CAUTION
To avoid considerable damage to the vehicle electrical system, take careful note of the following:
- If the jump leads are connected incorrectly, a short circuit may occur.
- Use only jump leads with fully insulated clamps.
- Do not allow the vehicles to come into contact with each other, otherwise current may start to flow as soon as the positive poles are connected.
NOTICE
The hybrid-vehicle system is not designed to provide a jump start to another vehicle. This may damage the vehicle's electrical system.
In vehicles with the 12 volt battery inside the passenger compartment or luggage compartment, jump loads must always be connected to the connection points in the engine bay.
Jump lead connection point
Connection points provided in the engine compartment for jump starting:
Jump start connection point, positive (only for PHEV hybrids)
Fig. 213 In the engine compartment under the Use box cover: positive connection point.
Jump start
Jump start connection point, positive (only for VZ5 vehicles)
Fig. 214 In the engine compartment, right hand side, next to the water box-positive connection point.
The jump start connection point (positive terminal) is used for connecting the red jump lead.
Jump start connection point, negative
Fig. 215 In the engine compartment, right-hand side, next to the water box, negative connection point.
The jump start connection point (ground) is used to connect the black jump cable.
Jump start: description
Fig. 216 Jump e ad connection diagram.
A Positive terminal of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
For vehicles with the battery in the luggage compartment, use the connection point provided in the engine bay.
⑧ Positive terminal of the vehicle supplying the current.
© Suitable earth point of the vehicle providing the jump start.
D Earth point of the vehicle receiving the jump start.
The discharged battery must be properly connected to the on-board network.
Make sure that the clamps have sufficient metal contact when connecting them to the poles.
Miscellaneous situations
Gloves and eye protection are recommended before starting work on the 12-volt battery.
If the discharged 12-volt battery is equipped with a sight glass ™ )>>> page 367, Check the electrolyte level.
Jump lead terminal connections
The jump leads should only be connected in the order 1 > 2 > 3 > 4) Fig. 216.
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles
))) △
2. Connect one end of the r- ed jump lead to the positive terminal or connection point + of the vehicle with the discharged bat- tery A
3. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal + in the vehicle providing the jump start Ⓑ.
4. Connect one end of the black jump lead to a suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine block itself.
5. Connect the other end of the black jump lead to a suitable ground terminal, a solid metal component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a point near the battery.
6. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any rotating part in the engine compartment.
Starting
- Start the engine of the vehicle supplying the current and leave it running at idle.
- Start the engine of the vehicle with a discharged battery and wait 2 to 3 minutes until the engine runs.
Disconnecting the jump leads
- Before disconnecting the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlight if it
15 - Turn on the heating fan and the vehicle's heated rear window when the battery is discharged to reduce the voltage peaks that occur while disconnecting the battery.
- While the engines are still running, disconnect the cables in the reverse order in which they were connected.
If the engine does not start after 10 seconds, wait for approximately 1 minute and then try again.
WARNING
- Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment
page 352.
• The battery supplying the current must have the same voltage (12 V) and a similar capacity to the discharged battery. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
- Keep any sources of ignition (flames, cigarettes, etc.) far enough away from the batteries. They may cause an explosion.
- Observe the usage instructions of the jump lead manufacturer.
- On the other vehicle, do not connect the negative cable directly to the negative terminal of the discharged battery. Any sparks could ignite the igniter gas coming out of the battery and could cause an explosion.
- The negative wire must never be connected to fuel system components or brake lines on the other vehicle.
- Do not touch uninsulated parts of the pole clamps. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
- Jump leads must be placed in such a way that they cannot be caught by rotating parts in the engine compartment.
- Do not rest your body on the batteries, as this could cause burns.
• Take into account the instruction manual of the jump load manufacturer and the instruction manual of the other vehicle.
• Before starting work on the 12 volt battery, discharge any static electricity to avoid sparks that could ignite battery gases.
Towing the vehicle
CAUTION
Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even once thawed, electrolyte leaks can cause burns. Replace the battery if it is frozen.
NOTICE
Immediately go to a specialist workshop and have the 12 volt battery checked.
Towing the vehicle
Introduction
It takes practice to tow a vehicle, especially when using a tow cable. Both drivers should be well informed of the special features of towing. Inexperienced drivers should refrain from towing.
During towing, make sure at all times that no inadmissible pulling forces or jolts are caused. On roads without a firm surface there is always the danger of overloading the attachment parts.
Take into account the legal provisions regarding tow starting and towing.
Tow start
Tow starting means starting a vehicle's engine while another puts it in motion by pulling it.
The vehicle can be tow started with a tow bar or cable.
Towing
Towing means a vehicle pulling another vehicle that is not in a condition to drive.
The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or cable.
- The speed limit is 50 km/h (30 mph).
• The maximum permitted distance is 50 km (30 miles).
Tow cable and tow bar
It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. The tow cable should only be used if a tow bar is not available.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly plastic material.
Towing with a tow truck
If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with automatic transmission are only allowed to be towed with the front wheels suspended.
Fig. 217 Transport with a low truck vehicles with an automatic gearbox and iron, wheel drive.
Fig. 218 Transport with a low truck vehicles with automatic transmission and 4 Drive.
Miscellaneous situations
Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive (4Drive)
Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope. It is not permitted to suspend the front or rear axle while towing. This could damage the transmission.
Deactivate roll-away protection (vehicles with automatic transmission) >> page 234
If necessary, to release the parking brake so that the vehicle can be pushed or towed:
- Keep the brake pedal pressed down and select the N position on the gear selector. Next, confirm Deactivate roll-away protection in the infotainment System.
- OR: open the vehicle settings in the infotainment system □ > Vehicle > Brakes > Deactifyate the "Roll-away protection function".
WARNING
When towing a vehicle, the driving behaviour and braking capacity change considerably.
WARNING
Never allow the vehicle to be towed if it has no power.
- When towing, never remove the key from the ignition or disconnect the ignition with the ignition and start button. Otherwise, the electronic lock of the steering column could suddenly get blocked and it would be impossible to steer the vehicle. This could cause an accident, serious injury and loss of control of the vehicle.
- If the vehicle runs out of power during towing, stop the process immediately and seek the assistance of specialised personnel.
NOTICE
Towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar can cause damage to the vehicle.
- If the vehicle is towed with a tow cable or tow bar, special care must be taken.
- If possible, have the vehicle transported on a tow truck.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is pushed by hand, the tail light units, the side spoilers of the rear window and large sheet metal surfaces may be damaged. In addition, the rear spoiler could be detached.
- If the vehicle is pushed by hand, the tall light units, the side spoilers of the rear window, large sheet metal surfaces or the rear spoiler.
NOTICE
Removing and attaching the cover and the towing eye may cause damage to the vehicle, for example, on the paintwork.
• To avoid damaging the vehicle, remove and replace the cover and the towing eye carefully.
NOTICE
Using a towing eye that is not suitable for the vehicle can damage it.
- When towing, always use the vehicle's towing eye, which forms part of the on-board tools, or an appropriate eye for towing.
Towing the vehicle
Instructions for tow-starting and towing
During towing, the change of direction can be signalled on the towed vehicle even when the hazard warning lights are on. To do so, at the same time, the turn signal lever must be operated with ignition switched on. During this time the hazard warning lights remain disconnected. When the turn signal lever is returned to the neutral position, the hazard warning lights will be automatically reactivated.
Cases where tow starting and towing the vehicle are not permitted
Do not allow the vehicle to be towed in the following situations:
- The vehicle's gearbox is damaged or has no lubricant.
- The 12-volt battery is discharged. In vehicles with the "Keyless Access" locking and ignition system the steering remains locked and the parking brake cannot be deactivated and the steering column lock cannot be released if they are connected.
- If a distance above 50 km needs to be travelled.
- There is no guarantee that the wheels will turn smoothly or that the steering will work after an accident.
If the vehicle cannot be towed on its wheels for any of the reasons mentioned above, request assistance from specialised personnel and, if necessary, have the vehicle transported without the wheels touching the ground.
Tow start
Steps to be taken prior to tow starting Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Due to technical reasons, tow starting the vehicle is not allowed. Attempt to start the engine using the starting aid >> page 340.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox: In general, it is not recommended to tow start the vehicle. If the engine does not start, try the starting aid first >>> page 340. Please note that, in the case of petrol engines, the maximum permitted distance for tow starting is 50 m.
- Secure the tow cable or tow bar using only the attachment points provided for this purpose.
- Switch on the ignition and the hazard warning lights.
- Engage 2nd or 3rd gear while the vehicle is stopped.
- Press the clutch and hold it down.
- When both vehicles are in motion, release the clutch pedal.
- As soon as the engine starts, depress the clutch and disengage the gear to avoid colliding with the towing vehicle.
NOTICE
When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Towing
Preliminary steps
- Secure the tow cable or tow bar using only the attachment points provided for this purpose >>> △. Depending on the equipment, these points may be a towing device or a towing eye.
• Make sure the tow cable is not twisted. Otherwise the towing eye could unscrew during towing. - Switch on the ignition and the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. If necessary, take into account other different provisions that may exist in this regard.
• Take into account the instructions on towing provided in the instruction manual of the other vehicle.
Towing vehicle (lead)
- Do not actually start driving until the cable is tight.
- Accelerate with particular care.
- Avoid sharp braking and sudden manoeuvres.
Miscellaneous situations
Vehicles with a manual gearbox:
- When starting to drive, use the clutch very gently.
Towed vehicle (following)
• Make sure the ignition is switched on so that the steering wheel does not lock and so that, if necessary, you can use the turn signals and the windscreen wiper.
• The brake serve and power steering only work when the engine is running. Otherwise, you will have to depress the brake pedal considerably harder and more force will be needed to turn the steering wheel.
- Release the electronic parking brake
page 234. Using the electronic parking brake.
- Make sure the tow cable is always taut. - Disengage the gear or place the gear selector in the N position.
WARNING
Never attach the tow rope or tow bar to axle or running gear components. They could be damaged, resulting in an accident and serious injury.
- Seek specialist assistance and, if applicable, have the vehicle transported on a tow truck.
NOTICE
The vehicle can only be towed if the state of charge of the 12-volt battery is sufficient to disengage the electronic parking brake and the steering column lock. If the vehicle has no power supply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be jump-started to release the electronic parking brake and deactivate the electronic lock of the steering column.
Front towing eye
Fig. 219 Front banner on right remove the lid
Fig. 220 Right side of the front bumper, towing eye screws in.
The housing of the removable towing eye is on the right side of the front bumper underneath. a cover >>> Fig. 219.
The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle.
Bear in mind the instructions for towing >>> page 345.
Fitting the towing eye
- Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment. >>> page 338.
- Remove the cover by pressing down on its base and leave it hanging from the vehicle >> Fig. 219.
Towing the vehicle
- Screw the towing eye into the housing by turning it anticlockwise >>> Fig. 220.
③ as far as it will go. Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. - After towing, unscrew the towing eye clockwise with a suitable object.
- Replace the cover and push it in until it clicks into place.
- Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.
NOTICE
The towing eye must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could jump out of the housing during towing.
Rear towing eye
Fig. 221 7 bar bumper on right remove the lid.
Fig. 222 Right side of the rear bumper bowing eye screwed in.
The housing of the screw towing eye is on the right side of the rear bumper behind a lid >>> Fig. 221.
Vehicles fitted as standard with a towing bracket do not have any housing for the screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case, the tow hitch needs to be extracted or installed and used for towing >>> page 319, >>> ①. Dear in mind the instructions for towing >>> page 345.
Assemble the rear towing eye (cars without a factory-equipped towing bracket)
- Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment >>> page 338. - Press the upper side of the lid >>> Fig. 221 to unclip it.
- Remove the lid and let it hang from the vehicle.
- Screw the towing eye into the housing by turning it anticlockwise >>> Fig. 222, >>> © as far as it will go. Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing.
- After towing, unscrew the towing eye clockwise with a suitable object.
- Replace the cover and press until the tab snaps into the bumper.
- Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.
Miscellaneous situations
NOTICE
- The towing eye must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow-starting.
- If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a towing bracket, it is only permitted to tow with a tow bar if this has been specially designed to be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuitable tow bar is used, both the tow hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. Instead, a tow rope should be used.
Fuses
Introduction
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Likewise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses. Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death!
- Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
- Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or fitting jumps on a live circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury.
- Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.
- Never replace a fuse with a metal strip, staple or similar.
NOTICE
• To prevent damage to the vehicle's electrical system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all electrical components.
- Protect the fuse boxes when open to prevent the entry of dust or humidity as they can damage the electrical system.
Note
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be replaced by a specialist workshop.
Fuses inside the vehicle
Fig. 223 On the dash panel on the driver side: fuse box cover
Opening and closing the fuse box located below the dash panel
- Open fold the cover down >> Fig. 223.
- Close push back the cover it in until it clicks into place.
Fuses
Identifying fuses below the dash panel by colours
| Colour | Current intensity in amps |
| Light brown 5 | |
| Brown 7.5 | |
| Red 10 | |
| Blue 15 | |
| Yellow 20 | |
| White or transparent | 25 |
| Green 30 | |
| Orange 40 |
Red 50
NOTICE
- Always carefully remove the fuse box covers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle. - Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical system.
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 224 In the engine compartment is of the fuse box.
To open the engine compartment fuse box
- Raise the bonnet >>> △ on page 352
- Press the locking tabs to unlock the fuse box cover>>> Fig. 224.
- Then lift the cover out.
- To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the locking tabs down until they click audibly into place.
Replace a blown fuse
Preparations
- Switch off the ignition, lights and all electrical equipment.
- Open the corresponding fuse box >>> page 348. >>> page 349.
Recognise a blown fuse
A blown fuse can be recognised if the metal strip is melted >> Fig. 225.
- Point a torch at the fuse to see if it has blown.
Miscellaneous situations
To replace a fuse
| • Remove the fuse. |
| • Replace the blown fuse with one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and markings) and identical size. |
| • Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid. |
Fuse placement
Fuses in the vehicle interior
| No. | consumers/Amps |
| 3 | Traloc 25 |
| 4 | SCR, Aublue® 30 |
| 5 | Aromatic gearbox lever 25 |
| 6 | Inflation rig 30 |
| 8 | Sunroof 20 |
| 7 | Hotdog seats 30 |
| 9 | Left door 40 |
| 1 | Trailer 15 |
| 12 | Tigh lights 40 |
| 13 | Central locking 40 |
| 14 | External Ethernet Amplifier |
| 16 | Airbag |
| 18 | Kbszy |
| 19 | Instrument cluster |
| No. | Consumers/Amps | |
| 20 | Connectivity Box | 7.5 |
| 21 | Rear camera, IPA | 7.5 |
| 22 | Radar , front camera and multifunction from camera | 7.5 |
| 24 | 4x4 Holder Control Unit | 1b |
| 25 | Front seat belts RGS+RGS left | 25 |
| 26 | Right cover | 30 |
| 27 | Rear seat belts RGS+RGS right | 25 |
| 28 | P-IEV, Switching off the high voltage system for rescue paths identified by a yellow label | 2b |
| 29 | Inletter | 1b |
| 30 | Stable | 30 |
| 31 | Trailer 25 | |
| 34 | 320V socket 30 | |
| 35 | Left lights | 40 |
| 36 | Air conditioner fan | 40 |
| 37 | Electric rear lid | 30 |
| 39 | Heated steering wheel | 10 |
| 40 | Aramhorn | 7.5 |
| 41 | Goftaway | 7.5 |
No. Consumers/Amps
| 42 Automatic gearbox lever | 7.5 | |
| 43 | Air conditioning and heating control panel, rear window heating, AA compressor | 10 |
| 44 | Diagnosis, handblake switch, light switch, reverse light, in-tenor lighting, in up door all | 45 |
| 45 | Shooting column | 7.5 |
| 46 | Radio display | 7.5 |
| 47 | Driving mode | 10 |
| 48 | USB | 7.5 |
| 52 | 12V socket | 20 |
| 58 | Parking sensors, park distance control unit, front camera, motor | 45 |
| 59 | Reverse switch, clima sensor, pectrochromic motor | 7.5 |
| 60 | Diagnosis | 7.5 |
| 61 | Sarler motor, clutch sensor | 7.5 |
| 65 | Rear window wiper | 15 |
| 67 | Healed rear window | 30 |
In-line fuse/Amps
| Electric driver's seat | 15 |
| Electric passenger seat | 15 |
Changing bulbs
Fuse arrangement in engine compartment
| No. | Consumers/Amps | |
| 2 Engine control unit 7.5 | ||
| 3 | Pure pump control unit 10/20 | |
| Version V20 Ignition coils 30 | ||
| 4 Left headlight 1x50 | ||
| 5 Right headlight 5x30 | ||
| 7 Automatic gearbox pumps 30 | ||
| 9 Left 15 | ||
| 10 Front windscreen washer 30 | ||
| 11 PHeV Climate 7.5 | ||
| 12 | Automatic gearbox control unit | 13/30 |
| Version V20 Automatic gearbox control unit | 15 | |
| 13 ESP control unit 75 | ||
| 14 | PHEV | 7.5 |
| 15 | ESP control unit | 40 |
| 16 | PHeV Automatic gearbox unit | 50 |
| 1/10 | C | 60 |
| 19 | PKC | 80 |
| 20 | Pure electronic diffronoidal | 15 |
| 21 | Engine control unit 7.5 | |
| No. | Consumers/Amps | |
| 22 | Starter motor | 30 |
| 23 | Engine control unit (cle- se/petrol) | 10 |
| 24 | engine sensors | 75/10/ 10 |
| Version V25 Engine relay, electric fan | 7.5 | |
| 25 | Engine sensors | 10 |
| Version V25 Engine sensors | 15 | |
| 26 | Engine power supply | 7.5/10/ 10 |
| Version V25 Engine power supply | 7.0 | |
| 27 | lambda probe | 10 |
| Version V25 Lambda probe | 15 | |
| 28 | Engine | 10/20 |
| 29 | Fuel pump control unit | 15/20/ 30 |
| 30 | Pressure pump 1.0 | 10 |
| 31 | Version V25 Inletion valve for cylinders 1-4 | 10 |
| 33 | PVC | 40 |
Note
- In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be changed by a specialised workshop. - Positions not containing a fuse do not appear in the tables. - Some of the equipment listed in the tables pertain only to certain versions of the model or arc optional extras. - Please note that the above lists, while correct at the time of printing, are subject to change.
Changing bulbs
Change a bulb
LED technology lights
Full-LED headlights handle all light functions (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam and full beam) with light emitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source.
The outdoor lighting system's LED lighting does not require a maintenance service. If any component fails, go to an authorised service to have it replaced.
The fog lights, tail lights, number plate light. side turn signals and additional brake light are all LED bulbs. With this in mind, they should be replaced by a technical service.
Checking and refilling levels
Checking and refilling levels
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compartment
The engine compartment of the vehicle is a dangerous area. You should only perform works in the engine compartment if you have good knowledge of the necessary operations and the general safety measures, and if you have adequate tools, means and operating fluids. Works performed inadequately could lead to serious injuries >> △. In this case, get a specialised workshop to perform all the works. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this purpose.
Before performing any work in the engine compartment, always park the vehicle on level and firm ground, taking all necessary safety precautions.
WARNING
Any accidental movement of the vehicle during maintenance work could cause serious injuries.
* Never perform works underneath the vehicle without having first immobilised it to prevent it from moving. When working under the vehicle with the wheels on the ground, the vehicle must be on a level surface and the wheels must be locked.
- If work must be performed underneath the vehicle, take the extra precaution of supporting it safely using a suitable support assembly. The jack is not suitable for this purpose and may not provide support, which could lead to serious injuries.
- The Start-Stop system must be switched off manually.
WARNING
The engine compartment of any vehicle is a dangerous area in which serious injuries can be caused!
- When performing any type of work, always ensure you are extremely cautious, and bear in mind the general safety measures. Never put yourself at risk.
- Never perform works in the engine compartment if you do not have solid knowledge of the necessary operations. If you are unsure of what needs to be done, seek a speci-
alised workshop to perform the works. Works performed inadequately could lead to serious injuries.
* Never open or close the bonnet if you see steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Steam or hot coolant can cause severe burns. Always wait until you stop hearing or seeing the steam or coolant discharging from the engine compartment.
- Before opening the bonnet, always wait for the engine to cool down.
- Touching hot engine or exhaust system components could result in skin burns.
- Turn off the ignition and keep the vehicle key in a safe place at a safe distance from the vehicle to prevent the ignition from being turned on and the combustion engine started by mistake.
• Always keep children away from the engine compartment and never leave them unsupervised.
- When the engine is hot, its cooling system is pressurised. Do not open the expansion tank cap. Hot coolant may splash out and cause severe burns and other injuries.
- Turn the coolant expansion tank cap slowly and very carefully anticlockwise while pressing it down slightly.
- Always protect your face, hands and arms from the hot coolant and steam with a large thick cloth.
Engine compartment
- When refilling operating fluids, ensure they do not spill onto the components of the engine or onto the exhaust system. These liquids could cause a fire.
WARNING
The electrical system is under high voltage and can cause electrical shocks, burns, serious injuries and even death!
- Never short circuit the electrical system. The 12-volt battery could explode.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock and serious injury, never touch the electrical wires of the ignition system while the engine is running or when starting.
WARNING
There are rotating parts in the engine compartment which could cause serious injury.
- Never insert your hand into the radiator fan or around that area. All the rotor blades can cause serious injuries. The fan activates depending on the temperature and can switch on automatically, even if the ignition is off.
- If any work has to be done during engine start-up or when it is running, take into account that the rotating parts (e.g. the poly-V belt, alternator and the radiator fan) and the high-voltage ignition system pose a fatal hazard. Always act with extreme care.
- Ensure that no part of your body, or any jewellery or tie, loose clothing, loose long hair can become trapped in the rotating parts. Before performing works in the engine compartment, remove any jewellery or tie you may be wearing, tie up your hair if it is long and gather any loose clothing.
- Do not press the accelerator pedal while not paying attention. Always do so with extreme care. The vehicle could start moving even when the electronic parking brake is engaged.
Do not leave objects in the engine compartment, e.g. rags or tools.
WARNING
The operating fluids and some materials of the engine compartment are highly flammable and could cause a fire and serious injuries!
- Never smoke in the vicinity of the engine compartment.
- Never perform works close to unprotected flames or sparks.
- When you must perform works on the onboard 12 volt electrical system, bear in mind the following:
- Always disconnect the 12 volt battery. Ensure the vehicle is unlocked when disconnecting the 12-volt battery, otherwise the anti-theft alarm will trigger.
- Never perform works in the vicinity of heating elements, water boilers or unprotected flames.
• Always have a fire extinguisher close-by. Make sure it is operational and has been in-
NOTICE
When refilling or changing the operating fluids, ensure you pour the correct fluids into their corresponding filler caps. Using the wrong operating fluids can lead to serious malfunctions and engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Operating fluids that overflow from the vehicle contaminate the environment. Therefore, check underneath the vehicle on a regular basis. If there are marks on the ground left by operating fluids, consult a specialised workshop and request the vehicle be checked. If any operating fluid leaks out, dispose of it in the correct manner.
Checking and refilling levels
Preparing the vehicle for work in the engine compartment
Before performing works in the engine compartment, always perform the following operations in the order indicated >> △
1. Place the vehicle on level and firm ground, taking all necessary safety precautions.
2. Press the brake pedal and hold it down until the ignition is switched off.
3. Apply the electronic parking brake.
4. Manual transmission: place the gear lever in neutral.
Automatic transmission: press the parking lock button P.
5. Switch the ignition off >>> page 169.
6. Remove the vehicle key from the vehicle and store it outside to avoid inadvertently starting the engine.
7. Wait for the engine to cool down sufficiently.
8. Always keep other people away from the engine compartment.
9. Immobilize the vehicle so that it cannot move.
WARNING
For your own safety, do not ignore this important check list, otherwise accidents and serious injuries could be caused.
* Always follow the indications on the check list and always bear in mind the general safety measures.
Opening and closing the bonnet
Fig. 226 A release lever in the driver's footwet areas.
Fig. 227 Lever under the bonnet
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle. Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen.
- Open the door and pull the lever that is underneath the dash panel >>> Fig. 226①.
- To lift the bonnet, press towards the left on the lever located under the bonnet, in the centre >>> Fig. 227②. The fastening hooks are unlocked.
- The bonnet can be opened. Release the bonnet prop and secure it in the fixture designed for this in the bonnet.
Cooling system
Closing the bonnet
- Slightly lift the bonnet.
- Release the bonnet prop and replace it in its support.
- At a height of approximately 20 cm let it fall so it locks.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it again and let it fall as mentioned above.
WARNING
Make sure that the bonnet is properly closed. If it opens when driving, it can cause an accident.
NOTICE
In certain weather conditions, ice or snow may build up between the bonnet and windscreen; do not force the bonnet open until you are sure that there is no ice or snow, especially in the hinge area.
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the windscreen wiper arms, only open it when the windscreen wipers are in place against the windscreen.
Fluids and consumables
Introduction
All fluids and consumables, such as engine coolant or vehicle batteries, are subject to continuous development. For this reason, whenever a fluid or consumable needs to be replaced, please contact a specialist workshop.
WARNING
If unsuitable fluids and consumables are used or used improperly, accidents, injuries, burns and severe poisoning can occur.
- Only store operating fluids in their original containers, tightly closed.
- Never store operating fluids in empty food cans, bottles or other empty containers, as they could be ingested by somebody.
- Keep all fluids and consumables out of much of children.
■ Always read and observe the information and warnings given on containers of operating fluids.
- When using products that emit harmful vapours, always work outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.
NOTICE
Use only appropriate operating fluids. Never confuse operating fluids. This could result in serious malfunctions and engine damage!
For the sake of the environment
Leakages of operating fluids can contaminate the environment. If any operating fluid leaks, collect it in an appropriate container and dispose of it properly and in an environmentally friendly manner.
Cooling system
Introduction
Only carry out work on the engine cooling system yourself if you are familiar with the necessary operations and the generally applicable safety measures, and if you have the appropriate tools, equipment and operating fluids. Works performed inadequately could lead to serious injuries. In this case, get a specialised workshop to perform all the works. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this purpose.
Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
Engine coolant is toxic! Contact with coolant, especially ingestion, can cause serious or fatal injury.
• If you swallow coolant, seek medical assistance immediately.
- If your health is affected after working with coolant, seek medical assistance immediately.
- Only store coolant in its original container, tightly closed and in a safe place.
- Never store motor coolant in empty food cans, bottles or other empty containers, as it could be ingested by another person.
• Always keep motor coolant out of reach of children.
- Avoid frequent contact with coolant to prevent skin damage.
- Protect your skin, face and especially your eyes when working with coolant.
- Do not eat, drink or smoke when working with coolant.
- Wash your skin with soap and water after working with coolant.
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any operating fluid leaks out, collect it and dispose of it properly and in an environmentally friendly manner.
Coolant specifications
The factory fitted engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of specially treated water and at least 40% coolant additive G12evo (TL-VW 774 LI).
Get information from a specialist workshop about which coolant is suitable for your vehicle. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this purpose.
To protect the engine cooling system, the additive percentage should always be at least 40%. If more antifreeze protection is required for climatic reasons, the additive proportion can be increased. However, it should only be increased up to a maximum of 55%, otherwise the antifreeze protection would be reduced and the cooling effect would be impaired.
The G12eva (TL-VW 774 L) can be recognised by its lilac colouring. This mixture of water and additive not only provides antifreeze protection down to -25°C (-13°F), but also protects the light alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion, prevents limescale build-up and considerably raises the boiling point of the coolant.
When topping up the coolant, a mixture of distilled water and at least 40% of the appropriate coolant additive should be used for optimum corrosion protection >> page 357.
WARNING
If the vehicle's cooling system does not have sufficient antifreeze protection, the engine could fail and this could result in serious injury.
- Ensure that the coolant fluid additive percentage is correct, taking into account the lowest ambient temperature expected in the location where the vehicle is to be used.
- When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehicle could be immobilised. In this case, the heating would not work either and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold.
NOTICE
Never mix G12evo coolant (TL-VW 774 L) with engine coolants not approved by CUPRA.
- If the fluid in the expansion tank does not have a pink colour (resulting from mixing the lilac additive with distilled water), but is, for example, brown, the suitable coolant may have been mixed with another unsuitable one. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is the case! Otherwise serious malfunctions or damage to the engine and the cooling system could occur!
Cooling system
For the sake of the environment
Motor coolant and its additives can pollute the environment. If any operating fluid leaks out, collect it and dispose of it properly and in an environmentally friendly manner.
Coolant tank
√ Valid for hybrid vehicles.
Fig. 228 Engine compartment: C polan tanks
Hybrid vehicles have 2 independent coolant expansion tanks.
Fig. 228
① Coolant expansion tank for the combustion engine >> Fig. 229.
② Coolant expansion tank for the high voltage system >> Fig. 230.
Check and refill the coolant
Engine cooling fluid
Fig. 229 in the front compartment: coolant expansion tank.
Preliminary steps
- Park the vehicle on a firm, flat surface.
- Wait until the engine has fully cooled >>> △.
- Open the front bonnet >> page 352
- The engine coolant expansion tank can be recognised by the symbol on the cap. Fig. 229.
Check the level
When the vehicle is delivered (new vehicles), the coolant may be above the marked area. This is normal. It is not necessary to suck the coolant out.
-
When the engine is cold, check the coolant level using the side marking on the expansion tank >> Fig. 229. The coolant level should be between the marks.
-
If the level is below the minimum level mark (min) on the tank, top up with coolant. When the engine is warm, the coolant level may be slightly above the upper mark.
-
Do not add coolant if there is no more coolant visible in the coolant expansion tank >> ○.
The coolant level cannot be checked accurately on all models as the visibility of the fluid level in the coolant expansion tank may be obstructed, if the coolant level cannot be read accurately, contact a qualified workshop.
When the motor coolant level is too low, the coolant warning light comes on. In this case, immediately seek assistance from specialist personnel.
Checking and refilling levels
Topping up the fluid
If the coolant level is too low and there is no workshop nearby, note the following:
- Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant or steam by placing a suitable cloth over the cap of the motor coolant expansion tank.
- Carefully unscrew the cap.
- Only top up with fresh coolant according to specifications >> page 356. Only top up with coolant if there is still some coolant left in the expansion tank; otherwise the engine could be damaged if you do not see any coolant in the expansion tank; do not continue driving a seek specialist assistance.
- If there is still some coolant left in the expansion tank, top up with coolant up to the tank's upper mark and check the level the next day. If the level drops again, go to a workshop and request a check of the cooling system.
The coolant level must be between the marks on the expansion tank >>> Fig. 229. Never exceed the top edge of the marked area.
- Screw the cap on tightly.
If engine coolant with the recommended specifications is not available in an emergency, do not use any other coolant additive! In this case, top up with distilled wateronly. Next, on-
sure that the recommended additive is topped up as soon as possible in the correct proportion >> page 356.
High voltage system coolant (valid for hybrid vehicles)
Fig. 230 In the front compartment: coolant
expansion tank
Preliminary steps
- Park the vehicle on a firm, flat surface.
- Wait for the high voltage system to cool down
△.
- Open the front bonnet >>> page 352
- The high voltage system's coolant expansion tank can be recognised by the symbol on the cap. >> Fig. 230.
Check the level
When the vehicle is delivered (new vehicles), the coolant may be above the marked area. This is normal. It is not necessary to suck the coolant out.
- Check the coolant level on the side marks of the expansion tank when the coolant is cold >> Fig. 230. The coolant level should be between the marks.
- If the level is below the minimum level mark (min) on the tank, top up with coolant. When the coolant is hot, the coolant level may be slightly above the upper mark.
- Do not add coolant if no coolant at all is visible in the high voltage system >>> ① coolant expansion tank.
The coolant level cannot be checked accurately on all models as the visibility of the fluid level in the coolant expansion tank may be obstructed. If the coolant level cannot be read accurately, contact a qualified workshop.
Topping up the fluid
If the coolant level is too low and there is no workshop nearby, note the following:
1. Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot liquid coolant or steam by placing a suitable cloth over the coolant expansion tank cap.
2. Carefully unscrew the cap >> △
Cooling system
-
Add only fresh coolant according to the manufacturer's specification up to the upper level mark. After adding the coolant, the coolant level must be between the marks on the high voltage system coolant expansion tank >> Fig. 230.
-
Close the cap tightly.
-
The next day, check the high voltage system coolant level. If the level in the coolant expansion tank has fallen below the mark min, have the cooling system checked by a specialist workshop.
If in an emergency you do not have access to coolant with the required specifications, only add distilled water in the first instance. Afterwards, take the vehicle to a specialist workshop as soon as possible to have the correct coolant additive mixture restored.
WARNING
Steam and hot engine coolant can cause severe burns.
- Never open the front bonnet if you see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the front compartment. Always wait until you can no longer see or hear steam or coolant escaping. Touching hot parts can result in skin burns.
WARNING
Before opening the front bonnet, please note the following:
• Apply the electronic parking brake.
• Always keep children away from the front compartment and never leave them unattended.
WARNING
When the engine is hot, its cooling system is pressurised. Do not open the expansion tank cap. Hot coolant may splash out and cause severe burns and other injuries.
- Turn the cap slowly and very carefully anti-clockwise while pressing it down slightly.
■ Always protect your face, hands and arms from the hot coolant and steam with a large thick cloth.
NOTICE
Only use distilled water! Other types of water contain chemical substances that could cause significant corrosion damage. If you have added non-distilled water, have all of the engine cooling system fluid changed immediately by a specialist workshop.
- When heated, the coolant expands. If coolant is filled above the marked area, excess liquid may overflow and damage the vehicle.
- When adding coolant, do not fill above the upper edge of the marked area >>> Fig. 229, >>> Fig. 230. Otherwise, when the temperature rises the excess fluid will be expelled from the engine cooling system and could cause damage.
- If the system leaks a lot of coolant, only refill once the motor has cooled down completely. If there is a significant loss of coolant, there may be leaks in the cooling system. Immediately go to a specialist workshop to have the system checked. This could result in engine damage.
- Do not add coolant if the expansion tank is completely empty! Air may have got into the cooling system. Do not continue driving and seek assistance from specialist personnel. This could result in engine damage.
- When changing the operating fluids, make sure that you pour the correct fluids into the correct filler necks. Using the wrong operating fluids can lead to serious malfunctions and engine damage.
Checking and refilling levels
Brake fluid
Check and refill the brake fluid
Fig. 231 From compartment; brake fluid reservoir cap.
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid level must be between the MM and MMRkings.
However, if the brake fluid level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
MN mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning light on the instrument cluster display monitors the brake fluid level.
Brake fluid level
The control lamp lights up red. Brake fluid level is too low.
Stop driving!
- Check the brake fluid level.
- If the brake fluid level is too low, seek specialist assistance.
Changing brake fluid
We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by a Technical Service.
ARNING
If the brake fluid level is low or unsuitable/old brake fluid is used, the brake system may fail or braking power may be reduced.
- Check the brake system and the brake fluid level regularly!
* When the brake fluid is used and brakes are subjected to extreme braking forces, bubbles of vapour form in the brake system. These bubbles can significantly reduce braking power, notably increasing braking distance, and could result in the total failure of the brake system.
- Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the VW 501.14 standard.
• You can buy VW 50114 standard brake fluid at a specialised CUPRA service or at a SEAT Official Service. If none is available, use only high-quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS A standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
- The replacement brake fluid must be new. - Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
NOTICE
Brake fluid should not come into contact with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.
Note
Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. Collect any spilt service fluids get a professional to dispose of them.
Windscreen washer reservoir
Windscreen washer reservoir
Checking the level of the wind-screen washer reservoir and refilling it
Fig. 232 In the front compartment: blue cap of the windscreen washer reservoir.
Check the water level in the windscreen washer reservoir regularly and top up as required.
The windscreen washer reservoir contains liquid detergent for the windscreen and rear window.
There is a sieve in the filler neck of the washer fluid tank. When filling the tank, this sieve retains large dirt particles so that they do not reach the nozzles. Do not remove the sieve except for cleaning. If the sieve is damaged or
not fitted, these dirt particles could enter the system during filling and clog the windscreen washer nozzles.
- Raise the bonnet >>> △ on page 352.
- The windscreen washer reservoir is marked with the symbol ☺ on the cap.
- Check if there is enough fluid in the tank.
Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-screen and headlights. We recommend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.
The capacity of the windscreen washer reservoir is approximately 3 litres.
NOTICE
If the water from the windscreen washer does not contain enough antifreeze, it may freeze on the windscreen and rear window, reducing forward and rear visibility.
• In winter, ensure the windscreen washer contains enough antifreeze.
- In cold conditions, you should not use the windscreen wiper system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the ventilation system. The antifreeze could freeze on the windscreen and reduce visibility.
NOTICE
Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other similar additives with the windscreen washer water. A greasy layer may be formed on the windscreen which will impair visibility.
- Use clean water with a window cleaner recommended by CUPRA.
- If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to the water in the reservoir.
NOTICE
- Do not mix cleaning products recommended by CUPRA with other products. This could lead to flocculation and may block the windscreen washer jets.
- When topping up service fluids, make absolutely certain that you fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions.
- Lack of window washer fluid causes the view through the windscreen to be obscured.
Checking and refilling levels
Engine oil
General notes
Fig. 233 In the engine compartment: engine or label
Fig. 234 In the engine compartment area where the engine oil label is located
Key to >> Fig. 233:
A Information about the engine oil standard. B Information about engine oil viscosity.
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year round.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essential for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use only those oils that comply with VW standards.
For vehicles with an engine oil label
If the engine oil has to be topped up, use one of the oils shown on the label >>> Fig. 233. The label with the prescribed standard is located at the front of the engine compartment >>> Fig. 234 ①. If you use the recommended engine oil, you can top up the oil as often as necessary.
For vehicles without an engine oil label
Go to a specialised workshop, a specialised CUPRA dealer or SEAT Official Service to get information on the corresponding standard.
If the engine oil level is too low
If the recommended engine oil is not available, in the event of an emergency you can change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 l of the next oil until the next oil change:
Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00, ACEA C3, ACEA C4, APISN or IL-5AC GE-6A.
- Diesel engines: standard VW 50700, ACEA C3, ACEA C4 or API CK-4
CUPRA recommends changing the oil at a specialised workshop. CUPRA recommends a specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Serv
① NOTICE
CUPRA recommends the use of engine oils approved according to the appropriate VW standard. Use of engine oils that do not meet these quality requirements can cause engine damage.
CUPRA recommends the use of Original SEAT Spare Part engine oils.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.51/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a journey.
① NOTICE
0.51 of engine oil of one of the indicated engine oil standards may be used, only in the event of an emergency and in exceptional cases.
Engine oil
① NOTICE
Take the following into account if you have refilled with an engine oil different to those specified in the aforementioned standards, or by your SEAT technical service centre:
- There is no way of completely avoiding the danger of causing damage to the engine and particulate filter.
- You can continue driving with the vehicle if the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engine oil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and request an oil change. Otherwise, there is a danger of engine damage.
* If you have topped up more than 0.5 l of engine oil, drive with the engine at low load levels and within the medium RPM range as a maximum. Do not drive at more than 80 km/h and do not travel more than 300 km (approximately). Go to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and request an oil change. Otherwise, there is a danger of engine damage.
- You are responsible for the risk of possible damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaust system). If in doubt, do not start the engine and request assistance from the technical service centre.
• Do not start the engine if you have topped up with a fluid other than engine oil. Request assistance from the technical service centre. Danger of engine damage
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corresponding VW specifications and recommend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
- If the label showing the engine oil specifications is missing >>> Fig. 233, please contact a specialist workshop.
Checking and topping up the engine oil level
Checking the oil level in vehicles with a dipstick
Fig. 235 Engine oil dip stick
The oil level is too low. Add oil up to zone B.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings >>> page 352. Working in the
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.
- Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
- Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating temperature is reached and then stop.
- Wait for about two minutes.
- Locate the oil level dipstick. It can be recognized by its coloured upper end.
- Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go
- Then pull it out again and check the oil level >>> Fig. 235. Top up with engine oil if necessary.
The oil should leave a mark between the areas ① and ②. It must never exceed zone ③.
Do not top up oil in any case.
⑥ You can add oil but keep the level in that zone.
Checking and refilling levels
Checking the oil level on the digital display on vehicles without a dipstick
Fig. 236 On the infotainment system screen: possible engine oil level indicator displays.
A Do not tap up engine oil
⑧ Engine oil level in normal range.
© Engine oil level low, engine oil must be topped up.
Engine oil level very low, engine oil needs to be topped up.
To check the oil level on the information screen, the following steps must be followed:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Select the menu: ☐ Vehicle > Status > Oil level.
Possible actions after reading the oil level on the information screen >> Fig. 236:
Do not top up engine oil, do not start the engine and seek professional assistance.
B Oil level correct.
Oil level low, engine oil must be topped up.
Oil level below minimum, engine oil must be topped up.
If the oil level is in the lower area of B or in the area C, it can be topped up to half of the area B (approx. 0.5 l). Or follow the instructions on the information screen.
Topping up engine oil
Fig. 237 Oil filler cap cover in the engine compartment.
- Locate the engine oil filler cap. It can be recognized by the symbol on the cover >> Fig. 237.
-
Unscrew cap from the oil filler mouth >>> Fig. 237.
-
Carefully add oil in small quantities (no more than 0.5 l).
• To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes and recheck the oil level >> page 363. - If necessary, add some more oil.
- When the oil level reaches at least zone >>> Fig. 235 B, carefully screw on the engine oil filler cap >>> ①
Engine oil specification >>> page 362.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
- When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings >> page 352.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up.
NOTICE
If the oil level is above zone A, do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a Technical Service.
Engine oil
For the sake of the environment
Under no circumstances should the oil level be above zone A. Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and leak into the atmosphere via the exhaust system.
i Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corresponding VW specifications and recommend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
Engine oil change
We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Service.
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required!
- Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings >>> page 352.
- Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
- Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.
- When removing the oil drain plug with your
fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help
prevent off from running do-in your arm.
• Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
■ Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
stored in a safe place out of the reach of children.
NOTICE
No additives should be used with engine
oil. This could result in engine damage. Any
damage caused by the use of such additives
would not be covered by the factory war-
Tony:
For the sake of the environment
- We recommend that you change the en-
gine oil and the filter at a technical service
centre.
- Never pour oil down drains or into the
ground.
■ Use a suitable container when draining the
used all. It must be large enough to hold all
the eng
Troubleshooting
Engine oil pressure too low.
The indicator lamp lights up red.
Do not carry on driving! Switch off the
engine. Check the engine oil level.
- If this warning lamp 📋 starts to flash, and
is accompanied by three audible warnings.
switch off the engine and check the oil level.
If necessary, add more oil >> page 363.
- If the warning lamp 🔍 flashes although the
oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even
run the engine at idle speed! Seek professional
assis
Engine oil level very low.
The warning lamp flashes red and a message
is shown on the dash panel: "Add engine oil
now
Do not carry on driving! This could result
Do not carry on arriving. This could result in engine damage.
-
Safely stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
-
Stop the engine
-
陈小华先生（简历）
-
Check the oil level 777 page 363.
-
If necessary, add engine oil gradually in
small quantities, do not exceed a total of
0.5 I and observe the filing indications on
the instrument cluster display.
If the warning lamp is lit up even if the oil level is
coupct, do not continue driving. Engine dam-
age may occur. Seek assistance from the tech-
pical service
Checking and refilling levels
Engine oil level too low
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
- Check the engine oil level as soon as possible
page 363
- Change the oil as soon as you have the op
portunity to do so.
Engine oil level too high
The warning lamp lights up yellow and a mes-
sage is shown on the dash panel.
- Safely stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
- Stop the engine
- Check the oil level >>> page 363.
- If the oil level is too high, do not continue driving or leave the engine running. Engine damage may occur. Seek assistance from the technical service.
Oil level sensor fault
The control lamp flashes yellow.
- Have the check done by a specialised workshop.
- Until then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you refusal.
12-volt battery
Introduction
The 12 volt battery is located in the engine compartment or in the luggage compartment (PHEV4 hybrid vehicles). The 12 volt battery is checked and, if necessary, replaced as part of maintenance work.
All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge. Please refer to a specialised CUPRA Service, SEAT Official Service or a workshop specialising in batteries: risk of burns or exploding battery!
The battery must not be opened! Never try to change the fluid level of the battery. Otherwise explosive gas is released from the battery that could cause an explosion.
Battery warning indications
Wear protective goggles.
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited.
The battery should only be charged in a well-ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!
Keep children away from acid and the battery.
Always follow the instruction manual.
Automatic shutdown for electrical consum-
After the vehicle's drive system is deactivated, the 12 volt battery may reach a low charge state if the vehicle stands for a long time, electrical consumers are used or the outside temperature is very low.
To ensure the drive system can be activated, the smart energy-management system may automatically apply the following measures when battery charge is low:
- The output of the largest electrical consumers is limited, or switched off completely if necessary, and online functions will no longer be available.
- Power supply to the 12 volt socket may be briefly interrupted when the drive system is started.
13 And version V75.
12-volt battery
WARNING
Working on the 12-volt battery and electrical system can cause severe burns, fire and electric shock. Always read and observe the following warnings and safety precautions before working on the battery:
• Before working on the 12-volt battery, switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers and disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
* Always keep children away from the 12-volt battery electrolyte and the battery itself.
• Always wear eye protection and protective gloves.
• The battery electrolyte is very corrosive. It can cause skin burns and blindness. When handling the 12-volt battery, protect your hands, arms and face in particular from acid splashes
- Do not smoke while working and never work in the vicinity of naked flames or sparks.
- Avoid sparks caused by electrostatic discharges, such as when handling electric cables and devices.
- Never short the battery terminals.
- Never use damaged 12-volt batteries. They could explode. If the 12-volt battery is damaged, replace it immediately.
* Never use a frozen 12 volt battery. When the battery is discharged, it may freeze at temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F). If the 12-volt battery is frozen, replace it immediately.
NOTICE
Do not expose the 12-volt battery to direct sunlight for a prolonged period of time.
• Ultraviolet rays can damage the battery casing.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is not to be used for a long period of time, protect the 12-volt battery from frost.
* The battery may freeze and, as a result, suffer irreparable damage.
Note
After starting the engine with a deeply discharged or newly replaced 12-volt battery, or after a jump start, some system settings (time, date, personalised comfort settings and programs) may be incorrectly set or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.
Note
During the winter, the starting power may be reduced, and if necessary, the battery should be charged.
Check the electrolyte level
Fig. 238 Local or of the battery in the luggage compartment..
① Location of the battery in hybrid vehicles (PHEV).
② Location of the battery in version VZ5. Access to the 12 volt battery
The 12 volt battery is in the engine compartment (conventional vehicles) or beneath the luggage-compartment floor (PHEV hybrids and VZS versions).
Valid for conventional and Mild Hybrid vehicles: - Raise the bonnet >>> △ in Working in the engine compartment on page 352.
- Lift the cover that protects the front of the battery.
Checking and refilling levels
Valid for hybrid vehicles (PHEV) and VZS versions:
- Open the luggage compartment.
- Raise the floor of the luggage compartment
page 313 to gain access to the 12 volt battery.
- You must use a suitable tool to open and close the battery cover ①.
Check the level
Fig. 239 Eight glass on the top of the 12 volt battery (schematic representation).
The electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-mile age vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries.
- Check the colour display in the sight glass on the top of the battery >>> Fig. 239.
- If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until they disperse.
The "magic eye" indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour, depending on the charge state and electrolyte level of the battery.
There are two different colours:
Yellow or colourless: The battery's electrolyte level is too low. Go to a specialised workshop to have the battery checked and replaced if necessary.
Black: The battery's electrolyte level is cor-
Charging, replacing, disconnecting and connecting the 12-volt battery
If you suspect that the 12-volt battery is damaged or defective, have it checked by a qualified specialist workshop.
Charging the 12-volt battery
Contact a specialist workshop for charging the 12-wolt battery, as the battery model fitted in the vehicle in the factory uses a technology that requires limited voltage charging >> △. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this purpose.
Replacing the 12-volt battery
The 12-volt vehicle battery has been designed to suit its location and has special safety features. If a 12-volt battery needs to be replaced,
the replacement battery must be installed by a qualified technician. CUPRA recommends that you visit a CUPRA dealer. Component information regarding size, maintenance, power and safety characteristics to be met can be obtained from a qualified technician, who should have the necessary documentation and technical equipment. CUPRA recommends visiting a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership.
The degassing hole of the 12-volt battery must always be on side of the negative pole. The degassing hole on the side of the positive pole must always be sealed.
Only use maintenance-free 12-volt batteries that comply with the TL 825 06 and VW750 73 standards. These standards must be dated October 2014 or later.
The 12-voit battery must always be replaced by a qualified technician, as the vehicle's electronic system must also be adjusted as part of the replacement. In addition, the battery parameters relating to operational safety can only be determined with the original battery. Only a qualified technician has both access to the right technology to make the adjustment and the correct replacement batteries.
12-volt battery
NOTICE
The use of batteries that do not meet CU- PRA's quality specifications, or with a ca- capacity lower than that fitted as standard, could, depending on the local legislation in each country, lead to the loss of approval or the corresponding administrative permits for the vehicle. In addition, it may pose a serious safety risk.
Vehicles with Start-Stop functions
page 179; are fitted with a special battery. Therefore, it must only be replaced with a battery of the same specifications.
Disconnecting the 12-volt battery
If the 12-volt battery is to be disconnected from the vehicle's electrical system, please note the following.
- Switch off all electrical consumers.
Before disconnecting the battery, unlock the vehicle, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
- First disconnect the negative cable and then (the positive cable)
Connecting the 12-volt battery
- Switch off all electrical consumers before re-connecting the 12-volt battery.
- First reconnect the positive cable and then the negative one >> △.
After connecting the 12-volt battery and switching on the ignition, several control lamps may light up. These lamps go out after a short distance at a speed of approx. 15 to 20 km/h (10 to 12 mph). If the warning lights do not go out, visit a specialist workshop and have the vehicle checked.
If the 12-volt battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is likely that the next service will not be correctly indicated or calculated >> page 16. In this case it will be necessary to take into account the maximum permitted maintenance intervals >> page 392.
Vehicles with a "Keyless Access" system
page 101: If the ignition cannot be switched on after connecting the 12-volt battery, lock and unlock the vehicle from the outside. Then try to switch on the ignition again. If the ignition does not work, seek professional assistance.
WARNING
Attaching the 12-volt battery incorrectly or using unsuitable batteries may result in short circuits, fire and serious injury.
• Use only maintenance-free 12 volt batteries with an anti-spill system with the same properties, specifications and dimensions as the factory-fitted battery.
WARNING
Charging the 12-volt battery creates a highly explosive mixture of detonating gases.
- Only charge the 12-volt battery in a well-ventilated place.
- Never charge a 12-volt battery that is frozen or has thawed. When the battery is discharged, it may freeze at temperatures close to 0°C(+32°F) .
- If the 12-volt battery has frozen, have it replaced without fall.
- A short circuit may occur if the wires are incorrectly connected to the poles. First connect the positive cable and then the negative one.
NOTICE
- Never connect or disconnect the 12-volt battery when the ignition is switched on or the engine is running. Also, never use a 12-volt battery that does not meet the vehicle's battery specifications. The electrical system or certain electronic components could be damaged and electrical malfunctions could occur.
- Never connect accessories that supply power, such as solar panels or battery chargers, to the 12-volt socket or cigarette lighter, to charge the 12-volt battery. This could damage the vehicle's electrical system.
Checking and refilling levels
For the sake of the environment
- The battery may contain toxic substances, such as sulphuric acid and lead. Dispose of the 12-volt battery in accordance with the applicable regulations.
- Electrolyte can contaminate the environment. If any operating fluid leaks out, collect it and dispose of it properly.
Troubleshooting
12-volt battery
The control lamp lights up in RED.
The following message is displayed:
Error: 12-V power supply. Park safely! Please
refer to the instruction manual
Stop driving! Stop the vehicle at the first opportunity and in a safe place. The 12-volt battery is not recharging while the vehicle is in motion and has a critical charge level, or there is a fault in the on-board 12-volt network.
- Switch off the ignition and any electrical consumers that are not required.
- Contact a specialised workshop.
- Request a check of the electrical system.
12-volt battery
The indicator lamp lights up YELLOW.
The following message is displayed:
The 12-V battery is not charged. You may only continue driving with limitations.
The vehicle battery stops charging while driving As the battery gradually discharges, switch
Due to this fault, you will only be able to drive for a limited period of time. Once this time has elapsed, a red warning lamp will be displayed. Drive with caution.
• Have the electrical system checked by a
qualified workshop.
12-volt battery
The indicator lamp lights up YELLOW. The following message is displayed:
Error: 12 V battery. Restart impossible. Go to the workshop.
There is a fault in the connection between the on-board network and the 12-volt battery. If the drive system is switched off in this situation, it cannot be switched on again. If necessary, use the jump leads >> page 340 or seek resistance from modified equipment.
- Contact a specialised workshop.
- Request a check of the electrical system.
12-volt battery
The indicator lamp lights up YELLOW. The following message is displayed:
12-V battery charge low. Please refer to the instruction manual.
Starting capability may be limited and may not be able to start the drive system. If the drive system can be started, charge while driving. If this driver message goes out after a certain amount of time, the vehicle's battery has re-charged while driving and reached a sufficient level. If the driver message does not go out, take the vehicle to a specialized workshop.
12-volt battery
The indicator lamp lights up YELLOW. The following message is displayed:
12-V power supply limited. Drive with extra caution.
The 12-volt power supply is limited because the 12V battery is discharged or not working at full performance, for example due to very cold outside temperatures. The 12-volt battery can be charged while driving. Until the warning disappears, you should drive with care.
12-volt battery
The indicator lamp lights up YELLOW. One of the following messages is displayed:
Error: 12-V supply. Please visit workshop.
Error: 12-V battery. Please visit workshop.
There is a fault in the 12-volt power supply:
48-volt battery
- Contact a specialised workshop.
• Have the electrical system checked.
12-volt battery
The indicator lamp lights up YELLOW. The following message is displayed:
The 12V battery is being discharged. Switch on the engine.
With the engine off, this message may appear a few seconds after turning on the ignition. However, this is normal. It simply alerts you that the 12-volt battery is discharging. As soon as the engine is started, the lamp will switch off
48-volt battery
General information
√ Valid for Mid Hybrid vehicles (MHEV)
Fig. 240 48-volt battery: hazard warning
① Never expose the 48 volt battery to sources of fire, sparks or unprotected flames.
② The instruction manual and the workshop documentation contain further information and warnings in this regard.
③ Always keep children away from the 48 volt battery.
④ If the 48-volt battery is damaged, fluid can leak and very corrosive acids can form. The battery should only be handled by qualified personnel.
⑤ All maintenance works involving the 48 volt battery should only be performed by duly qualified and trained technical staff.
⑥ Take care when handling flammable substances.
In addition to a 12-volt battery, the vehicle may be fitted with a 48-volt battery located underneath the front passenger seat.
The works that are to be carried out on the 48 volt battery should be performed exclusively by a specialised workshop with duly qualified technical staff, trained according to CUPRA guidelines.
Overview of the 48 volt system
The 48 volt system consists of the following components, among others:
- 48-watt battery
• 12V/48V voltage converter
■ 48 volt alternator/starter motor
• Purple 48 vplt cables
48 volt battery warnings
There is a hazard warning sign on the 48 volt battery >> Fig. 240.
Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
Inappropriate handling of the 48 volt battery can cause serious injuries or death.
- All maintenance works involving the 48 volt battery should only be performed by duly qualified and trained technical staff.
- Never make any changes to the 48 volt battery.
WARNING
Make sure the 48 volt battery does not come into contact with water or other fluids.
- Liquids may cause short circuits, electrical shocks and burns.
Troubleshooting
√ Valid for: Mild Hybrid vehicles
Controllamps and driver messages on the instrument cluster display or infotainment system:
48-volt battery
The indicator lamp lights up red. The following message is displayed:
Battery: Risk of fire! Stop safely and get out quickly. Call the emergency services.
The 48V battery temperature is too high. If this message is displayed on the instrument cluster, follow the steps below:
- STOP Stop driving! Stop the vehicle immediately, taking into account the traffic situation.
- Choose a safe place outdoors, away from buildings or vehicles, canopies, covered car parks or similar places.
- If possible, switch on the hazard warning lights.
- Before leaving the vehicle, make sure it is immobilised (parking brake, parking lock P).
- Switch off the ignition and leave the ignition key on the dash panel or in a visible place so that the emergency services can use it (for example to recover the vehicle from a hazardous area).
- Exit the vehicle and make sure that there are no other people or animals left inside.
- Make sure that you leave the danger zone together with all other vehicle occupants and that everyone remains in an area that is protected from traffic (e.g. behind the guard rail).
- Notify the emergency services.
48-volt battery
The indicator lamp lights up red while driving. The following message is displayed:
Error: 48V power supply. Stop safely! Please refer to the instruction manual.
There is a error in the 48V power supply.
-
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
-
Stop the engine and turn off the ignition.
-
Wait for a few seconds.
-
Switch ignition back on.
-
Start the engine.
If the lamp remains on, seek professional assistance. CUPRA recommends going to a CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this.
48-volt battery
When the vehicle is stopped, the warning lamp lights up yellow and the following message is displayed:
Error: 48V power supply. Do not start driving. Please refer to the instruction manual.
There is a error in the 48V power supply.
-
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
-
Stop the engine and turn off the ignition.
-
Wait for a few seconds.
-
Switch ignition back on.
-
Start the engine.
If the lamp remains on, seek professional assistance. CUPRA recommends going to a CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this.
48-volt battery
When the vehicle is stopped, the warning lamp lights up yellow and the following message is displayed:
Energy management
48V battery charge low. Start the engine or refer to the owner's manual.
48V Battery state of charge warning.
-
Start the engine.
-
Stand in a safe place and leave the engine running for a few minutes.
If the lamp remains on, seek professional assistance. CUPRA recommends going to a CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this.
If the engine cannot be started:
-
Switch the ignition off.
-
Use the Jump start >> page 340.
If the vehicle still won't start, seek professional assistance. CUPRA recommends going to a CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership for this,
Energy management
Optimisation of the starting capacity
Energy management controls the electrical power distribution so that there is always enough electrical power to start the engine. If a vehicle with a conventional energy system remains stationary for a long period of time, the electrical devices, for example in the electronic ignition lock, discharge the battery. Under certain circumstances, this can lead to a lack of electrical power to start the engine.
In your vehicle, a smart energy management system is responsible for distributing the electrical energy. This clearly improves the starting performance and service life of the battery. The main functions incorporated in the power management system are battery diagnosis, residual current management and a dynamic power management system.
Battery diagnostics
Battery diagnostics determine the status of the battery on an ongoing basis. The battery voltage, current and temperature are monitored for this purpose. This is used to determine the battery's charge level and efficiency.
Residual current management system
The residual current management reduces energy consumption while the vehicle is stationary. When the ignition is switched off, it manages the power supply to the various electrical devices. In doing so, it takes into account the battery diagnostic data.
With the ignition on and depending on the battery's charge level, it disconnects electrical devices one after the other to avoid over-discharging the battery and to maintain starting capacity.
Dynamic energy management system
Energy generated while driving is distributed by the dynamic energy management system to the electrical devices according to their energy requirements. It also ensures that no more energy is consumed than is generated, thus ensuring an optimal battery charge level.
Note
- The energy management system cannot override the limits imposed by the laws of physics. Please note that the capacity and service life of the battery are limited.
- When there is a risk that the vehicle will not start, the low battery charge level warning lamp will be shown (29) page 370.
Discharged battery
Maintaining starting capacity has top priority. Battery strain is considerable on short journeys, city driving and in the cold season of the year.
In these situations, a lot of energy is required but very little is generated. If the engine is stopped and at the same time the electrical devices are switched on, the battery can become discharged to a critical point. In this case energy is consumed without being generated at the same time.
Checking and refilling levels
In these situations you will notice that the energy regulation system performs active energy distribution adjustments.
Vehicle stationary for a long period of time
If you do not drive the vehicle for a few days or weeks, adjustments will be made to reduce consumption or the electrical devices will be deactivated one by one. This reduces energy consumption and the starting capacity is maintained for longer. Some convenience functions may not be available under certain circumstances. The convenience functions will be available again when the ignition is switched on and the engine is started.
With the engine stopped
If you listen to the radio, for example, while the engine is stopped, the battery will be discharged.
If the energy consumption means there is a risk that the engine will not start, a text will be displayed in vehicles with a driver information system.
This driver message indicates that the engine must be started to recharge the battery.
With the engine running
The battery may discharge despite the fact that energy is being generated while the vehicle is in motion. This is particularly the case if
too little energy is generated and too much is consumed at a time while the battery's level of charge is not optimal.
To restore the energy balance, the devices that consume the most energy are either temporarily adjusted or deactivated. Heating systems, in particular, consume a lot of energy. If you notice, for instance, that the seat heating or the rear window heater is not working, they may have been temporarily switched off or regulated to a lower heat output. These systems can be used again as soon as the energy balance has been restored.
If necessary, you may also notice a slight idling speed boost. However, this is normal and should not cause you any concern. Boosting the idling speed generates additional energy and charges the battery.
Important information about wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres
Important information
about wheels and tyres
General notes
- When driving with new tyres, be especially careful during the first 600 km (300 miles).
- If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the obstacle.
- Check from time to time if the tyres are damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or dents). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
- Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately.
- Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
- Replace any missing valve caps as soon as possible.
- Mark the wheels before taking them off so that they rotate in the same direction when put back.
- When removed, the wheels or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.
Low profile tyres
Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.
This results in more agile driving behaviour.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quickly than standard tyres, for instance due to heavy impacts, potholes, manhole covers and kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important >> page 377.
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive with special care when driving on roads in poor condition.
Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.
If the tyres or rims have received a heavy impact or have been damaged, have a specialised workshop check whether or not it is necessary to change the tyre.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quickly than standard tyres.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed immediately if there is any reason to suspect that damage may have occurred. Inspect the tyres for damage. If no external damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the car inspected.
Foreign objects inserted in the tyre
- Do not remove foreign bodies if they have penetrated through the tyre wall
- If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility system, where necessary seal the damaged tyre as shown in section >>> page 389.
Use a specialised workshop for repair or replacement. CUPRA recommends going to a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealer ship for this purpose.
The sealant inside the tyre tread wraps around the foreign body and provisionally seals the
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the rotation direction on directional tyres. Always note the rotation direction indicated when mounting the wheel. This makes sure that optimal use is made of tyre properties in terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise and wear.
Retrofitting of accessories
If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or wheel trims, we recommend that you consult with a specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service centre for advice regarding current technical recommendations.
Speed symbols
The speed rating indicates the maximum speed permitted for the tyres.
Wheels and tyres
P max. 150 km/h (93 mph)
Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph)
R max. 170 km/h (105 mph)
\$ max. 180 km/h (112 mph)
T max. 190 km/h (118 mph)
u max. 200 km/h (124 mph)
H max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
V max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
W max. 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y max. 300 km/h (186 mph)
WARNING
- New tyres do not have maximum grip during the first 600 km. Drive particularly carefully to avoid possible accidents.
• Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.
- If you notice unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres. - Never use old tyres or those with an unknown history of use.
New wheels and tyres
It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced by a specialised workshop. There they have the required knowledge, the special tools and the corresponding space parts.
- Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you have installed new tyres, drive the first 600 km carefully and at a moderate speed.
- All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and, if possible, tread pattern.
- When changing tyres, do not change just one; change at least two on the same axis.
- If you want to equip your vehicle with a combination of tyres and rims that are different to those fitted in the factory, inform your specialised workshop before purchasing them
The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for your vehicle are listed in the vehicle documentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC document). The vehicle documentation varies depending on the country of residence.
If the type of spare wheel is different form the normal wheels — e.g. in the case of winter tyres or particularly wide tyres — the spare wheel should only be used temporarily in the event of a puncture, and the vehicle should be driven with care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.
In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same brand, type and tread so that the traction system is
not damaged by a difference in the number of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event of a puncture, only a spare wheel with the same perimeter as normal tyres should be used.
Manufacturing date
The manufacturing data is also indicated on the tyre sidewall for on the inside face of the wheel:
DOT...2220..
this means, for example, that the tyre was manufactured in the 22nd week of 2020.
WARNING
- Use only combinations of tyres and rims, as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by CUPRA. Otherwise the vehicle may be damaged, causing an accident.
- For technical reasons it is not possible to use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases not even wheels from the same vehicle model should be used.
* Always ensure that the tyres you have chosen can have adequate clearance. When selecting replacement tyres, do not rely entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can differ significantly depending on the manufacturer. Lack of clearance can damage the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, endanger road safety. Accident hazard!
Important information about wheels and tyres
- Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in an emergency, and drive with due care.
- The fitting of tyres with run-flat properties is not permitted on your vehicle! Prohibited use can cause accidents or can damage your vehicle.
- If decorative hubcaps are retrofitted, make sure that they allow enough air to cool the braking system. Accident hazard 1
- Models with aerodynamic wheel rims and/or with bolt-on plastic elements (more enclosed design) increase the likelihood of ice and snow accumulating on the inside. This should be taken into account, depending on the driving situations, as snow or ice accumulated in the wheels can cause vibration in the vehicle when it drives at over 60 km/h. It is advisable to remove ice and snow from the inside of the wheels using hot water
* If you drive on dirt or gravel tracks, the likelihood of stones becoming trapped inside wheel rims with plastic elements increases when driving at high speed or in a sporty manner. If you see that there are stones trapped between the aluminium wheel rim and the insert, you can attempt to remove them using pressurised water.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to each country's laws.
Note
• A CUPRA Service Centre should be consulted to find out whether wheels or tyres of different sizes to those originally fitted by CUPRA can be fitted, and to find out about the combinations allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
- Never mount used tyres if you are not sure of their "previous history".
Tyre life
Fig. 241 | portion of the tyre pressure sticker
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driving habits will increase the useful life of your tyres.
- Check tyre pressure at least once a month, and also prior to any long trip.
• The tyre pressure should only be checked when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the pressure of warm tyres. - Adjust tyre pressure to the load being carried by the vehicle >>> Fig. 241.
• In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, save the modified tyre pressure >> page 386. - Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.
- Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from time to time.
Tyre pressure
The tyre pressure values are shown on the sticker located on the rear frame of the front left door >> Fig. 241.
Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly reduces the useful life of the tyres and adversely affects vehicle performance and ride. Correct inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted according to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehicle is going to be fully loaded, increase the tyre pressure to the maximum load value shown on the sticker >> Fig. 241.
Do not forget the spare wheel when checking the tyre pressures. Keep this spare wheel inflated to the highest pressure required for the road wheels.
Wheels and tyres
In the case of a minimised temporary spare wheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure label >> Fig. 241
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking (squaling tyres) all increase tyre wear.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, certain circumstances may lead to imbalance (run out), which is detected as vibrations in the steering wheel.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted or if a tyre is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect running gear alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you should check wheel alignment at a specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service.
WARNING
Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses. Tread separation or even a blow-out.
- The driver is responsible for ensuring that all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated to the right pressure. The recommended tyre pressure is indicated on the label >>> Fig. 241.
- Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure they are kept at the indicated pressures. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause overheating, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres.
- Tyre pressure should be as indicated on the label when the tyres are cold at all times
Fig. 241.
- Regularly check the cold inflation pressure of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are cold.
- Regularly check your tyres for damage and wear.
- Never exceed the speed limit or loads specified for the type of tyre fitted on your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tread wear indicators
Fig. 242 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.
Fig. 243 5 wapping bytes.
Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be found on the base of the original tyre treads, ordered at regular intervals and running across the tread >> Fig. 242. The letters "Tw" or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark the position of the wear indicators.
Important information about wheels and tyres
The minimum permitted profile depth 16 have been reached when the tyres have worn down to the wear indicators. Replace the tyres with new ones >> △.
With a spotty driving style, check the tread depth every 5,000 / 10,000 km (3,000 / 6,000 mi). When checking the tread depth, check the wear indicators in all the tyre grooves.
Changing wheels around
In order to wear the wheels in a uniform manner, it is recommended to swap them regularly according to the diagram >>> Fig. 243. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time.
WARNING
The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear indicators. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident.
• Particularly in difficult driving conditions such as wet or icy roads. It is important that the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be approximately the same on the tyres of both the front and the rear axles.
- Lower driving safety due to insufficient road depth is particularly evident in vehicle handling, when there is a risk of "aquaplan-
ing" in deep puddles of water and when driving through corners, and braking is also adversely affected.
- The speed has to be adapted accordingly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control over the vehicle.
Wheel nuts
The wheel nuts and rims have been designed to be part of an assembly. When installing different wheels (for instance alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is important to use the correct wheel nuts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.
The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily. A special adapter is required to turn the anti-thaft wheel nuts >>> page 383.
WARNING
Wheel nuts should never be greased or oiled.
• Use only wheel nuts which belong to the
wheel.
- If the required torque of the wheel nuts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident if the tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts and threads can be damaged.
NOTICE
See >>> page 385 to find out the recommended tightening torque for wheel nuts for alloy rims.
Winter tyres
• Winter tyres must be fitted on all four
- Only use winter tyres that are approved for your vehicle.
- Please note that the maximum permissible speed for winter tyres may be lower than for summer tyres.
- Also note that winter tyres are no longer effective when the tread is worn down.
- After fitting the wheels you must always check the tyre pressures. When doing so, take into account the correct tyre pressures listed on the rear of the front left door frame >>> page 377.
In winter road conditions winter tyres will considerably improve vehicle handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles equipped with wide section tyres or with high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on the sidewall).
Wheels and tyres
Only use winter tyres of the correct type approved for your vehicle. The sizes of these
tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC ® ). The vehicle documentation varies depending on the country of residence.
Winter tyres lose a great deal of their properties when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.
The performance of winter tyres is also severely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is still much deeper than 4 mm.
A code letter indicating the speed limit is stamped on all winter tyres >>> page 375.
In the infotainment system's Vehicle settings menu, a speed warning can be set in the Tyres menu.
Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds must have an appropriate sticker attached so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stickers are available at specialised CUPRA Services, SEAT Official Service centres and specialised workshops. Please note the regulations to this effect in your country.
"All-weather" tyres can also be used instead of winter tyres.
Using winter tyres with a V-rating
Please note that the generally applicable 240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres with the letter V is subject to technical restrictions; the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle may be significantly lower. The maximum speed limit for these tyres depends directly on the maximum axle weights for your car and on the listed weight rating of the tyres being used.
It is best to contact a specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service to check the maximum speed which is permissible for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on the basis of this information.
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum speed permitted for the winter tyres fitted on your car can cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle – risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
When winter is over, change back to summer tyres at an appropriate moment. In temperatures above +7°C (+45°F), performance will be improved if summer tyres are used. Rolling noise, wear and energy consumption will all be reduced.
Snow chains
Snow chains are only permitted on the front wheels, even on 4-wheel drive vehicles.
- Check that they are correctly sealed after driving for a few yards: correct the position if necessary, in accordance with the manufacturer's fitting instructions.
- Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).
- If there is a danger of being trapped despite having fitted the chains, it is best to disable the traction control (TCS) in the ESC >>> page 196
Snow chains will improve braking ability as well as traction in winter conditions.
For technical reasons, the use of snow chains is only permitted on the following rim and tyre combinations:
| Tyres Wheel | m Chains | |
| 215/35 R17 7.5x1 ET40 Max. Ink 15 mm | ||
| 255/35 R17 7.5 x17 ET40 | Max. Ink 9 mm | |
| 255/30 R18 6x 8 ET40 | ||
| 245/45 R18 6x 8 ET40 | ||
| 245/40 R19 8x19 ET40 | ||
| Other dimensions do not allow chains | ||
13 COC = certificate of conformity.
Changing a wheel
Remove any central wheel trims before fitting snow chains.
WARNING
The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted chains could lead to serious accidents and damage.
• Always use appropriate snow chains.
- Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer.
- Never exceed the speed limits when driving with snow chains.
* Before fitting the chains, check that the wheel/tyre combination on the table is the one installed on your vehicle. The combination can also be found on the technical data-sheet.
NOTICE
- Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will impair vehicle handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.
- Wheel rims may be damaged or scratched if the chains come into direct contact with them. CUPRA recommends the use of coated snow chains.
Changing a wheel
Introduction
Only change a wheel yourself if you are familiar with the necessary operations and safety measures, if you have the necessary tools and if the vehicle is parked safely.
Preliminary actions
- Stop the vehicle on a level surface and in a safe place, as far away from road traffic as possible.
• Apply the electronic parking brake.
■ Switch on the hazard warning lights.
• Manual transmission: engage 1st gear.
- Automatic transmission: switch on the parking lock P.
- If towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer from your vehicle.
- Lay out the on-board tools >>> page 338 and the wheel to be changed.
- Follow the legal provisions of each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, light beacon, etc.).
- Get all occupants out of the vehicle and keep them out of the danger zone (e.g. behind the guard rail).
WARNING
• Always observe the above steps and protect yourself and other road users.
- If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car with a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from moving.
Location and use of the temporary spare wheel
Fig. 244 In the luggage compartment: load floor raised.
Wheels and tyres
Fig. 245 In the usage compartment remove the subcofer.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
The temporary spare wheel has been designed to be used for short periods of time. Have the tyre checked and replaced as soon as possible at a specialised CUPRA Service, SEAT Official Service or at a specialised workshop.
The spare wheel must not be switched for a spare wheel from another vehicle.
Removing the temporary spare wheel
- Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove the temporary spare wheel >>> page 313
• Turn the thumb wheel anticlockwiseFig. 244.
• Take out the temporary spare wheel.
Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles fitted with the optional sound system (with subwoofer)
To remove the spare wheel, you must first remove the subwoofer.
- Vehicles without a variable floor in the luggage compartment: pull the floor of the luggage compartment (carpet) upwards to get it out.
- Vehicles with a variable luggage compartment floor; lift and secure the floor storage compartment as explained in >> page 313.
- Disconnect the subwoofer's speaker cable
Fig. 245①
- Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise. >>> Fig. 245 ②.
- Remove the subwoofer speaker and the spare wheel.
- When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with care. When doing so, the tip of the "FRONT" arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.
- Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly rotate the securing wheel clockwise so that the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in place.
Chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the temporary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel that you have removed and replace the punctured front wheel with this wheel.
WARNING
• After fitting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. Failure to do so may cause an accident. The tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left front door frame >>> page 377.
- Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle: Accident risk!
- Never travel more than 200 km using a temporary spare wheel.
- Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering: Accident risk!
- Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time, risk of accident.
- No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact (temporary spare wheel rim).
- If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC system could automatically switch off during the journey. Switch off the system when starting off.
Changing a wheel
Wheel nut caps
Fig. 246 Wheel wheel nuts with caps.
Anti-theft wheel nuts
Fig. 247 Anti-theft wheel cut with cap and adapter.
Loosening wheel nuts
Fig. 248 Tyre change: located the wheel n.i.s.
Removal
- Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools >>> Fig. 210) over the cap until it clicks into place
Fig. 246.
- Remove the cap with the plastic clip. The caps protect the wheel nuts and should be remounted after changing the tyre.
The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking bolts and is not for use with standard wheel nuts.
Loosening the anti-theft wheel nut
- Remove the wheel trim or hub cap.
- Insert the special adapter >>> Fig. 247① (vehicle tools) page 3381 onto the anti-theft wheelout and walkit on a bar on a will on
- Insert the wheel wrench (vehicle tools) onto the adapter as far as it will go.
- Remove the wheelnut >>> page 383.
Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the car to loosen the wheel nuts.
Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. If the wheel nut is very tight, carefully push on the end of the wheel wrench with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip during this operation.
Note
Make a note of the code number of the anti-theft wheel nut and keep it in a safe place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a new adapter, you can obtain it from the specialised CUPRA service or the SEAT Official Service, by giving the code number.
Wheels and tyres
Important information about wheel nuts
Factory-fitted rims and wheelnuts are specially matched during construction. Therefore, if different rims are fitted, the correct wheel nuts with the right length and heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the blue water fixtures are completely
In certain circumstances, you should not even use wheel nuts from vehicles of the same model.
WARNING
If the wheel nuts are not properly tightened, they could come loose while driving and cause an accident, serious injury and loss of vehicle control.
- Use only wheel nuts which correspond to the rim in question.
- Never use different wheel nuts.
- Wheel nuts and threads should be clean, free of oil and grease, and it should be possible to screw them easily.
• To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only use the wheel wrench that came with the car from the factory.
- The wheel nuts should only be loosened slightly (about one turn) before raising the vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!
- Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the required torque, they could come loose while driving.
- Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims.
- If wheel nuts are tightened below the required torque, the bolts and rims could come loose while driving. If tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts or threads can be damaged.
Raise the vehicle
Fig. 249 Jack position points.
Fig. 250 Crossbar mounting the jack on the vehicle.
- Rest the jack (vehicles tools) on firm ground. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support. If the surface is slippery (for example tiles) place the jack on a rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slipping >>> △.
- Look on the crossbar for the mark of the jack support point (sunken areal closest to the wheel to be changed) Fig. 249.
- Tum the jack crank handle, located below the crossbar support point, to raise it until the tab①>>> Fig. 250 is below the housing that is provided.
- Align the jack so that the tab ① "grips" onto the housing provided on the cross member and the mobile base ② is resting on the ground. The base plate ② should fall vertically with respect to the support point ③.
- Continuous turning the jack until the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground.
Changing a wheel
WARNING
The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury.
- Make sure the jack remains stable. If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack could slip or sink, respectively, with the consequent risk of causing injuries.
- Lift the vehicle using only the jack supplied from the factory. Other jacks, even those approved for other CUPRA models could slip, with the consequent risk of injury.
- Place the jack only at the support points provided on the crossbar and align it. Otherwise, the jack could slip because it does not have sufficient grip on the vehicle. Risk of injury!
- You should never place a body limb such as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that is solely supported by the jack.
- If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle. Accident risk!
- Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one side or the engine is running.
- Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. The vehicle may come loose from the jack due to the engine vibrations.
NOTICE
- The vehicle must not be raised on the crossbar. Place the jack only at the support points provided on the crossbar and align it. Otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.
- Any type of load or weight applied to the external trim/door (treading on it, fitting the jack, resting heavy objects, etc.) can cause damage to it. CUPRA accepts no responsibility for any damages caused by improper use of the external trim or body.
Removing and installing a wheel
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
Where we're a turning the vulture with the jacks.
When removing hicking the wheel, the hit may hit and damage the brake disc. Therefore, please take care and get a second person to assist you.
Taking off the wheel
- Unscrew the nuts with the wheel wrench and place them on a clean surface.
- Remove the wheel.
Putting on the spare wheel
Check the rotation direction of the tyre
page 386.
- Place the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel into position.
- Screw in the wheel nuts and tighten them a little with the wheel wrench.
- Use the appropriate adapter to tighten the anti-theft wheel nuts.
• Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack.
- Use the wheel wrench to tighten all of the wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in diagonal pairs (not in a circle).
- Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on.
Fitting the minimised spare wheel (depending on the version)
For technical reasons (brake disc size), it may not be possible to fit the minimised spare
In the event of a puncture or damage to a front tyre, follow the instructions below:
-
Remove the rear wheel on the same side as the damaged front wheel.
-
Fit the minimised spare wheel on the rear axle.
-
Replace the damaged front wheel with the removed rear wheel.
If necessary, check that the tyre pressures are correct as soon as possible.
Wheels and tyres
Tightening torque of the wheel nuts
The required tightening torque for wheel nuts for alloy rims is 140 Nm.
After changing a wheel, have the tightening torque checked immediately with a torque wrench that is working perfectly.
The wheel nuts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
Before checking the tightening torque, have any rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw replaced and clean the wheel hub threads. Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the required torque, they could come loose while driving.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern have been designed to operate best when rotating in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the rotation direction on tyres with directional tread. Always observe the indicated rotation direction in order to guarantee optimum grip and help avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.
If the tyre is mounted in the opposite rotation direction, drive with extreme caution, as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is of
particular importance when the road surface
is wet. Change the tyre as soon as possible or remount it with the correct rotation direction
Works after changing a wheel
- Replace the hub caps or wheel nut caps (depending on equipment).
- Return all tools to their proper storage location
- If the replaced wheel does not fit in the spare wheel housing, store it safely in the luggage compartment >> page 311.
- Check the tyre pressure of the newly mounted tyre as soon as possible.
- In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indicator, adjust the pressure and store it in the memory >>> page 386.
- Have the tightening torque of the wheel nuts checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench >>> page 385. Meanwhile, drive carefully.
- Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.
Tyre pressure monitor sys- tem
Tyre pressure monitor indicator
Fig. 251 Instrument cluster: warning of loss of tyre pressure.
The tyre pressure monitoring system compares the individual speeds of each wheel and thus the dynamic radius with the help of the ABS sensors.
if the rolling circumference of one or more wheels has changed, the tyre pressure monitoring indicator will indicate this on the instrument cluster through a warning lamp and a warning to the driver >>> Fig. 251. If only one tyre is affected, its position on the vehicle will be indicated.
(1) Loss of pressure: Check left tyre pressure!
Change in wheel diameter
The wheel diameter changes when:
Tyre pressure monitor system
• Tyre pressure is changed manually.
• The tyre pressure is insufficient.
• The tyre's structure is damaged.
• The vehicle is not level due to a load.
- The wheels on an axle are subject to a heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).
• The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
• The temporary spare wheel has been fitted.
• One wheel has been changed on an axle.
There may be a delay in the reaction of the tyre pressure monitoring indicator (C) or it may not indicate anything under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or unpaved roads, or when driving with snow chains).
Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring indicator
After changing the tyre pressure or replacing one or more wheels, the tyre pressure monitoring indicator must be recalibrated. This should also be done, for example, when swapping the front and rear tyres.
It should be calibrated with the vehicle stopped and its tyres cold. If calibrated while the tyres are hot, the pressure check and calibration procedure should be repeated when cold before the next trip.
- Switch the ignition on.
- Save the new inflation pressure in the information system: function button ≡ > Vehicle > Exterior > Tyras >> page 40
- OR: = > Vehicle > Status > Tyres.
After storing the new inflation pressure, a confirmation message will be displayed, the warning light in the instrument cluster will flash briefly and a driver alert tape will be played.
The tyre pressure loss indicator uses the ABS sensors to compare the turns of each wheel and, therefore, their tread circumferences, among other aspects. The set values are collected and monitored after a long journey at different speeds.
For example, if the wheels are under very heavy loads, the tyre pressure must be increased to the total recommended tyre pressure before calibration >> Fig. 251
WARNING
If the tyres are inflated to different pressures, or to a pressure that is too low, a tyre may be damaged and control of the vehicle may be lost. This could lead to a serious or even fatal accident.
- If the lamp(s) lights up, reduce speed immediately and avoid any sudden turning or braking manoeuvres. Stop as soon as possible, and check the pressure and status of all tyres.
- The tyre pressure loss indicator only works correctly if all the tyres are at the correct pressure when cold, and it is subsequently calibrated according to the described procedure.
- If the tyres have no punctures and do not need to be replaced immediately, drive to the nearest specialist workshop at low speed and have the tyre pressure checked and corrected.
Note
- When driving for the first time with new tyres at high speeds, the tyres may expand slightly, which may result in an air pressure warning.
* If a low tyre pressure is detected when the ignition is switched on, an audible warning will sound. If the system fails, an audible signal sounds.
- Driving on unpaved roads for a long period of time, or sporty driving, may temporarily deactivate the system. The warning lamp shows a fault, but disappears when road conditions or driving behaviour change.
- Do not only rely on the tyre pressure monitoring system. Check the tyres regularly to ensure that the tyre pressures are correct and that the tyres are free of damage such as punctures, cuts, gouges and dents. Remove any non-puncturing objects from the tyres.
Wheels and tyres
• The tyre pressure monitoring indicator does not function when there is a fault in the ESC or ABS >>> page 194.
Troubleshooting
Tyre pressure low
The control lamp lights up in yellow.
The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre has structural damage. In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text message is displayed on the instrument cluster display.
- Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe place.
- Check all tyres and pressures. - Replace any damaged tyres.
Fault in the tyre pressure loss indicator
The control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minute and then lights up permanently in yellow.
- If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition off and on again.
- Re-calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring system >>> page 386
- If the fault continues, go to a specialised workshop.
Tyre repair
TMS (Tyre Mobility System) puncture repair kit
The puncture repair kit (Tyre Mobility System) will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetration of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, you must recheck the tyre pressure about 10 minutes after starting the engine.
You should only use the tyre mobility set if the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the procedure and you have the necessary tyre mobility set. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.
Tyre sealant must not be used in the following cases:
• If the wheel rim has been damaged.
- In outside temperatures below -20°C (-4°F).
- If the cut or punctures in the tyres are larger than 4 mm.
- If the tyre has been driven on with very low inflation pressure or no tyre pressure.
- If the expiry date of the sealant bottle has passed.
WARNING
Using the puncture repair kit can be dangerous, particularly when filling the tyre on the roadside. To reduce the risk of serious injury, consider the following:
- Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe place. Park it at a safe distance from road traffic to fill the tyres.
• Make sure the ground is flat and firm. - All occupants, especially children, should stay a safe distance away from the work area.
- Turn on the hazard lights to warn other road users.
• Always switch off the engine and activate the electronic parking brake to reduce the risk of accidental vehicle movement.
- Vehicles with automatic transmission: switch on the parking lock P.
- Vehicles with manual transmission: engage a gear.
- Use the puncture repair kit only if you are familiar with the necessary operations. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.
- The puncture repair kit should only be used in an emergency, to reach the nearest garage.
- Replace tyres repaired with the puncture kit as soon as possible.
Tyre repair
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same driving properties as a conventional tyre.
- Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
- Avoid full throttle, braking heavily and cornering at high speeds.
- Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check the tyre.
CAUTION
• The sealant is harmful to health and must be cleaned off immediately if it comes into contact with the skin.
• Always keep the puncture repair kit out of the reach of children.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired tyre sealant in accordance with the relevant legal requirements.
Note
You can purchase new bottles of tyre sealant from CUPRA specialist dealers or any SEAT network dealer.
Note
Take into account the separate instruction manual provided by the tyre mobility system manufacturer.
Tyre mobility system contents
Fig. 252 Standard display contents of the tyre mobility system.
The tyre mobility system is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compartment. Includes the following components >>> Fig. 252:
① Valve insert remover
⑦ A sticker to be stuck to the instrument cluster, in the driver's field of view, as a reminder of the advisable maximum speed "max. 80 km/h" or "max. 50 mph"
① Filer tube with cap
④ Air compressor (depending on the version, the model may vary).
⑤ ON/OFF switch
⑧ Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube).
⑦ Warning provided by tyre pressure monitoring system (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube).
⑧ Tube for inflating tyres
⑨ 12 volt connector
⑮ Bottle of sealant
⑪ Spare tyre valve
The valve insert remover ① has a gap at the lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part ② .
Sealing and inflating a tyre
Sealing the tyre
- Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use the device >>> Fig. 252 ① to remove the valve cap. Place it on a clean surface.
- Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
Fig. 2S230.
- Screw the tyre inflation hose >> Fig. 252 ③ into the tyre sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break automatically
Wheels and tyres
- Remove the filler cap >> Fig. 252③ and screw the open end of the tube into the tyre valve.
- With the bottle upside down, empty all of the contents into the tyre.
- Remove the bottle from the valve.
- Replace the valve insert with the device >>> Fig. 252 ① onto the tyre valve.
Inflating the tyre
- Screw the tyre inflation tube of the compressor >>> Fig. 252 Ⓤ onto the tyre valve.
- Check that the air evacuation screw is closed >> Fig. 252 6.
- Start the engine and leave it running.
- Attach the connector >>> Fig. 252 9 to the vehicle's 12 volt power outlet >>> page 261.
- Switch on the air compressor with the ON/OFF switch >> Fig. 252⑤.
- Keep the air compressor running until it reaches a pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes.
- Disconnect the air compressor.
- If it does not reach the indicated pressure, unscrew the tyre inflater tube from the valve.
- Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre.
- Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the valve.
-
Repeat the inflation process.
-
If it still does not come up to pressure, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop and seek assistance from authorised personnel.
- Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew the tyre inflation tube from the tyre valve.
- When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
- Attach the sticker >>> Fig. 252② to the instrument cluster display, within the driver's field of vision.
- Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
page 390.
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compressor and the inflator tube may become hot.
- Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
- Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or hot air compressor on flammable material.
- Allow them to cool before storing the device.
- If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a good condition to seal the tyre. Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
NOTICE
Switch off the air compressor after a maximum of 8 minutes of operation to avoid overheating! Before switching on the air compressor again, let it cool for several minutes.
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw in the inflator tube >>> Fig. 252 ⑧ again and check the pressure on the gauge ⑦ .
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) or lower
- Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
- You should obtain professional assistance >>> △.
1.4 bar (20 psi/140 kPa) and higher:
- Set the tyre pressure to the correct value again.
- Carefully resume your journey until you reach the nearest specialised workshop without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
• Have the damaged tyre replaced.
Tyre repair
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cause accidents and serious injury.
• Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure
is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) or lower.
- Seek specialist assistance.
Maintenance
Maintenance
Service
Service work and the Digital Maintenance Plan
Log of services performed ("Digital Maintenance Plan")
Specialised CUPRA dealers, SEAT dealerships or a specialised workshop records Service receipts in a central system. Thanks to this comprehensive documentation of the service history, it is possible to view the services performed any time. CUPRA recommends requesting a Service receipt after every service carried out containing all the services on the system.
Whenever there is a new service the receipt is replaced with a current one.
The Digital Maintenance Plan is not available in some markets. In this case, your specialised CUPRA dealer or a SEAT dealership will inform you about the documentation of the service work.
Service works
In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your specialised CUPRA dealer, SEAT dealership or a specialised workshop will document the following information:
- When each one of the services was carried out.
- Whether a specific repair has been suggested, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near future.
- If you have expressed a special request for the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will write the work order.
- The components of fluids that were changed.
• The date of the next service.
The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until the next inspection. This information is documented in all checks performed.
The type and the volume of the service may vary from one vehicle to another. A specialised workshop will be able to provide specific information on the jobs for your vehicle.
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not performed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic, which can cause an accident and severe injuries.
- Make sure that any repairs are carried out by a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEAT dealership or a specialised workshop.
NOTICE
CUPRA accepts no liability for any damage to the vehicle caused either by inadequate workshop service or damage resulting from the unavailability of spare parts.
Note
Regular services on the vehicle not only maintain its value, but also its correct operation and road safety. For this reason, conduct the services in accordance with CUPRA guidelines.
Set Service or Flexible Service Intervals
Services are classified as oil change service and inspection. The service interval indicator on the instrument cluster display serves as a reminder of the next service.
Depending on the features, the engine and the usage conditions of the car, either the Fixed service or the Flexible service will be applied for an oil change service.
Service
How to know which type of service needs to his vehicle
The vehicle service type can be checked at a specialised workshop. Make sure that any repairs are carried out by a specialised CUPRA dealer, any SEAT network dealership or a specialised workshop.
Particular characteristics of the Flexible Service
Regarding the Flexible Service the oil change service only has to be performed when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when you have to carry out this service, take into account the individual usage conditions and personal driving style. A major component of the flexible service is the use of LongLife oil instead of conventional engine oil.
Bear in mind the information about the specifications of the engine oil according to the VW standard >> page 362.
If you do not want to perform the flexible service you can select the fixed service. However, a fixed service may affect service costs. The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.
Service interval indicator
At CUPRA, the dates of the services are indicated by the service interval indicator on the instrument cluster >>> page 25 or in the Vehicle settings menu of the infotainment system >>> page 38.
The service interval indicator gives information for service dates that involve an engine oil change or an inspection. When the time for the corresponding service comes, additional work required, such as the change of brake fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.
Information about the terms of use
The service intervals and groups are usually based on normal usage conditions.
If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under adverse usage conditions, some of the work must be carried out before the next service period or even between service intervals.
Adverse usage conditions include:
• The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.
- Frequent short trips.
- Letting the engine idle for a long period of time, as in the case of taxis.
• Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.
- Frequent driving with a trailer (depending on equipment).
- Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in the city).
This applies especially for the following parts (depending on equipment):
• Dust and pollen filter
- Air Care allergen filter
• Air filter
- Toothed chain
• Particulate filter
- Engine oil
The Service Advisor of your specialised
workshop will gladly inform you about the need to perform service work between normal service intervals, always considering the usage conditions of your vehicle.
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not performed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilized in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries.
• Make sure that any repairs are carried out by a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEAT dealership or a specialised workshop.
Maintenance
NOTICE
CUPRA cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or lack of availability of spare parts.
Service packages
Service packages include all the maintenance works needed to ensure the safety and the smooth running of the vehicle (depending on the usage conditions and the features of the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or operating fluids).
Maintenance services are divided into inspection and review services. Consult the details of the jobs required for your vehicle at:
- Your CUPRA dealer
- Your SEAT dealership
- Your specialised workshop
Due to technical reasons (continuous development of components) the service packages may vary. Your specialised CUPRA dealer, any SEAT dealership or a specialised workshop always receives updated information about any modifications that are made.
Additional service offers
Approved spare parts
Original SEAT Spare Parts have been designed for your vehicle and approved by SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. These parts correspond exactly to the manufacturer's requirements in terms of design, accuracy of the measurements and materials. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been designed exclusively for your vehicle. For this reason, we always recommend the use of Original SEAT Spare Parts, SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.
Approved spare parts
Approved spare parts, following the manufacturer's requirements, are an additional service to you, offering the possibility of replacing complete sets, such as: lightened engine, gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical components, etc.
These parts are, approved parts, and are the same as the factory parts, which are also approved spare parts.
Original accessories
We recommend you only use CUPRA Original Accessories and CUPRA approved accessories for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and suitability of these accessories have been inspected specifically for this type of vehicle. CUPRA cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.
Service Mobility
As of the moment you purchase your CUPRA vehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits and coverage of Service Mobility.
For the first two years after the purchase, your new CUPRA vehicle is automatically covered by Service Mobility at no additional cost.
If you wish to enjoy this service after this period, you can extend Service Mobility as long as you carry out the recommended Inspection and Maintenance Services at a specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service.
If your CUPRA vehicle is immobilised due to a fault or an accident, our assistance services will help you keep moving.
Take into account that Service Mobility differs depending on the country where the vehicle was purchased. For further information, ask your specialised CUPRA dealer, any SEAT dealership or visit the CUPRA website in your country.
Vehicle upkeep and cleaning
Vehicle upkeep and cleaning
Basic observations
Regular and careful care helps to maintain the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may become a prerequisite for a warranty claim in the event of corrosion damage and deficiencies in the paint coat of the bodywork.
Specialised workshops have the necessary care products. Please follow the application instructions on the packaging.
WARNING
- Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your health if misused.
• Always keep care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children. Danger of poisoning!
For the sake of the environment
- When purchasing car care products, chose products that are compatible with the environment.
- The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.
Washing the vehicle
The longer you take to clean off deposits, e.g. remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin or road salt adhered to your vehicle, the more damage it can cause to the surface. High temperatures, for instance strong sunlight, further intensify the damage.
Before washing the car, soften the dirt using plenty of water.
To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and a microfibre cloth.
Have the underside of the vehicle washed after the end of the road salts in winter.
High pressure cleaning equipment
When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, always follow the operating instructions for the equipment. This applies particularly to the operating pressure and the distance between the water jet and the vehicle.
Do not aim the jet directly towards the side windows, doors, sunroof or covers: the same applies for the tyres, rubber hoses, damping material, radar sensors or camera lenses. Keep a distance of at least 40 cm.
Do not remove snow and ice with a high-pressure cleaner.
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out in a direct stream or one that has a rotating jet for forcing off dirt.
The water temperature must not exceed 50°C.
Automatic car washes
Spray the vehicle before starting the car wash. Make sure that the windows and sunroof are closed and the wipers are deactivated. Beer in mind the instructions of the car wash tunnel operator, especially if your vehicle has detachable parts.
Use car washes without brushes if possible.
Washing by hand
Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge or with a brush. Only use cleaning products that do not contain solvents.
Polishing
Polishing is only necessary when the vehicle's paintwork has lost its gloss and cannot be restored with care products.
Do not polish matt painted surfaces! If the paintwork is polished, the surface will be irreparably damaged.
Washing vehicles with matte paintwork
To wash the vehicle, it is best to use a special cleaner for matte paintwork. For further information, please contact an official service centre.
Maintenance
Apply the product by spraying it onto the bodywork. Work in one zone at a time and leave
the product to act for at least 2 minutes. Wipe it with a microfibre cloth and avoid placing excessive pressure on the treated area until the dirt is removed. Once clean, repeat the application of the product area by area and spread it until a uniform finish is achieved.
If the vehicle is affected by mosquitoes or larger amounts of dirt, spray the product on the entire surface, leave it to act for 2 minutes and apply pressurised water until it is completely clean. Once dry, apply the product one zone at a time and spread it with microfibre, avoiding excessive pressure, to achieve a uniform finish.
In both cases, the final application cares for the vehicle in an optimal manner and provides a protective layer against dirt and water.
WARNING
- Only wash the vehicle with the ignition switched off or according to the specifications of the car wash tunnel operator. Accident hazard!
- When cleaning the underbody or the inside of the wheel arches, protect yourself from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of cuts!
- After cleaning, the brakes could act more slowly due to moisture or, in winter, ice on the brake discs and pads. Accident hazard! In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.
WARNING
Incorrect use of high-pressure cleaning equipment can cause damage. This can lead to accidents and serious injuries.
- Never direct the jet of the high-pressure cleaning equipment directly at the orange high-voltage cables, the high-voltage system components or the 12-volt on-board network.
NOTICE
- Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, the exterior mirrors should be folded in to prevent them from being damaged. The electric folding exterior mirrors should only be folded or unfolded electrically!
- Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job!
- Do not use sponges, abrasive household sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Risk of damaging the surface!
• Vehicle parts with matte paint:
- Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of damaging the surface!
- Never select washing programmes that include the use of wax. This could damage the appearance of matte paint.
- Do not put stickers or magnets on parts with matte paint, as removing them may damage the paint.
For the sake of the environment
The car should only be washed in special wash bays. These places are designed to prevent oily water from getting into the public drains.
Cleaning the exterior
Below can be found some recommendations on the cleaning and upkeep of individual vehicle components.
Go to your specialised workshop if you have special questions or parts that are not listed. Take the general considerations into account >>> page 398, Take special care with...
Windscreen wipers
- Dirt: Soft cloth with windscreen cleaner.
Vehicle upkeep and cleaning
Headlights / Tail lights
- Dirt: Soft sponge with neutral soap solution 1 .
Sensors / Camera lenses
- Dirt:
- Sensors: soft cloth with a solvent-free cleaning product.
- Camera lenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-free cleaning product.
- Snow/ice: Hand brush/Solvent-free anti-freeze spray
Wheels
- Road salt: Water.
- Brake abrasion dust: Special acid-free cleaning product.
Exhaust pipe ends
- Road salt: Water, if a fine steel cleaning product is required, or a non-abrasive and non-corrosive cleaning product.
- Dirt on painted exhaust pipes: Clean with a soft cloth dampened with water or a non-abrasive, non-corrosive cleaning product.
Covers / Trims
- Dirt: Neutral soap solution 2 , if a fine steel cleaning product is required.
(1) 2017年1月1日
Paint
- Paint flaws. Check the paint's colour code at an authorised service and restore with a touch up pencil.
- Spilled fuel: Immediately rinse with water.
- Environmental rust deposit: Apply rust remover and then apply hard wax. Go you your specialised workshop if you have any queries.
- Corrosion: Have your specialised workshop take care of this.
- Water does not form droplets on the clean paint: Maintain with hard wax (at least twice a year).
- No shine despite maintenance/unattractive paint: Treat with suitable wax and apply paint preservative afterwards if the wax used does not contain preservative ingredients.
- Tanks, e.g. insect remains, bird droppings, tree sap, road salt: Immediately soak with water and remove with a microfibre cloth.
- Grease-based dirt, e.g. cosmetic products or sunscreen: Remove immediately with a neutral soap solution 1 and a soft cloth.
Carbon fibre parts
- Dirt: Clean in the same way as painted parts
page 395.
Decorative laminates
- Dirt: Soft sponge with neutral soap solution 1 .
Interior cleaning
Below can be found some recommendations on the cleaning and upkeep of individual vehicle components.
Go to your specialised workshop if you have special questions or parts that are not listed.
Take the general considerations into account >>> page 398, Take special care with...
Windows
- Dirt: Apply windscreen cleaner and then dry with a cloth.
Covers / Trims
- Dirt: Neutral soap solution 10 .
Plastic parts
- Dirt: Damp cloth.
- Encrusted dirt: Neutral soap solution 1 , if possible a solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
Displays/instrument cluster
- Dirt: Soft cloth with a liquid crystal display cleaner.
Maintenance
Control panels
- Diet: Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a neutral soap solution 1 .
Seat belts
- Dirt: Neutral soap solution 10 , allowed to dry before retracting.
Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather
- Particles of dirt stuck to surfaces: Vacuum cleaner.
- Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.: Absorbent cloth and neutral soap solution 1 .
- Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.. Apply a neutral soap solution 2 . Absorb the dissolved grease and paint particles by drying with an absorbent cloth, if you have to treat it with water afterwards.
- Special dirt, e.g. pans, nail polish, spray paint, shoe polish, etc.: Special stain remover: dry with an absorbent cloth, if applicable, apply neutral soap solution afterwards 1 .
Natural leather
- Recent dirt: Cotton cloth with neutral soap solution 11 .
• Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.:
- Recent stains: absorbent cloth.
- Dry stains: stain remover suitable for leather.
- Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.: - Recent stains: absorbent cloth and suitable stain remover for leather.
Dry stains: grease solvent spray.
- Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, spray paint, shoe polish etc.: Stain remover suitable for leather.
- Care: Apply preservative cream regularly to protect from sunlight. Use a coloured preservative if required.
Carbon fibre parts
- Dirt: Clean as with plastic parts.
Take special care with...
Headlights/tail lights
- Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with a dry cloth or sponge.
- Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks!
Wheels
- Do not use paint wax or other abrasive products.
- If the protective coating on the paint of the rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, scratches, etc., the damage should be repaired immediately.
Camera lenses
- Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of cracking the lens!
- To clean the camera lens, never use abrasive cleaning products or products with alcohol. Risk of scratches and cracks!
Radar sensors
- Avoid aiming the jet of pressurised water at the radar sensors.
- Paint the bumpers only with CUPRA approved paint.
Windows
- Remove snow and ice from windows and exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To avoid scratches, the scraper should only be pushed in one direction and not moved to and fro.
13 Neutral soap solution: maximum of two tacheters in 1 L of water
Vehicle upkeep and cleaning
- Never remove snow or ice from windows and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. Risk of cracks on the windows!
• To prevent damage to the heating of the rear window, do not put stickers over the heating elements.
Covers/trims
- Do not use cleaning products or chrome based cleaning agents
Paint
- The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust before applying wax or care products. Risk of scratched
- Do not apply wax or care products if the vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job!
- Environmental rust deposits must not be removed by friction. Risk of damaging the paint job!
- Remove cosmetic products and sunscreen immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!
Displays/instrument cluster
• The displays, the instrument cluster and the trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of scratches!
- Make sure that the instrument cluster is switched off and cooled down before cleaning.
- Make sure that no liquid leaks between the instrument cluster and the trim. Risk of damage!
Control panels
- Make sure that no liquid leaks into the control panels. Risk of damage
Seat belts
- Do not remove the seat belts to clean them. - Seat belts and their components must never be cleaned with chemical products, nor should they be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp objects. Risk of damaging the fabric
- If you find any damage to the belt webbing belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buicka ask your specialised workshop to replace the belt in question.
Fabrics/artificial leather/microfibre
- Do not treat artificial leather/microfibre with leather cleaning products, solvents, wax polish, shoe polish, wax removers or similar products
- If the stain is very hard to remove, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it removed there. This will prevent damage.
- Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean.
- Do not turn on seat heating to dry the seats.
- Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, rivets or belts can damage the surface.
- Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro fasteners are closed.
Natural leather
- Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe polish, spot removers or similar products on leather. - Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, rivets or belts can damage the surface.
- Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean.
- Do not turn on seat heating to dry the seats.
- Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a prolonged period in the bright sun, it is best to cover the leather.
WARNING
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such as humid weather, darkness or when the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may be impacted. Accident hazard! Such coatings can also cause the windscreen wiper blades to make noise.
Maintenance
Note
- Remains of insects can be removed much more easily with previously treated paint.
• Regular car care treatments can prevent deposits of environmental rust.
Taking your vehicle out of service
If you want to leave your vehicle stationary for a long period of time, contact a qualified workshop. They will gladly inform you about the necessary measures, such as anti-corrosion protection, Service and storage.
Also take into account the indications relating to the vehicle's battery >>> page 366.
page 366, Introduction.
Accessories, spare parts and repair work
Introduction
Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer for advice before purchasing accessories and replacement parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety. For this reason, we recommend that you ask a specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service for advice before fitting accessories or replacement
parts. Your Official Service has the latest information from the manufacturer and can recommend accessories and replacement parts which are suitable for your requirements. They can also answer any questions you might have regarding official regulations.
We recommend only using CUPRA accessories and Genuine CUPRA parts ® . Specialised CUPRA Services or SEAT Official Services have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that the parts are installed correctly and professionally.
Although CUPRA continuously monitors the market, it cannot judge whether products not authorised by CUPRA meet the vehicle's reliability, safety and suitability requirements. CUPRA therefore accepts no liability for these products, even, in certain cases, they are authorised by an officially recognised technical inspection institute or official body. Any retrofitted equipment which has a direct effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driven, such as a cruise control system or electronically-controlled suspension, must be approved for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol);
If any additional electrical devices are fitted which do not serve to control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the marking (manufacturer conformity declaration in the European Union).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders or drink holders, should never be fitted on the covers, or inside the operating range of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Technical modifications
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components, software, wiring or data transfer in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. We request your understanding that your specialised CUPRA dealer or SEAT dealership cannot be held liable for any damage caused by modifications and/or work performed incorrectly in the vehicle.
We therefore recommend that all work should be performed by a specialised CUPRA Service or a SEAT Official Service using genuine CUPRA parts ® .
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Accessories, spare parts and repair work
Radio telephones and office equipment
Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters in the vehicle require prior approval. CUPRA generally authorises in-vehicle installations of approved types of radio transmitters provided that:
• The antenna is installed correctly.
- The aerial is installed on the exterior of the vehicle (and shielded cables are used together with non-reflective aerial trimming).
• The effective transmitting power does not exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.
A specialised CUPRA Service, SEAT Official Service or specialised workshop will be able to inform you about options for installing and operating radio transmitters with a higher transmitting power.
Mobile radio transmitters
Commercial mobile telephones or radio equipment might interfere with the electronics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. This may be due to:
• No external aerial.
• External aerial incorrectly installed.
• Transmitting power more than 10 W.
Therefore you must not operate portable mobile telephones or radio equipment inside the vehicle without a properly installed external serial >>> △
Please note also that the maximum range of the equipment can only be achieved with an external aerial.
Business equipment
Retrofit installation of business or private equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provided the equipment cannot interfere with the driver's immediate control of the vehicle and that any such equipment carries the € mark. Any retrofit equipment that could influence the driver's control of the vehicle must have a type approval for your vehicle and must carry the e mark.
WARNING
Mobile telephones or radio equipment which is operated inside the vehicle without a properly installed external aerial can create excessive magnetic fields that could cause a health hazard.
Note
* Retrofitting electric and electronic equipment in this vehicle affects its licence and could lead to the withdrawal of the vehicle registration document under certain circumstances.
- Please follow the mobile telephone/radio operating instructions.
User information
User information
Warranty
Fault-free operation warranty
Specialised CUPRA Services or SEAT Official Services ensure the perfect condition of new vehicles. Check the purchase agreement or complementary additional documentation provided by your Technical Service for the conditions and terms of the warranty. Get further information about this from your specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Service.
Commercial warranty for high voltage batteries for electric and hybrid vehicles
To supplement the aforementioned warranties and guarantees, SEAT Official Services also offer a warranty for high voltage batteries existing in many countries.
Consult the details of this warranty in the sales contract or contact a SEAT Official Service.
Information stored by the control units
Storage of accident data (Event Data Recorder)
Your vehicle has an event data recorder (EDR). The EDR's function is to record data in the event of a mild or serious accident. These data are used to support the analysis of how different vehicle systems behaved.
The EDR records, over a reduced time range (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driving data and data from the restraint systems, such
- How different vehicle systems worked. - Whether the driver and the occupants were wearing their seat belts.
- How hard the accelerator or brake pedal was pressed.
- Vehicle speed. These data will provide a better understanding of the circumstances of the accident.
Data from the driving assist systems are also recorded. This includes data such as whether the systems were inactive or active and if such action had an impact on the vehicle's dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the aforementioned situations, or accelerating or decelerating the vehicle.
Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-
cludes data from systems such as:
• the adaptive cruise control
- the lane assist system
• the park assist systems
■ the emergency brake functions.
The EDR data are only recorded in specific accident situations. No data are recorded in normal driving conditions.
No audio or video data inside or around the vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstances are personal data such as name, age, or gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties (such as criminal proceedings authorities) may relate the contents of the EDR data to other data sources and create a personal reference in the context of an accident investigation.
In order to read the EDR data it is necessary to access (if legally permitted to do so) the vehicle's ODB ("On-Board-Diagnose") interface while the vehicle is switched on.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, third parties, such as judicial organisations with the appropriate tools, may be able to access the information if they have access to the vehicle or to the data recorded in the EDR.
CUPRA will not have access to EDR data unless the owner for, in "Leasing" cases, the lessee or hirer) gives their consent. There may be exceptions to this, depending on legal or contractual provisions.
Fluids in the air conditioning system
Due to legal requirements in safety-related products, CUPRA may use the EDR data for field research and in order to improve vehicle system quality. Any data used for research purposes will be treated anonymously (in other words, no reference will be made to the vehicle, its owner or the lessee/hirer).
Vehicle antennas
Infotainment system and antennas
The infotainment system's antennas are installed on different locations on the vehicle:
- On the roof.
- On the windscreen, between the layers of glass.
- On the rear and side windows with a printed antenna structure >>> ①
NOTICE
The printed antenna structure on the rear and side windows can be damaged by objects rubbing against it or by the use of corrosive products, or products containing acids.
- Do not apply any stickers to the rear and side window areas.
- Never clean the antenna structure with corrosive or acidic products.
Fluids in the air condition- ing system
Refrigerant in the air conditioning system
The label in the front compartment provides information on the type and amount of refrigerant used in the vehicle's air conditioning system. The label is located at the front of the front compartment, near the refrigerant filling valves >> △.
Detailed information on the refrigerant used
If the type of refrigerant indicated on the label is R1234yf, the air conditioning system contains fluorinated gases.
If the type of refrigerant is R744, this gas does not contain fluorinated gases.
Pursuant to Regulation (EU) 2024/573 on fluorinated greenhouse gases, article 12 referring to labelling end product and equipment information, applicable from 1 January 2025 onwards.
| Type of refrigerant R1234yf | |
| Refrigerant, weight | 450 g |
| 460 g | |
| CO equivalent | 0.0007 : |
| 0.0002 : | |
| Global warming potential 0.501 | |
Refrigerant oil in the air conditioning
The air conditioning system is filled with a refrigerant oil. For information on the type and amount of refrigerant oil used, contact a qualified specialist company.
CUPRA recommends a CUPRA official service
Warning: Maintenance of the air conditioning system must be performed by qualified specialists.
Type of refrigerant.
Type of refrigerant oil
Refer to the workshop information (available only at CUPRA official services).
Maintenance of the air conditioning system must be performed by qualified specialists.
Flammable refrigerant.
Ensure all components are properly disposed of. Do not install components removed from end-of-life vehicles or recycled components in your vehicle.
User information
DANGER
Maintenance of the air conditioning system by unqualified personnel can cause serious and fatal injuries.
For air conditioning system maintenance, contact qualified personnel trained according to the required country standards, such as the standard SAE J2845.
• Bear in mind the service intervals recommended by CUPRA. For this, contact a qualified specialist company. CUPRA recommends a CUPRA official service.
DANGER
The refrigerant is flammable and can cause serious and fatal injuries if not properly maintained.
The refrigerant is under pressure and can explode when heated. This can cause serious and fatal injuries.
The refrigerant can form toxic vapours when it comes into contact with hot surfaces. If inhaled, they can cause poisoning or even death.
- Have the air conditioning system repaired by qualified personnel.
- Keep the vehicle away from flames, sparks, or other sources of ignition.
NOTICE
Repair or replacement of the evaporator with space parts from end-of-life vehicles or recycling can damage the air conditioning system.
- Never have the evaporator repaired with space parts from end-of-life vehicles or recycling.
Information on the EU chemicals regulation REACH
In accordance with the European Chemicals Regulation REACH, SEAT, S.A. has information on the substances that may be contained in the vehicle.
You can ask for this information at your CUPRA Official Service or at any SEAT dealership.
Materials and recycling information
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials and manufacture of your new CUPRA.
Constructive measures to encourage recycling
- Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling
- Modular construction to facilitate dismantling.
- Increased use of single-grade materials.
- Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO 1629.
Choice of materials
• Use of recycled materials.
- Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not easily separated.
- Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources.
- Reduction of volatile components, including colour, in plastic materials.
■ Use of CPC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
provided for by law (Annex II of ELV Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
- Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities.
- Use of plastic film as protection during vehicle transport.
Materials and recycling information
• Use of solvent-free stickers.
- Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling systems.
- Recycling and energy recovery of waste (RDF).
- Improvement in the quality of waste water.
- Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, etc.)
• The use of water-souluble paints.
Information on the European Regulation on batteries and accumulators
Technical data and documents relating to the requirements of Regulation (EU) 2023/1542 of the European Parliament and of the Council on batteries and waste batteries can be found at: https://product-pass.online/vehicle?id_type=brand&id=S
Recycling of electrical or electronic devices
All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must be marked with the following symbol:
This symbol indicates that EED must not be discarded as home waste but through selective waste collection.
Product recycling
√ Valid for market France
Fig. 253 Recycling notice for France.
Please note the recycling instructions in 100 Fig. 253 for the following items:
- Vehicle keys
- Remote control of auxiliary heating and ventilation.
• Compressor
- Charging cable.
Fig. 254. Fré extinguisher recycling notice for France.
Please note the recycling instructions in >>> Fig. 254 for the following items:
- Extinguishers.
Fig. 255 Recycling notes for France
User information
Fig. 256 Recycling notice for France.
Please observe the recycling instructions >>> Fig. 255, >>> Fig. 256 for documentation and packaging or bags of the following items:
and packaging of bags of the following items.
- Maintenance manual.
- First aid kit.
• Extinguishers.
• Compressor.
- Charging cable.
• Charging socket and watertight seal
- Vehicle toolbox.
- Puncture repair spray.
- Jack.
- Warning triangle.
• High visibility jacket.
- Toolbag
For the sake of the environment
The Triman logo and the Info-tri symbol contain important classification information for the end user.
Product recycling
√ Valid for market: Italy
Environmental labelling
Legislative decree no. 116 (3 September 2020) which transposes EU Directive 2018/851 on waste, and EU Directive 2018/852 on packaging and packaging waste, states that all packaging must be properly labelled to facilitate the collection, reuse, recovery and recycling of packaging, and to give users correct information about the final destination of the packaging.
Information about the environmental labelling of packaging present in the vehicle can be accessed by scanning the following QR code, which links to a website where the information required by this regulation can be found:
Third-party copyright information
https://www.seat.com/company/softwareinfo.html
Some products installed in the vehicle include software components that require Open Source licenses.
A list of the Open Source software components used, including information on copyright terms, the respective Open Source license terms, and the text of the corresponding license, is available on the website mentioned above. The source code for certain Open Source software components can be requested from the vehicle manufacturer. The manufacturer will provide the source code in accordance with the respective license terms, and only the cost of making it available will be charged (e.g., costs for data storage devices, shipping, and packaging). The required information can be found on the website mentioned above.
Return and scrapping of end-of-life vehicles
End-of-life return
At the end of its useful life, your vehicle must be recycled and disposed of in an environmentally sound manner. For this reason, final vehicle owners in the EU and in many other countries are required by law to take their vehicle to an authorised collection point, vehicle return centre or authorised dismantling facility.
Radioelectrical equipment
CUPRA has already made the necessary arrangements for this: an extensive network of vehicle return centres is available throughout the EU and in many other countries, where you can drop off your vehicle. If you meet the national legal requirements, you can return your end-of-life vehicle free of charge within the EU.
The vehicle return centre issues a recycling certificate which serves as proof that the end-of-life vehicle has been recycled correctly.
Information about the Vehicle Return Centres can be obtained from your CUPRA dealer.
Scrapping
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when scrapping the vehicle or its individual components, e.g. airbag system and seatbelt tensioners. Qualified workshops are already familiar with these requirements. CUPRA recommends using a CUPRA dealer.
Declaration of conformity
Commercialisation of finished products on the British market (England, Wales and Scotland):
UK CA The UKCA (UK Conformity Assessed) marking is a new British marking used for products commercialised in Great Britain (England, Wales and Scotland).
Importer
Volkswagen Group United Kingdom Ltd
Yeomans Drive, Blakelands
Milton Keynes, M. United Kingdom
Vehicles commercialised on the British market by the importer mentioned above may include complete products that comply with the following provisions:
• The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regula
tions, 2016
• The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations, 2016
• The Supply of Machinery (Safety) (Amendment) Regulations, 2011
• The Noise Emission in the Environment by Equipment for use Outdoors Regulations, 2001
• The Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Regulations, 2012
■ The Medical Devices Regulations. 2002 (ISISI 2002, no. 618, in its amended version (UK MDR 2002))
• The Pressure Equipment (Safety) Regulations, 2016
■ The Personal Protective Equipment (Enforcement) Regulations, 2018
Note
For medical devices, the (marking will remain valid in the UK until 30 June, 2023.
In accordance with the aforementioned regulations, the importer has ensured that:
The manufacturer has performed the corresponding conformity assessment, has drawn up the technical documentation and meets the market requirements.
Until 31 December 2025, the British market may be placed on a label that is affixed to the product or the attached documentation.
Radioelectrical equipment
Simplified declaration of conformity
Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devices. The manufacturers of these devices declare that they comply with Directive 2014/53/EU when legally required.
The full text of the EU compliance declaration is available online at the following website:
technical-support/declarations-o- conformity
CE
User information
United Kingdom
Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devices. The manufacturers of these devices declare that they comply with the UK Radio Equipment Regulations 2017 (SI 2017/1206) if required by law.
The full text of the declaration of conformity is available online at the following website:
www.cupraoficial.com/owners/technical-support/declarations-of-conformity
Ukraine
Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devices. The manufacturers of these devices declare that they comply with Ukraine Decree 355/2017 (TR Radio Equipment) where legally required.
The full text of the declaration of conformity is available online at the following website:
www.cupraoficial.com/owners/technical-support/secular.cn-cl-ordonnity
Addresses of the manufacturers
The address of the manufacturers of components that, due to their size or nature, cannot include a sticker are listed below, as long as it is legally required:
Central control unit (BCM)
Robert Bosch GmbH/Braunschweig Theodor-Heuss Strasse 12 38:22 Braunschweig, Germany Phone: 0049 53188890
Keyless Access system and key with radio remote control of the central locking system
HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA/Hamm Roomstr. 66 59075 - Hamm, Germany Phone: 0049 23817980
Roof antenna
Website: www.mclex.com
Connectivity Box
Radioelectrical equipment
Optional infotainment system
LG Electronics Mlawa SP
LG Electronics 7
06 500, Mlawa
Radio remote control of the auxiliary heat-
ing
530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic
Digital Cockpit for Raval, Born, Tavascan
Europe - CE
LG Electronics Inc. Single Point of Contact
United Kingdom - UKCA
LG Electronics U.K. Ltd.
Velocity 2, Brooklands Drive.
Waybridge, KT13 DSL
[Non-Text]
Front radar sensors
MRR for Leon and Formentor
Robert Bosch GmbH
59552 Lippstadt (Germany)
Online Connectivity Unit
LG ELECTRONICS IN
- Macukiungang 10-ro
Gangseo-gu, Seoul, Republic of Korea
Radio equipment, frequency band, maximum transmitting power
Below can be found details of the radio equip-
ment 11 that may be fitted to the CUPRA mod-
5
Frequency band
Max. station
power
Key with radio-operated remote control
(vehicle)
(33.05-134.78 MHz 10 mV/EBPI)
Radio-operated remote control (auxiliary
heater
853.7-859.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mW
Transmitter-Receiver (auxiliary heater)
858.7-969.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW
Bluetooth»
2400-2483.5MHz 15.63 dBm
Auxiliary antenna for Car2X
5855-5925 MHz 2 W PIRE
3) The commissioning or authorisation of radiolactrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.
User information
Wireless hotspot
| 2400-2433.5 MF:15.63 dBm |
Keyless Access
| 434.42 MHz 32 μW | |
| 125 kHz 89 dB/km | * |
a Valdor mawes Ukraine
Radar sensors for front assist systems
| 76 GHz-77 GHz | 30.49 dBm 1 |
| 34.9 dBm 1 | |
| 31.56 dBm 1 |
"Valid for Lead, 100% of the
a Volef for /deca
"Valid for Renal (dum Tarascari)
Radar sensors for rear assist systems
| 250.61 24250MHz 20.68m | a) |
"Vallfor (Eur, Extensive, Alacal, Dand Eun) Tavascan
Radar sensors for rear and side assist sys-
| terms | |
10、(AP)2.7468
"Valid for: therefore
| Wireless charging function | |
| 110-126 kHz 5 W | a) |
| 110-128 kHz 15 W | b) |
* Valid for Araca * Valid for Leon, Lomontor, Torramer, Kavel, Born, Tavasco
Instrument cluster
3-150kHz<65dBμA/m
Online Connectivity Unit
| TDS1900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm | |
| DCS800: 270-1785 MHz 31 dBm | |
| LNTS FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm | |
| LNTS FDD 3: 2100-2400 MHz 26 dBm | |
| LNTS FDD 8: 880-920 MHz 24 dBm | |
| F. LTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 21.5 dBm | |
| F. LTRA FDD 3: 17.0-1785 MHz 23.0 dBm | |
| E-LTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570 MHz | 23.5 dBm |
| E-LTRA FDD 8: 680-915 MHz | 23.0 dBm |
| E-VTRA FDD 20: 882-882 MHz | 23.2 dBm |
| E-VTRA FDD 23: 703-743 MHz | 23.0 dBm |
Additional information for countries outside the European Union
Mexico
Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devices. The manufacturers of these devices declare that they comply with Directive RLVCOAR15-0008 when legally required. The full text of the declaration of conformity is available online at the following website.
www.seat.mx/servicio/mi-seat/manuales-seat
Certificate: RLVHERS17-0286. RS4 Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. short-range radar IFT: RLVHERS17-0286. The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
United Kingdom
The following applies to importers in the UK market:
Volkswagen Group United Kingdom Ltd
Yeomans Drive, Blakelands
Milton Keynes, MK 14 SAN United Kingdom
Turkey
Radioelectrical equipment
Krisi et al. 2019, 1983
Pavia Tychyny ave. 1V, Office "B", 4th floor
02152 Kyiv, Ukraine.
Technical data
Technical data
Indications about the technical data
Vehicle identification data
The values indicated in the technical data may differ depending on optional equipment or version of the model, as well as in the case of special vehicles and equipment for certain countries.
The information in the official vehicle documentation takes precedence at all times.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifications section
| kw | Slowatt, engine power measurement. |
| kWh | Klowatt hour, battery capacity. |
| PS | Horsepower (not currently used), engine power measure motor unit. |
| rpm, 1/min | Revolutions per minute - engine speed. |
| Nm | Newton metres, unit of engine torque. |
| CZ | Caloure number, indication of the diesel combustion power. |
| RON | Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol. |
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The vehicle ID number can be found in the following places:
- In the infotainment system using the function button (○ Vehicle > Status > Service.
- Front, visible through the small window on the lower left side of the windscreen.
- On the vehicle's data label.
• To the right in the engine compartment.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the vehicle's right hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.
Performance
The values apply only to optimal road and weather conditions.
The vehicle's performance has been calculated without any equipment that would affect it, e.g. accessories.
Fuel consumption
Approved consumption values are derived from measurements performed or supervised by certified EU laboratories, according to the legislation in force at the time (for more information, see the Publications Office of the European Union on the EUR-Lex website: © European Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) for the specified vehicle characteristics.
The values relating to fuel consumption and CO 2 emissions can be found in the documentation provided to the purchaser of the vehicle at the time of purchase.
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions depend on the equipment/features of each individual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road conditions, traffic conditions, environmental conditions, load or number of passengers.
Tank level
| Vehicles with front wheel drive: | 501, 71 reserve |
| Vehicles with all wheel drive: | 551, 8.5 reserve |
| Plug-in hybrid vehicles (PHFV) | 401, 81 reserve |
Indications about the technical data
Adblue ® tank volume
approx. 11 μ)
approx. 12
a The amount filled using a dispersion nozzle may be less. In conditions of extreme cold, the amount filled may be less. The values depend on the equipment.
High-voltage battery
Type and capacity
Plug-in hybrid vehicles (PHEV) Li-ion 25.8 KWh 353V
Weights
The kerb weight values apply to a vehicle that is ready to drive with a driver (75 kg), operating fluids and, if applicable, tools and the spare wheel. The kerb weight increases with optional equipment and retrofitting of accessories, which reduce the possible payload accordingly.
Load on the roof
The maximum authorised load on the roof of your vehicle is 75 kg.
Trailer weight
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball head of the towing bracket is 80 kg.
WARNING
The values indicated for the maximum permitted weights must not be exceeded. There is a risk of accident and damage!
Technical data
Engine specifications
| Petrol engines 1.5 TSI Start-Stop PHEV | ||
| TS engine power in kW (hr) at 1/min 130 (240/5,000-6,000 130 (1/9),500-6,000 | ||
| Electric motor power in kW (hr) at 1/min 85 (116/7220-4,300 35 (126)/2,250-4,500 | ||
| TS engine • electric motor power in kW (hp) at 1/min | 150 (204/74,000-6,000 200 (2/2)76, 150-6,500 | |
| TS engine maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1 500-4,000 250/1 500-4,000 | ||
| Electric motor maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 330/0-2 250 130/0-2 750 | ||
| Maximum torque of TSI engine • electric motor (Nm at 1/min) | 350/850-4,000 400/850-4 750 | |
| No. of cylinders/displacement (cm) 4/1 458 4/1 495 | ||
| Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ | ||
| Gearbox (no. of cars) / traction (255 kg) / front | D36 (8) / front | |
| Top speed (km/h) (g/m) | 210 [V] | 220 [V] |
| Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (kg) | 7.9 | 7.2 |
| Maximum authorized weight (kg) | 2 190 | 2 200 |
Engine specifications
| Petrol engines 1.5 Start-Stop MHEV 1.5 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI Start-Stop | |||
| Power output in kW (mp) at 1/min 110; 150/5,000-6,000 110; 150/5,000-6,000 140; 190/4,180-6,000 | |||
| Maximum torque (kcal/1/min) 1250/1,500-3,500 250/4,350-3,500 320/1,500-4,000 | |||
| No. of cylinders/displacement (cm2) 4/1488 4/1495 4/2,984 | |||
| Fuel % per l/s / normal ml (with a sign power loss R/Q) | |||
| Gearbox (no. of cars) / traction (250 L) / front manual (n) / Front DVO (L) / front | |||
| Top speed (km/h/year) | 205 [V] | 205 [V] / 218 [V] | |
| Accelerator from 0-100 km/h (s) | 9.0 | 9.0 | 7.5 |
| Maximum authorised weight (kg) | 2,000 | 1960 | 2010 |
| Petrol engines | 2.0 TSI Start-Stop | 2.0 TSI Start-Stop |
| Power output in kW/hp at 1/min | 150 (204) / 5,000, 6,300 | 195 (262) / 750, 6,500 |
| Maximum torque (km/h m/s) | 370 (1,500, 4,600) | 370 (1,600, 4,500) |
| No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) | 4/1,984 | 4/1,984 |
| Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a sign power bus) ROZ | ||
| Gearbox (no. of gear) / cylinder | DSG (7) 4Drive / total 4x4 | DSG (7) / front |
| Top speed (km/h gear) | 225 (V) | 245 (V) |
| Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) | 6.8 | 6.5 |
| Maximum a-thorised weight (kg) | 3 | 2,060 |
1 Do not consider this edition goes to print.
Technical data
| Petrol engines 2.0 TSI Start-Stop 2.5 TFSI Start-Stop | ||
| Power output in kW (r) at 1/min 245,033/5,500-6,500 287 (360/5,700-7,000) | ||
| Maximum torque (km at 1/min) 420/2,100-5,500 480/2,250-5,700 | ||
| No. of cylinders/displacement (cm2) 4/1,994 5/2,480 | ||
| Fuel | Super 98 / Super 95 both a slight power loss; ROZ | Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss; ROZ |
| Gearbox (no. of gears) / traction DSG (3) 4/Drive / total (kg) DSG (5) 4/Drive / total (kg) | ||
| Top speed (km/h (gcat) ≥50 [V]) | a | |
| Acceleration (mm: 0-100 km/h) 4.8 | a | |
| Maximum motorized weight (kg: 2.160 | a | |
8 Data not available as this edition goes to print.
| Diesel engines 2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop | |
| Power output in kW (mp) at 1/min | 110 (150)/3,000-4,200 |
| Maximum torque (kmat·l/min) | 360/1,600-2,750 |
| No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) | 4/1,968 |
| Fuel | EN 350 standard/diese, min. ±1°C |
| Gearbox (no. of cars) / traction | [5%] / Hours |
| Top speed (km/h) (g/m) | 705 [V] |
| Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) | 9.0 |
| Maximum authorized weight (kg) | 2,060 |
Dimensions.
Dimensions.
Fig. 257 Dimensions.
| >>> Fig. 257 | Formentor Formentor 4Drive Formentor PHEV Formentor VZS | ||||
| A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 698/674 658/676 658/677 908/685 | |||||
| C Wheel base (mm) 2,679 2,681 2 681 2 681 | |||||
| D Length (mm) 4,451 4,455 4,455 4,454 | |||||
| E/P | Front/rear back width (mm) | 1,987/1,995 | 1,987/1,961 | 1,983/1,958 | 1,937/1,961 |
| G | Width from one anterior minor to the other (mm) | 1,997 1,997 1,997 1,997 | |||
| H | Width (mm) | 1,839 | 1,839 | 1,839 | 1,852 |
| I | Height at knee weight (mm) | 1,537 a | 1,537 a | 1,537 a | 1,529 a |
| Turning radius (m) | 11.4 | 11.4 | 11.4 | 11.4 | |
a Dimension to the roof bars.
Technical data
Index
Index
Numbers and Symbols
4Drive 168 12-volt battery 556 ground switch 310
charge level 373 charging 368
controlamps....370 disconnect and connect....368
electrolyte level 367 energy management 375
replacement 358
(b-Von battery 372) control lamps 372
A
ACC 200 Accessories 400
Activating CUPRA CONNECT 768 Adopting the playback volume 28A
Adaptive Cruise Control 209
control and warning lamp 214 malfunction 214
operation 210
status display 210
System limitations....213
control and warning lamps.... 535
information 335
minimum filling capacity 333
specification.... 324 tank capacity.... 323
Adjust
Front seats 124
headrest....127 lights....127
seat with memory 129
seats....43
Adjusting the seat belt 49 Air conditioning 160
air recirculation....152
controls....150 parking ventilation....156
rear controls 152
refrigerant oil....403 retiring the temperature....152
stationary air conditioning....161
troubleshooting 157
Air recirculation 152
Airbag system....53
activation 54 control lamp 55
deactivation of the front airbag .... 57
description 54 rent airbags 56
how it works....54
Airbags....53
centre 58
description 54
for the head 50 for the knees 61
front 56
side....58
Android Auto™ disconnecting 276
establish connection....278
requirements 275
special characteristics....276
Anti-theft alarm 108
interior monitoring and anti-tow system ... 109
Anti-theft alarm system 108
Anti-trap function
sunroof....120 windows....118
Antifreeze 355
Apple CarPlay disconnection 70%
establish connection....275
menu 275
special characteristics 275
Applications (apps) 274
Approved spare parts 394 Area View system 203
Aspects to think about before starting the vehicle
42 Ashtoso call 73
Assistance systems
adaptive cruise control 209
Area View System 203 Auto Hold function 776
connecting....139
cruise control 204 drives attraction monitor 29
drowsiness monitor....26
Emergency Assist 228
Index
| emergency broking (Front Assist) | 217 |
| front camera | 201 |
| front radar | 200 |
| general notes | 193 |
| Hill Hold Control (HHC) | 188 |
| lane decarture warning (Slice Assist) | 229 |
| park assist Plus | 239 |
| peripheral view system (Top View Camera) | 251 |
| PreCash system | 51 |
| predictive speed adjustment | 214 |
| rear park assist | 242 |
| rear radar | 203 |
| road signs detection system | 30 |
| safety advice | 199 |
| side radars | 200 |
| speed limiter | 205 |
| speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment | 207 |
| switching off | 199 |
| system limits | 159 |
| Trailer assist | 233 |
| Travel Assist | 223 |
| byte pressure monitor indicator | 386 |
| byte pressure monitoring | 388 |
| ultrasound sensors | 203 |
| axial start | 360 |
| attribal warning | |
| lights | 133 |
| unbuckled seat belt | 46 |
| Warning and control lamps | 11 |
| Auto Hold | 250 |
| Auto Hold function | 236 |
| Auto Lock (central locking) | 104 |
| Auto Unlock | 104 |
| Automatic car wash | 395 |
| disconnecting the Auto Hold function | 230 |
| Automatic dispel beam headlight control | 132 |
| Automatic gearbox | |
| control lamp | 183 |
| downhill assistant | 188 |
| driving tips | 185 |
| launch-control program | 186 |
| selector level positions | 183 |
| steering wheel with shift paddles | 184 |
| luptronic | 194 |
| Automatic parking system | 243 |
| angles parking | 246 |
| description | 244 |
| leaving a parking space (only when parallel parked) | 247 |
| parallel parking | 248 |
| parking conditions | 246 |
| support properly | 245 |
| Auditory heating | |
| activate | 160 |
| connecting | 158 |
| electricity consumers | 161 |
| programming | 160 |
| radio-operated remote control | 158, 259 |
| special characteristics | 161 |
| switching off | 158 |
| usage instructions | 161 |
| Average fuel consumption | 16 |
B
| Background lighting | 140 |
| Backrest of the rear seat | |
| folding | 125 |
| raise | 125 |
| Bag hooks | 281 316 |
| Battery | 100 |
| Before starting the vehicle | 42 |
| Delt force limiter | 50 |
| Belt lighting | 50 |
| Ricycle carrier | |
| fitting onto the coverable tow hook | 327 |
| max. load rating | 327 |
| Biodiesel | 333 |
| Blown bulbs | |
| change a bulb | 351 |
| Bomnet | |
| opening and closing | 354 |
| Brake fluid | 360 |
| Brakes | 182 |
| brake fluid | 360 |
| brake servo | 193 |
| braking assistant | 194 |
| electronic parking brake | 234 |
| new brake parts | 193 |
| Braking assistant | 194 |
| Braking system | |
| warning lamp | 154 |
| Brands | 285 |
| Ureek recommendation | |
| see Driver attention monitor | 28 |
| see Drawiness monitor | 26 |
| Breakaway | 169 |
C
| Camera | |
| cleaning the vehicle | 31 |
| Catalytic converter | 135 |
| Central armrasts | 130 |
| Centrallocking | 104 |
| anti-theft alarm | 108 |
| auto-locking due to involuntary opening | 104 |
Index
central locking button 105
emergency lock.... 111
Keyless Access system 101
remote controlkey 105 ctane index /diesel fuelt 333
Change a bulb 351
Change the wiper blades.... 338
Changing a wheel....381
raise the vehicle.... 384
subsequent work....386
Wheel nuts 505 Changing parts 400
Changing the battery
of the vehicle key....100
Charging cable
for charging stations (AC) 95 for sockets 95
For sockets....90 Charging socket....83.84
Charging the high-voltage battery
charging cable 05
charging limits 92
charging locations....93 charging modes....81
charging process display 86
emergency unlocking....89
programmed charging 93
squirrel (AC) 85 squirrel (DC) 84
troubleshooting 87
Check lists
requirements for Android Auto ™ ..... 275
requirements for Apple CarPlay 275
Reverse Ass: (near view).... 216 Childlock
powerwindows....116
Child seats
attachment systems....64
group classification....62
I-Size 65 ISOFIX 45
safety instructions....63
securing with the seat belt....71
Top Tether system.... 68,6
Cleaning high usage on alpomium provirus
high pressure cleaning equipment.... 592 suncial care 300
special care 306 vehicle exterior 306
vehicle Interior 39
washing the vehicle 395
Clocks set the time 74
Set the time....24 Closing 10
bermet 35
near id....11
sunroof 11
Windows....11 Clutch Clamp 187
Coming Home 130
Connectivity
WLAN access point 272
Control and warning strips
12-well battery .... 370 ACC .... 214
adaptive cruise control 210
AdBlue ® 335
air conditioning....157
airbag system....52
airbags 57 anti-lock brake system ABS 197
automatic gearbox 182
braking system....154
cruise control 205
cruise control (GRA) 204
drive system 176
electric mode 170 electromechanical steering 190
emissions control....337
engine coolant 20
engine management....337
engine oil....365
ESC 127 ESC (in Secret) menela 106
ESC in spot mode 196 ESC eff. 196
fuel reserve....15
high-voltage battery 87
high-voltage system 87
Hill descent control....189 Lone Assist....222, 225
lane departure warning (Side Assist) ..... 230
lights 130
parking brake 235
particulate filter 336,32 press on the brake 709
refueling 19,331
remote control (independent heating) 158, 159
seat belt 46
speed limiter 206
Start-Stop 179 steering columns 190
TCS 197
tow hook....320
tyre pressure monitor system.... 388
wipers....142 water is the viewing school....13
Controls on the steering wheel 12. Convenience close function
sunroof 120
Index
Convenience open function
sunroof....120
Cooling 146
check the coolant 357
refilling coolant....357
Copyright 285
Cornering light....132
Correct position....45 driven: 67
passenger 44
Cruise central 70%
Cruise control system 204
controllamps....205
operating 205
atquisition ward 728
end 280
s1set 268
CUPRA CONNECT 266
activation....269
desactivate....269
adults 270 local requirements 267
- 2017年1月1日
CUPRA ID 268
Current documentation attached.... 278
D
Dampers of not using the seat belt 47
Data label 412
Data transfer....Zub
Deactivating CUPRA CONNECT services .... 269
Deactivation of the front airbag .... 57
on your own
Receiving
Digital Cockpit....15
Disposal
seat bell tensioners....51
Door handle 110
Door lock....110
Door opening assist (Exit Warning) ..... 257
Doors....109
childlock....111 Fogmill resistance functions....200
downhill assistant 180
Download
over-the-air updates 265
Drawers 260
Drink Holder hottie holder 762
Event 767
in the rear central armrest 260
Drive profile 19
Drive Profile 19
Drive profiles 19
BHK Provisions
See Drive profile selection....190
control | scores 1.07
Driver attention monitor 20
settings 79
system limits....29
troubleshooting....30
warning levels 29
Driving driver
driving on bio-octercodas....107
economical 16%
124,103-74=18.5%
trips abroad 137,160
with the luggage compartment open.....156
with trailer 324
Driving data display 25
Driving mode 192
Driving on flooded roads.... 167
Driving profiles
selecting a profile.... 191
Driving with a loaded vehicle .... 150 Driving with the lungenne unguarant puy 15%
Drowsiness monitor 2
settings....27
system limits 26
troubleshooting....28
Warning levels....2
2017.10.31
Dust and pollen filter 148
Dynamic headlight surge control 13
[Non-Text]
E
e-Call 76
Easy Goan
special characteristics....115
Eco Assist 208
Electric devices....261
electric mode....D6
confrontamps....18
Electronic differential work 106
Electronic immobilizer 173
Electronic parking brake 234
controllamos 235
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 194
[Non-Text]
Index
Emergencies....73
changing a wheel 181
changing the delivery.... 306 engradering vehicle trayiem.... 3/3
hazard warning lights 72
jump leads....340
replace a blown fuse....349
tyre mobility system.... 388 vehicle toolkit.... 370
mergency Assist 228
problems and solutions 229
see Emergency Assist 278
status display 228
Energererel, in-line Azerbaijan System, (Frank Oswald)
activating and deactivating 220
dodge assist....21B
junction assist 219
pedestrian and cyclist recognition ..... 218
system limitations 219
temporarily deactivating ..... 221
turn-off assist 218
warnings 237
Emergency braking warning....72
troubiesheating 77
emergency call service 76
Emergency locking of the front passenger door
Emergency opening
driver's door....110
regis 115
front passenger door....111
Emissions control system
AdBlue ® 335
catalytic converter....535
particulate filter 334
nergy management 373
Engine
noise....171
running in....167
contact) 173
Start-Step system....179
Engine and ignition
emergency start 173
preheat the engine....171 starting the engine....172
starting the opening with Press 5. Price 272
switching off the engine 172
Engine compartment
battery 365
engine all....363
opening and closing.... 334
safety instructions.... 352 eine progress.... 711
Engine Coolark.... 355 Chuck the jaw.... 357
exterior 22
specifications....355
tank (hybrid vehicles) 357
temperature indicator 20
Engine failure
control lamp....33/
Engine management 355
CounRx S41p....
Engine oil
change 502,365
check the oil level....363
diestick 363
inspection service 362
maintenance frequencies....362
refill....363
specifications.... 362
controllings 365
Engine specifications....414
Environment
ecological driving.... 164
environmental compatibility 4.04
refueling 337
Environmental Up
refueling 330
ESC
connecting and disconnecting.... 195
electronic stability control (ESC)....194
Sport mode 196 Event Data Operations 467
Exhaust gases 355
Exit Warning 257
riting a parking space
with the automatic paning system ..... 247
Extensorlighting
Exterior micro
driving with a trailer....521
folding 145
Finished 145
settings....145
(五) 2014年1月1日
Index
External audio sources
adapting the playback volume 284
Fuel tank cap
opening and closing 331
Fuel tank flap
opening and closing 331
applications 274
settings 274
symbols 274
FULL LED headlights 352
Fuses 346 value spread 340
fuse box 348, 349
preparations for replacing fuses....349
recognise blown fuses 349
replaces 349
。
G
Gear change
manual gearbox....182
Gear Indication 164
Glass temp/ww.bfoni 12 st
Glove compartment 759
[Non-Text]
H
Hartners 261
Hazard warning lights 72
HDC
see Hill descent control (HDC) 189
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 47
Headlight Range Control 237 Headlights
changes a bulb 351
trips abroad 137
Headrest 125
adjust 127
removing....128
HHC
see Hill Hold Control (HHC) 189
High-voltage battery
care....80
charging limits 92 growing previous 75
charging settings in the infotainment system 89
general settings 22
safety instructions 78
warning lettering....79
High-Voltage battery charging cable ..... 94 Util Descent Control (WBC)
in Belize, Canada (ABC)
Hill Hold Central (HIC) 18
Hybrid drive
battery level indicator 19
electric mode 176
Hybrid mode 176
operating modes 176 switching on the drive system 176
system power indicator 20
vehicle sound 178
|
i-Sizc 65
Identification of fuels 357
measures for p: 2017
inertia mode 185
Information call....力
Index
| Infrotainment | 278 |
| adapt menus | 284 |
| Android AutoTM | 275 |
| Apple CarPlay | 275 |
| assist systems and vehicle settings | 38 |
| before first use | 278 |
| Clean | 285 |
| connecting and disconnecting | 283 |
| Customise | 284 |
| customised menus | 284 |
| departure menu | 41 |
| draw-down menu | 286 |
| exciting functions | 283 |
| function buttons | 36 |
| help | 35 |
| internal configuration | 37 |
| Internet access | 275 |
| Media mode | 294 |
| migration | 297 |
| operating | 283 |
| overview and controls | 281 |
| Radio mode | 290 |
| safety instructions | 278 |
| share a WLAN connection | 272 |
| sound settings | 284 |
| system settings | 284 |
| technical data | 285 |
| telephone interface | 304 |
| tutorial | 35 |
| vehicle information | 40 |
| WLAN | 272 |
| Infotainment systemsee Infotainment | 35 |
| Inspection | 362,397 |
| Inspection reminder | 25 |
| Inspection service | 362 |
| Installing software | |
| over the air updates | 260 |
| Instrument cluster | 15 |
| date and time | 24 |
| digital (Digital Cockpit) | 16 |
| service intervals display | 25 |
| status display | 21 |
| warning and information messages | 24 |
| Instrument cluster display | 16, 21 |
| Hybrid vehicles | 26 |
| Instrument cluster fighting | 138 |
| Instrument panel | |
| symbols | 11 |
| unit with the multifunction steering wheel | 14 |
| warning and control lamps | 11 |
| Interior mirror | |
| anti-dazzle | 144 |
| Interior monitoring and the anti-low system | |
| actioner | 109 |
| ISOFIX | 65 |
| ISOFIX system | 65 |
| J | |
| lack | 338 |
| position points | 384 |
| jump leads | 340 |
| jump start | 240 |
| description | 342 |
| jump leads | 340 |
| jump start connection point | 360 |
| K | |
| Key switch | 57 |
| Keyless Access | |
| Press & Drive | 169 |
| starting the engine | 171 |
| troubeshooting | 103 |
| unlocking and locking the vehicle | 101 |
| Keys | |
| changing the battery | 100 |
| Instructions for the driver (mechanical contact) | 173 |
| pull out the key blade | 89 |
| remote control | 98 |
| spore key | 98 |
| synchronise | 100 |
| unlock and lock | 105, 110 |
| vehicle key | 98 |
| Lane Assist | 221 |
| control and warning lamp | 222 |
| controll lamot | 223 |
| Lane Assist system | 221 |
| Lane change assist | 226 |
| Lane departure warning (Side Assist) | |
| control lamp | 230 |
| driving situations | 231 |
| how 7 parts | 223 |
| lane change Plus | 230 |
| light indication | 230 |
| system limitations | 223 |
| Launch control (automatic transmission) | 186 |
| Leaving home | 150 |
| Legal provisions | 259 |
| Licenses | 285 |
Index
Lift the vehicle 384
Light Assist 135
133
AUTO....132
background lighting 140
change a bulb....351
coming home .... 136 controlling.... 177
control panel 152
cornering light....132
daytime running lights....133
Fog light 132 Inad libit range control 277
instourant lighting 139
interior lights....138
leaving home 136
main beam assist....135
readings 139
switching on and off.... 132
troubleshooting....138
turn signal lever 134
Loading the vehicle
fastening rings 314
luggage compartment 311
positioning the load 311
positioning the luggage 311
roof carrier system.... 318
disrael 325 transporting for transporting low objects 376
ock and unlock 101
in the locking cylinder 110
with the central locking button....106
Luggage compartment.... 112, 311
electric opening and closing.... 113
emergency unlocking....118
features of the electric rear lid 114
luggage compartment lighting.... 138
net bag 315
opening and closing controlled by sensors (Easy
Open! 113
store the rear shelf. 313
variable luggage compartment floor....313
aggage compartment floor....313
regare net
logage compartment.... 32
the support.....24
4
1
dün behmäßist....13
ain team headlight lever....134
affluence
adaptive cruise control 714
clutch....187
PreCrash system....52
SUNIOR....119
towing device 322
als 16A
edis Morle 20%
equipment 295
symbols 295
emory function....129
icronber: clean.... 397
settings 270
Mirrors....143
adjusting the exterior mirrors....145
anti-vazzle 144
ability Service 304
multimedia....276,290
favourtes....295
play....255
select source 295
1
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), if the GT contains lines used for stylistic emphasis or as background elements (like ruled paper), the OCR result must ignore them. The line in the GT is clearly a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder for text. Therefore, the OCR should not have output any underscores. Outputting `____` constitutes an error under Rule 2, as it hallucinates placeholder symbols where none are semantically intended. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
navigation 297,300
decrease the navigation map....298
enter an aridress for a mobile destination...300
favourite destinations 301
function: entering destination.... 300
functions....258
Increase the navigation map 258
team usage pattern 303
navigating measurements 297
operating the navigation map 298
recent destinations....300
route details....302
save destination 301
saved data 298 on and destinations 701
SAPED DESTINATION 302 summingness 322
symbols 798
traffic reports 302
updating navigation data 300
use contact details....301
let Bag | Upper compartment 711
Id n is a complex key. 215
Index
| Noise | |
| auxiliary heating | 151 |
| brakes | 195 |
| parking brake | 236 |
| tyras | 375 |
| Number of seats | 44 |
O
| Octane (petrol) | 332 |
| Odometer | 16 |
| total | 22 |
| Oil change | 365 |
| On board toolkit | 558 |
| One-touch signalling function | 134 |
| Cofex previous | 266 |
| Capeen | 104 |
| bonnet | 354 |
| rearlid | 113 |
| sunroof | 119 |
| tank cap | 321 |
| windows | 116 |
| Opening and closing | 104 |
| bomnet | 354 |
| by remote control | 105 |
| doors | 109 |
| in the locking cylinder | 110 |
| rear lid | 112 |
| rear lid with electric opening and closing | 113 |
| surcap | 119 |
| sunshude bind | 121 |
| tank cap | 331 |
| windows | 116 |
| with the central locking button | 106 |
| Operation in winter | |
| diesel | 323 |
| salt per the roads | 145 |
snow chains....380
tyres 379 Original accessories 394
Over-the-air updates 264
download 265
installing software....265 requirements....265
Overview
of warning and control lamps 11
overview (left hand drive).... 9 morning (right hand drive).... 10
view of the vehicle from inside 8
view of the vehicle from the front ..... 5
view of the vehicle from the rear .... 7
Ownership accreditation.... 208
P
Painting the vehicle
care 396
Park 3526 fault 739
operating 241
park assist plus 230
rear park assist 242
see the Automatic Parking System.... 243 sensors and camera clean.... 705
sensors and camera credit.... 358 surroundings warning.... 219
visual indication.... 242
Parking 233
at an single with the reverse assist .... 250 automatic pushway .... 165
with the automatic parking system ..... 246
Parking systems
automatic brake operation.... 237
reverse assist (Rear View Cameral ..... 248
creableshooting 238
Parking ventilation....156
Partial odometer 24
Particulate filter.... 536 Rudals.... 4/1-16/
Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) ... 251
menus....253
modes....253
special characteristics....252
disse instructions....253
additives 332
particulate filter 33
refuelling....332
Places with risk of explosion.... 305
Places with special regulations....905 Power meter....20
Power sockets 281
trailer 322
Power windows....116
Pracrash system....51 Front Assist monitoring system....52
maltfunction 52
selecting the drive profile....52
status display 52
Predictive speed adjustment....214
activation 215 driving 215
limitations 215
troubleshooting....216
Preheat the engine 171
Press & Drive start just on 163
starting the engine 171
Privacy 270
settings....271
Private emergency call service....73
Index
R
Radar sensors 200
and 230
equipment 291
frequency bands 291
symbols....291
Traffic information (TP) 292
Transstation 291
type of reception.... 291
Radio screen clean 307
Radio telephones 401
Rain and light sensor 142 Rain sensor
function control 145
Side the vehicle 350
near Cross Traffic Alert 256
ear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) 256
Rear 10....112,116
Rear mounting
towing device 328
Rear park assist 242
Rear radar 202
ear View Camera 248
and without water .... 181
educiling.
control lamp 19
Fuelgauge....19
consping the fuel tank flap....237
safety warnings 330
Releasing the seat belt 48
Dennis neutral (indoor/neutral location) 159, 150
amote control key
unlock and lock 105
REPAIR WORK....400
Requirements for Apple CarPlay 275
Rev counter 16.18 Earnings result 249
Reverse assist (Rear View) 248
angle parking 250
connecting and disconnecting....249
cross traffic....250
requirements....249,250
shown on the display 2/49
usage instructions....250
Road signs
shown on the display 30
Road signs detection system....30 brev it weeks....50
limited operation 31
settings 31
troubleshooting....32
warning levels 37
windscreen damage .... 31
fix the crossbars....318
Roof carrier system 317
Rotation direction
tyres 386
inning in new brake pads 150
new engine....15/
new tyres 375
S
Safe 106,173
Safe driving 42 Safe security custom 106
troubleshooting....107
Safety
child safety....61 child seats....81
safe driving....42
Safety equipment 42 Safety instructions 278
central airbag....58
head-protection airbags 60
seat belt tensioners....51 side airbags....58
using child seats 63
using seat belts .... 45 Save fuel
inertia moda 186
Screen
clean....285 Seat belt tensioners....50
controllamp 55
Seat bells adjusting the seat belt 40
adjustment..../6
automatic retractor, tensioner and belt force
limiter 95 controllama 46
maintenance and disposal of seat belt
tensioners....51 protective function....45
purpose 53
safety instructions 46
unfastened....47 Seat heating....154
(1) AD = BD = 1
Index
Seats 124
adjusting the headrests....127
armrest 130 (burkrest) of the year seat 125
electric settings 125
fitting the headrest 128
heating....154
incorrect positions....44 manual adjustment....124
Manual adjustment....124 memory functions....378
memory function 129 number of seats 44
removing the headrest....126
election of drive profile
characteristics....190
Selective catalytic reduction....333
electron level (automatic transmission)
positions....263 selling the vehicle....269
service
Digital Maintenance plan 397
inspection.... 392
proof of Service 352
service packages 394
service works....352 Items of use....8918
Service interval indicator 24
service intervals....25
ervice Menu
service interval indicator 24
vehicle identification number 24
Service Monthly 394
et of vehicle keys 98 hill paricles autocratic (caraguinsipin) 104
Snow chains 380
ound settings 284
Spare parts 400
Spare wheel....381
Special characteristics
Android Auto ™ 276 Apple CatPlay 275
high pressure cleaning equipment ..... 326
peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . 252
tow start 343
towing....343
Trailer mode 324 Expense limites 76%
speedinifer 205 control lamps 206
indication on display 205
operating....205
Speed limiter with proactive speed adjustment
207
treadishooting....208 Spread symbol....375
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer
combination....325
Start button 169
Start the engine by towing.... 345
special characteristics.... 342
Start-Stop....1/9
start: Stop system displacement and growth unusually 182
driver indications 181
how it works....179
lamps....179
stopping and starting the engine.... 179
the engine does not turn off.... 1/9
the engine starts by itself .... 179
Stationary air conditioning....151 activain....162
connection 162
PROGRAMME 162
switching off....162
Status display
adaptive cruise control.... 210
date and time 24 dress from brought and near friend press 22
Drive Profile 150
Eco Assist 208
Emergency Assist....228
Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)
Assist 217
instrument cluster 21 odometer 22
outside temperature....22
ProCrash system....52
road signs 30
selector lever positions.... 183 service intervals.... 25
service intervals 25 good limitar 705
speed friction 205 speed warning 22
Travel Assist 224
tyre pressure monitoring.... 386
warning and information messages.... 24
Steering
controllamp 150
electromechanical steering....169
steering assist....190 Sugerrim-grain....190
Steering wheel 130
adjust....123
controls 122
heating....156
shift poddies (automatic transmission) .... 184
Steering wheel heating 156 Sprange compartment 250
drawers 260
glove compartment....259
Index
on-board documentation....259
other object holders.... 201
storage compartment accessories ave Slurry, 250
Storage of accident data 402
Storing objects 311
fastening rings 316
loading the trailer 323
net bag 315
positioning the load 511
posturing the image....517 roof cardies....217
roof carrier system 317,318
trailer....319
trailer mode....324
trapdoor for transporting long objects ..... 316
Sun protection 146
Sunroof 119
anti-trap function.... 120
convenience open/close function ..... 120
malfunction....119 synthetic kind....121
witching off
telephone 305
Symbols
size warning and control hands.... 11
(1) Stock Market Index 2.04
T
all ligands
change a bulb 351
echnical data
engine specifications.... 414
vehicle dimensions 417
vertical load on the tow hitch.... 319
weights 412
Technical modifications.... 400
connection 306
contacts 308
favourites....305
pairing a mobile phone....306
phone book.... 506 and messages.... 428
speed dial buttons 309
switching off....305
to call....307
Telephone interface 304
equipment 304 pieces with risk of aviation 725
parks 4th and 6 Exploration...... 305 symbols 37A
True
adjust 24
Tiptronic (automatic transmission)....184
Tap Tether....68,45
Tap Father System .... 68, 69 Tap View System
on the Neighborhood View System / Top View
Cupera)
Тотгии
wheel nuts 386
Touch screen 281
Tobcn zones 282 Towashis 371-372
Towbrook
control
unlickring electrically 326
cswable loads
loading the trailer 323
Toying device
fitting a bicycle carrier.... 327
fitting later 320
Inflüsse: 522
To-do the vehicle
emergency towing....345
front towing eye 346
prior steps....345
near towing eye 347
special characteristics 545
(1) 2017
towinga prohibited 345
Traction control 194
Traffic information....302
Traffic information (IP) 292
raffic programme
see TP [traffic information] 292
adjusting the headlights 324
anti-thrift alarm 322
connecting 122
exterior mirrors 321
hitching 322
LED tail lights 321,322
loaring 323
malfunction 322
power socket 322
retrofitting a towing bracket ..... 128
stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer
combination....325
(£m) 321,322
2014.13.15
to be able to see
Trailer assist....253
trailer mode 324
unlocking the low hook electrically ..... 326 vertical load on the low hitch ..... 310, 323
water assist 253
automatic brake operation....254
check list....254
malfunction 253
operating 254 see Trailer Assist 253
troubleshooting....256
raler moda
see Trailer 319
transportation of children....61
Travel Assist 223
connecting and disconnecting.... 225
lane change assist.... 229
problems and solutions 227 see Travel Assist 223
status display 224
rips abroad 169
headlights 137
roubleshooting
ADJGE TM 595 DSG newbys 187
Emergency Assist 220
Start-Stop system....181
Trallier asalst 736
Travel Assist....227 sum signal waves....274
turning off the lights 152
turning on the lights....132
ype mobility 380
yre mobility set 388
Tyre mobility system....388
check after 10 minutes....390
components 389 inflation the time 380
sealing the tyre 389
Tyre pressure....377
Tyre pressure monitor system.... 188
Tyre pressure monitor systems
(2) pressure monitor indicator.... 396 Ivan vanfiln.... 368
Tyre profile.... 378 Tyre repair.... 380
Tyre repair kit 368
Tyre tread depth 378
Tyre wear....378
Tyres 375
accessories .... 375 change.
change 382 directional tread pattern 375, 386
for winter 379
foreign objects inserted....375
new tyres 376
snow chains 380 speed symbol 275
speed symbol 375 tread wear indicators 378
bre pressure 572
useful life 377
[Non-Text]
U
Ultrasonic services 203
Unigark and lock 101
by remote control....105
doors 109
with the central locking button....106
USB 276
USB port 276 User administration 271
(3) Credit Intrinsic...... 212
V
Vanity mirror 1/46
Variable luggage compartment floor.... 313
Vehicle
data label 412 engine specifications A1A
identification data 412
interior view....8
lending or selling 269
overview (left hand drive) 9
overview (light bar; tarky).... 10
101
vehicle ID number 412
view from behind....
view from the front....6
Vehicle care
Wiper Blade Service position .... 438 Vehicle compensation .... 30
Vehicle conservation products 39%
Vehicle dimensions 417
Vehicle information 40
Vehicle location.... 265
Vehicle seats 24
Vehicle Sarrings....31 Vehicle only....179
Vehicle tool kit 236
Ventilation....148
Vertical load on the tow hitch 319
loading the trailer 323
Voice control
Android Auto ™ 276 Sidi ™ Apple Corp ™ 275
Volume
set for external audio sources.... 284
Index
W
Warning lamps
Overview....1. Warning triangle....72
Warranty 402
Washing the vehicle clearing the exterior 396
high pressure cleaning equipment ..... 395
interior clearing....397
special data 518 special characteristics 215
Weights 412
Wheel balance....377
anti-theft device 363
caps 363
loosen 383 100% 386
Wheelwrench 338
Wheels
change....301 changing....206
new wheels....3/6
removing and attaching 365
snow charts 350 scrum wheel 381
wheel nuts....379
Window controls....116 Window work system....264
Window washer system .... 302 Window washer water
check 361
filing quantifies 361 well 361
Windows....116
anti-trap function....116
automatic opening/closing 117 automatic operation 117
Windscreen washer....141
/indscreen wipers control items 142
control lamps 14.3 functions 14.2
lift the blade 330
rain and light sensor 142
reposition the blade 338
special characteristics 141
wiper lever....141
Winter conditions
sanro 129 trales 310
Winter tyres 379
Wiper and rear window wiper blades
cleaning the vehicle 339,396
replication....the
WLAN 272
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and modes. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding scope, equipment and techniques may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook
All texts illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying of translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act
All rights on changes are reserved.
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15/22/25
CUPRA FORMENTOR
English
Edition: 11.25
5H012/2CBS
5FF012720BS
- THANK YOU FOR YOUR CONFIDENCE
- CUPRA
- WARNING
- TABLE OF CONTENTS
- ABOUT THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL
- DANGER
- CAUTION
- NOTICE
- FOR THE SAKE OF THE ENVIRONMENT
- NOTE
- OWNER'S MANUAL AND EXPLANATORY VIDEOS OF SOME FUNCTIONALITIES
- DIGITAL MANUAL IN THE INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 1)
- VALID FOR THE DUTCH MARKET
- GENERAL VIEWS OF THE VEHICLE
- FRONT EXTERIOR VIEW
- DRIVING ASSISTANCE SENSORS >>> PAGE 199
- A LEVELS CONTROL
- B BONNET
- © TOWING THE VEHICLE
- D CHARGING SOCKET (HYBRID VEHICLES)
- REAR EXTERIOR VIEW
- INTERIOR VIEW
- OVERVIEW (LEFT HAND DRIVE)
- OVERVIEW (RIGHT HAND DRIVE)
- CONTROL LAMPS
- DRIVER INFORMATION
- CONTROL AND WARNING LAMPS
- WARNING WITH PRIORITY 1
- WARNING WITH PRIORITY 2
- LAMPS WITH OTHER COLOURS
- INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
- SYM- BOL
- MEANING
- INTRODUCTION
- DIGITAL COCKPIT
- INFORMATION PROFILES
- CLASSIC AND DYNAMIC VIEW
- INFORMATION THAT MAY BE DISPLAYED IN THE CENTRAL AREA OF THE DIGITAL COCKPIT REV COUNTER
- CUPRA VIEW
- REV COUNTER
- SPEED LIMITER 1)
- FUEL GAUGE
- BATTERY LEVEL INDICATOR
- COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
- ENGINE COOLANT
- CONTROL AND WARNING LAMPS (VALID FOR HYBRID VEHICLES)
- POWER METER
- AVAILABILITY OF BOOST ON SCREEN
- STATUS DISPLAY
- POSSIBLE INDICATIONS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
- DOORS, BONNET AND REAR LID OPEN
- SELECTOR LEVER POSITIONS
- OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
- GEAR-CHANGE RECOMMENDATION
- ODOMETER
- SPEED WARNING FOR WINTER TYRES
- LOW CONSUMPTION DRIVING
- DRIVING DATA DISPLAY
- CHANGE FROM ONE DISPLAY TO ANOTHER
- CHANGING MEMORY
- DELETE JOURNEY DATA PRESETS
- SELECT THE INSTRUCTIONS
- OIL TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
- WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES
- PRIORITY 1 WARNING (IN RED)
- PRIORITY 2 WARNING (IN YELLOW)
- REFERENCE TO INFORMATION IN THE OWNER'S MANUAL
- INFORMATION MESSAGE
- ACCESSING WARNINGS AND INFORMATION
- DATE AND TIME
- SETTING THE TIME ON THE INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
- SERVICE MENU
- OPEN THE SERVICE MENU
- RESTART THE SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR
- RESET THE OIL SERVICE
- IDENTIFYING LETTERS ON ENGINE (LDM)
- NEXT SERVICE
- SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
- SERVICE INTERVALS
- INSPECTION REMINDER
- SERVICE DUE
- CONSULT A SERVICE NOTIFICATION
- RESETTING THE SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR
- DROWSINESS MONITOR
- OPERATING CONDITIONS
- SYSTEM LIMITS AFFECTING THE DROWSINESS MONITOR
- RESTARTING THE DROWSINESS MONITOR
- DRIVING WITH THE DROWSINESS MONITOR
- CONNECTION AND DISCONNECTION
- SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT
- CONCEALING MESSAGES VIA THE MULTI-FUNCTION STEERING WHEEL
- DROWSINESS MONITOR WARNING LEVELS
- DROWSINESS MONITOR WARNING - LEVEL 1
- DROWSINESS MONITOR WARNING - LEVEL 2
- DROWSINESS MONITOR WARNING - LEVEL 3
- TIME-RELATED INFORMATION
- TROUBLESHOOTING
- DRIVER ATTENTION MONITOR
- SYSTEM LIMITS AFFECTING THE DRIVER ATTENTION MONITOR
- DRIVING WITH THE DRIVER ATTENTION MONITOR
- DRIVER ATTENTION MONITOR SYMBOL
- THE AVAILABILITY OF THE DRIVER ATTENTION TOR IS RESTRICTED
- THE DRIVER ATTENTION MONITOR IS AVAILABLE
- ROAD SIGNS DETECTION SYS- TEM
- SHOWN ON THE DISPLAY
- DISPLAY OF ROAD SIGNS
- ROAD SIGNS DETECTION SYSTEM
- NO ENTRY SIGN
- LIMITED OPERATION
- DRIVING WITH THE SPEED WARNING FUNCTION
- ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING THE AUDIBLE WARNING
- ADJUSTING THE WARNING THRESHOLDS
- ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION OF THE SPEED CHANGE WARNING TONE
- CONCEALING FAULT MESSAGES VIA THE MULTIFUNCTION STEERING WHEEL
- TRAILER MODE
- SPEED WARNING FUNCTION WARNING LEVELS
- INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OPERATION
- SPEED WARNING - LEVEL 1
- SPEED WARNING - LEVEL 2
- ADVANCED ROAD SIGN RECOGNITION IS AVAILABLE
- OUTSIDE THE OPERATING REGION FOR ADVANCED ROAD SIGNS RECOGNITION
- SPEED WARNING SYSTEM PARTIALLY DEACTIVATED
- INSTRUMENT PANEL MENUS
- OPERATION USING THE MULTIFUNCTION STEERING WHEEL
- SELECT A MENU OR AN INFORMATIVE DISPLAY
- CHANGING MENU SETTINGS
- BACK TO MENU SELECTION
- INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION AND DISPLAYS
- GENERAL OPERATING INFORMATION
- HOW TO MOVE THROUGH THE DIFFERENT MENUS AND SELECT THEM
- TUTORIAL
- HELP
- EXPLANATION OF THE FUNCTION BUTTONS
- TOP PART OF THE SCREEN
- BOTTOM PART OF THE SCREEN
- SEGMENTS
- INITIAL CONFIGURATION WIZARD
- ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS AND VEHICLE SETTINGS
- ASSISTANTS
- PARKING
- SMART ASSISTANTS
- DRIVER ALERTS
- VEHICLE
- VEHICLE INFORMATION
- DEPARTURE MENU
- HIDE
- ADJUST
- SAFETY
- SAFE DRIVING
- SAFETY FIRST
- BEFORE DRIVING
- FACTORS INFLUENCING SAFETY
- SAFETY EQUIPMENT
- CORRECT SITTING POSITION OF VEHICLE OCCUPANTS
- VALID FOR ALL VEHICLE OCCUPANTS
- THE FOLLOWING ALSO APPLIES TO THE DRIVER
- FOR THE PASSENGER, THE FOLLOWING APPLIES
- NUMBER OF SEATS
- RISKS OF SITTING IN AN INCORRECT POSITION
- SEAT BELTS
- WHEN THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION
- IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USE OF SEAT BELTS
- SEAT BELT BUCKLED INDICATION
- LIGHTS UP RED
- HEAD-ON COLLISIONS AND THE LAWS OF PHYSICS
- FASTENING AND UNFASTENING THE SEAT BELT
- FASTENING THE SEAT BELT
- RELEASING THE SEAT BELT
- ADAPTING THE POSITION OF THE BELT WEBBING TO YOUR SIZE
- AUTOMATIC RETRACTOR, TENSIONER AND BELT FORCE LIMITER
- AUTOMATIC BELT RETRACTOR
- SEAT BELT TENSIONER
- PRECRASH SYSTEM
- REVERSIBLE BELT TENSIONING (PROACTIVE OCCUPANT PROTECTION)
- BELT FORCE LIMITER
- MAINTENANCE AND DISPOSAL OF SEAT BELT TENSIONERS
- HOW IT WORKS
- BASIC FEATURES
- IN ADDITION TO FRONT ASSIST
- IN ADDITION TO SIDE ASSIST
- IN ADDITION TO THE EMERGENCY ASSIST SYSTEM
- ACTIVATING THE PRECRASH SYSTEM
- DRIVE PROFILE SELECTION SETTINGS
- AIRBAG SYSTEM
- WHY IS IT SO IMPORTANT TO WEAR A SEAT BELT AND TO SIT CORRECTLY
- DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRBAG SYSTEM
- THE AIRBAG SYSTEM COMPRISES THE FOLLOWING MODULES (DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT)
- THERE IS A FAULT IN THE SYSTEM IF THE CONTROL LAMP
- THE AIRBAG SYSTEM IS NOT TRIGGERED IF
- AIRBAG ACTIVATION
- ACTIVATION FACTORS
- THE FOLLOWING AIRBAGS ARE TRIGGERED IN SERIOUS HEAD-ON COLLISIONS
- IN AN ACCIDENT WITH AIRBAG ACTIVATION
- AIRBAG SYSTEM CONTROL LAMPS
- LIGHTS UP ON THE ROOF CONSOLE
- FRONT AIRBAGS
- ACTIVATE AND DEACTIVATE FRONT PAS- SENGER AIRBAG
- DEACTIVATE AND ACTIVATE THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG 1)
- CENTRAL AIRBAG
- SIDE AIRBAGS
- HEAD-PROTECTION AIRBAGS
- TRANSPORTING CHILDREN SAFELY
- KNEE AIRBAG
- CLASSIFICATION OF CHILD SEATS
- CHILD SEATS BY WEIGHT GROUP AS PER ECE-R44 AND HEIGHT AS PER ECE-R129
- GROUP AS PER ECE-R44
- CHILD HEIGHT AS PER ECE-R129
- CHILD SEATS BY APPROVAL CATEGORY
- WARNINGS ABOUT FITTING A CHILD SEAT
- IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG
- ATTACHMENT SYSTEMS
- ATTACHMENT SYSTEMS OVERVIEW
- SECURING A CHILD SEAT WITH THE ISO-FIX OR I-SIZE SYSTEM
- USE OF TOP TETHER ON REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS
- RELEASE THE TETHER BELT
- FITTING A CHILD SEAT USING THE SEAT BELT
- IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
- EMERGENCY BRAKING WARNING
- BEHAVIOUR IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENT OR FIRE
- INFORMATION CALL, ASSISTANCE CALL AND EMERGENCY CALL SERVICE
- CONTROL LAMP
- → ASSISTANCE CALL
- I INFORMATION CALL
- TYPES OF EMERGENCY CALL
- PRIVATE EMERGENCY CALL
- STARTING AN EMERGENCY CALL MANUALLY
- AUTOMATIC ACTIVATION OF AN EMERGENCY CALL
- INTEGRATED BATTERY
- EDR DATA TRANSMISSION >>> PAGE 402
- ECALL EMERGENCY CALL SERVICE, REQUIRED BY LAW
- ACTIVATING AN EMERGENCY CALL MANUALLY
- HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY
- SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
- HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LETTERING
- WARNING LETTERING ON THE VEHICLE
- FIG. 56
- CONSERVATION OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY
- CONSERVATION INSTRUCTIONS
- RELIABILITY AND CAPACITY OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY
- VEHICLE PARKING TIMES
- CHARGING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY
- TYPES OF CHARGING
- PROTECTION AGAINST CURRENT LEAKAGE
- IDENTIFICATION OF COMPATIBLE CHARGING INFRASTRUCTURE
- COMPATIBILITY BETWEEN VEHICLES AND CHARGING INFRASTRUCTURE
- INDICATORS >>> FIG. 57
- INDICATORS >>> FIG. 58
- CHARGING WITH ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC)
- FIG. 60, >>> FIG. 61
- CONNECTING THE CHARGING CABLE
- AUTOMATIC START OF THE CHARGING PROCESS
- DURING CHARGING
- INTERRUPTING THE CHARGING PROCESS
- AFTER CHARGING
- CHARGING WITH DIRECT CURRENT (DC)
- AUTOMATIC START OF CHARGING
- CHARGING PROCESS DISPLAY
- CHARGING PROCESS DISPLAYS
- THE LED FLASHES
- WHITE LED
- GREEN LED
- RED LED
- CHARGING SOCKET LIGHTING
- ON
- OFF
- CHARGING PROCESS INDICATOR LAMP
- THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IS NOT WORKING RLY. STOP SAFELY
- AND HV BATTERY: RISK OF FIRE E! STOP SAFELY AND GET OUT IMMEDIATELY. CALL THE EMERGENCY SERVICES
- PROTECTION FUNCTIONS IN THE EVENT OF A FAILURE
- DEEP DISCHARGE OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BAT- DUE TO PROLONGED PARKING TIME
- HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY DISCHARGED
- LOW STATE OF CHARGE IN THE HIGH-VOLTAGE ERY
- RANGE CALCULATION FAULT
- THE CHARGING PROCESS IS NOT POSSIBLE OR HAS BEEN PAUSED
- THE CHARGING CABLE PROTECTION DEVICE DISCONNECTS
- THE CHARGING TIME VARIES
- CHARGING SETTINGS
- EMERGENCY RELEASE OF THE CHARGING CONNECTOR
- UNLOCKING THE CHARGING CONNECTOR
- EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL RELEASE OF THE CHARGING CONNECTOR
- MANUAL RELEASE OF THE CHARGING CONNECTOR
- IMMEDIATE CHARGING
- ADVANCED CHARGING CONFIGURATION
- CHANGING THE CHARGING MODE
- OVERVIEW
- INDICATIONS IN THE CHARGING MAIN MENU
- INSTRUCTIONS FOR PLUGGING IN THE CHARGING CONNECTOR
- CONFIGURATION IN THE SETTINGS MENU
- OPEN THE GENERAL CHARGING SETTINGS MENU
- SETTINGS IN UNKNOWN LOCATIONS
- BATTERY CARE MODE FUNCTION
- SET THE BATTERY CHARGING LIMITS
- MAXIMUM BATTERY CHARGING LEVEL
- MINIMUM CHARGING LEVEL OF THE BATTERY
- EXAMPLES FOR CHARGING WITH ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC)
- SET CHARGING LOCATIONS (SCHEDULE)
- LOCATION DATA
- CREATE A SCHEDULE
- DELETE A SCHEDULE
- SETTINGS
- I NOTE
- DEPARTURE TIME SETTINGS
- SET THE DEPARTURE TIME
- AIR CONDITIONING
- ACTIVATE A DEPARTURE TIME
- DISPLAYS
- CHARGING CABLE
- NOTES ON THE CHARGING CABLE
- NOTES ON CHARGING CONNECTORS AND THE CHARGING CABLE PROTECTION DEVICE
- CLEANING THE CHARGING CABLE
- CHARGING CABLE FOR POWER SOCKETS
- FIG. 70
- CHARGING CABLE INFORMATION
- PROTECTION DEVICE
- SELF-CHECK
- OPERATING DISPLAYS
- DISPLAY >> FIG. 70 MEANING
- SET THE CHARGING CURRENT
- TEMPERATURE CONTROL
- DISPLAY >>> FIG.70 MEANING
- FAULT DISPLAY
- DISPLAY >>> FIG. 70 MEANING
- OPENING AND CLOSING
- SET OF VEHICLE KEYS
- KEY HOUSING
- SPARE KEY
- △WARNING
- ① NOTICE
- PULLING OUT THE KEY BLADE
- CHANGING THE BATTERY
- SYNCHRONIZE THE VEHICLE KEY
- OR
- KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM
- LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH THE KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM
- FIG.77
- CONFIGURING THE KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM
- UNLOCKS THE VEHICLE
- LOCKS THE VEHICLE
- VEHICLE LOCKING WHEN WALKING AWAY
- COMFORT FUNCTIONS
- ALL TURN SIGNALS FLASH FOUR TIMES
- CENTRAL LOCKING
- DESCRIPTION
- SELF-LOCKING SYSTEM TO PREVENT INVOLUNTARY UNLOCKING
- AUTOMATIC LOCKING (AUTO LOCK)
- AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING (AUTO UNLOCK)
- TURN SIGNALS
- ACCIDENTAL LOCK-OUT
- CENTRAL LOCKING SETTINGS
- UNLOCKING AND LOCKING FROM THE INSIDE
- SAFE" SECURITY SYSTEM
- DISABLING THE "SAFE" SECURITY SYSTEM
- SAFE" STATUS
- THE CONTROL LAMP REMAINS ON
- THE TURN SIGNALS DO NOT FLASH
- THE VEHICLE LOCKS AUTOMATICALLY
- WHAT HAPPENS WHEN LOCKING THE VEHICLE WITH A SECOND KEY
- LOCKING THE VEHICLE AFTER AN AIRBAG IS TRIGGERED
- ANTI-THEFT ALARM
- WHEN IS THE ANTI-THEFT ALARM TRIGGERED
- SWITCHING OFF THE ALARM
- DOORS
- INTERIOR MONITORING AND ANTI-TOW SYSTEM
- EMERGENCY UNLOCKING OR LOCKING OF THE DRIVER'S DOOR
- SPECIAL CHARACTERISTICS
- EMERGENCY LOCK OF DOORS WITHOUT LOCK CYLINDERS
- REAR LID
- OPENING AND CLOSING THE REAR LID
- REAR LID WITH ELECTRIC OPENING AND CLOSING
- CLOSING THE REAR LID
- INTERRUPTING OPENING OR CLOSING
- PARTICULAR FEATURES IF TOWING A TRAILER
- AUDIBLE WARNINGS
- MODIFYING AND SAVING THE OPENING ANGLE
- RESETTING AND SAVING THE OPENING ANGLE
- AUTOMATIC PROTECTION AGAINST OVERHEATING
- REAR LID WITH SENSOR-CONTROLLED OPENING AND CLOSING (EASY OPEN)
- UNLOCKING THE REAR LID FROM INSIDE THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
- WINDOW CONTROLS
- SAFETY SWITCH
- CONVENIENCE OPENING AND CLOSING
- ONE-TOUCH OPENING AND CLOSING
- RESETTING THE AUTOMATIC RAISING/ LOWERING FUNCTION
- WINDOW ANTI-TRAP FUNCTION
- SUNROOF
- OPERATING THE GLASS ROOF
- CONVENIENCE FUNCTION TO OPEN OR CLOSE THE SUNROOF
- USING THE DOOR LOCK
- USING THE REMOTE CONTROL
- ANTI-TRAP FUNCTION OF THE PANORAMIC SUNROOF
- CLOSING THE SUNROOF WITHOUT THE ANTI-TRAP FUNCTION
- GLASS ROOF SUN BLIND
- OPENING OR CLOSING THE SUN BLIND
- STEERING WHEEL
- STEERING WHEEL MULTIFUNCTION STEERING WHEEL
- MULTIFUNCTION STEERING WHEEL
- SATELLITE BUTTONS
- STEERING WHEEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT
- SEATS AND HEADRESTS
- FRONT SEATS
- MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF THE FRONT SEATS
- REAR SEATS
- ELECTRIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE FRONT SEATS
- FOLDING DOWN AND RAISING THE REAR SEAT BACKREST
- FOLDING THE BACKREST FORWARDS
- CONVERTING THE TABLE TO A SEAT
- HEADREST
- ADJUSTING THE HEADRESTS
- ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT OF THE HEADRESTS
- REMOVING THE FRONT HEADRESTS
- FITTING THE FRONT HEADRESTS
- REMOVING THE REAR HEADRESTS
- FITTING THE REAR HEADRESTS
- SEAT FUNCTIONS
- MEMORY FUNCTION
- MEMORY BUTTONS
- EASY ENTRY FUNCTION
- FRONT CENTRE ARMREST
- REAR CENTRE ARMREST
- LIGHTS
- VEHICLE LIGHTING
- SIDE LIGHTS
- CORNERING LIGHT FUNCTION
- DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
- MOTORWAY LIGHT
- TURN SIGNAL AND MAIN BEAM LEVER
- COMFORT TURN SIGNALS
- PARKING LIGHT P
- PARKING LIGHT ON BOTH SIDES
- MAIN BEAM ASSIST (LIGHT ASSIST)
- ADVANCED MAIN BEAM ASSISTANT (LED MATRIX)
- SWITCHING ON THE MAIN BEAM ASSIST OR ADVANCED MAIN BEAM ASSIST (MATRIX LED)
- ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS
- SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
- COMING HOME" AND "LEAVING HOME" FUNCTION (EXTERIOR ORIENTATION LIGHTING)
- DRIVING ABROAD
- TURN SIGNAL CONTROL LAMP
- TRAILER TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR CONTROL
- [NON-TEXT]
- SULT IN EXTERNAL LIGHTING
- INTERIOR LIGHTS
- LIGHTING OF THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER, DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS
- INTERIOR AND READING LIGHTS
- READING LIGHT
- FOOTWELL LIGHTING
- BACKGROUND LIGHTING
- WINDSCREEN WIPER AND REAR WINDOW WIPER SYSTEMS
- VISIBILITY
- WIPER FUNCTIONS
- MIRRORS
- ABNORMAL OPERATION OF THE RAIN AND LIGHT SENSOR
- WASHER FLUID LEVEL TOO LOW
- GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
- INTERIOR MIRROR
- ADJUSTING THE EXTERIOR MIRRORS
- SUN PROTECTION
- SUN BLIND
- HEATING, VENTILATION AND COOLING
- ECONOMIC USE OF THE AIR CONDITIONING
- OPERATING THE AIR CONDITIONING WITH VOICE CONTROLS
- PASSENGER RECOGNITION FUNCTION 11
- DUST AND POLLEN FILTER
- AIR VENTS
- CLIMATRONIC CONTROL
- ④ CLIMABAR
- AIR CONDITIONING MENU
- FRONT SUBMENU
- AUTO
- SMART SUBMENU
- REAR SUBMENU
- SETTINGS SUBMENU
- REAR CONTROLS
- TEMPERATURE SELECTION
- AIR RECIRCULATION
- SEAT HEATING
- TURNING ON THE SEAT HEATING
- CONTROLLING SEAT HEATING
- SMART HEATED SEAT
- CASES IN WHICH HEAT SEATING SHOULD NOT BE SWITCHED ON
- STEERING WHEEL HEATING
- AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION
- PARKING VENTILATION
- SWITCHING ON THE STATIONARY VENTILATION
- DISCONNECTING PARKING VENTILATION
- PROGRAMMING A DEPARTURE/TRIP START
- WATER OR WATER VAPOUR UNDER THE VEHICLE
- AUXILIARY HEATING (ADDITIONAL HEATING)
- SWITCHING THE AUXILIARY HEATER ON AND OFF
- SETTING THE DESIRED TEMPERATURE
- THINGS TO NOTE
- RADIO-OPERATED REMOTE CONTROL
- FIG. 120
- CONTROL LAMP ON THE REMOTE CONTROL
- FLASHES QUICKLY APPROX. 2 SECONDS
- IT LIGHTS UP FOR APPROX. 2 SECONDS
- FLASHES FOR AROUND 5 SECONDS
- CHANGING THE BATTERY OF THE RADIO-OPERATED REMOTE CONTROL
- RANGE
- PROGRAMMING THE AUXILIARY HEATER
- STATIONARY AIR CONDITIONING
- USAGE INSTRUCTIONS
- MANAGING THE STATIONARY AIR CONDITIONING
- SWITCHING OFF THE STATIONARY AIR CONDITIONING IT CAN BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE FOLLOWING WAYS
- PROGRAMMING THE STATIONARY AIR CONDITIONING
- THE STATIONARY AIR CONDITIONING SWITCHES OFF AUTOMATICALLY
- STATIONARY AIR CONDITIONING WITH ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL COMFORT CONSUMERS
- IMMEDIATE ACTIVATION OF THE REAR WINDOW HEATING
- AIR-CONDITIONING THE VEHICLE AFTER UNLOCKING
- AIR CONDITIONING THE VEHICLE DURING HIGH-VOLTAGE CHARGING
- CHECK THE SCHEDULE
- DRIVING
- DRIVING INDICATIONS
- PEDALS
- WEAR SUITABLE FOOTWEAR
- SELECTING THE OPTIMAL GEAR
- ECONOMICAL AND ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY DRIVING
- ACTIVE CYLINDER MANAGEMENT (ACT ® )
- ANTICIPATION WHEN DRIVING
- CHANGING GEAR TO SAVE ENERGY
- AVOID DRIVING AT HIGH SPEED
- REDUCE IDLING TIME
- REGULAR MAINTENANCE
- AVOID SHORT JOURNEYS
- CHECK TYRE PRESSURE
- AVOID CARRYING UNNECESSARY LOADS
- SAVE ELECTRICAL ENERGY
- DRIVING WITH A LOADED VEHICLE
- DRIVING WITH THE REAR LID OPEN
- DRIVING ON FLOODED ROADS
- RUNNING IN
- RUNNING-IN THE ENGINE
- RUNNING IN NEW TYRES AND BRAKE PADS
- FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4DRIVE)
- GENERAL NOTES
- WINTER TYRES
- SNOW CHAINS
- CHANGING TYRES
- OFF-ROADER
- STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINE
- TRIPS ABROAD
- SWITCHING THE IGNITION ON/OFF
- AUTOMATIC IGNITION DISCONNECTION
- AUTOMATIC DEACTIVATION OF THE IGNITION ON VEHICLES WITH THE START-STOP SYSTEM
- SWITCHING OFF THE IGNITION WHEN LEAVING THE VEHICLE, WITH HYBRID DRIVE
- FUNCTION "MY BEAT
- BREATH ALCOHOL IGNITION INTERLOCK DEVICE (BREATHALYSER)
- STARTING THE ENGINE
- TURNING OFF THE ENGINE
- CAR WASH FUNCTION (HYBRID VEHICLES)
- ELECTRONIC IMMOBILIZER
- INDICATIONS FOR THE DRIVER ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
- DRIVING WITH ELECTRIC DRIVE SWITCHING ON THE HYBRID DRIVE SYS- TEM
- DRIVING WITH ELECTRIC DRIVE
- OPERATING MODE SELECTION
- HYBRID MODE ⊖ (USE THE BATTERY'S CHARGE)
- MANUAL CONTROL OF THE BATTERY CHARGE
- VEHICLE SOUND
- START-STOP SYSTEM
- SYSTEM POWER LIMITED
- ELECTRIC MODE IS NOT AVAILABLE
- DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
- CONTROLLAMPS
- THE ENGINE STARTS BY ITSELF
- MANUALLY CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING THE START-STOP SYSTEM
- MANUAL GEARBOX
- CHANGING GEARS
- ENGAGING REVERSE GEAR
- CHANGING TO LOWER GEARS
- DSG AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
- DSG AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS-SION
- P - PARKING LOCK
- R-REVERSE GEAR
- N-NEUTRAL
- D/S - PERMANENT FORWARD DRIVE POSITION
- CHANGING GEAR IN TIPTRONIC MODE
- DRIVING WITH AN AUTOMATIC GEARBOX
- DRIVING DOWNHILL
- STOP/PARK
- STOPPING ON A DOWNHILL
- STARTING OFF UPHILL WITH THE AUTO HOLD FUNCTION
- STARTING OFF UPHILL WITHOUT THE AUTO HOLD FUNCTION
- KICK-DOWN
- LAUNCH-CONTROL PROGRAM
- INERTIA MODE
- ACTIVATION OF THE INERTIA MODE
- START AND CANCEL INERTIA MODE
- THE ENGINE DOES NOT START
- CLUTCH
- FAULTS IN THE GEARBOX
- EMERGENCY MODE
- PARKING LOCK MANUAL RELEASE MECHANISM
- DRIVING ON SLOPES
- HILL HOLD CONTROL (HHC)
- DOWNHILL ASSISTANT
- STEERING
- HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC)
- INFORMATION RELATING TO DIFFERENT VEHICLE PROCESSES
- PROGRESSIVE STEERING
- STEERING ASSIST
- STEERING FAULT
- DRIVE PROFILES
- ENGINE
- ENGINE SOUND
- DYNAMIC CHASSIS CONTROL (DCC)
- ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
- ENGINE TORQUE DISTRIBUTION
- SELECTING A DRIVING PROFILE
- CHARACTERISTICS OF DRIVE PROFILES
- BRAKING SYSTEM
- INFORMATION ABOUT THE BRAKES
- A WARNING
- ① DEFECT IN THE BRAKE SYSTEM
- STOP DRIVING
- BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATOR
- BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEMS
- INFORMATION RELATING TO BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEMS
- ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC)
- TRACTION CONTROL (TCS)
- ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
- BRAKE ASSIST (BAS)
- ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL LOCK (EDS AND XDS)
- MULTI-COLLISION BRAKE
- TRAILER STABILISATION 11
- ELECTROMECHANICAL BRAKE SERVO (EBKV)
- BRAKE BLENDING 1
- CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING THE ESC AND TCS
- DISCONNECTING AND CONNECTING THE ESC IN "SPORT" MODE
- THE ESC OR TCS IS REGULATING
- ESC FAULT
- ASSISTANT SYSTEMS
- SAFETY ADVICE
- SYSTEM LIMITS
- BUTTON FOR THE ASSISTANT SYSTEMS
- DRIVE ASSIST SENSORS AND CAMERAS
- AUTOMATIC DEACTIVATION OF SUPPORTED FUNCTIONS
- INTERIOR CAMERA
- FRONT CAMERA
- REAR RADAR
- ULTRASOUND SENSORS
- AREA VIEW SYSTEM
- CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
- SPEED RANGE
- DRIVING DOWN SLOPES
- SPEED LIMITER
- OPERATING THE CRUISE CONTROL
- CONNECTING
- START REGULATION
- ADJUSTING THE SPEED
- REINSTATING THE CRUISE CONTROL
- FAULT IN THE SPEED REGULATOR
- THE ADJUSTMENT IS INTERRUPTED UNEXPECTEDLY
- SELECTING THE SPEED LIMITER
- OPERATING THE SPEED LIMITER
- SPEED LIMITER WITH PROACTIVE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
- LIMITATIONS OF PROACTIVE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
- ACTIVATE PROACTIVE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
- DRIVING WITH PROACTIVE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
- INTERRUPTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT
- ADJUST THE DISPLAYED SPEED USING THE BUTTONS ON THE MULTIFUNCTION STEERING WHEEL
- SPECIAL CASES
- ECO ASSIST
- ACC - ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
- DOES MY VEHICLE HAVE ACC
- DRIVING WITH ACC
- DRIVER INTERVENTION PROMPT
- RADAR SENSORS
- ACC OPERATION
- FIG. 140
- PROGRAM THE SPEED
- PROGRAM THE DISTANCE SETTING
- SUSPEND REGULATION (STANDBY)
- EXCEEDING THE SPEED REGULATED BY THE ACC
- CHANGING THE DRIVE PROFILE
- SPECIAL DRIVING SITUATIONS
- AVOID UNDERTAKING ON THE RIGHT 4
- OVERTAKING
- STOP&GO FUNCTION
- ACC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
- PREDICTIVE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
- LIMITATIONS OF THE PREDICTIVE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
- ACTIVATING THE PREDICTIVE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
- DRIVING WITH PREDICTIVE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
- INDICATION OF TURNING INTENTION
- INDICATION OF REGULATION IN PROGRESS
- ADJUST THE ANNOUNCED SPEED
- EMERGENCY BRAKE ASSISTANCE SYSTEM (FRONT ASSIST)
- WARNING LEVELS AND BRAKE ASSIST
- SAFETY DISTANCE WARNING
- ADVANCE WARNING
- CRITICAL WARNING
- AUTOMATIC BRAKING
- PEDESTRIAN AND CYCLIST RECOGNITION
- DODGE ASSIST
- LIMITATIONS
- TURN-OFF ASSIST
- JUNCTION ASSIST
- UNRECOGNISED OBJECTS
- OPERATING LIMITATIONS
- MANUAL ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION OF THE FUNCTION
- ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING FRONT ASSIST
- SWITCHING DISTANCE WARNING ON AND OFF
- ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE SWERVE AND TURN ASSIST
- LANE ASSIST SYSTEM
- ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE SWERVE AND TURN AND JUNCTION ASSIST
- TEMPORARILY DEACTIVATING FRONT ASSIST
- LIGHTS UP GREY
- LIGHTS UP GREEN
- LIGHTS UP YELLOW
- SWITCHING THE LANE ASSIST SYSTEM ON OR OFF
- TRAVEL ASSIST
- STEERING WHEEL VIBRATION
- THE SYSTEM BEHAVES DIFFERENTLY THAN EXPECTED
- HOW TO KNOW IF THE VEHICLE IS FITTED WITH TRAVEL ASSIST
- DRIVING WITH TRAVEL ASSIST
- SWITCH ON AND START REGULATION
- INTERRUPTING REGULATION
- SWITCH TO ACC OR SPEED LIMITER
- MAKING OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
- USING THE LANE CHANGE ASSIST
- PREREQUISITES
- TRAVEL ASSIST MUST ALSO BE ACTIVATED
- ACTIVATING LANE CHANGE ASSIST WHILE DRIVING
- CHANGING LANES
- TURNING OFF THE LANE CHANGE ASSIST
- GRIP THE STEERING WHEEL
- TRAVEL ASSIST DISCONNECTS AUTOMATICALLY
- REGULATION IS INTERRUPTED UNEXPECTEDLY
- EMERGENCY ASSIST
- SYSTEM INTERVENTION
- LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (SIDE ASSIST)
- EMERGENCY ASSIST NOT AVAILABLE
- PHYSICAL LIMITATIONS INHERENT TO THE SYSTEM
- DRIVING WITH SIDE ASSIST
- CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING
- LIGHT INDICATION
- IT LIGHTS UP
- FLASHES
- LANE ASSIST PLUS
- DRIVING SITUATIONS
- PARK THE VEHICLE
- PARKING AND MANOEUVRING
- REAR SEAT WARNING
- SWITCHING OFF
- AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION WHEN MOVING OFF
- AUTOMATIC APPLICATION WHEN EXITING THE VEHICLE INCORRECTLY
- ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE
- PROTECTION AGAINST UNINTENTIONAL MOVEMENT
- DEACTIVATE
- ACTIVATE
- EMERGENCY BRAKE FUNCTION
- REQUIREMENTS
- SWITCHING ON AND OFF AUTOMATICALLY
- ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION
- GENERAL INFORMATION ON PARKING SYSTEMS
- AUTOMATIC BRAKE OPERATION
- BRAKING FUNCTIONS
- INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM LAMPS
- WHAT HAPPENS IN THE EVENT OF AUTOMATIC BRAKING
- DEACTIVATING
- PARK DISTANCE CONTROL PLUS (PARK PILOT)
- ERROR MESSAGES
- PARK ASSIST SETTINGS
- OPERATING PARK ASSIST PLUS
- SWITCHING ON AND OFF MANUALLY
- AUTOMATIC ACTIVATION
- TEMPORARY MUTE
- CHANGE FROM REDUCED VIEW TO FULL VIEW
- SWITCH TO THE REVERSE ASSIST IMAGE (REAR VIEW CAMERA "RVC")
- VISUAL INDICATION SEGMENTS
- REAR PARK ASSIST
- TURNING ON PARK ASSIST
- TURNING OFF PARK ASSIST
- INTELLIGENT PARK ASSIST (IPA) AUTOMATIC PARKING SYSTEM
- TOWING DEVICE
- DESCRIPTION OF THE AUTOMATIC PARKING SYSTEM
- PREREQUISITES FOR PARKING
- SELECTING A PARKING TYPE
- SELECTING A PARKING TYPE AFTER PASSING IN FRONT OF THE SPACE
- REVERSE PARALLEL PARKING WITHOUT DRIVING PAST FIRST (TYPE 0)
- SPECIAL CASE OF FORWARD OR REVERSE PARKING INTO A PARKING BAY [6] WITHOUT DRIVING PAST FIRST
- PARKING WITH THE AUTOMATIC PARKING SYSTEM
- REVERSE ASSIST (REAR VIEW CAMERA)
- REVERSE ASSIST FUNCTIONS AND SYMBOLS
- GUIDE LINES
- PERIPHERAL VIEW SYSTEM (TOP VIEW CAMERA)
- POSSIBLE SOLUTION
- TRAILER ASSIST
- VIEWS OF THE PERIPHERAL VISION SYSTEM (MODES)
- TOP VIEWS (BIRD'S EYE VIEW)
- FRONT CAMERA VIEWS (FRONT VIEW)
- SIDE CAMERA VIEWS (SIDE VIEW)
- REAR CAMERA VIEWS (REAR VIEW)
- OPERATING
- REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
- EXIT WARNING
- STORAGE COMPARTMENT
- PRACTICAL EQUIPMENT
- GLOVE COMPARTMENT
- DRINK HOLDER
- FRONT DRINK HOLDERS
- STORAGE COMPARTMENT UNDER FRONT SEATS
- POWER SOCKETS
- OTHER OBJECT HOLDERS
- FIG. 176
- USB POWER SOCKETS
- FLASHING GREEN LIGHT
- FLASHING RED LIGHT
- DISCONNECTION DUE TO OVERHEATING
- 230-VOLT POWER SOCKET
- DO NOT CONNECT NEON LAMPS
- DATA TRANSMISSIONS
- OVER-THE-AIR UPDATE
- PREREQUISITES FOR AN OVER-THE-AIR UPDATE
- DOWNLOAD AND INSTALL AN OVER-THE-AIR UPDATE
- DOWNLOAD COSTS
- DOWNLOAD TIMING
- SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PRE-REQUISITES
- AFTER INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
- CUPRA CONNECT
- SERVICES PORTFOLIO
- CUPRA CONNECT SERVICES
- CUPRA CONNECT SERVICES FOR HYBRID VEHI
- CUPRA CONNECT INDIVIDUAL OPTIONS
- ACTIVATING CUPRA CONNECT AND S-PIN
- S-PIN
- OWNERSHIP AND IDENTITY ACCREDITATION
- BECOME PRIMARY USER
- HOW IS OWNERSHIP ACCREDITED
- IDENTITY ACCREDITATION (CUPRA ID)
- LEGAL PROVISIONS
- FOLLOW-UP SERVICES: ASK ALL OCCUPANTS
- GPS TRACKING: MARKING
- PERSONAL INFORMATION
- PERMANENT TRANSFER OF THE VEHICLE
- DEACTIVATING CUPRA CONNECT SERVICES
- FAULTS
- SERVICE MANAGEMENT
- PRIVACY MODE
- USER ADMINISTRATION
- PRIVACY AND SERVICES SETTINGS
- CONNECTIVITY STATUS INDICATION
- USER ROLE DESCRIPTION
- CREATE AND DELETE A USER ROLE
- CREATE A USER
- DELETE A USER
- WLAN ACCESS POINT
- CONFIGURATION FOR SHARING A CONNECTION OVER WLAN
- FULL LINK
- CONFIGURE INTERNET ACCESS
- ESTABLISHING THE CONNECTION WITH THE WIRELESS NETWORK (WLAN)
- MANUAL SETTINGS
- THE FOLLOWING TECHNOLOGIES MAY BE AVAILABLE
- ACCESS THE FULL LINK MAIN MENU
- CONFIGURE WIRELESS FULL LINK
- BLUETOOTH PAIRING
- APPLICATIONS (APPS)
- FULL LINK SYMBOLS AND SETTINGS
- APPLE CARPLAY™
- ESTABLISH CONNECTION
- DISCONNECTING
- VOICE CONTROL
- ANDROID AUTO™
- WIRED AND WIRELESS CONNECTIONS
- USB CONNECTION
- INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
- FIRST STEPS
- BEFORE FIRST USE
- CURRENT DOCUMENTATION ATTACHED
- OVERVIEW AND CONTROLS
- GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
- OPERATING INDICATIONS
- HOME SCREEN
- MANAGING THE INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
- OPEN THE QUICK GUIDE
- CUSTOMISING THE INFOTAINMENT SYS-TEM
- CONFIGURING CUSTOMISED MENUS
- SETTINGS (SYSTEM AND SOUND)
- MODIFYING SETTINGS
- SOUND SETTINGS
- SYSTEM SETTINGS
- ADJUST THE VOLUME OF EXTERNAL AUDIO SOURCES
- CLEAN THE SCREEN
- TRADEMARKS, LICENSES AND COPY-RIGHTS
- REGISTERED TRADEMARKS AND LICENSES
- COPYRIGHT
- TECHNICAL DATA
- OPTIONAL SOUND SYSTEM
- WI-FI
- CUPRA ASSISTANT
- BLUETOOTH® PROFILES
- SEAT-DEPENDENT SPEECH RECOGNITION
- ACTIVATION WORD AND COMMANDS
- COMMANDS
- STARTING AND ENDING THE CUPRA ASSISTANT
- RADIO MODE
- RADIO EQUIPMENT AND SYMBOLS
- UNIVERSAL SYMBOLS IN RADIO MODE
- SYMBOLS ON THE FM/DAB FREQUENCY BAND
- SYMBOLS ON THE AM FREQUENCY BAND 1
- MENUS IN INTERNET RADIO MODE 1)
- SELECTING, TUNING AND SAVING A STA- TION
- SELECT THE FREQUENCY BAND
- SEARCH AND SELECT A STATION
- SELECT VIA THE FREQUENCY BAND (AM AND FM)
- SELECT FROM THE STATION LIST (AM AND FM/DAB)
- SEARCH AND FILTER STATIONS (INTERNET RADIO)
- SAVE STATIONS ON THE PRESET KEYS
- SPECIAL FUNCTIONS IN RADIO MODE
- TRAFFIC INFORMATION (TP)
- PRESENTATIONS (SLIDESHOW) IN DAB
- ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING THE SLS FUNCTION
- ONLINE RADIO. 11
- STATION LOGOS
- ASSIGN STATION LOGOS MANUALLY
- ADDITIONAL DAB WARNINGS
- ACTIVATE AND DEACTIVATE ADDITIONAL DAB WARNINGS
- RADIO TEXT
- MEDIA MODE
- EQUIPMENT FEATURES AND MEDIA SYMBOLS
- SELECT AND PLAY A MULTIMEDIA
- SOURCE
- SELECT FAVOURITES
- SAVE FAVOURITES
- PLAYING ENTERTAINMENT CONTENT IN THE INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
- VIDEO MODE
- NAVIGATION
- NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS
- LIMITATIONS DURING NAVIGATION
- MANAGING THE NAVIGATION MAP
- MOVING THE MAP
- ZOOMING INTO OR OUT OF THE VIEW
- CHANGE THE 2D / 3D VIEW
- ROTATE THE MAP
- SAVED DATA
- DELETE SAVED DATA
- NAVIGATION FUNCTIONS AND SYMBOLS
- FUNCTIONS
- SYMBOLS ON THE MAP
- OTHER SYMBOLS
- SYMBOLS IN THE ROUTE DETAILS
- POI SYMBOLS (POINTS OF INTEREST)
- TRAFFIC INFORMATION
- NAVIGATION DATA
- ONLINE UPDATING OF NAVIGATION DATA 31
- MANUAL UPDATE OF NAVIGATION DATA
- START ROUTE GUIDANCE
- OPENING THE NAVIGATION MAIN MENU
- SELECT THE DESTINATION AND START NAVIGATION
- SUGGESTIONS
- RECENT DESTINATIONS
- TRAFFIC INCIDENTS
- TRAFFIC FLOW INDICATION
- FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS
- ROUTE DETAILS
- OPEN AND CLOSE THE ROUTE DETAILS
- EDIT ROUTE GUIDANCE
- AVOID TRAFFIC INCIDENTS
- SPLIT SCREEN
- CLOSE THE ADDITIONAL SCREEN
- FUNCTIONS IN THE ADDITIONAL WINDOW
- LEARN USAGE PATTERN
- 360° ELECTRIC OPERATING RANGE DISPLAY
- TELEPHONE INTERFACE
- TELEPHONE INTERFACE EQUIPMENT AND SYMBOLS
- SYMBOLS IN THE MAIN MENU
- SYMBOLS FOR CALLS
- CALL LIST SYMBOLS
- SYMBOLS FOR TEXT MESSAGES
- PLACES WITH SPECIAL REGULATIONS
- PAIRING, CONNECTING AND MANAGING
- PAIR A MOBILE PHONE DEVICE
- CONNECTING A KNOWN MOBILE DEVICE
- SWITCHING THE ACTIVE CONNECTION
- BASIC AND COMFORT TELEPHONY
- BASIC TELEPHONE INTERFACE
- COMFORT TELEPHONE INTERFACE
- CALLING AND SENDING MESSAGES
- MAKE A CALL
- CONTACTS
- CALLS
- DIAL NUMBER
- 5END MESSAGES
- PHONE BOOK, FAVOURITES AND SPEED DIAL BUTTONS
- FAVOURITES
- ASSIGN THE SPEED DIAL BUTTON
- EDIT THE SPEED DIAL BUTTON
- CALL A FAVOURITE
- CONNECTIVITY BOX
- WIRELESS CHARGER
- MOBILE SIGNAL AMPLIFIER
- POSITIONING THE LUGGAGE AND CARGO
- STORING OBJECTS
- GENERAL INFORMATION
- F NOTE
- LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
- REMOVING
- FITTING
- VARIABLE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR
- LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT EQUIPMENT
- NET BAG
- REMOVING THE NET BAG
- BAG HOOKS
- TRAPDOOR FOR TRANSPORTING LONG OBJECTS
- OPENING THE TRAPDOOR
- ROOF CARRIER
- CLOSING THE TRAPDOOR
- SECURING THE CROSSBARS AND THE ROOF CARRIER SYSTEM
- INSTALLING THE BARS
- LOADING THE ROOF CARRIER SYSTEM
- MAXIMUM AUTHORISED CARGO ON THE ROOF
- DISTRIBUTING A LOAD
- CHECK ATTACHMENTS
- VEHICLES WITH THE START-STOP SYSTEM
- VEHICLES WITH DRIVE PROFILE SELECTION
- TRAILER WEIGHT/DRAWBAR LOAD
- TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
- TOWING BRACKET FITTED ON THE BUMPER
- ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
- TRAILER BRAKES
- TOW CABLE
- TRAILER TAIL LIGHTS
- EXTERIOR MIRRORS
- HITCHING AND CONNECTING A TRAILER
- PIN MEANING
- POWER SOCKET FOR TRAILER
- INCLUDE IN THE ANTI-THEFT ALARM
- TRAILERS WITH LED TAIL LIGHTS
- TRAILER LOADING
- TYRE PRESSURE
- DRIVING WITH A TRAILER
- HILL STARTS WITH A TRAILER
- STABILISATION OF THE TOWING VEHICLE AND TRAILER COMBINATION
- INSTALLING A REAR CARRIER SYSTEM OR A BICYCLE RACK ON THE TRAILER HITCH
- FUEL AND EXHAUST GAS CLEANING
- REFUELLING
- SAFETY WARNINGS REGARDING FUEL HANDLING
- HYBRID VEHICLES
- PURGING THE FUEL TANK
- FUEL TYPES
- IDENTIFICATION OF FUELS
- TYPE OF PETROL
- ADBLUE®
- DIESEL
- WATER IN THE FUEL FILTER 11
- WATER IN THE FUEL FILTER
- INFORMATION ABOUT ADBLUE®
- FILL ADBLUE®
- OPERATIONS PRIOR TO REFILLING
- FILL WITH A REFILL BOTTLE
- REFILLING ADBLUE® AT THE DISPENSER
- OPERATIONS BEFORE DRIVING
- ENGINE MANAGEMENT AND EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM
- CATALYTIC CONVERTER
- PARTICULATE FILTER
- MISCELLANEOUS SITUATIONS
- VEHICLE TOOL KIT
- CHANGING THE WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES
- CHANGING THE WIPER REAR WIPER BLADES
- JUMP START
- JUMP LEAD CONNECTION POINT
- JUMP LEAD TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
- STARTING
- DISCONNECTING THE JUMP LEADS
- TOWING THE VEHICLE
- TOW START
- TOWING
- TOW CABLE AND TOW BAR
- TOWING WITH A TOW TRUCK
- INSTRUCTIONS FOR TOW-STARTING AND TOWING
- CASES WHERE TOW STARTING AND TOWING THE VEHICLE ARE NOT PERMITTED
- TOWED VEHICLE (FOLLOWING)
- FITTING THE TOWING EYE
- FUSES
- FUSES INSIDE THE VEHICLE
- OPENING AND CLOSING THE FUSE BOX LOCATED BELOW THE DASH PANEL
- PREPARATIONS
- RECOGNISE A BLOWN FUSE
- CHANGING BULBS
- CHANGE A BULB
- LED TECHNOLOGY LIGHTS
- CHECKING AND REFILLING LEVELS
- ENGINE COMPARTMENT
- WORKING IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
- PREPARING THE VEHICLE FOR WORK IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
- OPENING AND CLOSING THE BONNET
- OPENING THE BONNET
- COOLING SYSTEM
- CLOSING THE BONNET
- FLUIDS AND CONSUMABLES
- COOLANT SPECIFICATIONS
- COOLANT TANK
- CHECK AND REFILL THE COOLANT
- PRELIMINARY STEPS
- CHECK THE LEVEL
- TOPPING UP THE FLUID
- HIGH VOLTAGE SYSTEM COOLANT (VALID FOR HYBRID VEHICLES)
- BRAKE FLUID
- CHECK AND REFILL THE BRAKE FLUID
- CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
- BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
- CHANGING BRAKE FLUID
- ARNING
- WINDSCREEN WASHER RESERVOIR
- ENGINE OIL
- FOR VEHICLES WITH AN ENGINE OIL LABEL
- FOR VEHICLES WITHOUT AN ENGINE OIL LABEL
- IF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL IS TOO LOW
- ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES
- CHECKING AND TOPPING UP THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
- ENGINE OIL CHANGE
- ENGINE OIL LEVEL TOO LOW
- ENGINE OIL LEVEL TOO HIGH
- OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAULT
- 12-VOLT BATTERY
- BATTERY WARNING INDICATIONS
- AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN FOR ELECTRICAL CONSUM
- CHECK THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
- CHARGING, REPLACING, DISCONNECTING AND CONNECTING THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- CHARGING THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- REPLACING THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- DISCONNECTING THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- CONNECTING THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- 48-VOLT BATTERY
- OVERVIEW OF THE 48 VOLT SYSTEM
- 48 VOLT BATTERY WARNINGS
- ENERGY MANAGEMENT
- OPTIMISATION OF THE STARTING CAPACITY
- BATTERY DIAGNOSTICS
- RESIDUAL CURRENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
- DISCHARGED BATTERY
- VEHICLE STATIONARY FOR A LONG PERIOD OF TIME
- WITH THE ENGINE STOPPED
- WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING
- IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT WHEELS AND TYRES
- WHEELS AND TYRES
- IMPORTANT INFORMATION
- ABOUT WHEELS AND TYRES
- LOW PROFILE TYRES
- CONCEALED DAMAGE
- FOREIGN OBJECTS INSERTED IN THE TYRE
- TYRES WITH DIRECTIONAL TREAD PATTERN
- RETROFITTING OF ACCESSORIES
- SPEED SYMBOLS
- NEW WHEELS AND TYRES
- MANUFACTURING DATE
- DRIVING STYLE
- WHEEL BALANCE
- INCORRECT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
- TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
- CHANGING WHEELS AROUND
- WHEEL NUTS
- CHANGING A WHEEL
- LOCATION AND USE OF THE TEMPORARY SPARE WHEEL
- REMOVING THE TEMPORARY SPARE WHEEL
- CHAINS
- WHEEL NUT CAPS
- ANTI-THEFT WHEEL NUTS
- LOOSENING WHEEL NUTS
- REMOVAL
- LOOSENING THE ANTI-THEFT WHEEL NUT
- REMOVING AND INSTALLING A WHEEL
- TAKING OFF THE WHEEL
- PUTTING ON THE SPARE WHEEL
- FITTING THE MINIMISED SPARE WHEEL (DEPENDING ON THE VERSION)
- TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE WHEEL NUTS
- WORKS AFTER CHANGING A WHEEL
- TYRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYS- TEM
- TYRE PRESSURE MONITOR INDICATOR
- TYRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM
- CALIBRATE THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR
- TYRE PRESSURE LOW
- FAULT IN THE TYRE PRESSURE LOSS INDICATOR
- TYRE REPAIR
- TMS (TYRE MOBILITY SYSTEM) PUNCTURE REPAIR KIT
- TYRE SEALANT MUST NOT BE USED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES
- TYRE MOBILITY SYSTEM CONTENTS
- SEALING AND INFLATING A TYRE
- SEALING THE TYRE
- INFLATING THE TYRE
- CHECK AFTER 10 MINUTES OF DRIVING
- MAINTENANCE
- SERVICE
- SERVICE WORK AND THE DIGITAL MAINTENANCE PLAN
- SERVICE WORKS
- SET SERVICE OR FLEXIBLE SERVICE INTERVALS
- HOW TO KNOW WHICH TYPE OF SERVICE NEEDS TO HIS VEHICLE
- PARTICULAR CHARACTERISTICS OF THE FLEXIBLE SERVICE
- SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR
- INFORMATION ABOUT THE TERMS OF USE
- ADVERSE USAGE CONDITIONS INCLUDE
- THIS APPLIES ESPECIALLY FOR THE FOLLOWING PARTS (DEPENDING ON EQUIPMENT)
- SERVICE PACKAGES
- ADDITIONAL SERVICE OFFERS
- APPROVED SPARE PARTS
- ORIGINAL ACCESSORIES
- SERVICE MOBILITY
- VEHICLE UPKEEP AND CLEANING
- BASIC OBSERVATIONS
- WASHING THE VEHICLE
- HIGH PRESSURE CLEANING EQUIPMENT
- AUTOMATIC CAR WASHES
- WASHING BY HAND
- POLISHING
- WASHING VEHICLES WITH MATTE PAINTWORK
- CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
- HEADLIGHTS / TAIL LIGHTS
- SENSORS / CAMERA LENSES
- WHEELS
- EXHAUST PIPE ENDS
- COVERS / TRIMS
- PAINT
- CARBON FIBRE PARTS
- DECORATIVE LAMINATES
- INTERIOR CLEANING
- WINDOWS
- PLASTIC PARTS
- DISPLAYS/INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
- CONTROL PANELS
- FABRICS, ARTIFICIAL, ALCANTARA LEATHER
- NATURAL LEATHER
- TAKE SPECIAL CARE WITH
- HEADLIGHTS/TAIL LIGHTS
- CAMERA LENSES
- COVERS/TRIMS
- FABRICS/ARTIFICIAL LEATHER/MICROFIBRE
- TAKING YOUR VEHICLE OUT OF SERVICE
- ACCESSORIES, SPARE PARTS AND REPAIR WORK
- TECHNICAL MODIFICATIONS
- RADIO TELEPHONES AND OFFICE EQUIPMENT
- RADIO TRANSMITTERS (FIXED INSTALLATION)
- MOBILE RADIO TRANSMITTERS
- BUSINESS EQUIPMENT
- USER INFORMATION
- WARRANTY
- FAULT-FREE OPERATION WARRANTY
- COMMERCIAL WARRANTY FOR HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERIES FOR ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES
- INFORMATION STORED BY THE CONTROL UNITS
- STORAGE OF ACCIDENT DATA (EVENT DATA RECORDER)
- FLUIDS IN THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
- VEHICLE ANTENNAS
- INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM AND ANTENNAS
- FLUIDS IN THE AIR CONDITION- ING SYSTEM
- REFRIGERANT IN THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
- DETAILED INFORMATION ON THE REFRIGERANT USED
- REFRIGERANT OIL IN THE AIR CONDITIONING
- CUPRA RECOMMENDS A CUPRA OFFICIAL SERVICE
- INFORMATION ON THE EU CHEMICALS REGULATION REACH
- MATERIALS AND RECYCLING INFORMATION
- ENVIRONMENTAL COMPATIBILITY
- CHOICE OF MATERIALS
- MANUFACTURING METHODS
- INFORMATION ON THE EUROPEAN REGULATION ON BATTERIES AND ACCUMULATORS
- RECYCLING OF ELECTRICAL OR ELECTRONIC DEVICES
- PRODUCT RECYCLING
- ENVIRONMENTAL LABELLING
- THIRD-PARTY COPYRIGHT INFORMATION
- RETURN AND SCRAPPING OF END-OF-LIFE VEHICLES
- END-OF-LIFE RETURN
- RADIOELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
- SCRAPPING
- DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
- SIMPLIFIED DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
- UNITED KINGDOM
- UKRAINE
- ADDRESSES OF THE MANUFACTURERS
- CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT (BCM)
- ROOF ANTENNA
- OPTIONAL INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
- RADIO REMOTE CONTROL OF THE AUXILIARY HEAT
- ONLINE CONNECTIVITY UNIT
- RADIO EQUIPMENT, FREQUENCY BAND, MAXIMUM TRANSMITTING POWER
- FREQUENCY BAND
- RADIO-OPERATED REMOTE CONTROL (AUXILIARY
- TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER (AUXILIARY HEATER)
- BLUETOOTH
- AUXILIARY ANTENNA FOR CAR2X
- ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR COUNTRIES OUTSIDE THE EUROPEAN UNION
- MEXICO
- TURKEY
- INDICATIONS ABOUT THE TECHNICAL DATA
- VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION DATA
- VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
- TYPE PLATE
- PERFORMANCE
- FUEL CONSUMPTION
- ADBLUE ® TANK VOLUME
- TYPE AND CAPACITY
- WEIGHTS
- LOAD ON THE ROOF
- TRAILER WEIGHT
- INDEX
- NUMBERS AND SYMBOLS
- A
- B
- C
- CONVENIENCE OPEN FUNCTION
- D
- E
- EXTERNAL AUDIO SOURCES
- FUEL TANK CAP
- 。
- G
- GEAR CHANGE
- H
- O
- P
- PAINTING THE VEHICLE
- R
- S
- T
- V
- W
Brand : Cupra
Model : Formentor (2026)
Category : Car